Project Report

.
com
JEE(Advanced)
Previous Year Papers with Solutions
(2014 to 2018)
Both Paper-1 and Paper-2
Ask, Learn & Lead it

With Better Score, Better Career and Ultimately By Building Better India
with POWER of Your KNOWLEDGE
Eduncle.com
Call us : 9982853222
-
(Page # 2) JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) Examination (2016) (Code - 3)
[PHYSICS]
SECTION - 1 : (MAXIMUM MARKS : 24)

 This section contains SIX (06) questions.
 Each questions has FOUR options for correct answer(s). ONE OR MORE THAN ONE of these
four option(s) is (are) correct option (s).
 For each question, choose the correct option(s) to answer the questions
 Answer to each question will be evaluated according to the following marking chosen.
Full Marks : +4 If only (all) the correct option(s) is (are) chosen.
Partial Marks :+3 If all the four options are correct but ONLY three options are chosen.
Partial Marks : +2 If three or more options are correct but ONLY two options are
chosen, both of which are correct options.
Partial Marks : +1 If two or more options are correct but ONLY one option is chosen
and it is a correct option.
Zero Marks : 0 If none of the options is chosen (i.e., the question is unanswered)
Negative Marks : –2 In all other cases.
- For Example : If first, third and fourth are the ONLY three correct options for a question with
second option being an incorrect option : Selecting only two of the three correct options (e.g., the
first and fourth options), without selecting any incorrect option (second option in this case) will
result in +2 marks. Selecting only one of the three correct options (either first or thrid or fourth
option), without selecting any incorrect option (second option in this case), will result in +1 marks.
Selecting any incorrect option(s) (second option in this case), with or without selection of any
correct option(s), will result in –2 marks.
Q.1 The potential energy of a particle of mass m at a distance r from a fixed point O is given by
V(r)=kr2/2, where k is a positive constant of appropriate dimensions. This particle is moving in a
circular orbit of radius R about the point O. If  is the speed of the particle and L is the magni-
tude of its angular momentum about O, which of the following statements is (are) true?
(Circular & work power energy, Class Sheet Example)
k k mk 2
(A)   R (B)   R (C) L = mkR 2 (D) L  R
2m m 2
Sol. B,C
v
kr 2
V=
2
r
 dV  O
F = –kr (towards centre) F   dr 
 
At r = R,
mv2
kR = [Centripetal force]
R
kR 2 k
v= = R
m m
k
L=m R2
m
(Page # 2) JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) Examination (2018)

Q.2 Consider a body of mass 1.0 kg at rest at the origin at time t=0. A force F  ti  j is applied on
 
the body , where  = 1.0 Ns –1
and  = 1.0 N. The torque acting on the body about the origin at

time t = 1.0 s is  . Which of the following statements is (are) true? (Rotational)
 1
(A)   Nm
3

(B) The torque  is in the direction oft he unit vector  k
 1  
(C) The velocity of the body at t = 1 s is v 
2
 
i  2 j m s–1
1
(D) The magnitude of displacement of the body at t = 1 s is m
6
Sol. A,C
 
F  (t)î   ĵ [At t = 0, v = 0, r  0 ]
 = 1,  = 1

F  t î  ĵ

dv
m = t î  ĵ
dt
On integrating
 t2
mv  î  tĵ [m = 1kg]
2
 t2
v î  tĵ
2

dr t2  
= î  t ĵ [ r  0 at t  0 ]
dt 2
On integrating
 t3 t2
r  î  ĵ
6 2
   1 1 
At t = 1 sec,   (r  F) =  6 î  2 ĵ  × î  ĵ
 
 
 1
   k̂
3
 t2
v î  tĵ
2
 1  1
At t = 1s, v   î  ĵ  =
2  2
î  2 ĵ m/sec.
  
At t = 1s,  r = r2 – r1 (0,0,0)
1 1  
 6 î  2 ĵ – [0]
 
 1 1
s  î  ĵ
6 2
2 2
 1 1 10
|s| =      m
6
  2 6
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) Examination (2018) (Page # 3)
Q.3 A uniform capillary tube of inner radius r is dipped vertically into a beaker filled with water. The
water rises to a height h in the capillary tube above the water surface in the beaker. The surface
tension of water is .The angle of contact between water and the wall of the capillary tube is  .
Ignore the mass of water in the meniscus. Which of the following statements is (are) true?
(Class Example, Surface Tension)
(A) For a given material of the capillary tube, h decreases with increase in r.
(B) For a given material of the capillary tube, h is independent of 
(C) If this experiment is performed in a lift going up with a constant acceleration, then h decreases
(D) h is proportional to contact angle 
Sol. A,C
2
= gh [R  Radius of meniscus]
R
2 r
h= R= [r  radius of capillary;   contact angle]
R g cos 
2 cos 
h= [we derive this expression in class]
rg
(A) For given material,   constant
1
h
r
(B) h depend on 
(C) If lift is going up with constant acceleration,
geff = (g + a)
2 cos 
h= which means h decreases
r(g  a)
(D) h is proportional to cos  and not 
Q.4 In the figure below, the switches S1 and S2 are closed simultaneously at t = 0 and a current starts
to flow in the circuit. Both the batteries have the same magnitude of the electromotive force
(emf) and the polarities are as indicated in the figure. Ignore mutual inductance between the
inductors. The current I in the middle wire reaches its maximum magnitude Imax at time t = .
Which of the following statements is (are) true? (EMI, Sheet Similar)
R L R 2L
V V
I
S1 S2
V V L 2L
(A) I max  (B) I max  (C)   ln 2 (D)   ln 2
2R 4R R R
Sol. B,D
R L R 2L
i1 i2
V V
Consider current in left part to be i1 and in the right part to be i2

 i through middle branch
= imax = (i2 – i1)max
 R   R 
 t  V   t
V 2L    L 
i = (i2 – i1) = R 1  e  1  e
 – R  
   
 R  R  
V    L  t  t
e  e  2L  
R  
 
d(i)
For (i)max =0
dt
 R   R  
V  R e  L     R e  2L  
  t  t
R  L  2L   =0

 R 
R 
  t 1  2L t
e L  = e
2
 R 
 t 1
 2L  =
e 2
R 
 t = n 2
 2L 
2L
or t = n 2
R
This is the time when i is maximum
R  2L  R   2L
V   L  R n2  n2  
 
 
  2L   R 
imax = R e  e

 
V 1 1 1 V
|imax| = 4  2 =
R   4 R
Q.5 Two infinitely long straight wires lie in the xy-plane along the lines x   R . The wire located at
x=+R. carries a constant current I1 and the wire located at x=–R carries a constant current I2. A
circular loop of radius R is suspended with its centre at (0,0, 3R ) and in a plane parallel to the
xy-plane. This loop carries a constant current I in the clockwise direction as seen from above the
loop. The current in the wire is taken to be positive if it is in the  j direction. Which of the

following statements regarding the magnetic field B is (are) true? (Magnetism)

(A) If I1=I2, then B cannot be equal to zero at the origin (0,0,0)

(B) If I1>0 and I2<0, then B can be equal to zero at the origin (0,0,0)

(C) If I1<0 and I2>0, then B can be equal to zero at the origin (0,0,0)
 0 I 
(D) If I1=I2, then the z-component of the magenetic field at the centre of the loop is  – 
 2R 
Sol. A,B,D
Z
l
C 0,0, 3R 
Y
w2 w1
x=–R O x=R
–Y
  
 
(A) At origin, B  0 due to two wires if I1 = I2, hence Bnet at origin is equal to B due to ring,
which is non-zero.
 
(B) If I1 > 0 and I2 < 0, B at origin due to wires will be along + k̂ direction and B due to ring is

along – k̂ direction adn hence B can be zero at origin.

(C) If I1 < 0 and I2 > 0, B at origin due to wires is alogn – k̂ and also along – k̂ due to ring, hence

B cannot be zero
(D)
Z B1
BX
B2
X
I2 I1

At centre of ring, B due to wires is along x-axis,
 i
Hence z-component is only because of ring which B = 0
2R  k̂ 
Q.6 One mole of a monatomic ideal gas undergoes a cyclic process as shown in the figure (where V
is the volume and T is the temperature). Which of the statements below is (are) true?
T
II
III
I
IV
V
(A) Process I is an isochoric process (B) In process II, gas absorbs heat
(C) In process IV, gas releases heat (D) Processes I and II are not isobaric
Sol. B,C,D
T
II
I III
IV
V
(A) Process-I is not isochoric as volume V is decreasing. (For isochoric process v = constant)
(B) Process-II is isotehrmal expansion
U = 0, W > 0  By first law of thermodynamics
d = du + dw
du = 0 (T = 0)
 d = +ve (v ses  dw = +ve)
(C) Process-IV is isothermal compression
opposite to process II
(D) Process-I and III are not isobaric because in isobaric process T  V. Thus T-V graph must be
linear for an isobaric process
SECTION 2 (Maximum Marks: 24)

 This section contains EIGHT (08) questions. The answer to each question is a NUMERICAL
VALUE.
 For each question, enter the correct numerical value (in decimal notation, truncated/rounded-
off to the second decimal place; e.g. 6.25, 7.00, -0.33, -.30, 30.27, -127.30) using the
mouse and the on-screen virtual numeric keypad in the place designated to enter the answer.
 Answer to each question will be evaluated according to the following marking scheme:
Full Marks : +3 If ONLY the correct numerical value is entered as answer.
Zero Marks : 0 In all other cases.
   
Q.7 Two vectors A and B are defined as A  ai and B  a  cos ti  sin tJ  , where a is a constant and
   
 = /6 rad s–1. If A  B  3 A – B at time t =  for the first time, the value of , in seconds, is
__________. (Vector + Circular Motion)
Sol. 2.00 sec


A  a î

B  a(cos tî  sin tj)
ˆ

  B
| A | a;| B | a
from figure t
 
  t A A

| A  B | = 2a cos B
2
  t
| A  B | = 2a sin
2
   
Given: | A  B | = 3 | A  B |
t  t 
So 2a cos
2
= 3  2a sin 2 
t 1
tan =
2 3
t  
=  t =
2 6 3
 
t= t = 2.00 sec
6 3
Q.8 Two men are walking along a horizontal straight line in the same direction. The man in front
walks at a speed 1.0 ms–1 and the man behind walks at a speed 2.0 ms–1. A third man is standing
at a height 12m above the same horizontal line such that all three men are in a vertical plane.
The two walking men are blowing identical whistles which emit a sound of frequency 1430 Hz.
The speed of sound in air is 330 ms–1. At the instant, when the moving men are 10 m apart, the
stationary man is equidistant from them. The frequency of beats in Hz, heard by the stationary
man at this instant, is __________. (Sound Wave)
Sol. 5.00 Hz
Observer (stationary)
m
13m
13
12m
B 1m/s
A
2m/s 5m 5m
 v 
fA = f  v  2 cos  
 
5  v 
cos  = f =f  
13 B  v  1 cos  
Beat frequency
= fA – fB
   
 330   330 
   
= 1430  5  – 1430  5 
 330  2    330  1  
 13   13 
On solving :
5.01 Hz
Q.9 A ring and a disc are initially at rest, side by side, at the top of an inclined plane which makes an
angle 60º with the horizontal. They start to roll without slipping at the same instant of time along
 
the shortest path. If the time difference between their reaching the ground is 2 – 3 / 10s , then
the height of the top of the inclined plane, in metres, is __________. Take g=10 ms–2.
(Rotational, Similar Question in Class)
Sol. 0.75 m
we know that :
g sin 
ae = 1  IC
MR 2
g sin 
aring =
2
2g sin 
and adisc =
3
1
From S = 0 + gt2
2
h 1  g sin   2 4h 16
Ring : =   t  = ....(1)
sin  2  2  1 g sin2  3g
h 1  2g sin   2 3h 4h
Disc : =   t t = = ....(2)
sin  2  3  2 2 g sin2  g
 From (1) and (2)
16h 4h 2 3
 – =
3g g 10
 4 
 2 = 2 –
h  3 3
 
(2  3 ) 3 3 3
h = (4  2 3 ) = h=
4
= 0.75 m
2
Q.10 A spring-block system is resting on a frictionless floor as shown in the figure. The spring constant
is 2.0 N m–1 and the mass of the block is 2.0 kg. Ignore the mass of the spring. Initially the spring
is in an unstretched condition. Another block of mass 1.0 kg moving with a speed of 2.0 m s–1
collides elastically with the first block. The collision is such that the 2.0 kg block does not hit the
wall. The distance, in metres, between the two blocks when the spring returns to its unstretched
position for the first time after the collision is _________. (Center of Mass)
–1
2ms
1kg 2kg
Sol. 2.09 m
m
T = 2 = 2 sec (time period of a spring block system)
k
T
Block returns to original position in =  sec
2
By momentum conservation
2 × 1 = 2V2 + V1
 V1 + 2V2 = 2 .....(1)
By coefficient of restitution :
v2  v1 v  v1
e = u u  1 = 2
1 2 2
 2 = v2 – v1 .....(2)
 From (1) and (2)
V1 + 2V2 = 2
+V2 – V1 = 2
3V2 = 4
 V2 = 4/3 m/s
4
 V1 = –2
3
2
= m/s
3
Thus after collision
4/3 m/s
2/3 m/s
1 2kg
 distance between the blocks = speed × time

2
× 3.14
3
= 2.09 m
Q.11 Three identical capacitors C1,C2 and C3 have a capacitance of 1.0 F. each and they are uncharged
initially. They are connected in a circuit as shown in the figure and C1 is then filled completely
with a dielectric material of relative permittivity r . The cell electromotive force (emf) V0=8V..
First the switch S1 is closed while the switch S2 is kept open. When the capacitor C3 is fully
charged, S1 is opened and S2 is closed simultaneously. When all the capacitors reach equilibrium,
the charge on C3 is found to be 5 C The value of r =____________. (Capacitor)
v0
S2
C1 C3
S1 C2
Sol. 1.50
As S1 is closed :
V0=8V
By loop rule (vnet = 0)
5 3 3 3
 –  – =0 r = 2
1 r 1
r = 1.50
Q.12 In the xy-plane, the region y>0 has a uniform magnetic field B1 k and the region y<0 has
another uniform magnetic field B2 k . A positively charged particle is projected from the origin
along the positive y-axis with speed  0 =  ms–1 at t = 0, as shown in the figure. Neglect gravity
y
in this problem. Let t = T be the time when the particle crosses the x-axis from below for the first
time. If B2=4B1, the average speed of the particle, in ms–1, along the x-axis in the time interval T
is __________. (Magnetism)
B1
B2
Sol. 2.00
(1) Average speed along x-axis
Total distances 2r1  2r2

= t t
Total Time 1 2
r1
d2
d1 r2
(2) We have,
mv mv
r1 = qB , r2 = qB
1 2
B2
As B1 =
4
 r1 = 4r2
m
Time in B1  qB = t1
1
m
Time in B2  qB = t2
2
Total distance along x-axis, d1 + d2 = 2r1 + 2r2 = 2 (r1 + r2) = 2 (5r2)

Total time T = t1 + t2 = 5t2
10r2 mv qB2
 Average speed = 5t = 2 qB × =2
2 2 m
Q.13 Sunlight of intensity 1.3kW m–2 is incident normally on a thin convex lens of focal length 20 cm.
Ignore the energy loss of light due to the lens and assume that the lens aperture size is much
smaller than its focal length. The average intensity of light, in kW m–2, at a distance 22 cm from
the lens on the other side is __________. (Geometrical Optics)
Sol. 130
Area=A
Screen
R
r Area=a
20cm 2cm
By similar triangles :
r 2 1
= =
R 20 10
1 1 a
 Ratio of area = (10)2 = =
100 A
Let energy incident on the lens is E.
E Energy
 = 1.3 (Intensity =
A Area  Time
Hence, E = A × 1.30
a 1
Also =
A 100
E A  1.3
Average intensity of light 22 cm away from lens = = = 100 × 1.3 = 130 kW/m2
a a
Q.14 Two conducting cylinders of equal length but different radii are connected in series between two
heat baths kept at temperatures T1=300 K and T2=100 K, as shown in the figure. The radius of
the bigger cylinder is twice that of the smaller one and the thermal conductivities of the materi-
als of the smaller and the larger cylinders are K1 and K2 respectively. If the temperature at the
junction of the two cylinders in the steady state is 200 K, then K1/K2=__________.
(Similar Class Example, Heat Transfer)
Insulating material
T1 K1 K2 T2
L
L
Sol. 4.00
2r
r
300k k1 100k
200k k2
L
L
Here as the flow of current is same, we can say that

R 1 = R2
L1 L2
 k A = k A
1 2 2 2
k1 L1 A2 (2r)2
 k = L × A = =4
2 2 1 r 2

 This section contains TWO (02) paragraphs. Based on each paragraph, there are TWO (02)
questions.
 Each question has FOUR options. ONLY ONE of these four options corresponds to the correct
answer.
 For each question, choose the option corresponding to the correct answer.
 Answer to each question will be evaluated according to the following marking scheme:
Full Marks : +3 If ONLY the correct option is chosen.
Zero Marks : 0 If none of the options is chosen (i.e. the question is unanswered).
Negative Marks : -1 In all other cases.
PARAGRAPH “X”
In electromagnetic theory, the electric and magnetic phenomena are related to each other. There-
fore, the dimensions of electric and magnetic quantities must also be related to each other. In
the questions below, [E] and [B] stand for dimensions of electric and magnetic fields respec-
tively, while 0  and [0] stand for dimensions of the permittivity and permeability of free space
respectively. [L] and [T] are dimensions of length and time respectively. All the quantities are
given in SI units.
(There are two questions based on PARAGRAPH “X”, the question given below is one of them)
Q.15 The relation between [E] and [B] is (Unit and Dimensions)
(A) [E]=[B] [L] [T] (B) [E]=[B] [L]–1 [T]
(C) [E]=[B] [L] [T]–1 (D) [E]=[B] [L]–1 [T]–1
Sol. C
E
We have =B
C
[C] = [LT–1]
[E]
[B] = = [E] L–1 T1
[C]
 [E] = [B] [L] [T–1]
Q.16 The relation between 0  and [0] is (Unit and Dimensions)
2 –2 –2 2
(A)  0   0  L  T  (B)  0   0  L  T 
–1 2 –2 –1 –2 2
(C) 0   0   L  T  (D)  0   0   L  T 
Sol. D
We know that :
1
C= 0 0
 1 
 [C2] =    
 0 0
1
 L2T–2 = [ ][ ]
0 0
 [0] = [0 ]1 [L]–2 [T]2

PARAGRAPH "A"
If the measurement errors in all the independent quantities are known, then it is possible to
determine the error in any dependent quantity. This is done by the use of series expansion and
truncating the expansion at the first power of the error. For example, consider the relation z =x/
y. If the errors in x, y and z are x, y and z, respectively, then
–1
x  x x  x   y 
z  z   1   1  
y  y y  x  y 
–1
 y 
The series expansion for 1   , to first power in y/y, is 1  (y/y). The relative errors in
 y 
independent variables are always added. So the error in z will be
 x y 
z  z   
 x y 
The above derivation makes the assumption that x/x<<1, y/y<<1. Therefore, the higher
powers of these quantities are neglected.
(There are two questions based on PARAGRAPH “A”, the question given below is one of them)
1 – a 
Q.17 Consider the ratio r  to be determined by measuring a dimensionless quantity a. If the
1  a 
error in the measurement of a is a(a/a <<1), then what is the error r in determining r?
(Error)
a 2 a 2 a 2aa
(A) (B) (C) 1 – a 2 (D) 1 – a 2
1  a 
2
1  a 
2
   
Sol. B
1  a
r = 1  a
 
r (1  a) (1  a)
= +
r (1  a) (1  a)
a a
= 
(1  a) (1  a)
(1  a  1  a)
=
(1  a)(1  a)
2a (1  a) 2a
r = =
(1  a)(1  a) (1  a) (1  a)2
Q.18 In an experiment the initial number of radioactive nuclei is 3000. It is found that 1000  40
nuclei decayed in the first 1.0 s. For x <<1, ln(1+x)=x up to first power in x. The error , in the
determination of the decay constant , in s–1, is (Error + Nuclear Physics)
(A) 0.04 (B) 0.03 (C) 0.02 (D) 0.01
Sol. C
N = N0e–t
 ln N – ln N0 = –t
Differentiating :
dN
 = –td
N
N
or = t
N
40
  =
2000  0.1
= 0.02
[CHEMISTRY]

1. The compound(s) which generate(s) N2 gas upon thermal decomposition below 300°C is (are)
(A) NH4NO3 (B) (NH4)2Cr2O7 (C) Ba(N3)2 (D) Mg3N2
Sol. B, C
NH4NO3 
T 300 C
 N2O + H2O [NH4NO3 
T 300 C
 N2 + O2 + H2O]
explosive
(NH4)2Cr2O7 

 N2 + Cr2O3 + H2O
volcanic reaction
Ba(N3)2 

 Ba + N2 (Method for getting purest form of Nitrogen)
Mg3N2  Ionic conp. (Does not decompose)
2. The correct statement(s) regarding the binary transition metal carbonyl compounds is (are)
(Atomic numbers : Fe = 26, Ni = 28)
(A) Total number of valence shell electrons at metal centre in Fe(CO5 or Ni(CO)4 is 16
(B) These are predominantly low spin in nature
(C) Metal - carbon bond strengthens when the oxidation state of the metal is lowered
(D) The carbonyl C–O bond weakens when the oxidation state of the metal is increased
Sol B, C
Fe(CO)5 & Ni(CO)4 metal carbonyl has 18e in valence shell
Valence shell electron in metal carbonyl = no. of (n–1) d- electron in metal
+ no. of electron acquired by metal through ligands
[Fe(Co)5] O oxidation no Fe [Ar]3d64s2
valence shell electron = 6 + 2 + 5 x 2 = 18e
[Ni(Co)4] valence shell electron = 10 + 4 x 2 = 18e
zero oxidation no.
Ni [Ar]3d84s2
these are low spin complexes as CO is strong field ligand both complex are dimagnetic with sp3
hybridisation.
CO involves synergic bonding with transition metal
3. Based on the compounds of group 15 elements , the correct statement(s) is (are)

(A) Bi2O5 is more basic than N2O5
(B) NF3 is more covalent than BiF3
(C) PH3 boils at lower temperature than NH3
(D) The N–N single bond is stronger than the P–P single bond
Sol. A,B,C
Bi2O5 & N2O5 Bi2O5 is Metallicoxide (Basicoxide) as Bi has high metallic character
same for NF3 & BiF3
Boiling point NH3 is more than PH3 due to H-Bonding N–N Bond is weaker than P–P bond due to
repulsion of non bonding electron present in Nitrogen of relatively small size.
4. In the following reaction sequence, the correct structure(s) of X is (are)
Me N3
(1) PBr3, Et2O
X
(2) NaI, Me2CO
(3) NaN3, HCONMe2
enantiomerically pure
Me OH Me OH
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Me OH Me OH
Sol. B
Me N3
(1) PBr3Et2O
X
(2) NaI, Me2C = O
(3) NaN3, HCONMe2
Me OH
all the three reaction are SN2 so X is
5. The reaction(s) leading to the formation of 1,3,5-trimethylbenzene is (are)
O Conc. H2SO 4 heated iron tube

(A) (B) Me H
873 K
O
1. Br2, NaOH CHO
2. H3O+
Zn/Hg, HCl
(C) (D)
OHC CHO
O O
Sol. A, B, D
O
Conc H2SO4
(A) (B) Me H
O COOH
1. Br2, NaOH 3. Soda lime

(C) 2. H3O +
HOOC COOH
O O
CHO
(D) Zn/Hg, HCl
OHC CHO
6. A reversible cyclic process for an ideal gas is shown below. Here, P, V and T are pressure , volume
and temperature , respectively. The thermodynamic parameters q, w, H and U are heat, work,
enthalpy and internal energy, respectively.
A(P1,V1,T1) C(P2,V 1,T2)
Volume (V)
B(P2,V2,T1)
Temperature (T)
Sol. B, C
‘AB’  isothermal
UAB = 0
WAB = –qAB = –nRT1n (V2/V1)
= nRT1 n (V1/V2)
AC isochoric
WAC= 0
qAC = AC = nCv (T2 – T1)
HAC = UAC + (PV)
= nCV(T2 – T1) + nR (T2 – T1)
= nCp (T2 – T1)
qCA = UCA
= nCV (T1 – T2)
= (–)ve
HCA = nCp(T1 – T2)
= (–)ve
BC Isobaric
WBC = –nR(T2 – T1)
= –P2 (V1 – V2) = P2(V2 – V1)
UBC = m Cv (T2 – T1)
qBC = UBC – WBC
= nCv (T2 – T1) + nR(T2– T1)
= ncp (T2 – T1)
qAB + qBC + qCA + WAB + WBC + WCa = 0 (qAB = WAB, WCA = 0)
UBC + qCA = 0
qAC = UBC
qBC = HAC = nCp (T2 – T1)

• This section contains EIGHT (08) questions. The answer to each question is a NUMERICAL VALUE.
• For each question, enter the correct numerical value (in decimal notation, truncated/rounded-off
to the second decimal place; e.g. 6.25, 7.00, -0.33, -.30, 30.27, -127.30) using the mouse and
the on-screen virtual numeric keypad in the place designated to enter the answer.
• Answer to each question will be evaluated according to the following marking scheme:
Full Marks : +3 If ONLY the correct numerical value is entered as answer.
7. Among the species given below, the total number of diamagnetic species is____.
H atom, NO2 monomer, O2 (superoxide), dimeric sulphur in vapour phase,
Mn3O4, (NH4)2[FeCl4], (NH4)2[NiCl4], K2MnO4, K2CrO4
Sol. 1
H– atom = 1 Paramagnetic
1
1s
N
NO2 = odd electron species Paramagnetic
O O
O2 (superoxide) = One unpaired electrons in * M.O.. Paramagnetic

S2 (in vapour phase) = same as O2, two unpaired e– s are present in * M.O. Paramagnetic
2 4
Mn3O4 = 2 MnO . MnO2 Paramagnetic
(NH4)2[FeCl4] = Fe +2
= 3d 4s
6 0
Paramagnetic
Cl Cl Cl Cl
sp3 – hybridisation
(NH4)2 [NiCl4] = Ni = 3d 4s8 2
Ni = 3d8 4s2
Paramagnetic
Cl Cl Cl Cl
sp3 – hybridisation
O
Mn
K2MnO4 = 2K+ , Mn+6 = [Ar]3d1 Paramagnetic
O O O
O
Cr
K2CrO4 = 2K+ , Cr+6 = [Ar]3d0 `Diamagnetic
O O O
8. The ammonia prepared by treating ammonium sulphate with calcium hydroxide is completely
usedby NiCl2.6H2O to form a stable coordination compound. Assume that both the reactions are
100% complete. If 1584 g of ammonium sulphate and 952g of NiCl2.6H2 O are used in the
preparation, the combined weight (in grams) of gypsum and the nickel-ammonia coordination
compound thus produced is___.
(Atomic weights in g mol–1: H = 1, N = 14, O = 16, S = 32, Cl = 35.5, Ca = 40, Ni = 59)
Sol. 2992
69+36
(NH4)2SO4 + Ca(OH)2 2NH3 + [CaSO4 + H2O]
1584gm
= 12mol 24mol CaSO4.2H2O
132amu
12mol
6NH3 + NiCl2.6H2O  [Ni(NH3)6]Cl2 + 6H2O
24mol 4 mol 232
232 × 4 + 12 × [40+96+36] = 920 + 8 + 132 + 80 + 172 × 12

= 928 + 2064 = 2992
9. Consider an ionic solid MX with NaCl structur. Construct a new structure (Z) whose unit cell is
constructed from the unit cell of MX following the sequential instruction given below. Neglect fthe
charge balance.
(i) Remove all the anions (X) except the central one
(ii) Replace all the face centered cations (M) by anions (X)
(iii) Remove all the corner cations (M)
(iv) Replace the central anion (X) with cation (M)
number of anions 
The value of number of cations in Z is ____________ .
 
Sol. 3
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

1 1 1 1 1 M0 M1×1
M 6× +8× M 6× +8× M8 ×
2 8 2 8 8
1
X 12× +1×1 X X 1 X 1×1+6× 1 X 1
4 1×1 1×1+6× 6×
2 2 2
No. of anions = 3
No. of cations = 1
Ans. 3/1
10. For the electrochemical cell,

Mg(s)Mg2+(aq, 1M) Cu2+ (aq, 1M) Cu(s)
the standard emf of the cell is 2.70 V at 300 K. When the concentration of Mg2+ is changed to x
M, the cell potential changes to 2.67 V at 300 K. The value of x is____.
F
(given,  11500KV–1 , where F is the Faraday constant and R is the gas constant, In(10) = 2.30)
R
Sol. 10
Mg(s) + Cu2+(aq)  Mg2+(aq) + Cu(s)
E°Cell = 2.70 ECell = 2.67 Mg2+ = x M
Cu2+ = 1 M
RT RT
ECell = E°Cell – ln x = 2.67 = 2.70 – ln x
nF 2F
R  300 0.03  2 F
–0.03 = – × ln x = lnx = ×
2F 300 R
0.03  2  11500
= = lnx = 2.30 = ln(10) = x = 10
300  1
11. A closed tank has two compartments A and B, both filled with oxygen (assumed to be ideal gas).
The partition separating the two compartments is fixed and is a perfect heat insulator (Figure 1).
If the old partition is replaced by a new partition which can slide and conduct heat but does NOT
allow the gas to leak across (Figure 2), the volume (im m3) of the compartment A after the
system attains equilibrium is_____.
1m3,5bar 3m3, 1 bar, 300 K

400 K B
A
Figure 1
A B
Figure 2
Sol. 2.22
P & T both will be same in both container there fore
V
= const
n
V1 V2
n1 = n2
v 4  v
5 1 = 1 3
R  400 R  300
4v 12  3V
=
5 3
1 2V + 15V = 60
27V = 60
20
= v 2.22
9
12. Liquid A and B form ideal solution over the entire range of composition. At temperature T, equimolar
binary solution of liquids A and B has vapour pressure 45 T orr. At the same temperature, a new
solution of A and B having mole fraction xA and xB, respectively, has vapour pressure of 22.5 Torr.
The value of xA/xB in the new solution is _______.
(given that the vapour pressure of pure liquid A is 20 Torr at temperature T)
Sol. 19
P°A + P°B = 90
xAP°A + (1 – xA) P°B = 22.5
P°A = 20
 P°B = 70
45
20xA + (1 – xA)70 =
2
45
70 – 50xA =
2
95
xA =
100
xA 0.95
xB = 0.05 = 19
13. The solubility of a salt of weak acid(AB) at pH 3 is Y × 10–3 mol L–1. The value of Y is___.
(Given that the value of solubility product of AB (Ksp) = 2 × 10–10 and the value of ionization
constant of HB(Ka) = 1 × 10–8)
Sol. 0.95
AB  A+ + B–
y× 10–3 y× 10–3 [B–] [y × 10–3] = 2 × 1010 ....(1)
B– + H+  HB
y×10–3 10–3
[B  ][103  x]
y × 10–3 – x 10–3 – x x, = 10–8 ....(2)
x
(1)  (2)
y  103 2  1010
x
= = 2 × 10–2
10 3
x  108
y2  103 y2 2000
= 2 × 10–2
 =
1  y  1y 100
y2 + 20y – 20 = 0
20  400  80
y=
2
21.90  20 1.90
y= = = 0.95
2 2
14. The plot given below shows P–T curves (where P is the pressure and T is the temperature) for two
solvents X and Y and isomolal solutions of NaCl in these solvents. NaCl completely dissociates in
both the solvents.
1 2 3 4
760
Pressure (mmHg)
1. solvent X
2. solution of NaCl in solvent X
3. solvent Y
4. solution of Nacl in solvent Y
360
362
367
368
Temperature (K)
On addition of equal number of moles a non-volatile solute S in equal amount (in kg) of these
solvents, the elevation of boiling point of solvent X is three times that of solvent Y. Solute S is
known to undergo dimerization in these solvents. If the degree of dimerization is 0.7 in solvent
Y, the degree of dimerization in solvent X is ___.
Sol. 0.05
Tb(x) = 360
Tb(x) = 2 = i × kb(x) × m
Tb(y) = 367
Tb(y) = 1 = i × kb(y) × m
kb  x  2
kb  y  = 1
Tb(x) = 3 T2(y)
ix × kb(x) × m = 3 × iy + kb(y) × m
2 × [1 + (1/2–1)] = 3 × [1 + (1/2 – 1)0.7]
3
[1 –/2] = [1 – 0.35] = 3/2 × 0.65
2
3
/2 = 1 – × 0.65
2
 = 2 [1 – 0.975]
 = 2 × 0.025 = 0.05
Paragraph "X"
Treatment of benzene with CO/HCl in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3/CuCl followed by reaction
with Ac2O/NaOAc gives compound X as the major product. Compound X upon reaction with Br2/
Na2CO3, followed by heating at 473 K with moist KOH furnishes Y as the major product. Reaction
of X with H2/Pd-C, followed by H3PO4 treatment gives Z as the major product. (There are two
questions based on PARAGRAPH "X", the question given below is one of them)
15. The compound Y is :–
OH
COBr Br
(A) (B)
HO O
Br
COBr
(C) (D)
Br
Sol. C
CHO Peek in CH=CH—COOH
condensation
CO + HCl AC2O
AlCl 3/CuCl ACONa
Gatter mann (X)
Koach RXn
Br2/Na2CO3
Br Br
C CH CH—CH
moist KOH
473 K COONa
Elementary Rxn
(1) H2 Pd–C
(X)
(2) H3PO4
(Z)
Paragraph "X"
Treatment of benzene with CO/HCl in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3/CuCl followed by reaction
with Ac2O/NaOAc gives compound X as the major product. Compound X upon reaction with Br2/
Na2CO3, followed by heating at 473 K with moist KOH furnishes Y as the major product. Reaction
of X with H2/Pd-C, followed by H3PO4 treatment gives Z as the major product.
(There are two question based on PARAGARAPH "X", the question given below is one of them)
16. The compound Z is :-
(A) (B)
O O
OH
(C) (D)
Sol. A
CHO CH CH—COOH
CO + HCl AC2O
AlCl3/CuCl ACONa
(X)
Br2/Na2CO3
Br Br
CH—CH OH
–CO 2
COONa Ph—CH—CH—Br
OH
Ph—CH CHBr
Ph—C CH
(Y)
Paragraph "A"
An organic acid P (C11H12O2) can easily be oxidized to a dibasic acid which reacts with ethyleneglycol
to produce a polymer dacron. Upon ozonolysis, P gives an aliphatic ketone as one of the products.
P undergoes the following reaction sequences to furnish R via Q. The compound P also undergoes
another set of reactions to produce S.
(1) H2/Pd-C
(1) H2/Pd-C (1) HCl
(3) Br2/NaOH (2) SOCl2 (2) Mg/Et2O
S P Q R
(3) MeMgBr, CdCl2 (3) CO2 (dry ice)
+
(5) H2/Pd-C (4) NaBH 4 (4) H3O
(There are two questions based on PARAGRAPH "A", the question given below is one of them)
17. The compound R is:-
HO2C
(A) CO2H (B)
CO2H CO2H
(C) (D)
Ans. A
Paragraph "A"
An organic acid P (C11H12O2) can easily be oxidized to a dibasic acid which reacts with ethyleneglycol
to produce a polymer dacron. Upon ozonolysis, P gives an aliphatic ketone as one of the products.
P undergoes the following reaction sequences to furnish R via Q. The compound P also undergoes
another set of reactions to produce S.
(1) H2/Pd-C
(1) H2/Pd-C (1) HCl
(3) Br2/NaOH (2) SOCl2 (2) Mg/Et2O
S P Q R
(3) MeMgBr, CdCl2 (3) CO2 (dry ice)
+
(5) H2/Pd-C (4) NaBH 4 (4) H3O
(There are two questions based on PARAGRAPH "A", the question given below is one of them)
18. The compound S is
(A) (B)
NH 2 HN
NH 2 H
N
(C) (D)
Ans. B
COOH
OH
[O] OH
C11H12O2 dacron
H+
(P)
COOH
COOH
H2Pd/C
H2Pd/C
COOH COOH COCl

SOCl2
McMgCl/CdCl2
O
CONH2 C—Me
Br2 NaOH NaBH4
NH2
OH
(Q)
CHCl3/KOH
HCl
NC NH—CH3
H2
Pd/C
(S)
1. CO2 Mg/Et2O
MgCl Cl
2. H3O
[MATHEMATICS]
SECTION 1 (MAXIMUM MARKS : 24)
This section contains Six(06) questions.

. Each question has Four options for correct answer(s). ONE OR MORE THAN ONE of these
four options(s) is (are) correct options(s).
. For each question. choose the correct option (s) to anser the question.
. Answer to each question will be evaluated according to the following marking chosen.
Full marks : +4 If only (all) the correct option (s) is (are) chosen.
Partial Marks : +3 If all the four options are correct but ONLY three options are chosen.
Partial Marks : +2 If three or more options are correct but ONLY two options are chosen.
both of which are correct option.
Partial Marks : +1 If two or more options are correct but ONLY one option is chosen and it
is a correct options.
Zero Marks : 0 If none of the options is chosen (i.e. the question is unanswered.)
For Example : If first, third and fourth are the ONLY three correct options for a question with
second option being an incorrect option. selecting only two of three correct options (e.g. the first
and fourth options), without selecting any incorrect option (second option in this case), will
result in +2 marks, selecting only one of the three correct options(either first or third or fouth
option), without selecting any incorrect option(second option in this case) will result in +1 marks.
Selecting any incorrect option(s) (second option in this case). with our without selection of any
correct option(s) will result in –2 marks.
Q.1 For a non-zero complex number z, let arg(z) denote the principal argument with –  < arg(z) 
. Then, which of the following statement(s) is (are) False ?

(A) arg(–1 –i) = , where i = –1
4
(B) The function f : R  (–, ], defined by f(t) = arg (–1 + it) for all t  R, is continuous at all
points of R, where i = –1
 z1 
(C) For any two non-zero complex numbers z1 and z2, arg z  – argz1  + arg (z2)
 2
is an integer multiple of 2
(D) For any three given distinct complex numbers z1, z2 and z3, the locus of the point z satisfying
the condition
 (z  z1 )(z2 – z3 ) 
arg 

 (z  z3 )(z2  z1 ) 
lies on a straight line

Sol. A,B,D
3
(A) arg(–1–i) =  ,
4
   tan1  t  , t  0
(B) f(t) = arg (–1 + it) =  1
   tan  t  , t  0
Discontinuous at t = 0
 z1 
(C) arg  z   arg  z1   arg  z2  = 2n.
 2
= argz1 – arg(z2) + 2n –arg(z1) + a rg(z2)
  z  z1   z2  z3  
(D) arg  z  z z  z   
 3 2 1 

 z  z1   z2  z3 
is real .
 z  z3   z2  z1 
 z, z1, z2 , z3 are concyclic.
Q.2 In a triangle PQR, let  PQR = 30° and the sides PQ and QR have lengths 10 3 and 10,
respectively. Then, which of the following statement(s) is (are) TRUE ?
(A)  QPR = 45°
(B) The area of teh triangle PQR is 25 3 and  QRP = 120°
(C) The radius of the incircle of the triangle PQR is 10 3  15

(D) The area of the circumcircle of the triangle PQR is 100
Sol. B,C,D
2 2 2
cos30° =
10 3   10   PR 
2  10 3  10
P
10
10 3
30°
Q R
10
 PR  10
 QR  PR  PQR  QPR
QPR  30
1 1 1
(B) area of  PQR =  10 3  10  sin30   10  10 3 
2 2 2
= 25 3
QRP  180 – (30° + 30°) = 120°
 25 3 25 3
(C) r   =
S 101010 3 10  5 3
 
 5 3. 2  3  10 3  15
a 10
(D) R    10
2 sin A 2 sin30
 Area = R2 = 100
Q.3 Let P1 : 2x + y – z = 3 and P2 : x + 2y + z = 2 be two planes. Then, which of the following

statement(s) is (are) TRUE ?
(A) The line of intersection of P1 and P2 has direction ratios 1, 2, –1
3x  4 1  3y z
(B) The line   is perpendicular to the line of intersection of P1 and P2
9 9 3
(C) The acute angle between P1 and P2 is 60°
(D) If P3 is the plane passing thorugh the point (4, 2, –2) and perpendicular to the line of
2
intersection of P1 and P2, then the distance of the point (2, 1, 1) from the plane P3 is
3
Sol. C,D
D.C. of line of intersection (a, b, c)
2a + b – c = 0
a  2b  c  0
a b c
 
1  2 1  2 4  1
 D.C. is (1, –1, 1)
3x  4 1  3y z
(B)  
9 9 3
x  4 /3 y 1 /3 z
  
3 3 3
lines are parallel .
2112 11
(C) Acute angle between P1 and P2 = cos–1  
 6 6 
3 1  1 
= cos–1  6   cos  2   60
   
(D) Plane is given by (x –4) – (y –2) + (z + 2) = 0
xyz0
2 11 2
Distance of (2, 1, 1) from plane = 
3 3
Q.4. For every twice differentiable function f : R –2with (f(0))2 + (f'(0))2 = 85, which of the
following statement(s) is (are) TRUE ?
(A) There exist r, s R, where r < s, such that f is one-one on the open interval (r, s)
(B) There exists x0 (–4, 0) such that |f'(x0)|  1
(C) xlim f x   1

(D) There exists   (–4, 4) such that f() + f'' () = 0 and f'()  
Sol. A,B,D
f(x) can't be constant throughout the domain. Hence we can find x (r, s) such that f(x) is one-
one option (A) is true.
f  0   f  4 
Option (B) : f '  x0   4
1 LMVT 
Option (C) : f(x) = sin  

85x satisfies given condition
but lim sin

x 
 
85 D.N.E
 Incorrect
Option (D) : g(x) = f2(x) + (f'(x))2
|f'(x1)  1 (by LMVT)
f  x1   2 (given)
x1 (–0, 4)
Similarly g(x2)  5 x2  (0, 4)
g(0) = 85 g(x) has maximum in (x1, x2) say at .
g'() = 0 g()  85
2f'() (f() + f''()) = 0
If f'() = 0 g() =f2 ()  85 Not possible
 f     f ''     0 (x1, x2)(–4, 4)
option (D) correct.
Q.5 Let f : R  R and g : R R be two non-constant differentiable functions . If

f'(x) = (e(f(x) –g(x)))g'(x) for all x R,
and f(1) = g(2) = 1, then which of the following statement(s) is (are) TRUE ?
(A) f(2) < 1 –loge2 (B) f(2) > 1 –loge2
(C) g(1) > 1 –loge2 (D) g(1) < 1 –loge2
Sol. B,C
f'(x) = e(f(x) –g(x)) g'(x) x  R
 f x .f ' x  e    0
g x
e    
 e 
f  x
f '  x  e   .g'  x  dx  C
g x

f x  e    C
g x
 e  
 e    e    e    d  
f1 g 1 f 2 g 2
1 1
e   e   
g 1 f 2

e e
2
e   e   
f 2 g 1
e
2 2
 e    and e   
f 2 g 1
e e
 –f(2) < In 2 –1 and 0–g(1) < In 2 –1
 f(2) > 1 – In2 and g(1) > 1 – In 2
Q.6 Let f : [0,  )  R be a continuous function such that

x
f  x   1  2x   ext f  t  dt
0
for all x  ) . Then which of the following statement (s) is (are) TRUE ?
(A) The curve y = f (x) passes through the point (1, 2)
(B) The curve y = f(x) passes throgh the point (2, –1)
(C) The area of the region  x, y   0,1  R: f  x   y  1  x2  is

 2
4
(D) The area of the region  x, y   0,1  R: f  x   y  1  x2  is  1

4
Ans. B,C
x
x t
f(x) = 1 –2x + e f  t  dt
0
x
 ex f  x   e x 1  2x    e1f  t  dt
0
Differentiate w.r.t. x.
–e–x f(x) + e–xf'(x) = –e–x (1 –2x) + e–x (–2) + e–x f(x)
 f  x   f '  x    1  2x   2  f  x  .
 f '  x   2f  x   2x  3
Integrating factor = e–2x
f(x).e–2x =  e2x 2x 3 dx

 2x  3  e2xdx   2   e2xdx dx 

2x  3 e2x 
e2x
c
2 2
2x  3 1
f(x) =   ce2x
2 2
3 1
f(0) =  c 1 c  0
2 2
SECTION 2 (MAXIMUM MARKS: 24)

• This section contains EIGHT (08) question. The answer to each question is a NUMERICAL VALUE.
• For each question,enter the correct numerical value (in decimal notation, truncated/rounded-offf
to the second decimal place; e.g. 6.25, 7.00, –0.33, –30.27, –127.30) using the mouse and the
on-screen virtual numeric keypad in the place designated toenter the answer.
• Answer to each question will be evaluated according to the following marking scheme :
Full Marks : +3 If ONLY the correct numerical value is entered as answer .
Zero Marks : 0 in all other cases.
1 1
Q.7 The value of log 9  2
2 log log 9 
2 2   7 log4 7 is _________
Sol. 8
2 1/2
log2 log2 9 log4 7
log2 9 7
1
= log 9 2loglog2 9 2  72 log7 4
2
=4×2=8
Q.8 The number of 5 digit numbers which are divisible by 4, with digits from the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
and the repetition of digits is alllowed, is _____.
Sol. 625
Option for last two digits are (12), (24), (32), (44) are (52).
 Total No. of digits
= 5 × 5 × 5 × 5 = 625
Q.9 Let X be the set consisting of the first 2018 terms of the arithmetic progression 1, 6, 11, ... and
Y be the set consisting of the first 2018 terms of the arithmetic progression 9, 16, 23, ..... Then,
the number of elements in the set X U Y is ________
Sol. X : 1, 6, 11, ................... 10086
Y : 9, 16, 23, .................. 14128
X Y :16, 51, 86,........
Let m = n  X  Y 
16 + (m –1) × 35  10086
 m  288.71
 m = 288
 n  X  Y   n  X   n  Y   n  X  Y 
= 2018 + 2018 – 288 = 3748
Q.10 The number of real solutions of the equation

 i    x i 

x   i

sin1   xi1  x       cos 1         x  
 i1 i 1  2  
 2  i1  2  i1 
  
 1 1
lying in the inverval   2 , 2  is ______.
 
  
(Here, the inverse trigonometric functions sin–1x and cos–1x assume values in   2 , 2  and [0, ],
 
respectively.)
Sol. 2

x2
 xi1  1  x
i 1
 i
x x
  2   2  x
i 1
 i
 x x
   2   2  x
i 1

i x
  x  
1 x
i 1
To have real solutions
  i i
x  x  i
 xi1  x  2     2     x 
i 1 i1 i1 i1
x2 x2 x x
  
1 x 2 x 2 x 1 x
x(x3 + 2x2 + 5x –2 ) = 0
 x = 0 and let f(x) = x3 + 2x2 + 5x – 2
1  1
f   .f     0
2  2
Hence two solution exist
Q.11 For each positive integer n, let

1
1
yn 
n
 n  1 n  2  ... n  n n .
For x  R, let [x] be the greatest integer less than or equal to x. If lim yn  L, then the
n
value of [L] is _________.
Sol. 1
1
 1 2  n  n
yn   1    1   .... 1   
 n   n   n 
n 1 /n
 r
yn    1  
r 1 
n
1 n 1  r
logyn =  n  1  
n r 1 n  n
n
1  r
 lim log yn  lim
n x 
 nn 1  n 
r 1
2
 logL = 0 n 1  x dx
4
 logL  log
e
4
L 
e
 L   1
   
Q.12 Le t a and b be t wo uni t v ec tors such t hat a . b  0. For s om e x , y  R , l e t
   
 =x  
a + y b + ( a  b ). If | c | = 2 and the vector c is inclined at the same angle  to both
c
 
a and b, then the value of 8 cos2  is _______
Sol. 3
    
c  xa  yb  a  b

c.a  x and x  2 cos 

c.b  y and y  2 cos 
 
Also, | a  b | 1
    

 c  2 cos a  b  a  b 
       
  a  b 
2 2
c2  4 cos2  a  b   
 2 cos  a  b . a.  b 
4= 8cos2+ 1
8cos2 = 3
Q.13 Let a, b, c be three non-zero real numbers such that the equation
  
3 a cos x  2b sin x  c, x    ,  ,
 2 2
 b
has two distinct real roots  and with  +  = . Then, the value of is ________
3 a
Sol. 0.5
2b c
3 cos x  sin x 
a a
2b c
Now, 3 cos   sin   ..... 1
a sin a
2b c
3 cos   sin   ...... (2)
a a
2b
3 cos   cos  
a
 sin   sin   0
         2b         
3  2 sin   sin     2 cos   sin    0
  2   2  a   2   2 
b
 3  2 3. 0
a
b 1
  0.5
a 2
Q.14 A farmer F1 has a land in the shape of a triangle with vertices at P(0, 0), Q(1, 1) and R(2, 0).
From this land, a neighbouring farmer F2 takes away the region which lies between the side PQ
and a curve of the form y = xn (n > 1). If the area of the region taken away by the farmer F2 is
exactly 30% of the area of PQR, then the value of n is _______.
Sol. 4
(1, 1)
(0, 0) (1, 0) (2, 0)
1
Area =  x  x
n
dx  103
0
1
 x2 xn1  3
   
 2 n  1 0 10
1 1 3
   n + 1 = 5
2 n  1 10
n=4
SECTION 3 (Maximum Marks : 12)

• This section contains TWO (02) paragraphs. Based on each paragraph,there are TWO (02) ques-
tions.
• Each question has FOUR options. ONLY ONE of these fouroptions corresponds to the correct
answer.
• For each question, choose the option corresponding to the correct answer.
• Answer to each question will be evaluated accroding to the follwing marking scheme :
Full Marks : + 3 If ONLY the correct option is chosen.
Zero Marks : 0 If none ofthe option is chosen (i.e. the question is unanswered).
PARAGRAPH ''X''
Let S be the circle in the xy- plane defined by the equation x2 + y2 = 4.
Q.15 Let E1E2 and F1F2 be the chords of S passing through the point P0(1, 1) and parallel to the x-axis
and the y-axis, respectively. Let G1G2 be the chord of S passing through P0 and having slope -1.
Let the tangents to S at E1 and E2 meet at E3, the tangents to S at F1 and F2 meet at F3 and the
tangents to S at G1 and G2 meet at G3. Then, the points E3, F3, and G3 lie on the curve
(A) x + y = 4 (B) (x –4)2 + (y –4)2 = 16
(C) (x –4) (y – 4) = 4 (D) xy =4
Sol. A
(0, 2) F1
P0
(–2, 0) (2, 0)
F2
E3, F3 and G3 lie on polar of P0,

Equation of polor T = 0
x.1 + y.1 = 4
x+y=4
Q.16 Let P be a point on the circle S with both coordinates being positive. Let the tangent to S at P
intersect the coordinate axes at the points M and N. Then, the mid-point of the line segment MN
must lie on the curve.
(A) (x + y)2 = 3xy (B) x2/3 + y2/3 = 24/3
(C) x2 + y2= 2xy (D) x2 + y2= x2y2
Sol. D
N
P 2 cos , 2 sin  
Tangent at P(2cos, 2sin) is xcos+ysin= 2

M(2sec 0) and N(0, 2cosec)
Let midpoint be (h, k)
h = sec, k = cosec
1 1
2
 1
h k2
1 1
 1
2
x y2
PARAGRAPH ''A''
There are five students S1, S2, S3, S4 and S5 in a music class and for them there are five seats R1,
R2, R3, R4 and R5 arranged in a row, where intially the seat Ri is allotted to the student Si , i = 1,
2, 3, 4, 5. But, on the examination day, the five students are randomly allotted the five seats.
Q.17 The probability that, on the examination day, the student S1 gets the previously allotted seat R1
and NONE of the remaining students gets the seat previously allotted to him/ her is
(There are two questions based on Paragraph ''A''. the question given below is one of them)
3 1
(A) (B)
40 8
7 1
(C) (D)
40 5
Sol. A
1 1 1
4!    
Required probability =  2! 3! 4!   9  3
5! 120 40
Q.18 For i = 1, 2, 3, 4 let Ti denote the event that the students Si and Si + 1 do NOT sit adjacent to each
other on the day of the examination. Then,the probability of the event T1 T2  T3  T4 is
1 1
(A) (B)
15 10
7 1
(C) (D)
60 5
Sol. C
Case-1
...... ...... S1 S3 ...... = 2C1 . 2C1.1 = 4
Case-2
S1 ...... S2 ...... S3 =1
Case -3
S1 S3 ...... S2 ...... =1
Case-4
S1 ...... S3 ...... S2 =2
Case-5
...... S1 ...... S2 ...... =2
Case-6
...... S1 S3 ...... S2 =4
Total = 14
14 7
probability 
5! 60
[PHYSICS]
SECT ION 1 (Maximum Marks: 24)

• This section contains SIX (06) questions.
• Each question has FOUR options for correct answer(s). ONE OR MORE THAN ONE of these four
option(s) is (are) correct option(s).
• For each question, choose the correct option(s) to answer the question.
Full Marks : .... If only (all) the correct option(s) is (are) chosen.
Partial Marks : .... If all the four options are correct but ONLY three options are chosen.
Partial Marks : .... If three or more options are correct but ONLY two options are chosen, both of which
are correct options.
Partial Marks : .... If two or more options are correct but ONLY one option is chosen and it is a
correct option.
Negative Marks : .... In all other cases.
• For Example: If first, third and fourth are the ONLY three correct options for a question with second option
being an incorrect option; selecting only all the three correct options will result in +4 marks. Selecting only
two of the three correct options (e.g. the first and fourth options), without selecting any incorrect option
(second option in this case), will result in +2 marks. Selecting only one of the three correct options (either
first or third or fourth option) ,without selecting any incorrect option (second option in this case), will result
in +1 marks. Selecting any incorrect option(s) (second option in this case), with or without selection of any
correct option(s) will result in ]2 marks.
WPE
1. A particle of mass m is initially at rest at the origin. It is subjected to a force and starts moving
along the x-axis. Its kinetic energy K changes with time as dK/dt = t, where  is a positive
constant of appropriate dimensions. Which of the following statements is (are) true ?
(A) The force applied on the particle is constant
(B) The speed of the particle is proportional to time
(C) The distance of the particle from the origin increases linerarly with time
(D) The force is conservative
Sol. ABD
1
KE = mv
v2
2
dk dv
 = mv = t
dt dt
v t
m 
0
vdv =   tdt
0
mv 2 t2
=
2 2

v= t
m
We can see that v  t
 a = constant
 F = constant
Thus the force is conservative in nature
VISCOSITY
2. Consider a thin square plate floating on a viscous liquid in a large tank. The height h of the liquid
in the tank is much less than the width of the tank. The floating plate is pulled horizontally with
a constant velocity u0. Which of the following statements is (are) true ?
(A) The resistive force of liquid on the plate is inversely proportional to h
(B) The resistive force of liquid on the plate is independent of the area of the plate
(C) The tangential (shear) stress on the floor of the tank increases with u0.
(D) The tangential (shear) stress on the plate varies linearly with the viscosity  of the liquid.
Sol. ACD
u0
h
We know that :
dv
Fv = – A . since h is very small therefore, magnitude of viscous force is given by
y
dy
v
F = A
y
Au0
F=
h
1
(A) F  (C) F  0 (D) F  n
h
ELECTROSTATICS - 2
3. An infinitely long thin non-conducting wire is parallel to the z-axis and carries a uniform line
charge density . It pierces a thin non-conducting spherical shell of radius R in such a way that
the arc PQ subtends an angle 120° at the centre O of the spherical shell, as shown in the figure.
The permittivity of free space is 0. Which of the following statements is (are) true ?
(A) The electric flux through the shell is 3R /  0
(B) The z-component of the electric field is zero at all the points on the surface of the shell
(C) The electric flux through the shell is 2R / 0
(D) The electric field is normal to the surface of the shell at all points
Sol. AB
Field due to straight wire is perpendicular to the wire and P z-axis
radially outward. Hence EZ = 0 Length, PQ = 2R sin 60 = R

3R
60°
according to Gauss's law 120°
O
 qin   PQ 3R
Total flux =  E.ds =  = 
0 0
=
0 Q
GEO. OPTICS
4. A wire is bent in the shape of a right angled triangle and is placed in front of a concave mirror of
focal length f, as shown in the figure. Which of the figures shown in the four options qualitatively
represent(s) the shape of the image of the bent wire ? (These figures are not to scale.) ?
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Sol. D
As we can see from figure that the common ray for all the points on the hypotenuse, passes
through focus. Thus the rays after reflection from mirror become parallel to principal axis.
On extending backwards, rays incident on pole meet the rays from focus on the straight line
always.
45°
F
RADIOACTIVITY (MODERN - 2)
232 212
5. In a radioactive decay chain, 90 Th nucleus decays to 82 Pb nucleus. Let N and N be the number
of  and  - particles, respectively, emitted in this decay process. Which of the following
statements is (are) true ?
(A) N = 5 (B) N = 6 (C) N = 2 (D) N = 4
Sol. A,C
232 212
90 Th is converting into 82 Pb
Change in mass number (A) = 20
is only brought by 
20
 no of  particle = =5
4
Due to 5  particle, z will change by 10 unit
Since given chagne is 8, therefore no. of  particle is 2
SOUND
6. In an experiment to measure the speed of sound by a resonating air column, a tuning fork of
frequency 500 Hz is used. The length of the air column is varied by changing the level of water in
the resonance tube. Two successive resonances are heard at air columns of length 50.7 cm and
83.9 cm. Which of the following statements is (are) true ?
(A) The speed of sound determined from this experiment is 332 ms-1
(B) The end correction in this experiment is 0.9 cm
(C) The wavelength of the sound wave is 66.4 cm
(D) The resonance at 50.7 cm corresponds to the fundamental harmonic
Sol. A,C
Let n1 harmonic is corresponding to 50.7 cm and n2 harmonic is corresponding 83.9 cm. Since
both one consecutive harmonics.

 Their difference =
2

 = (83.9 – 50.7) cm
2

= 33.2 cm
2
 = 66.4 cm

 = 16.6 cm
4

Length corresponding to fundamental mode must be close to & 50.7 cm must be an odd
4
multiple of this length 16.6 × 3 = 49.8 cm. Therefore 50.7 is 3nd harmonic
If end corection is e, then
3
e + 50.7 =
4
e = 49.8 – 50.7 = –0.9 cm
Speed of sound, v = f
 v = 500 × 66.4 cm/sec = 332.000 m/s

• This section contains EIGHT (08) questions. The answer to each question is a NUMERICAL
VALUE.
• For each question, enter the correct numerical value (in decimal notation, truncated/rounded.off
to the second decimal place; e.g. 6.25, 7.00, .0.33, ..30, 30.27, .127.30) using the mouse and
the onscreen virtual numeric keypad in the place designated to enter the answer.
Full Marks : ..3 If ONLY the correct numerical value is entered as answer.
CONSTRAIN
7. A solid horizontal surface is covered with a thin layer of oil. A rectangular block of mass m=0.4kg
is at rest on this surface. An impulse of 1.0 N s is applied to the block at time to t = 0 so that it
starts moving along the x-axis with a velocity v(t) = v0e t /  , where v0 is a constant and  = 4 s.
The displacement of the block, in metres, at t =  is................... Take e-1 = 0.37 ?
Sol. 6.30
J=1 m=0.4
v = v0e–t/ As J = p
J dx
 v0 = = 2.5 m/s  = v0e–t/
m dt
x 
t /  ex

0
dx  v0 e
0
dt
 e x dx 
1

 
 e t /  
 
x = v0  1 

   0
or x = 2.5 (–4) (e–1 – e0) or x = 25 (–4) (0.37 – 1) or x = 6.30
CONSTRAIN
8. A ball is projected from the ground at an angle of 45° with the horizontal surface. It reaches a
maximum height of 120 m and returns to the ground. Upon hitting the ground for the first time,
it loses half of its kinetic energy. Immediately after the bounce, the velocity of the ball makes an
angle of 30° with the horizontal surface. The maximum height it reaches after the bounce, in
metres, is.................
Sol. 30.00
u2 sin2 45
H1 = = 120
2g
u2
 = 120 ....(1)
4g
u
If half of kinetic energy is lost, v =
2
2
 u 
  sin2 30 u2
H2 =  2  = = ......(2)
16g
2g
 from (1) and (2)

H1
H2 = = 30 m
4
AC
9. A particle, of mass 10-3 kg and charge 1.0 C, is initially at rest. At time t = 0, the particle comes

under the influence of an electric field E(t)  E0 sin tî where E0 = 1.0 N C-1 and =103 rad s-1.
Consider the effect of only the electrical force on the particle. Then the maximum speed, in ms-1,
attained by the particle at subsequent times is...........................
Sol. 2.00
m = 10–3 kg, q = 1 C t = 0
E = E0 sin t 
Force on particle will be

F = qE = qE0 sin t
At v = vmax,
a = 0 and F = 0
 qE0 sin t = 0
F = qE0 sin t
dv E
= q 0 sin t
dt m
v /
qE0

a
dv = 
0
m sin t dt
qE0
or v = [–cos t]0/
m
qE0
or v = [(–cos) – (–cos)]
m
11
v= × 2 = 2 m/s
10 3103
MAGNETISM
10. A moving coil galvanometer has 50 turns and each turn has an area 2×10–4 m2. The magnetic
field produced by the magnet inside the galvanometer is 0.02 T. The torsional constant of the
suspension wire is 10–4 N m rad–1. When a current flows through the galvanometer, a full scale
deflection occurs if the coil rotates by 0.2 rad. The resistance of the coil of the galvanometer is
50 . This galvanometer is to be converted into an ammeter capable of measuring current in the
range 0–1.0 A. For this purpose, a shunt resistance is to be added in parallel to the galvanometer.
The value of this shunt resistance, in ohms, is...........
Sol. 5.55
n = 50 turns A = 2 × 10–4 m2
B = 0.02 T K = 10–4
 = 0.2 rad Rg = 50 
IA = 1.0 A
BINA = C
0.02 × Ig × 50 × 2 × 10–4 = 10–4 × 0.2
 Ig = 0.1 A
For galvanometer, resistance is to be connected to ammeter in shunt.
Ig=0.1 Rg =50
I–Ig S
Ig × Rg = (I – Ig) S
0.1 × 50 = (1 – 0.1) S
50
S= = 5.55
9
THERMAL EXPANSION
11. A steel wire of diameter 0.5 mm and Young’s modulus 2 × 1011 N m–2 carries a load of mass M.
The length of the wire with the load is 1.0 m. A vernier scale with 10 divisions is attached to the
end of this wire. Next to the steel wire is a reference wire to which a main scale, of least count 1.0
mm, is attached. The 10 divisions of the vernier scale correspond to 9 divisions of the main scale.
Initially, the zero of vernier scale coincides with the zero of main scale. If the load on the steel
wire is increased by 1.2kg, the vernier scale division which coincides with a main scale division is
.......... Take g = 10 ms–2 and  = 3.2.
Sol. 3.00
d = 0.5 mm Y = 2 × 1011  = 1m
F mg 1.2 10 1

   
Ay d2  2
  5  10–4   2  1011
y
4 4
1.2 10
 
3.2
 25  10 –8  2  1011 1
4
12 12
 3
  0.3mm
0.8  25  2  10 40  103
Thus 3rd division of vernier scale coincide with main scale.
HEAT - 2
12. One mole of a monatomic ideal gas undergoes an adiabatic expansion in which its volume be-
comes eight times its initial value. If the initial temperature of the gas is 100 K and the universal
gas constant R = 8.0 J mol–1 K–1, the decrease in its internal energy, in Joule, is............ .
Sol. 900
5
For adiabatic process {   for monoatomic process}
3
1
TV
1 1  T2 .V2 –1
100(v)2/3 = T2(8v)2/3
T2 = 25 k
 fR 
U = ncvT = 1   [100–25]=12 ×75 = 900 Joule
 2 
PHOTOELECTRIC EFFECT
13. In a photoelectric experiment a parallel beam of monochromatic light with power of 200 W is
incident on a perfectly absorbing cathode of work function 6.25 eV. The frequency of light is just
above the threshold frequency so that the photoelectrons are emitted with negligible kinetic
energy. Assume that the photoelectron emission efficinecy is 100% A potential difference of 500
V is applied between the cathode and the anode. All the emitted electrons are incident normally
on the anode and are absorbed. The anode experiences a force F = n × 10–4 N due to the impact
of the electrons. The value of n is........ Mass of the electron me = 9 × 10–31 kg and
1.0 eV = 1.6 × 10–19 J.?
Sol. 24
Power = nh (n = number of photons per second)
KE = 0, h =  (h =  + KEmax)
200 = n[6.25 × 1.6 × 10–19 Joule]
200
n
1.6  10 –19  6.25
As photon is just above threshold frequency KEmax is zero and they are accelrated by potential
difference of 500V.
KEf = qV
p2
 q  p  2mqV
2m
Since efficiency is 100%, number of electrons = number of photons per second
As photon is completely absorbed force exerted = nmv
200
 –19
 2  9  10 –31   1.6  10–19  500
6.25  1.6  10
3  200  10 –25  1600 2  40

   10 –4  3  24
6.25  1.6  10 –19 6.25  1.6
14. Consider a hydrogen-like ionized atom with atomic number Z with a single electron. In the
emission spectrum of this atom, the photon emitted in the n = 2 to n = 1 transition has energy
74.8 eV higher than the photon emitted in the n = 3 to n = 2 transition. The ionization energy of
the hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV. The value of Z is.............. .
Sol. 3
 1 3
E 2–1  13.6  z 2 1 –   13.6  z 2  
 4 4
1 1 5
E3–2  13.6  z 2  –   13.6  z 2  
4 9  36 
E 2–1  E 3– 2  74.8
3 5
13.6  z 2    13.6  z 2    74.8
4  36 
3 5 
13.6  z 2  –   74.8
 4 36 
z2 = 9
z = +3 ans

• This section contains FOUR (04) questions.
4 Each question has TWO (02) matching lists: LIST.I and LIST.II.
4 FOUR options are given representing matching of elements from LIST.I and LIST.II. ONLY ONE
of these four options corresponds to a correct matching.
• For each question, choose the option corresponding to the correct matching.
• For each question, marks will be awarded according to the following marking scheme:
Full Marks : ..3 If ONLY the option corresponding to the correct matching is chosen.
Negative Marks : ..1 In all other cases.
15. The electric field E is measured at a point P(0,0,d) generated due to various charge distributions
and the dependence of E on d is found to be different for different charge distributions. List-I
contains different relations between E and d. List-II describes different electric charge distribu-
tions, along with their locations. Match the functions in List-I with the related charge distribu-
tions in List-II.
List–I List–II
P. E is indpendent of d 1. A point charge Q at the origin
1
Q. E 2. A small dipole with point charges Q at (0,0,) and –Q
d
at (0,0,–).
Take 2 << d
1
R. E 3. An infinite line charge coincident with the x-axis, with
d2
uniform linear charge density .
1
S. E 4. Two infinite wires carrying uniform linear Charge
d3
density parallel to the x - axis. The one along (y = 0,
z = ) has a charge density + and the one along (y =
0, z = – ) has a charge density –. Take 2 << d
5. Infinite plane charge coincident with the xy-plane with

uniform surface charge density
(A) P  5 ; Q  3, 4 ; R  1 ; S  2 (B) P  5 ; Q  3, ; R  1,4 ; S  2
(C) P  5 ; Q  3, ; R  1,2 ; S  4 (D) P  4 ; Q  2, 3 ; R  1 ; S  5
Sol. B
KQ 1
(i) E  E 2
d2 d
(ii) Electric field due to dipole
2kp
E 3
1  3cos 2 
d
1
E for dipole
d3
(iii) For line charge
2k
E
d
1
E
d
2k 2K
(iv) E  –
d– d
d   – d  
 2K  
 d –
2 2

2K  2 
E
 2 
d 2 1 – 2 
 d 
1
E
d2
(v) Electric field due to thin sheet

E ( independent of v)
2 0
GRAVITATION
16. A planet of mass M, has two natural satellites with masses m1 and m2. The radii of their circular
orbits are R1 and R2 respectively. Ignore the gravitational force between the satellites. Define v1,
L1, K1 and T1 to be, respectively, the orbital speed, angular momentum, kinetic energy and time
period of revolution of satellite 1 ; and v2, L2, K2 and T2 to be the corresponding quantities of
satellite 2. Given m1/m2 = 2 and R1/R2 = 1/4, match the ratios in List-I to the numbers in List-II.
List–I List–II
1 1
P. 1.
2 8
L1
Q. 2. 1
L2
K1
R. 3. 2
K2
T1
S. 4. 8
T2
(A) P  4 ; Q  2 ; R  1 ; S  3 (B) P  3 ; Q  2 ; R  4 ; S  1
(C) P  2 ; Q  3 ; R  1 ; S  4 (D) P  2 ; Q  3 ; R  4 ; S  1
Sol. B
m1 
M  2
m2 
 given
R1 1 
R1 
R2 R 2 4 
m2 m1
GMm1 m1 v12

R 12 R1
GM 2 GM
v12  , v2 
R1 R2
v12 R 2
 4
v 22 R1
v1
(P) 2
v2
(Q) L = mvR
L1 m1v1R1 1
  2 2 1
L2 m 2 v 2 R 2 4
1
(R) K = mv
v2
2
K1 m1 v12 2
 2
 2   2  8
K 2 m 2 v2
(S) T = 2R/V
T1 R 1 v 2 R1 v2 1 1 1
      
T2 v1 R 2 R 2 v1 4 2 8
HEAT - 2
17. One mole of a monatomic ideal gas undergoes four thermodynamic processes as shown sche-
matically in the PV-diagram below. Among these four processes, one is isobaric, one is isochoric,
one is isothermal and one is adiabatic. Match the processes mentioned in List-I with the corre-
sponding statements in List–I with the corresponding statements in List–II.
P
II
3P0
IV III
I
P0
V
V0 3V0
List–I List–II
P. In process I 1. Work done by the gas is zero
Q. In process II 2. Temperature of the gas remains unchanged
R. In process III 3. No heat is exchanged between the gas and its surround
ings
S. In process IV 4. Work done by the gas is 6 P0V0
(A) P  4 ; Q  3 ; R  1 ; S  2
(B) P  1 ; Q  3 ; R  2 ; S  4
(C) P  3 ; Q  4 ; R  1 ; S  2
(D) P  3 ; Q  4 ; R  2 ; S  1
Sol. C
Process – I is an adiabatic process
Q = U +W Q = 0
W = –U
Volume of gas is decreasing  W < 0
U > 0
 Temperatuer of gas increases.
 No heat is exchanged between the gas and surrounding.
Process – II is an isobaric process
(Pressure remains constant)
W = P V = 3P0[3V0 – V0] = 6P0V0
Process - III is an isochoric process
(Volume remains constant)
Q = U + W
W=0
Q = U
Process – IV is an isothermal process
(Temperature remains constant)
Q = U + W
U = 0
ROTATION
18. In the List-I below, four different paths of a particle are given as functions of time. In these
functions,  and  are positive constants of appropriate dimensions and   B. In each case, the
force acting on the particle is either zero or conservative. In List–II, five physical quantities of the
 
particle are mentioned; p is the linear momentum L is the angular momentum about the origin,
K is the kinetic energy, U is the potential energy and E is the total energy. Match each path in
List–I with those quantities in List–II, which are conserved for that path
List–I List–II
 
P. r  t   ti  t j 1. p
 
Q. r  t    cos ti   sin t j 2. L

R. r  t    cos ti  sin t j
  3. K
  2
S. r  t   ti  t j 4. U
2
5. E
(A) P  1,2,3,4,5 ; Q  2,5 ; R  2,3,4,5 ; S  5
(B) P  1,2,3,4,5 ; Q  3,5 ; R  2,3,4,5 ; S  2,5
(C) P  2,3,4 ; Q  5; R  1,2,4 ; S  2,5
(D) P  1,2,3,5 ; Q  2,5 ; R  2,3,4,5 ; S  2,5
Sol. A

(P) r  t î  tĵ

 v  i   tĵ
 a  0 [1,2,3,4,5]
ˆ sin  t ˆj
(Q) r = 
 cos 
t i  
 
a b
This is an equation of ellipse (2,5)

(R) r (t) =  cos ti   sin tĵ
This is the equation of a circle (2,3,4,5)
  2
(S) r(t) = t î  t ĵ
2

v   î  tĵ

a  ĵ (5)
[CHEMISTRY]

COORDINATION COMPOUND
1. The correct option(s) regarding the complex [Co(en) (NH3)3(H2O)]3+ :
(en = H2NCH2CH2NH2) is (are)
(A) It has two geometrical isomers
(B) It will have three geometrical isomers if bidentate ‘en’ is replaced by two cyanide ligands
(C) It is paramagnetic
(D) It absorbs light at longer wavelength as compared to [Co(en) (NH3)4]3+
Sol. A, B, D
The given complex
[Co(en)(NH3)3H2O]3+ has 2 – Geometrical Isomer as following
3+ 3+
NH 3 NH3
N NH3 N H2O
CO POS CO POS
N NH3 N NH3
H2O NH3
facial form Meridonial form
Both are optically inactive (PoS)

When en is replace by CN– then the complex will be [Co(CN)2(NH3)3 (H2O)] & it has three
geometrical isomers as –
NH3 NH 3 NH3
CN NH3 CN H2O H2O CN
CO CO CO
CN NH3 CN NH 3 CN NH3
H2O NH3 NH 3
facial form
(optically inactive) 2- Meridonial form
-
(trans wrt CN )
-
(Cis wrt CN )
[Co(en)(NH3)H2O]3+ It has en & NH3 as strong field ligand so it is a low spin complx with
Hybridisation d2sp3 & in dimagnetic
Co3+ 3d6
3d8 4S 4P
3d 4s 4d
2 3
d sp
hc
o = abs
as
strong field nature of Ligend inc. o Inc.
ELECTRO CHEMISTRY
2. The correct option(s) to distinguish nitrate salts of Mn2+ and Cu2+ taken separately is (are) : -
(A) Mn2+ shows the characteristic green colour in the flame test
(B) Only Cu2+ shows the formation of precipitate by passing H2S in acidic medium
(C) Only Mn2+ shows the formation of precipitate by passing H2S in faintly basic medium
(D) Cu2+/Cu has higher reduction potential than Mn2+/Mn (measured under similar conditions)
Sol. B,D
Mn2+ is IV group radical in which group reagent is H2S + NH4OH


H2S 
 2H+ + S2


NH4OH 
 NH4 + OH–
H+ + OH–  H2O
so equilibrium shift in forward reaction [S–2] increases
KSP as IV group sulphide is higher & hence its solubility is higher
Cu2+ & Mn2+ gives some green flame is flame test Cu2+/Cu,+ve standard reduction potential (refer
the electro chemical series)
AMINE
3. Aniline reacts with mixed acid (cone. HNO3 and cone. H2SO4) at 288 K to give P (51%), Q (47%)
and R (2%). The major product(s) the following reaction sequence is (are) :
(1) Ac2O, pyridine (1) Sn/HCl
(2) Br2, CH3CO2H (2) Br2/H2O (excess)
R + S major product(s)
(3) H3O (3) NaNO 2, HCl/273-278K
(4) NaNO2, HCl/273-278K (4) H 3PO2
Br
Br Br Br
Br Br
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Br Br
Br Br Br Br Br
Br Br
Sol. D
NH2 NH 2 NH2 NH 2
NO2
HNO3 + H2SO4
+ +
(2%) (47%)
NO2
NO2
(51%)
O
NH—C—Cl 3
NH2 NH—C—CH3
NO2 NO2
AC2O NO2
Py Br2/CH3CO2H
+ Br
N2 NH2
NO2 Et-OH NO2 NaNO 2 NO2

HCl
0–5°C
Sn+HCl
Br Br Br
Br NH2 Br
NO2 Br2/H2O NH2 NaNO2 + HCl N2 H3PO2

(excess) 0–5°C
Br Br Br Br Br Br
Br Br Br Br
BIOMOLECULE
4. The Fischer presentation of D-glucose is given below.
CHO
H OH
HO H
H OH
H OH
CH3OH
D-glucose
The correct structure(s) of 3-g1ucopyranose is (are) :-
H H CH2OH H
O O O O
CH2OH CH2OH H CH2OH
HO OH HO OH H OH HO H
(A) H H (B) H H (C) HO H (D) H OH

H HO H H OH HO H HO
OH H OH OH H H OH OH
Sol. D
CH=O H
H OH OH O
CH2OH
HO H O OH
HO H
H OH OH
H OH OH H
H OH
OH H HO
CH2OH
D-glucose OH OH
CHEMICAL KINETICS
5. For a first order reaction A(g)  2B(g) + C(g) at constant volume and 300 K, the total pressure
at the beginning (t = 0) and at time t are P0 and Pt , respectively. Initially, only A is present with
concentration [A]0, and t1/3 is the time required for the partial pressure of A to reach 1/3rd of its
initial value. The correct option(s) is (are) :
(Assume that all these gases behave as ideal gases)
Rate constant
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Time [A]0 Time [A]0
Sol. A,D
A  2B + C
t=o P0
‘t’ P0–x 2x x P0 + 2x = Pt
 
 P0 

n  P  P0   = Kt
P0  t
 2 
 2P0 
n  3P  P  = Kt
 0 t
n{3P0 – Pt} = –kt + ln(2P0)

(–)ve slope (+)ve intervept (+) correct
 P0 
Kt1/3 = ln  P / 3  = ln (3)
 0 
THERMO DYNAMICS
6. 

For a reaction, A 
 P , the plots of [A] and [P] with time at temperatures T1 and T2 are given
below.
10 10
T1
T2
5 5
T2
T1
Time Time
If T2 > T1, the correct statement(s) is (are)

(Assume H° and S° are independent of temperature and ratio of InK at T1 to InK at T2 is greater
T2
than T1 . Here H, S, G and K are enthalpy, entropy, Gibbs energy and equilibrium constant,
respectively.)
(A) H0 < 0, S0 < 0 (B) G0 < 0, H0 > 0
(C) G0 < 0, S0 < 0 (D) G0 < 0, S0 > 0
Sol. A, C
A  P
Keq at T1 > Keq at T2(K2) from graph
T 2 > T1
 K2  H  1  1 
n  K  =  
 1 R  T1 T2 
H  0
ln k1  T2
ln k2  > T1
S H  1 
  
R R  T1 
T2
S x  1  > T1
  
R R  T2 
S H S H

T1 – > T2. 
R R R R
S
(T1 – T2) 0
R
S  0
G° = H° – T.s°
G° < 0 both
>0

VALUE.
• For each question, enter the correct numerical value (in decimal notation, truncated/rounded.off
to the second decimal place; e.g. 6.25, 7.00, .0.33, ..30, 30.27, .127.30) using the mouse and
the onscreen virtual numeric keypad in the place designated to enter the answer.
CHEMICAL BONDING
7. The total number of compounds having at least one bridging oxo group among the molecules
given below is________
N2O3, N2O5, P4O6, P4O7, H4P2O5, H5P3O10, H2S2O3, H2S2O5
Sol. 5 or 6
O
N O N O
N2O3 O O=N-N O
symmetrical str.
unsymmetrical str.
O
O
N2O5 N O N
O O
P O P
O OO O
P4O6
P O P
O
P O P
P4O2 O OO O
P O P
O O
HO P O P OH
H H
O O O
HO P O P O P OH
OH OH OH
HO S OH
O O
HO S S OH
(5 or 6) It N2O3 is considered or not considered
METALLURGY + MOLE
8. Galena (an ore) is partially oxidized by passing air through it at high temperature. After some
time, the passage of air is stopped, but the heating is continued in a closed furnance such that
the contents undergo self-reduction. The weight (in kg) of Ph produced per kg of O, consumed is
_______.
(Atomic weights in g mol–1 : O = 16, S = 32, Ph = 207)
Sol. 6.47
Involved reaction are
2Pbs + 3O2 
T1
 2PbO + 2SO2
Galena
2PbO + Pbs 
T2
 3Pb + SO2
T2 > T1
3PbS + 3O2  3Pb + 3SO2
or Pbs + O2  Pb + SO2
mole of O2 consumed = mol at Pb formed
103 Wt of Pb
=
32 207
103 x 207
Wt at Pb = = 6.47 x 103g
32
= 6.47 Kg
STOICHIOMETRY - II
9. To measure the quantity of MnCl, dissolved in an aqueous solution, it was completely converted
to KMnO4 using the reaction,
MnCl2 + K2S2O8 + H2O  KMnO4 + H2SO4 + HCl (equation not balanced).
Few drops of concentrated HCl were added to this solution and gently warmed. Further, oxalic
acid (225 g) was added in portions till the colour of the permanganate ion disappeard. The
quantity of MnCl2, (in mg) present in the initial solution is ________.
(Atomic weights in g mol–1 : Mn = 55, Cl = 35.5)
Sol. 126
+2 +7 –2
MnCl2 + K2S2O8 + H2O KMnO4 + H2SO4 + HCl
RA
vf = 5
Ox. reduction
vf = 2
KMnO4 + oxalic 

acidic
 Ni+2 + CO
2
225
 103 gm
26  64
225  103
×2 = 5 × nKMnO4
90
= 5 × nMnCl2
2.25  2  103 W in mg  103

=5×
90 55771
450  126
W=
90  5
w = 126
ISOMERISM
10. For the given compound X, the total number of optically active stereoisomers is_____.
OH H OH
This type of bond indicates that he configuration at the
H specific carbon and the geometry of the double bond is fixed.
* *
* This type of bond indicates that he configuration at the
OH specific carbon and the geometry of the double bond is NOT fixed.
OH
Sol. 7
23 total = 8
1 meso = Optically active = 8 – 1 = 7
AROMATIC COMP.
11. In the following reaction sequence, the amount of D (in g) formed from 10 moles of acetophenone
is_______.
(A tomic weight in g mol–1: H = 1, C = 12, N = 14, O = 16, Br = 80. The yield (%) corresponding
to the product in each step is given in the parenthesis)
NaOBr Br2/KOH Br2(3 equiv)

A B C D
H3O
+
AcOH
(60%) (50%) (50%) (100%)
Sol. 495
HO H2N NH 2 NH 2
Br Br
NaOBr Br 2/KOH Br2 (3 equiv)
H3O+ AcOH
10 mole (60%) (50%) (50%)

6 mol 3 mol 1.5 mol Br
100%
1.5 mol = 495 gm
ELECTRO CHEMISTRY
12. The surface of copper gets tarnished by the formation of copper oxide. N2 gas was passed to
prevent the oxide formation during heating of copper at 1250 K. However, the N2 gas contains 1
mole % of water vapour as impurity. The water vapour oxidises copper as per the reaction given
below :
2Cu(s) + H2O(g)  Cu2O(s) + H2(g)
pH2 is the minimum partial pressure of H2 (in bar) needed to prevent the oxidation at 1250 K. The
 
value of ln pH2 is ___.
(Given : total pressure = 1 bar, R (universal gas constant) = 8 JK–1mol–1, ln(10) = 2.3. Cu(s) and
Cu2O(s) are mutually immiscible.
At 1250 K : 2Cu(s) + 1/2O2(g)  Cu2O(s); G = –78,000 J mol–1
H2(g) + 1/2O2(g)  H2O(g); G = 1,78,000 J mol–1; G is the Gibbs energy)
Sol. –14.6
Cu + O2  CuO
2Cu(s) + H2O(g)  Cu2O + H2
1
2Cu(s) + O (g)  Cu2O(s)
2 2
G° = –78000 = –nF E°
1
H2 + O  H2O(g)
2 2
G° = –178000
H2O(g)  H2 + H2O2 G° = +178000
2Cu(s) + H2O(g)  Cu2O(s) + H2(g)

G° = 1,00,000
  PH 
2
G = 1,00,000  8  1250ln  P O  g   > 0
  H2  
100000
  – ln P 
ln PH2 H2O >–
10000
  –2.3 × (–2) > –10

ln PH2
  > –14.6
ln PH2
THERMO DYNAMICS
13. Consider the following reversible reaction,
A(g) + B(g) AB(g).
The activition energy of the backward reaction exceeds that of the forward reaction by 2RT (in J
mol–1). If the pre-exponential factor of the forward reaction is 4 times that of the reverse reaction,
the absolute value of G (in J mol–1) for the reaction at 300 K is____.
(Given ; ln (2) = 0.7, RT = 2500 J mol–1 at 300 K and G is the Gibbs energy)
Sol. 8500
A + B  AB
(g) (g) (g)
Eab = Eaf + 2RT
Eaf – Eab = –2RT H°
Af = 4 Ab
Kf = Af e Eaf / RT
Kb = Ab e Eab / RT
kf Ab Eaf  Eab 
kb = Ab e
–
RT
Keq = 4 e+2
G° = –RT ln(Keq) = –2500 [2 + ln(4)] = –2500 [3.4]
1000  17
= –250 × 34 = –
2
G° = –8500 J/mol
Absolute value = 8500
ELECTROCHEMISTRY
14. Consider an electrochemical cell: A(s)  An+ (aq, 2M)  B2n+ (aq, 1M)  B(s). The value of H for the
cell reaction is twice that of G at 300 K. If the emf of the cell is zero, the S (in JK–1 mol–1) of
the cell reaction per mole of B formed at 300 K is___.
(Given : ln (2) = 0.7, R (universal gas constant) = 8.3 J K–1 mol–1. H, S and G are enthalpy,
entropy and Gibbs energy, respectively.)
Sol. –11.62
A(s)  An+ + ne–
B2n+
+ 2ne –
 B(s)
B+2n + 2A(s)  2An+ + B(s)

2
 An  
  4
Q =  2n   =
B 1
 
o RT
= E°Ce11 – 2n F ln (4)
E Ce11  
(2n) (F) E°Ce11 = +RT ln(4)
–G° = +2RT ln(2)
G° = –2RT ln(2)
G° = H° – T.S°
T.S° = H° – G°
T.S° = G°
T.S° = –2RT ln(2)
S° = –2×8.3×0.7 = –16.6 × 0.7 = –11.62 J/mol K

4 Each question has TWO (02) matching lists: LIST.I and LIST.II.
4 FOUR options are given representing matching of elements from LIST.I and LIST.II. ONLY ONE
of these four options corresponds to a correct matching.
COORDINATION
15. Match each set of hybrid orhitals from LIST-I with complex (es) given in LIST-II.
LIST-I LIST-II
P. dsp2 1. [FeF6]4–
Q. sp3 2. [Ti(H2O)Cl3]
R. sp3d2 3. [Cr(NH3)6]3+
S. d sp
2 3
4. [FeCl4]2–
5. Ni(CO)4
6. [Ni(CN)4]2–
The correct option is
(A) P  5; Q  4, 6; R  2, 3; S  1 (B) P  5, 6; Q  4; R  3; S  1,2
(C) P  6; Q  4, 5; R  1; S  2, 3 (D) P  4, 6, Q  5, 6; R  1, 2; S 3
Sol. C
[FeF6]4– F– b– wFL so Sp3d2
3
[ Ti (H2O)3 Cl3] 3d1 configuration CN = 6 so d2sp3
[Cr(NH3)6]3+ 3d3 configuration CN = 6 so d2sp3
[FeCl4]2– Sp3 weak field lignd CN = 4
[Ni(CO)4] Sp3 Co is strong field lignd
8 2
Ni 3d 4s
4p 4d
3d10 4S 4P 4d
sp3 hybridisation
[Ni (CN)4]2– CN– is strong field ligand
Ni2+ 8
3d 4S 4P
4S
2
dsp Hybridisation
CARBOXYLIC ACID
16. The desired product X can be prepared by reacting the major product of the reactions in LIST-I
with one or more appropriate reagents in LIST-II.
(given, order of migratory aptitude: aryl > alkyl > hydrogen)
O
OH
Ph
Ph
Me
X
LIST-I LIST-II
Ph
HO
P. Ph 1. I2, NaOH
Me
OH + H2SO4
Me
Ph
H2N
Q. Ph 2. [Ag(NH3)2]OH
Me
OH + HNO2
Me
Ph
HO
R. Me 3. Fehling solution
Ph
OH + H2SO4
Me
Ph
Br
S. Ph 4. HCHO, NaOH
H
OH + AgNO3
Me
5. NaOBr
The correct option is
(A) P  1; Q  2, 3; R  1, 4; S  2, 4 (B) P  1, 5; Q  3, 4; R  4, 5; S  3
(C) P  1, 5; Q  3, 4; R  5; S  2, 4 (D) P  1, 5; Q  2, 3; R  1, 5; S  2, 3
Sol. D
HALIDE
17. LIST-I contains reactions and LIST-II contains major products.
LIST-I LIST-II
P. + 1.
ONa Br OH
Q. + HBr 2.
OMe Br
R. + NaOMe 3.
Br OMe
S. + MeBr 4.
ONa
O
5.
Match each reaction in LIST-I with one or more product in LIST-Il and choose the correct option.
(A) P  1, 5; Q  2; R  3; S  4 (B) P  1, 4; Q  2; R  4; S  3
(C) P  1, 4; Q  1, 2; R  3, 4; S  4 (D) P  4, 5; Q  4; R  4; S  3, 4
Sol. B
P :
H3C H3C H3C CH2

CH3 CH3 CH 3
E2
+ +
H3C H3C H3C H3C CH 3
ONa Br OH
(i) (iv)
CH3
H3C
CH3
Q : H3C O + HBr + MeOH
CH 3 H3C
Br
CH3
H3C CH2
CH3
— +
R: MeO Na
E2
H3C H3C CH 3
Br
H3C H3C
CH3 2
CH 3
SN
S: + MeBr
H3C H3C
ONa OMe
IONIC EQ.
18. Dilution process of different aqueous solutions; with water, are given in LIST-I. The effects of
dilution of the solutions on [H+] are given in LIST—II.
(Note: Degree of dissociation () of weak acid and weak base is << 1; degree of hydrolysis of salt
<<1; [H+] represents the concentration of H ions)
LIST-I LIST-II
P. (10 mL of 0.1 M NaOH + 20 mL of 1. the vale of [H+] does not change on dilution
0.1 M acetic acid) diluted to 60 mL
Q. (20 mL of 0.1 M NaOH + 20 mL of 2. the value of [H+] change to half of its initial
0.1 M acetic acid) diluted to 80 mL value on dilution
R. (20 mL of 0.1 M HCl + 20 mL of 3. the value of [H+] changes to two times of its
0.1 M animonia solution) diluted to 80 mL initial value on dilution
1
S. 10 mL saturated solution of Ni(OH), in 4. the value of [H+] changes to times of its
2
equilibrium with excess solid Ni(OH)2 is initial value on dilution
diluted to 20 mL (solid Ni(OH), is still
present after dilution).
5. the value of [H+] changes to 2 times of its
initial value on dilution
Match each process given in LIST-I with one or more effect(s) in LIST-Il. The correct option is
(A) P  4; Q  2; R  3; S 1 (B) P  4; Q  3; R  2; S  3
(C) P  1; Q  4; R  5; S  3 (D) P  1; Q  5; R  4; S  1
Sol. D
(P) 10mol of 0.1M NaOH

 60ml
20 ml 0.1M CH3COOH
NaOH + CH3COOH  CH3COO– + Na+ + H2O
1 2 1
0 1
Buffer
Ans. P–1
(Q) 20ml of 0.1 M NaOH
+ 80ml
20 ml 0.1M CH3COOH
NaOH + CH3COOH  CH3COO– + H2O + Na+
2 2
0 0 2 (salt hydrolysis)
–  
CH3COO   CH3COOH + OH–
Kw
[OH–] = c
Ka
Kw
Kw
Kw  C = K w  Ka
[H+] = OH  =
  Ka C
On direction,  Conc. 
[H+] 
K w  Ka  40
[H+]i =
2
K w  Ka  8000
[H+]f = = K w  Ka  20 × 2
2
Q – (5)
(R) HCl + NH3  NH4+ Cl–
2 2
0 0 2
Kw
[H+] =  Conc.
Kb
Kw 2 Kw 1
[H+] =  
Kb 40 = Kb 20
Kw 2 Kw 1
[H+]i =  
Kb 40 = Kb 20
Kw 2 Kw 1 1
[H+]f =  
Kb 80 = Kb 20 × 2
R4


(S) Ni(OH)2(s) 
 Ni2+ + 2OH–
n 2n
2
 n   2n 
 10  1000    1000  = K
   10  sp
2
 x   2x 
 20  1000   20  1000  = Ksp
   
S–1
[MATHEMATICS]

• This section contains SIX (06) questions.
• Each question has FOUR options for correct answer(s). ONE OR MORE THAN ONE of these four
option(s) is (are) correct option(s).
• For each question, choose the correct option(s) to answer the question.
Full Marks : .... If only (all) the correct option(s) is (are) chosen.
Partial Marks : .... If all the four options are correct but ONLY three options are chosen.
Partial Marks : .... If three or more options are correct but ONLY two options are chosen, both of
which are correct options.
Partial Marks : .... If two or more options are correct but ONLY one option is chosen and it is a
correct option.
Negative Marks : .... In all other cases.
• For Example: If first, third and fourth are the ONLY three correct options for a question with
secondoption being an incorrect option; selecting only all the three correct options will result in
+4 marks. Selecting only two of the three correct options (e.g. the first and fourth options),
without selecting any incorrect option (second option in this case), will result in +2 marks.
Selecting only one of the three correct options (either first or third or fourth option) ,without
selecting any incorrect option (second option in this case), will result in +1 marks. Selecting any
incorrect option(s) (second option in this case), with or without selection of any correct option(s)
will result in .2 marks.
ITF
1. For any positive integer n, define fn : (0, )  R as
n
1  1 
f (x) =  tan  1   x  j  x  j  1  for all x  (0, ).
n
j1  
   
(Here, the inverse trigonometric function tan–1x assumes values in   ,  
 2 2 
Then, which of the following statement (s) is (are) TRUE ?
5 10
(A)  tan2 fj  0 = 55
  (B)  1  fj' 0  sec2  fj 0 =0
j1 j1
(C) For any fixed positive integer n, xlim tan  fn  x   = 1

 n
2
(D) For any fixed positive integer n, lim sec  fn  x   = 1
x 
Sol. D
n
1   x  j   x  j  1 
f (x) =  tan  1   x  j  x  j  1 
n
j1  
n
 1 1 
f (x) =   tan  x  j  tan  x  j  1 
n
j1
fn(x) = tan–1(x + n) – tan–1x
 tan(fn(x)) = tan[tan–1(x + n) – tan–1x]

 x  n  x n
tan(fn(x)) =  tan(fn(x)) =
1  x  x  n 2
1  x  nx
2
 n 
 sec2(fn(x)) = 1 + tan2(fn(x))  sec2(fn(x)) = 1   2 
 1  x  nx 
2
lim sec2  fn  x   = lim 1   n 
x  2  =1
x   1  x  nx 
CIRCLE
2. Let T be the line passing the points P(–2, 7) and Q(2,–5). Let F1 be the set of all pairs of circles
(S1, S2) such that T is tangent to S1 at P and tangent to S2 at Q, and also such that S1 and S2 touch
each other at a point, say M. Let E1 be the set representing the locus of M as the pair (S1, S2)
varies in F1. Let the set of all straight line segments joining a pair of distinct points of E1 and
passing through the point R(1,1,) be F2. Let E2 be the set of the mid-points of the line segments
in the set F2. Then, which of the following statment(s) is (are) TRUE ?
4 7
(A) The point (–2,7) lies in E1 (B) The point  ,  does NOT lie in E2
5 5
1   3
(C) The point  ,1  lies in E2 (D) The point  0,  does NOT lie in E1
2   2
Sol. D
AP = AQ = AM
Locus of M is a circle having PQ as its diameter
Hence, E1 : (x – 2)(x + 2) + (y – 7)(y + 5) = 0 and x  ±2
Locus of B(midpoint)
is a circle having RC as its diameter
E2 : x(x – 1) + (y – 1)2 = 0
Now, after checking the options, we get (D)

MATRIX
b1 
 
b
3. Let S be the set of all column matrices  2  such that b1, b2, b3  R and the system of equastions
b 
 3
(in real variables)
–x + 2y + 5z = b1
2x – 4y + 3z = b2
x – 2y + 2z = b3
has at least one solutions. Then, which of the following system (s) (in real variables) has (have)
b1 
 
b
at least one solutions for each  2   S ?
b 
 3
(A) x + 2y + 3z = b1, 4y + 5z = b2 and x + 2y + 6z = b3
(B) x + y + 3z = b1, 5x + 2y + 6z = b2 and – 2x – y – 3z = b3
(C) –x + 2y – 5z = b1, 2x – 4y + 10z = b2 and x – 2y + 5z = b3
(D) x + 2y + 5z = b1, 2x + 3z = b2 and x + 4y – 5z = b3
Sol. A,C,D
We find D = 0 & since no pair of planes are parallel, so there are infinite number of solutions.
Let P1 + P2 = P3
 P1 + 7P2 = 13P3
 b1 + 7b2 = 13b3
(A) D  0  unique solution for any b1, b2, b3
(B) D = 0 but P1 + 7P2  13P3
(C) D = 0 Also b2 = – 2b1, b3 = – b1
Satisfies b1 + 7b2 = 13b3 (Actually all three planes are co-incident)
(D) D  0
ELLIPSE
1
4. Consider two straight lines, each of which is tangent to both the circles x2 + y2 = and the
2
parabola y2 = 4x. Let these lines intersect at the point Q. consider the ellipse whose center is at
the origin O(0,0) and whose semi - major axis is OQ. If the length of the minor axis of this ellipse
is 2 , Then which of the following statment(s) is (are) TRUE ?
1
(A) For the ellipse, the eccentricity is and the length of the latus rectum is 1
2
1 1
(B) For the ellipse, the eccentricity is and the length of the latus rectum is
2 2
1 1
(C) The area of the region bouded by the ellipse between the lines x  and x = 1 is    2
2 4 2
1
(D) The area of the region bounded by the ellipse between the lines x = and x = 1 is
2

   2
16
Sol. A,C
1
Let equation of common tangent is y = mx +
m
1
00
m 1
 =  m4 + m2 – 2 = 0  m = ±1
1  m2 2
Equation of common tangents are y = x + 1 and y = – x – 1

Point Q is (–1,0)
x2 y2
 Equation of ellipse is  =1
1 1/2
1 1 2b2
(A) e = 1 = and LR = =1
2 2 a
(C)
1 1
1 x 1
2  . 1  x2 dx 2

1  x2  sin1 x 
Area 2 = 2 2
1/ 2  1 / 2
   1      2
= 2      = 2   =
 4  4 8   8 4  4 2
COMPLEX NO.
5. 
Let s,t, r be non - zero complex numbers and L be the set of solutions z = x + iy x, y  R,i  1 
of the equation sz + tz + r = 0, where z = x – iy. Then, which of the following statement (s) is
(are ) TRUE ?
(A) If L has exactly one element, then |s|  |t|
(B) If |s| = |t|, then L has infinitely many elements
(C) The number of elements in L  z : z  1  i  5 is at most 2
(D) If L has more than one element, then L has infinitely many elements
Sol. Given
sz  tz  r  0 ......(1)
on taking conjugate sz  tz  r  0 .....(2)

from (1) and (2) elliminating z

z s
2
 t
2
 = r t  rs
(A) = If |s|  |t| then z has unique value
(B) If |s| = |t| then r t  rs may or may not be zero so L may be empty set
(C) locus of z is noll set or singleton set or a line in all cases it will intersect given circle at most
two points.
(D) In this case locus of z is a line so L has infinite elements
DIFFERENTIABILITY
f  x  sin t  f  t  sin x
6. Let f : (0,)  R be a twice differentiable function such that lim = sin2x for all
t x tx
x  (0, ).
  
If f   =  , then which of the following statement (s) is (are) TRUE ?
6 12
 
(A) f   =
4 4 2
x4
(B) f(x) <  x2 for all x  (0,)
6
(C) There exists   (0,) such that f'() = 0
 
(D) f "    f   = 0
2
  2
Sol. B,C,D
f  x  sin t  f  t  sin x
lim   sin2 x
xx tx
by using L Hopital
f  x  cos t  f '  t  sin x
lim   sin2 x
xx 1
 f(x) cos x - f’(x) sin x = sin2x
 f '(x) sin x  f(x) cos x 
   1
 sin2 x 
 f x  
 d  sin x   1
 
f x
 xc
sin x
   
Put x = & f   
6 6
  12
 c=0  f(x) = –x sin x
    1
(A) f   
4 4 2
(B) f(x) = – x sin x
x3 x4
as sin x > x – , x sin x  x2 
6 6
x4
 f  x   x 2 x  0,  
6
(C) f’(x) = – sin x –x cos x
f’(x) =0  tan x = –x  there exist
  0,   for which f’(  ) = 0
(D) f’’ (x) = – 2 cos x + xsinx

     
f ''    , f      f ''    f   0
2 2 2 2 2 2

VALUE.
4 For each question, enter the correct numerical value (in decimal notation, truncated/
rounded.off to the second decimal place; e.g. 6.25, 7.00, .0.33, ..30, 30.27, .127.30) using
the mouse and the onscreen virtual numeric keypad in the place designated to enter the
answer.
DEF. INTIGRATION

2
1 3
7. The value of the integral  1
dx
is
0
 x  1 2 6 4
1  x  
Sol. 2
1 1
2 1  3  2 1  3  dx
 1/ 4
dx
  1/ 4
0
 x  1 1  x 
2 6
 0
 1  x  1  x
2
2 4

 12 
 1 
=  
dx  1  3 
0

1  x 
2
1  x  
put x = sin 
 6 
 cos d 
=  0 cos  1  sin   
1 3 
 
 
 6 
 1  sin  d 
=  0 cos2  
1 3  
 
 
 6 
6

 
=  0
2
sec d   tan  sec d  1  3
0
 
 
 
 
 6 6

tan  |  sec  |  1  3
= 0 0
 
 
1  2 
=   1
3  3 
=  3 1  3 1 
2
=  3 1 = 2
MATRIX
8. Let P be a matrix of order 3 × 3 such that all the entries in P are from the set {–1, 0 , 1}. Then,
the maximum possible value of the determinant of P is ........
Sol. 4
Set A = {-1,0,1}
for obtaining the determinant having maximum possible value
aii  min{1, 0,1}
aij  max{1, 0,1}
 1 1 1 
 
1 1 1 
Matrix p = 
 1 1 1
p  1 1  1   1  1  1 1  1
p 4
which is maximum possible value.
FUNCTION
9. Let X be a set with exactly 5 elements and Y be a set with exactly 7 elements. If  is the number
of one - one functions from X to Y and  is the number of onto functions from Y to X, then the
1
value of
5!
    is ..........
Sol. 119
n(X) =5
n(Y) =7
  Number of one-one function = 7 C5  5!
  Number of onto funtion Y to X
a1 b1
a2 b2
a7 b7
1,1,1,1,3 1,1,1,2,2
7! 7!
 5! 3
 5!
3! 4! 2!  3!
=  7

C3  3.7 C3 5!  4  7C3  5!

 4 7 C3 7 C5  4  35  21  119
5!
LIMIT
10. Let f : R  R be a differentiable function with f(0) = 0. If y = f(x) satisfies the differentiable
equation
dy f  x  is
= (2 + 5y)(5y – 2), then the value xlim
dx 
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Sol. 0.4
dy
 25y2  4
dx
dy
so,  dx
25y2  4
2
y
1 1 5 xc
 n
Integrating, 25 2 2
2 y
5 5
5y  2
 n  20  x  c 
5y  2
Now, c = 0 as f(0) = 0
5y  2
 e 
20x
Hence
5y  2
5f  x   2
 lim e
20x 
lim
x  5f  x   2 x 
Now, RHS =0  xlim


5f  x   2  0
2
 lim f(x) 
x  5
DIFFERENTIABILITY
11. Let f : R  R be a differentiable function wich f(0) = 1 and satisfying the equation
f(x + y) = f(x) f'(y) + f'(x)f(y) for all x, y  R Then, the value of loge(f(4)) is ......
Sol. 2
P(x,y) : f(x+y) = f(x) f’(y) + f’(x) f(y)  x,y  R
P(0,0) : f(0) = f(0) f’(0)+f’ (0) f(0)

 1= 2f’(0)
1
 f’(0) =
2
P(x,0) : f(x) = f(x). f’(0) + f’(x) . f(0)
1
 f(x) = f(x)  f '(x)
2
1
 f '(x)  f(x)
2
1
x
 f(x)  e2
 In (f(4))=2
3-D
12. Let P be a point int he first octant, whose image Q in the plane x + y = 3 ( that is, the line
segment PQ is perpendicualr to the plane x + y = 3 and the mid - point of PQ lies in the plane x
+ y = 3) lies on the z - axis. Let the distance of P from the x - axis be 5. If R is the imags of P in
the xy - plane, then the length of PR is ......
Sol. 8
Let
P  , ,  
Q 0, 0,   &
R  ,,   
   
Now, PQ || î  ˆj  î  ˆj || î  ˆj

Also, mid point of PQ lies on the plane
 
  3
2 2
    =6
 = 3
Now, distance of point P from X- axis is 2   2  5
 2   2  25
  2  16
as     3
as   4
Hence, PR = 2  =8
3-D
13. Consider the cube in the first octant with sides OP, OQ and OR of length 1, along the x-axis,
1 1 1
y - axis, and z- axis, respectively, where O(0,0,0) is the origin, Let S  , ,  be the centre of
2 2 2
the cube and T be the vertex of the cube opposite to the origin O such that S lies on the diagonal
           
OT. If p = SP , q = SQ , r = SR and t = ST , then the value  
alue of p  q  r  t is .....
Sol. (0.5)
T
S
O y
Q
P
x
   1 1 1 1 ˆ ˆ ˆ
p  SP   ,  ,   
2 2 2 2
i  jk  
   1 1 1 1 ˆ ˆ ˆ
q  SQ    , ,   
 2 2 2 2
i  j  k  
   1 1 1 1 ˆ ˆ ˆ
r  SR    ,  ,  
 2 2 2 2
i  j  k  
   1 1 1  1
t  ST   , ,  
2 2 2 2
ˆ
î  ˆj  k  
î ˆ
ˆj k î ˆj ˆ
k
    1 1
 
p  q   r  t  4 1  1  1  4  1  1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 ˆ
k 1
16

2î  2ˆj   2î  2ˆj  
2

2

P&C
2 2 2 2
14. Let X =  10
C1  + 2  10
C2  + 3  10
C3  + ..... 10  10
C10  .
1
where 10
Cr, r {1,2,.....10} denote binomial coefficient. Then, the value of X is ____
1430
Sol. (646)
n
n 2
x  r.( C ) ;n  10
r 0
r
n
x  n. (n Cr )n1Cr 1
r 0
n
x  n. n Cnr .n1Cr 1
r 1
x  10.19 C9
x 1 19
 . C9
1430 143
x  n.2n1 Cn1;n  10
= 646

• Each question has TWO (02) matching lists: LIST.I and LIST.II.
• FOUR options are given representing matching of elements from LIST.I and LIST.II. ONLY
ONE of these four options corresponds to a correct matching.
FUNCTION
 x     x  
15. Let E1 = x  R : x  1 and  0 and E = x  E1 : sin1  loge    is real number  .
 x 1  2
   x  1  
  
(Here, the inverse trigonometric function sin–1x assumes values in  ,  )
 2 2
 x 
Let f : E1  R be the function defined by f(x) = loge  
 x  1
  x 
and g : E2  R be the function defined by g(x) = sin1  loge   .
  x  1
List - I List - II
 1   e 
P. The range of f is 1.  , 1  e    e  1 ,  
   
Q. The range of g contains 2. (0,1)
 1 1
R. The domain of f contains 3.  2 , 2 
 
S. The domain of g is 4.  , 0   0,  

 e 
5.  , e  1 
 
1 e 
6.  , 0    ,
 2 e  1 
The correct option is :
(A) P  4; Q  2; R  1; S  1
(B) P  3; Q  3; R  6; S  5
(C) P  4; Q  2; R  1; S  6
(D) P  4; Q  3; R  6; S  5
Sol. (A)
x
E1 : 0
x 1
+
0 1
 E1 : x   , 0   1,  
 x 
E2: 1  n   1
 x  1
1  x 
 e
e  x  1 
x 1
Now  0
x 1 e

 e  1 x  1  0
e  x  1
+
-1/(e-1) 1
 1 
 x   ,   1,  
 1  e
x
also  e  0
x 1
 e  1 x  e  0
x 1
+
1 e/(e-1)
 e 
 x   ,1   , 
 e  1 
 1   e 
So E2 :  ,   e  1 , 
 1  e   
x
as Range of is R +- {1}
x 1
 Range of f is R - {0} or  , 0   0,  
        
Range of g is  ,  \{0} or   , 0    0, 
 2 2  2   2
Now P  4, Q  2, R  1, S  1
Hence A is correct
P&C
16. In a high school, a commintee has to be formed from a group of 6 boys M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, M6 and
5 girls G1, G2, G3, G4, G5.
(i) Let 1 be the total number of ways in which of the commitee can be formed such that the
commitee has 5 members, having exactly 3 boys and 2 girls.
(ii) Let 2 be the total number of ways in which the commitee can be formed such that the
committee has at least 2 members, and having an equal number of bosy and girls.
(iii) Let 3 be the total number of ways in wihc the committee can be formed such that the
commitee has 5 members, at least 2 of them being girls.
(iv) Let 4 be the total number of ways in which the committee can be formed such that the
committee has 4 members, having at least 2 girls and such that both M1 and G1 are NOT in the
committee together.
List - I List - II
P. The value of 1 is 1. 136
Q. The value of 2 is 2. 189
R. The value of 3 is 3. 192
S. The value of 4 is 4. 200
5. 381
6. 461

(A) P  4 ; Q  6; R  2; S  1
(B) P  1 ; Q  4; R  2; S  3
(C) P  4 ; Q  6; R  5; S  2
(D) P  4 ; Q  2; R  3; S  1
Sol. (C)
 6  5 
(1) 1       200
3   2
So P  4
(2)
 6   5   6   5   6   5   6  5   6   5 
2                         
1   1   2   2   3   3   4   4   5   5 
11
   1
5 
= 46!
So Q  6
 5   6  5   6  5   6   5   6 
(3) 3                    
 2   3   3   2   4  1   5   0 
 11   5   6   5   6 
=          
 5   0   5  1   4 
= 381
So R  5
 5   6   4  5   5   6   4  1  5 
(4) 2                       
 2   2  1  1   3  1   2   1   4 
= 189
= So S  2
HYPERBOLA
x2 y2
17. Let H :   1 , where a > b > 0, be a hyperbola in xy - plane whose conjugate axis LM
2
a b2
subtends an angle of 60° at one of its vertices N. Let the area of the trignale LMN be 4 3 .
List - I List - II
P. The length of the conjugate axis of H is 1. 8
4
Q. The eccentricity of H is 2.
3
2
R. The distance between the foci of H is 3.
3
S. The length of the latus rectum of H is 4. 4

(A) P  4; Q  2 ; R  1; S  3
(B) P  4; Q  3 ; R  1; S  2
(C) P  4; Q  1 ; R  3; S  2
(D) P  3; Q  4 ; R  2; S  1
Sol. (B)
L
300
30 0
O a 300 N
b
tan 300 =
a ab 3
1
Now area of LMN  .2b.b 3  4 3  3b2
2
b2 2
 b=2 & a = 2 3  e  1

a2 3
P. Length of conjugate axis = 2b = 4
So P  4
2
Q. Eccentricity e 
3
So Q  3
R. Distance between foci = 2 ae
 2 

2 2 3  
 3
8
So R  1
2
2b2 2 2  4
S. Length of latus rectum =  
a 2 3 3
So S  2
DIFFERENTIABILITY
  
     1, e2  2 
18. Let f1 : R  R, f2 :  ,   R; f3 : 
 2 2   R and f4 : R  R be functions defined by
 
  x2 
(i) f1(x) = sin  1  e 
 
 sin x
 if x  0
1
(ii) f2(x) =  tan x , where the inverse trigonometric function tan–1x assumes values in
 1 if x  0

  
 2 ,2,
 
(iii) f3(x) = [sin(loge(x +2))], where for t  R, [t] denotes the greates integer less than or equal
to t,
 2 1
 x sin   if x  0
(iv) f4(x) =  x
 0 if x  0

List - I List - II
P. The function f1 is 1. NOT continuous at x = 0
Q. The function f2 is 2. Continuous at x = 0 and NOT differentiable at
x=0
R. The function f3 is 3. differentiable at x = 0 and its derivative is NOT
continuous at x = 0
S. The function f4 is 4. differentiable at x = 0 and its derivative is
continuous at x = 0

(A) P  2, Q  3; R  1; S  4
(A) P  4, Q  1; R  2; S  3
(A) P  4, Q  2; R  1; S  3
(A) P  2, Q  1; R  4; S  3
Sol. (D)
2
(i) f(x)  sin 1  e x
1
f1' (x)  cos 1  e x .
2
2 1  ex
2
0  e  x2
.  2x  
at x=0 f1' (x) does not exist
So. P  2
 sin x
 ,x  0
f (x)   tan1 x
(ii) 2
0 x=0

sinx x
lim 1
x0 x tan1 x
 f2  x  does not continuous at x = 0
so Q  1
(iii) f3  x   sin n  x  2    0
1< x + 2 < e / 2

 0< n x  2  
2
 0<sin( n(x  2))  1

 f3  x   0
So R  4
 2 1
x sin , x0
(iv)  f4  x    x
 0 , x=0

So S  3
[PHYSICS]-Code-4
SECTION - 1
1. A block M hangs vertically at the bottom end of a uniform rope of constant mass per unit length.
The top end of the rope is attached to a fixed rigid support at O. A transverse wave pulse (Pulse 1)
of wavelength 0 is produced at point A (Pulse 2) without disturbing the position of M it takes time
TAO to reach point O. Which of the following options is/are correct?
(A) The velocities of the two pulses (Pulse 1 and Pulse 2) are the same
at the midpoint of rope
(B) The velocities of any pulse along the rope is independent of its
frequency and wavelength
(C) The wavelength of Pulse 1 becomes longer when it reaches point A

(D) The time TAO = TOA
1. , d l eku j S
f[ kd ?kur koky s(uniform mass per unit length) Å/okZ /kj Mksj dsfupy sfl j si j , d xq VdkM y Vdkgq vk
gSA Mksj dk nwl j k fl j k n`<+vk/kkj (fca
nqO) l sl a y Xu gSAr j a
x&nS/; Z0 dhvuq i zLFk r j a
x Li a
n (Li a
n 1, Pulse 1) fcanqO
i j mRiUu dhxbZgS A ; sr j a
x Li an fca
nqO l sfca nqA r d TOA l e; esai gq ¡pr hgSA xq VdsM dksfcuk fo{kksfHkr fd; sgq , fca
nq
A i j fuekZ
. k dhxbZr j a x&nS /; Z0 dhvuq i zLFk r j a
x Li a
n (Li a
n 2, pulse 2), fca nqA l sfca nqO r d TAO l e; esai gq
¡pr hgS
A
fuEu esal sdkS u l k(l s) dFku l ghgS @gSa
\
(A) Mksj dse/; fca
nqi j Li a
n 1 (pulse 1) , oaLi a
n 2 (pulse 2) dk osx l eku gS
A
(B) Mksj dsvuq
fn' k i zsf"kr fdl hHkhLi a
n dk osx ml dh vkof̀Ùk , oar j a
x nS
/; Zi j fuHkZ
j ughagS
A
(C) Li a
n 1 (pulse 1) dhr j a
x&nS
/; Zfca
nqA r d i gq
¡pusesay Echgkst k, xhA
(D) l e; TAO = TOA
1. B,D
A
T (M  μx)g
vA = = ;  = mass per unit length
 μg x
 v depends on x m
hence, A,D & B is theoretical
2. A circular insulated copper wire loop is twisted to form two loops of area A and 2A as shown in the
figure. At the point of crossing the wires remain electrically insulated from each other. The entire

loop lies in the plane (of the paper). A uniform magnetic field B points into the plane of the
paper. At t = 0, the loop starts rotating about the common diameter as axis with a constant
angular velocity  in the magnetic field. Which of the following options is/are correct?
(A) The net emf induced due to both the loops is proportional to
cos t
(B) The rate of change of the flux is maximum when the plane of the
loops is perpendicular to plane of the paper
(C) The amplitude of the maximum net emf induced due to both the
loops is equal to the amplitude of maximum emf induced in the
smaller loop alone
(D) The emf induced in the loop is proportional to the sum of the
areas of the two loops
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) Examination (2017) (Code - 4) (Page # 3)
2. , d xksy kdkj fo| q

r &j ks/khr kezr kj (insulated copper wire) dksA , oa2A oky snks{ks=kQy ksadsoy ; ksaesaO ; kofr Z
r fd; k
x; kgS
A r kj ksadsvfr Øe.kfca nqfo| qr j ks/khj gr sgS(t S
l kfp=kesan' kkZ
; kx; kgS)A l a
iw
. kZoy ; dkxt dsr y esafLFkr gS A dkxt

dsr y dsvfHky Ecor ~fLFkj r Fkk , d l eku pq Ecdh; {ks=k B l oZ
=k mi fLFkr gS
A oy ; vi usl keq nkf; d O
; kl ksal scusv{k ds
i fj r %l e; t = 0 l s dks.kh; osx (angular velocity) l s?kw
euk' kq
: dj r kgS
A fuEu esal sdkS
u l k(l s) dFku l ghgS
@gS
a
\
(A) nksuksaoy ; ksal smRiUu dq
y i zsf"kr fo| q
r okgd cy cos t l sl ekuq
i kr h gS
A
(B) t c oy ; ksadkr y dkxt dsr y l svfHky a
c fn' kkesagksrkgSr c vfHkokg dsi fj or Z
u
dhnj vf/kdr e gksrhgS
A
(C) nksuksaoy ; ksal smRiUu vf/kdr e dq
y i zsf"kr fo| q
r okgd cy dk vk; ke] NksVsoy ;
esamRiUu vf/kdr e i zsf"kr fo| q
r okgd cy dsvk; ke dscj kcj gksxkA
(D) i zsf"kr fo| q
r okgd cy oy ; ksads{ks=kQy ksads; ksx dsl ekuq
i kfr d gS
A
2. B,C
induced current is both loops in opposite directions;
enet = e2 – e1
2 = 2BA cost 1
1 = BA cost
d2 2
e2 = – = 2BA sint
dt
e1 = BA sint
enet = e2 – e1 = BA sint
3. A block of mass M has a circular cut with a frictionless surface as shown. The block rests on the
horizontal frictionless surface of a fixed table. Initially the right edge of the block is at x = 0, in
a co-ordinate system fixed to the table. A point mass m is released from rest at the topmost point
of the path as shown and it slides down. When the mass loses contact with the block, its position
is x and the velocity is v. At that instant, which of the following options is/are correct?
2gR
(A) The velocity of the point mass m is : v 
m
1
M
mR
(B) The x component of displacement of the center of mass of the block M is ; 
Mm
mR
(C) The position of the point mass is : x =  2
Mm
m
(D) The velocity of the block M is : V   2gR
M
3. oÙ̀kkdkj pki oky s, d xq

VdsdknzO ; eku M gSA ; sxq
Vdk, d ?k"kZ. kj fgr est i j fLFkr gS Aest dsl ki s{; (in a coordinate
system fixed to the table) xq Vdsdk nkfguk dksj (right edge) x = 0 i j fLFkr gS A nzO
; eku m oky s, d fca nqd.k
(point mass) dksoÙ̀kkdkj pki dsmPpr e fca nql sfoj kekoLFkk l sNksM+k t kr k (released from rest) gS A ; sfcanqd.k
oÙ̀kkdkj i Fk i j uhpsdhvksj l j dr k gS
A t c fcanqd.k xqVdsl sl a i dZfoghu gkst kr k gS ] r c ml dhr kR{kf.kd fLFkfr x vkS
j
xfr v gS A fuEu esal sdkS
u l k (l s) dFku l ghgS @gS
a
\
2gR
(A) fca
nqd.k (m) dk osx v  gS
A
m
1
M
mR
(B) xq
Vds(M) dsl a nzdsfoLFkki u dk x ?kVd (x co-ordinate) 
gfr dsa gS
a
Mm
mR
(C) nqd.k (m) dk LFkku x =  2
fca gS
A
Mm
m
(D) Vds(M) dk osx V  
xq 2gR gS
a
A
M
3. A,B
Let wedge shifts by x.
R
m
v M v
(0,0)
x
mR
xCM = 0  M (–x) + m (R – x) = 0  x =
mM
Then mechanical energy conservation
1 1
mv
v2 + Mv2 = mgR, R = h
2 2
& momentum conservation
mv = MV
2gR
v= m
1
M
4. A flat plate is moving normal to its plane through a gas under the action of a constant force F. The
gas is kept at a very low pressure. The speed of the plate v is much less than the average speed
u of the gas molecules. Which of the following options is/are true?
(A) The pressure difference between the leading and trailing faces of the plate is proportional to uv
(B) At a later time the external force F balances the resistive force
(C) The resistive force experienced by the plate is proportional to v
(D) The plate will continue to move with constant non-zero acceleration, at all times
4. , d l i kV IysV (flat plate) vYi ncko dsxS l (gas at low pressure) esavi usr y dhvfHkya c fn' kk esa
] cká cy F ds
i zHkko esavxzl fj r gSA Iy sV dhxfr v, xS l v.kq v ksadsvkSl r xfr u l scgq r de gS
A fuEu esal sdkS
u l k (l s) dFku l ghgS
@gS
a
\
(A) i z fr xkeh, oavuq xkehi `"B dsncko dk va r j uv dsl ekuq i kr h gS
A
(B) dq N l e; dsckn cká cy F vkS j i zfr j ks/k cy l arqfy r gkst k, xsa
A
(C) Iy s V } kj k vuq Hko gqv k i zfr j ks/kd cy v dsl ekuq i kr h gS
A
(D) Iy s V l oZ nk ' kq
U; srj fLFkj Roj .k (constant non-zero acceleration) l spy r h j gsxhA
4. A,B,C
v v
Leading
face
v'
u
Before After
Collision Collision
v ' v
1  v '  u  2v
vu
 p = m v' – m(–u) = mv' + mu
= 2m (u + v)
 FL  A (u + v)2
Rear
v v
face
u
v'
Before After
Collision Collision
v  v'
1=  v' = 2v - u
uv
 P = mv' – mu = 2m (v-u)
 FR  A (v-u)2
 Force difference = FL – FR  uv
 FRes = k u v
dv dv
F – FRes = (M)  F – k u v = M
Fres dt dt
5. In the circuit shown, L = 1 H, C = 1 F and R = 1 k. They are connected in series with an a.c.
source V = V0 sin t as shown. Which of the following options is/are correct?
(A) The current will be in phase with the voltage if = 104 rad.s–1
(B) At  >> 106 rad.s–1, the circuit behaves like a capacitor
(C) The frequency at which the current will be in phase with the voltage is independent of R
(D) At  ~ 0 the current flowing through the circuit becomes nearly zero.
5. fp=k esafn[ kk; sx, i fj i Fk esaL = 1 H, C = 1 F r Fkk R = 1 k gS
A , d i fj or hZoksYVr k (V = V0 sin t) L=kksr l s
Js.khl aca
/k gSA fuEu esal sdkS u l k (l s) dFku l ghgS
@gS
a
\
(A) t c = 104 rad.s–1 gksxhr c fo| q r /kkj k (electric current) oksYVr k dhl edy k esagksxhA
(B) t c  >> 106 rad.s–1, i fj i Fk l a /kkfj =k (capacitor) dhr j g O
; ogkj dj r k gS
A
(C) t c fo| q
r /kkj k oksYVr k dhl edy k esagksxhr ksog vkofr ZR i j fuHkZj ughadj sxhA
(D) t c  ~ 0 gks xhr c i fj i Fk esacgr h /kkj k ' kw
U; dsfudV gksxhA
5. C,D
1
0   106
LC
 A & B incorrect
C & D correct – Theoretical
6. For an isosceles prism of angle A and refractive index , it is found that the angle of minimum
deviation m = A. Which of the following options is/are correct?
(A) At minimum deviation, the incident angle i1 and the refracting angle r1 at the first refracting
surface are related by r1 = (i1/2)
1 
(B) For this prism, the refractive index  and the angle of prism A are related as A  cos1  
2 2
(C) For the angle of incidence i1 = A, the ray inside the prism is parallel to the base of the prism
(D) For this prism, the emergent ray at the second surface will be tangential to the surface when
1
 2 A

the angle of incidence at the first surface is i1  sin sin A 4 cos  1  cos A 
 2 
6. , d l ef} ckgqfi zTe dk fi zTe dks.k A gS(isosceles prism of angle A)A bl fi zTe dk vi or Z uka
d  gSA bl fi zTe dk
U; w
ur e fopy u dks.k (angle of minimum deviation)m = A gS A fuEu esal sdksS
u l k (l s) dFku l ghgS@gS
a\
(A) U; w
ur e fopy u esavki fr r dks.k i1 , oai zFke vi or Z
d r y dsvi or Z
d dks.k r1 = (i1/2) } kj k l a
ca
f/kr gS
A
1 
(B) fi zTe dk vi or Z d  , oafi zTe dks.k (A), A 
uka cos1   } kj k l a
ca
f/kr gS
A
2 2
(C) t c fi zTe dk vki r u dks.k i1 = A gSr c fi zTe dsHkhr j i zd k' k fdj .k fi zTe dsvk/kkj dsl ekukUr j gksxhA
1
 2 A

(D) t c i gy sr y i j vki r u dks.k i1  sin sin A 4 cos  1  cos A  gS
] r c bl fi zTe dsfy , f} r h; r y
 2 
l sfuxZ
r fdj .k fi zTe dsi `"B l sLi ' khZ
; gksxhA (tangential to the emergent surface)
6. A,C,D
At minimum deviation
r1 = r2 = A/2 & i = e, m = A e
i
sm = i + e – A = A  i = A = e r1 r2
  A  m  
 sin  sin A

Also,  =   2  A = 2 cos A
A  = sin 2
 sin  2
 2 
sin i =  sin r1 &  sin r2 = sin 90°
1 i e=90°
1 r1 r 2
 sin r2 = = 2 cos A & cos r2 = 2
1  sin r2

2
A
4 cos2 1
2
= A
2 cos
2
A A
Then, sin i =  sin (A – r2) = 2 cos [sin A cos r2 – cos A sin r2] = sin A 4 cos2  1 – cos A
2 2
7. A human body has a surface area of approximately 1 m2. The normal body temperature is 10 K
above the surrounding room temperature T0. Take the room temperature to be T0 = 300 K. For T0
= 300 K, the value of T04 = 460 Wm–2 (where  is the Stefan-Boltzmann constant). Which of the
following options is/are correct?
(A) If the surrounding temperature reduces by a small amount t0 << T0, then to maintain the
same body temperature the same (living) human being needs-to radiate W = 4T03T0 more
energy per unit time
(B) Reducing the exposed surface area of the body (e.g. by curling up) allows humans to main-
tain the same body temperature while reducing the energy lost by radiation
(C) If the body temperature rises significantly then the peak in the spectrum of electromagnetic
radiation emitted by the body would shift to longer wavelengths
(D) The amount of energy radiated by the body in 1 second is close to 60 Joules
7. ekuoh; i `"Bh; {ks=kQy y xHkx 1 m2 gksrk gS A ekuo ' kj hj dk r ki eku i fj os'k dsr ki eku l s10 K vf/kd gksrk gS A i fj os'k
r ki eku T0 = 300 K gS ] bl i fj os'k r ki eku dsfy , T04 = 460 Wm–2 gS A t gk¡  LVhQku&cksYV~ t eku fu; r kad
(Stefan-Boltzmann constant) gS A fuEu esal sdkS u l k (l s) dFku l gh gS @gSa
\
(A) i fj os ' k r ki eku vxj T0 l sdVr k gS (t0 << T0) r c ekuo ds' kj hj dksr ki eku dk vuq j {k.k dj usdsfy ,
W = 4T03T0 vf/kd Åt kZfofdfj r dj uh i M+ r hgS
A
(B) i `"Bh; {ks =kQy ?kVkus(t S l s%fl dq
M+usl s) l sekuo vi us' kj hj l sfofdfj r Åt kZ?kVkr sgS, oavi us' kj hj dk r ki eku
vuq j f{kr dj r sgS A
(C) ekuoh; ' kj hj dsr ki eku es avxj l kFkZ
d of̀) gksr c i zd k' kpq
Ecdh; fofdj .kLi S DVªe dhf' k[ kj r j a
x nS/; Z(peak in the
electromagnetic spectrum) nh?kZr j a x&nS /; Zdhvksj foLFkkfi r gksrhgS A
(D) ekuoh; ' kj hj l s1 l s d s.M esafudVr e fofdj r Åt kZ60 t w y (60 Joules) gS A
7. A,B,D
A = 1 m2
T04 = 460  4eA T03 ×(T)
SECTION - 2
0.1
8. A drop of liquid of radius R = 10-2 m having surface tension S  Nm1 divides itself into K
4
identical drops. In this process the total change in the surface energy U = 10-3J. If K = 10 then
the value of  is
0.1
8. i `"B r uko (surface tension) S  Nm1 dsæo ds, d cw
Un dh f=kT; k R=10-2 m gS
] ft l sK l e: i cw
Unksaesa
4
foHkkft r fd; k x; k gS
A i `"B&Åt kZdk cny ko U = 10-3J gS
A ; fn K = 10 gSr c  dk eku gksxk &
Sol. 6
0.1
s R = 10-2
4
4 4 106
(102 )3  k  r3  K  3
3 3 r
102
r  102  104 k1 / 3  1
k1 / 3
101 = k1 /3  K = (101)3  10 = (10)6   = 6
9. A monochromatic light is travelling in a medium of refractive index n = 1.6. It enters a stack of
glass layers from the bottom side at an angle  = 30°. The interfaces of the glass layers are
parallel to each other. The refractive indices of different glass layers are monotonically decreas-
ing as nm = n – mn, where nm is the refractive index of the mth slab and n = 0.1 (see the
figure). The ray is refracted out parallel to the interface between the (m–1)th and mth slabs from
the right side of the stack. What is the value of m?
, do.khZi zd k' k (monochromatic light) vi or Z uka
d n = 1.6 oky sek/; e esai zxkehgS A ; g i zd k' k dk¡p dhphr h(stack
of glass layers) i j fupy sl r g l s = 30° dks . k i j vki fr r gksrk gS
A (t S
l k fd fp=k esan' kkZ
; k x; k gS
A) dk¡pksadsLr j
i j Li j l ekUr j gS
A dk¡p dsphr hdsvi or Z uka
d , dfn"V nm = n – mn, Øe l s?kV j gsgS A ; gk¡m Lr j dkvi or Z uka
d nm
gSvkS j n = 0.1 gS A i zd k' k fdj .k (m–1) , oam Lr j dsi `"Br y l sl ekUr j fn' kk esankabZvkS j l sckgj fudy r k gS Ar c
m dk eku gks xk?
m
m-1
3
2
1
Sol. 8
n  (m  1)n
sin C   n sin  = (n–mn) sin 90°
n  mn
1
1.6× = (1.6–m(0.1))1
2
0.8 = 1.6 – 0.1m 0.1 m = 0.8 m = 8
10. 131
I is an isotope of Iodine that  decays to an isotope of Xenon with a half-life of 8 days. A small
amount of a serum labelled with 131I is injected into the blood of a person. The activity of the
amount of 131I injected was 2.4×105 Becquerel (Bq). It is known that the injected serum will get
distributed uniformly in the blood stream in less than half an hour. After 11.5 hours, 2.5 ml of
blood is drawn from the person's body, and gives an activity of 115 Bq. The total volume of blood
in the person's body, in liters is approximately (you may use ex  1 + x for |x| << 1 and In 2  0.7).
vk; ksMhu dk l eLFkkfud (isotope)131I ft l dhv/kZ&vk; q8 fnu gS] -{k; dsdkj .k t sukW u (Xenon) dsl eLFkkfud esa
{kf; r gksrk gS
A vYi ek=kk dk I fpfUgr (labelled) l hje (serum) ekuo ' kj hj esavUr %
131
f{kIr (inject) fd; k x; k] ft l
ek=kk dhvW fDVor k (activity) 2.4×105 csd sjy (Becquerel) gS A ; g l hje : f/kj /kkj k esavk/ks?k.Vsesa, dl eku for fj r
gksrk gSA vxj 11.5 ?k.Vsckn, 2.5 ml j Dr 115 cS d sjy dhvW fDVor k n' kkZ
r k gS] r c ekuo ' kj hj esaj Dr vk; r u (y hVj esa
)
gSA (vki ex  1 + x for |x| << 1 , oaIn 2  0.7 dk mi ; ksx dj l dr sgS A).
Sol. 5
A = A0e–t
0.7  11.5  0.7  11.5 
115 2.4  105  
8  24 
  
8  24 
 115V
3
 e  e 
2.5  10 V 2.4  2.5  102
e–0.0419 = 19.167×10-2
0.95  100
1 – 0.0419 = 19.167×10-2 V  V = 5 Litre
19.167
11. An electron in a hydrogen atom undergoes a transition from an orbit with quantum number ni to
another with quantum number nf. Vi and Vf are respectively the initial and final potential energies
Vi
of the electron. If V  6.25, then the smallest possible nf is
f
, d gkbMªkst u i j ek.kqdk , d by sDVªkW

u ni Doka
Ve l a
[ ; k (quantum number) oky sd{k l snf Doka
Ve l a
[ ; k (quantum
i V
number) dsd{k esai zos'k dj r k gS
A Vi r Fkk Vf i zkFkfed , oavfUr e fLFkfr t Åt kZ A ; fn V  6.25, r c nf dhU; w
, gS ur e
f
la
Hkkohl a
[ ; k (smallest possible nf) gS A
Sol. 5
Vi Z2
 6.25  13.6
Vf n2
n2f n
 6.25  f  2.5  Min. value of nf = 5
n2i ni
12. A stationary source emits the sound of frequency f0 = 492 Hz. The sound is reflected by a large
car approaching the source with a speed of 2 ms–1. The reflected signal is received by the source
and superposed with the original. What will be the beat frequency of the resulting signal in Hz?
(Given that the speed of sound in air is 330 ms–1 and the car reflects the sound at the frequency
it has received)
12. , d fLFkj L=kksr f0 = 492 Hz dh/ofu mRl ft Z r dj r k gS
A 2 ms–1 dsxfr l svi xeuhdkj l s; g /ofu i j kofr Z r gksrhgS
A
/ofu L=kksr i j kofr Z
r la
d sr dksi zkIr dj dsew
y la
d sr i j v/; kj ksfi r (superpose) dj r k gS
A r c i fj .kkeh fl Xuy dh
foLi a
n&vkof̀Ùk (beat frequency) gS&
(/ofu dh xfr 330 ms–1 gS A dkj /ofu dksml dhi zkIr gq
bZvkof̀Rr i j i j kofr Z
r dj r hgS
)
Sol. 6
v0=2m/s=vc
f0 = 492 Hz
f0=492 Hz
S
SC
 v  v0 
f = f0  v 
 
Now, C  S
 v  v0   v  v0   v  0 
f' = f  v  v   f' = f0    
 s   v   v  v0 
 330  2   330 
f' = 492  330   330  2  = 498 Hz
   
Beat frequency = 498 – 492 = 6 Hz
SECTION-3
Paragraph-I
A charged particle (electron or proton) is introduced at the origin (x = 0, y = 0, z = 0) with a
  
given initial velocity  . A uniform electric field E and a uniform magnetic field B exist every--
  
where. The velocity  , electric field E and magnetic field B are given in columns 1,2 and 3
respectively. The quantities E0, B0 are positive in magnitude.

, d pkt Z
;q
Dr d.k (by sDVªkW fHkd xfr  l sew
u ; k i zksVksu) vkj a y fca
nq(x = 0, y = 0, z = 0) i j i zLr q
r (introduced)
  
gksrkgS
A fLFkj r Fkk, dl eku fo| q
r {ks=k E , oapq
Ecdh; {ks=k B l oZ Ad.kdhxfr  , fo| q
=kmi fLFkr gS r {ks=k E r Fkkpq
Ecdh;

{ks=k B fuEu dkW
y eksa1,2 , oa3 Øe' k%n' kkZ
; sx; sgS
A E0, B0 dseku /kukRed gS
A
Column-1 Column-2 Column - 3
 E0  
(I) Electron with   2 B x̂ (i) E  E0ẑ (P) B  B0x̂
0
 E0  
(II) Electron with   B ŷ (ii) E  E0ŷ (Q) B  B0x̂
0
  
(III) Proton with   0 (iii) E  E0x̂ (R) B  B0ŷ
 E0  
(IV) Proton with   2 B x̂ (iv) E  E0x̂ (S) B  B0ẑ
0
dkW
y e-1 dkW
y e-2 dkW
y e- 3
 0E  
(I) u   2 B x̂ l s
by sDVªkW (i) E  E0ẑ (P) B  B0x̂
0
 0 E  
(II) u   B ŷ l s
by sDVªkW (ii) E  E0ŷ (Q) B  B0x̂
0
 
(III) i zksVksu   0 l s (iii) E  E0x̂ (R) B  B0ŷ
 E0  
(IV) i zksVksu   2 B x̂ l s (iv) E  E0x̂ (S) B  B0ẑ
0
13. In which case will the particle move in a straight line with constant velocity ?
(A) (IV) (i) (S) (B) (III) (ii) (R) (C) (II) (iii) (S) (D) (III) (iii) (P)
13. fdl fLFkfr esad.k vpy xfr l sl h/kk j s[kk esapy u dj r k gS\
(A) (IV) (i) (S) (B) (III) (ii) (R) (C) (II) (iii) (S) (D) (III) (iii) (P)
Sol. C
 E0  
Electron (II) v  B ŷ (III) E  E0x̂ (S) B  B0ẑ
0
Electric force on electron is along +x-axis FE = –e (E0 x̂) = eE0 x̂ & magnetic force on electron,
 
FM = –e (v  B)
 E0 
= – e  B  B0 (ŷ  ẑ) = – eE0 x̂
 0
14. In which case will the particle describe a helical path with axis along the positive z-direction ?
(A) (IV) (i) (S) (B) (II) (ii) (R) (C) (III) (iii) (P) (D) (IV) (ii) (R)
14. fdl fLFkfr esad.k +z-v{k vuq
fn' k dq
. Mfy uhi Fk (helical path along positive z-axis) dk vuq
l j .k dj sxk \
(A) (IV) (i) (S) (B) (II) (ii) (R) (C) (III) (iii) (P) (D) (IV) (ii) (R)
Sol. A
 E0  
(IV) Proton v  2 B x̂ (i) E  E0ẑ (S) B  B0ẑ
0
 
FE  eE  eE0ẑ
    2E0 
& FM = e(v  B) = e  B  B0 (x̂  ẑ)
 0 
Initial magnetic force = –2eE0 ĵ

15. In which case would the particle move in a straight line along the negative direction of y-axis
(i.e., move along - ŷ ) ?
(A) (III) (ii) (R) (B) (IV) (ii) (S) (C) (III) (ii) (P) (D) (II) (iii) (Q)
15. fdl fLFkfr esad.k l h/khj s[kk esa_ .kkRed y-v{k (negative y-axis) dhfn' kk esapy sxk \
(A) (III) (ii) (R) (B) (IV) (ii) (S) (C) (III) (ii) (P) (D) (II) (iii) (Q)
Sol. A
Electric force along -y aixs
& magnetic force is zero.
Initial value = 0. So particle will move along -y-axis
Paragraph - II
An ideal gas is undergoing a cyclic thermodynamic process in different ways as shown in the
corresponding P - V diagrams in column 3 of the table. Consider only the path from state 1 to
state 2. W denotes the corresponding work done on the system. The equations and plots in the
table have standard notations as used in thermodynamic processes. Here  is the ratio of heat
capacities at constant pressure and constant volume. The number of moles in the gas is n.
, d vkn' kZxS
l (ideal gas) fofHkUu pØh; m"ei kfr d i zØeksl sxq t j r k gS
A ; g fuEu dkW
y e 3 esaP - V vkj s[k } kj k n' kkZ
;k
x; k gS
A dsoy fLFkfr 1 l sfLFkfr 2 t kusoky si Fk dhvksj /; kj nsa
A bl i Fki j fudk; i j gqv k dk; ZW gS(work done on
the system)A ; gk¡ fu; r nkc , oafu; r vk; r u m"ek&/kkfj r kvksdkvuq i kr gS(ratio of the heat capacities)AxS l
dseksy ks(moles) dhl a [ ; k n gS
A
column-1 column-2 column- 3
P
1 2
1
(I) W12 =
 1
(P2V2 – P1V2) (i) l er ki h; (Isothermal) (P)
v
P
1
(II) W12 = –PV2 + PV1 (ii) l evk; r fud (Isochoric) (Q)

2
v
P 1
2
(III) W12 = 0 (iii) l enkch; (Isobaric) (R)
v
P
1
 V2 
(IV) W12 = –nRT ln  V  (iv) : /kks"e (Adiabatic) (S) 2
 1
v
16. Which of the following options is the only correct representation of a process in which U = Q – PV ?
(A) (II) (iii) (P) (B) (II) (iii) (S) (C) (III) (iii) (P) (D) (III) (iv) (R)
16. fuEu fn, fodYi ksesadkS
ul k l a
; kst u U = Q – PV i zfØ; k dk vdsy sl gh i zfr fuf/kRo dj r k gS?
(A) (II) (iii) (P) (B) (II) (iii) (S) (C) (III) (iii) (P) (D) (III) (iv) (R)
Sol. A
17. Which one of the following options is the correct combination ?

(A) (II) (iv) (P) (B) (IV) (ii) (S) (C) (II) (iv) (R) (D) (III) (ii) (S)
17. fuEu fodYi ksesadkS
ul k l a
; kst u l ghgS\
(A) (II) (iv) (P) (B) (IV) (ii) (S) (C) (II) (iv) (R) (D) (III) (ii) (S)
Sol. D
18. Which one of the following options correctly represents a thermodynamic process that is used as
a correction in the determination of the speed of sound in an ideal gas ?
(A) (III) (iv) (R) (B) (I) (ii) (Q) (C) (IV) (ii) (R) (D) (I) (iv) (Q)
18. fuEu fod Yi ksesal sdkS
ul k l a
; kst u vkn' kZxsl esa/ofu d h xfr dheki dsl a
' kks/ku esai z; q
Dr Å"ekxfr d i zfØ; k d ksl gh
n' kkZ
r k gS\
(A) (III) (iv) (R) (B) (I) (ii) (Q) (C) (IV) (ii) (R) (D) (I) (iv) (Q)
Sol. D
[CHEMISTRY]
19. An ideal gas is expanded from (p1,V1, T1) to (p2, V2, T2) under different conditions. The correct
statement (s) among the following is (are)
(A) The work done by the gas is less when it is expanded reversibly from V1 to V2 under adiabatic
conditions as compared to that when expanded reversibly from V1 to V2under isothermal conditions
(B) The change in internal energy of the gas is (i) zero, if it is expanded reversibly with T1 = T2,
and (ii) positive, if it is expanded reversibly under adiabatic conditions with T1  T2
(C) If the expansion is carried out freely, it is simultaneously both isothermal as well as adiabatic
(D) The work done on the gas is maximum when it is compressed irreversibly from (p2, V2) to
(p1, V1) against constant pressure p1
19. , d vkn' kZxS
l dks(p1,V1, T1) l s(p2, V2, T2) r d fofHkUu voLFkkvksadsv/khu QS
y k; k x; k gA fuEufy f[ kr fodYi ksaesal s
l ghdFku gS @gS a\
(A) t c V1 l sV2 r d #) ks "e voLFkk dsv/khu bl dk mRØe.kh; (reversibly) QS y ko fd; k t k; sr ksxS
l } kj k fd; k x; k
dk; ZV1 l sV2 r d l er ki h(isothermal) voLFkkvksadsv/khu mRØe.kh; QS y ko esafd; sx; sdk; Zdhr q y uk esade gS A
(B) xSl dhvka r fj d Åt kZea scny ko (i) ' kw
U; gS; fn bl sT1 = T2 dsl kFk QS y ko mRØe.kh; (revesible) r j hdsl sfd; k
t k, vkSj (ii) /kukRed gS A ; fn bl sT1  T2 dsl kFk #) ks"e (adiabatic) i fj fLFkfr ; ksadsv/khu mRØe.kh; (reversible)
QSy ko fd; k t k; sA
(C) ; fn QS y ko eq Dr : i l sfd; k t k; sr ks; g l kFk&l kFk nksuksal er ki h(isothermal) , oa#) ks"e (adiabatic) gS A
(D) t c bl svuq RØe.kh; r j hdsl s(irreversibly) (p2, V2) l s(p1, V1) r d fLFkj nkc p1 dsfo: ) nck; kt kr kgSr ksxS l
dsÅi j fd; k x; kk dk; Zvf/kdr e gksrk gS A
Sol. A, C, D
P1V1T1 P2V2, T2
PV°
isothermal
(A) Wisothermal  Wadiabatic
adiabatic
(B) (i) zero T1 = T2 = T = constant. E = ncv T = 0

(ii) positive T1  T2 (During adiabatic expansion internal energy decrease)
(C) Pext = 0 isothermal  E = 0  q= 0

W = 0 adiabatic  q = 0  E = 0
(D)
20. The IUPAC name(s) of the following compound is(are)
(A) 4-methylchlorobenzene (B) 4-chlorotoluene

(C) 1-chloro-4-methylbenzene (D) 1-methyl-4-chlorobenzene
20. fuEufy f[ kr ; kS
fxd dk ¼
ds½vkbZ
-; w
-i h-, s-l h- (IUPAC) uke gS%
(A) 4-eS
fFky Dy ksjkscS
a
t hu (B) 4-Dy ks
j ksVksy q
bu
(C) 1-Dy ks
j ks-4-eSfFky cSa
t hu (D) 1-eS
fFky -4-Dy ksjkscS
a
t hu
Sol. B, C
1-chloro-4-methylbenzene & 4-chlorotoulene

21. For a solution formed by mixing liquids L and M, the vapour pressure of L plotted against the mole
fraction of M in solution is shown in the following figure. Here x1 and xM represent mole fraction of
L and M, respectively, in the solution. The correct statement(s) applicable to this system is(are)
Z
pL
1 xM 0
(A) The point Z represents vapour pressure of pure liquid M and Raoult's law is obeyed from xL
= 0 to xL = 1
(B) Attractive intermolecular interactions between L–L in pure liquid L and M-M in pure liquid M
are stronger than those between L–M when mixed in solution
(C) The point Z represents vapour pressure of pure liquid M and Raoult's law is obeyed when xL  0
(D) The point Z represents vapour pressure of pure liquid L and Raoult's law is obeyed when xL  1
21. L vkS
j M nzoksadsfeJ.k} kj kcuk; s, d foy ; u esanzo M dsxzke v.kq d fHkUu (mole fraction) dsfo: ) nzo L dsok"i nkc
dksfp=k esafn[ kk; k x; k gS
] ; gkax1 r Fkk xM dsØe' k%xzke v.kq
d fHkUuksadksfu: fi r dj r sgS
A bl fudk; dk¼
ds½mi ; q
Dr l gh
dFku gS
¼
gSa
½
Z
pL
1 xM 0
(A) fca
nqZ Øe' k%nzo M dsok"i nkc dksfu: fi r dj r k gSvkSj xL = 0 l sxL = 1 r d j kmYV dk fu; e (Raoult's Law)
dk i ky u gksrk gS
(B) ' kq) nzo L esaL-L dschp esavkSj ' kq
) M esaM-M dschp esava r j k&v.kq
d fØ; k, aL-M dschp esava
r j k v.kq
d fØ; kvksa
l si zcy gSt c mUgsfoy ; u esafefJr fd; k t kr k gS
A
(C) fcU nqZ ' kq
) nzo M dsok"i nkc dksfu: fi r dj r k gSvkS
j t c xL  0 r ksj kmYV dk fu; e (Raoult's law) dk i ky u
gksrk gSA
(D) fcU nqZ ' kq
) nzo L dsok"i nkc dksfu: fi r dj r k gSvkS
j t c xL  1 r ksj kmYV dk fu; e (Raoult's law) dk i ky u
gksrk gSA
Sol. B,D
22. The correct statement(s) for the following addition reaction is (are)
(i)
(ii)
(A) (M and O) and (N and P) are two pairs of enantiomers
(B) Bromination proceeds through trans-addition in both the reactions
(C) O and P are identical molecules
(D) (M and O) and (N and P) are two pairs of diastereomers
22. fuEufy f[ kr l a
d y u vfHkfØ; kvksa(addition reaction) dsfy , l ghdFku gS@gS
a\
(i)
(ii)
(A) (M vkS j O) vkSj (N vkS j P) , uUVhvksesjks(enantiomers) dsnks; qxy gS A

(B) nks
uksavfHkfØ; kvksaesaczksfefudj .k Vªka
l la d y u } kj k c<+
r k gS
A
(C) O vkS j P l e: i v.kqgS A
(D) (M vkS j O) vkSj (N vkS j P) vkbZLVhfj vksesjksa(diastereomers)dsnks; q
xy gS
A
Sol. B, D
CH3 CH3
H3C H Br2/CHCl3 H Br Br H
Anti add.
+
H CH 3 H Br Br H
Trans
CH3 CH3
(M) (N)
[Erythene]
[Trans-Anti-Erythro]
Identical
CH 3 CH3
CH 3 CH3 Br2/CHCl3 H Br Br H
+
Anti add.
H H Br H H Br
Trans
CH 3 CH3
(O) (P)
[Erythene]
[Cis-Anti-Threo]
Enantiomerl
Ans. (B) Anti addition takes place.

(D) (M and O) and (N and P) are two pairs of diasteromers
23. Addition of excess aqueous ammonia to a pink coloured aqueous solution of MCl2.6H2O (X) and
NH4Cl gives an octahedral complex Y in the pressure of air. In aqueous solution, complex Y
behaves as 1 : 3 electrolyte. The reaction of X with excess HCl at room temperature results in the
formation of a blue coloured compelx Z. The calculated spin only magnetic moment of X and Z is
3.87 B.M., whereas it is zero for complex Y.
Among the following options, which statement(s) is(are) correct ?
(A) The hybridization of the central metal ion in Y id d2sp3
(B) Addition of silver nitrate to Y gives only two equivalents of silver chloride
(C) When X and Z are in equilbrium at 0°C, the coloured of the solution is pink
(D) Z is a tetrahedral complex
23. , d xqy kch j a
x oky sMCl2.6H2O (X) vkS j NH4Cl dst y h; foy ; u veksfu; k dsfey kusi j ] ok; qdh mi fLFkfr esa, d
v"VQy dh; l a d j (octahedral complex) Y nsrk gS A t y h; foy ; u esal a
d j Y, 1 : 3 fo| q
r vi ?kV~
; (electrolyte)
dhr j g O ; ogkj dj r k gS A l kekU; r ki i j vf/kD; HCl dsl kFk X dhvfHkfØ; k dsi fj .kkeLo: i , d uhy sj a x dk l adj Z
cur kgSA X vkS j Z dki fj dfy r i zpdj .kek=kpq Ecdh; vk?kw. kZ(spin only magnetic moment) 3.87 B.M. gS ] t cfd
;gl ad j Y dsfy , ' kw U; gS A fuEu esal sdkS ul k@l sfodYi l ghgS @gSa\
(A) Y es adsUnzh; /kkr qvk; u dk l a d j .k (hybridization) d2sp3 gS A
(B) Y ea sfl Yoj ukbVªsV fey kusi j fl Yoj Dy ksjkbM dsdsoy nksl er q Y; fey kr sgS
a
A
(C) t c 0°C i j X vkS j Z l kE; koLFkk easgS
ar ksfoy ; u dk j ax xqy kchgS
A
(D) Z , d pr q "Qy dh; (tetrahedral) l a d j gSA
Sol. A, C, D
Cobalt salts are pink in anhydrous & blue in hydated form.
(x) (z)
EX HCl
COCl2. 6H 2O [CO(H2O)4]Cl2
Pink Blue
NH4Cl NH4OH
(O)
[Co(NH3)6]Cl 3
(y)
24. The Correct statement(s) about the oxaacids, HCIO4 and HCIO, is (are)
(A) The central atom in both HCIO4 and HCIO is sp3 hybridized
(B) HCIO4 is formed in the reaction between Cl2 and H2O
(C) The conjugate base of HCIO4 is weaker base than H2O
(D) HCIO4 is more acidic than HCIO because of the resonance stabilization of its anion
24. HCIO4 vkS
j HCIO dsckj sesal ghdFku gS
¼
gSa
½
(A) HCIO4 r Fkk HCIO nksuksesadsUnzh; i j ek.kqsp3 l a
d fj r gS
A
(B) Cl2 dh H2O dsl kFk vfH kfØ; k gksusi j HCIO4 cukr k gS A
(C) HCIO4 dk l a ;q
Xeh{kkj (Conjugate base) H2O l snq cZ
y {kkj gS
A
(D) _ .kk; u dsvuq ukn fLFkj hdj .k (Resonance stabilization) dsQy Lo: i HCIO4, HCIO l svf/kd vEy h; gS
A
Sol. A, C, D
OH
Cl sp3 H—O—Cl
(A)
O O
O
3
sp
+
HClO4 + H2O ClOH– + H3O
strong weak acid weak base Strong
(C)
acid and strong (Resonance stable) acid
base More stable
O–
Cl
(D)
O O
O
25. The colour of the X2, molecules of group 17 elements changes gradually from yellow to violet
down the group. This is due to
(A) Decrease in *-O* gap down the group
(B) Decrease in ionization enrgy down the group
(C) The physical state of X2 at room temperature changes from gas to solid down the group
(D) decrease in HOMO-LUMO gap down the group
25. l ew
g 17 dsr RoksadsX2 v.kq
v ksadk j a
x budsoxZesauhpst kusi j i hy sj a
x l s/khjs&/khjscS
a
xuhj a
x esacny r k gS
A ; g fuEu esa
l sfdl dsQy Lo: i gS\
(A) oxZesauhpst kusi j *-O* dk va r j ?kVr k gS
(B) oxZesauhpst kusi j vk; uu Åt kZ?kVr hgS A
(C) l kekU
; r ki i j oxZesauhpst kusi j X2 dhHkkS fr d voLFkk xS
l l sBksl esacny r hgS
A
(D) oxZes auhpst kusi j HOMO-LUMO dk va r j ?kVr k gS
A
Sol. A, D
According to M.O.T
26. The sum of the number of lone pairs of electrons on each central atom in the following species is
[TeBr6]2–, [BrF2]+, SNF3, and [XeF3]–
(A) Atomic numbers: 7, F = 9, S = 16, Br = 35, Te = 52, Xe= 54)
26. fuEufy f[ kr oxZ(Species) esai zR; sd dsUnzh; i j ek.kqi j , dkdhby sDVªkW
u ;q
Xeksadhl a
[ ; k dk ; ksx gS%
&
[TeBr6]2–, [BrF2]+, SNF3, and [XeF3]–
(A) i j ek.kql a
[ ; k: 7, F = 9, S = 16, Br = 35, Te = 52, Xe= 54)
Sol. 6
2–
Br +
Br Br F
Te , Br
Br Br F
Br
lone pair in C.A. is 1 lone pair = 2
F F
F Xe—F
F F
lone pair of electron = 0 lone pair of electron = 3
Total sum is 0+1+2+3=6
27. Among the following the number of aromatic compound(s) is
27. fuEufy f[ kr esal s, j ksesfVd ; kS

fxd ¼
; kS
fxdksa
½dhl a
[ ; k gS%
&
Sol. 5
28. Among H2, He2+, Li2, Be2, B2, C2, N2, O2– and F2 the number of diamagnetic species is
(Atomic numbers: = 1, He = 2, Li=3, Be = 4, B = 5, C = 6, N = 7, O = 8, F = 9)
28. H2, He2+, Li2, Be2, B2, C2, N2, O2– vkS j F2 esai zfr pq
Ecdh; Li h'kht (Diamagnetic species) dhl a
[ ; k gS
%
&
(i j ek.kql a
[ ; k: = 1, He = 2, Li=3, Be = 4, B = 5, C = 6, N = 7, O = 8, F = 9)
Sol. 5 or 6
Diamagnetic species are
C2, H2, Li2, N2, F2, Be2  (does not exist)

29. A crystalline solid of a pure substance has a face-centred cubic structure with a cell edge of 400
pm. If the density of the substance in the crystal is 8 g cm–3, then the number of atoms present
in 256 g of the crystal in N×1024. The value of N is
29. , d ' kq
) i nkFkZds, d fØLVy h; Bksl dhQy d&dsfUnzr ?ku (face-centred cubic) l a j pukdsl kFkdksfLBdk dksj (cell
edge) dhy EckbZ400 pm gS A ; fn fØLVy dsi nkFkZdk ?kuRo 8 g cm gS
–3
] r ksfØLVy ds256 g esami fLFkr i j ek.kq
v ksa
dhdq y la[ ; k N×10 gS
24
AN dk eku gS% &
Sol. 2
FCC a = 400 pm
zFcc  GMM
dfFcc = NA  a3
4  GMM
8g/ml = N  64  1024
A
GMM = 128 × NA × 10–24
NA
= 128  N  1024 × 256
A
N = 2 Ans.
30. The conductance of a 0.0015 M aqueous solution of a weak monobasic acid was determined by
using a conductivity cell consisting of platinized Pt electrodes. The distance between the electrodes
is 120 cm with an area of cross section of 1 cm2. The conductance of this solution was found to
be 5 × 10–7 S. The pH of the solution is 4. The value of limiting molar conductivity ( 0m ) of this
weak monobasic acid is aqueous solution is Z × 102 S cm–1. The value of Z is
30. , d nqcZu , d{kkj dh; vEy ds0.0015 M t y h; foy ; u dhpky dr k (conductance) , d Iy kfVfudr̀ Pt (Platinized
Pt) by sDVªkW
Moky spky dr kl Sy dkmi ; ksx dj dsfu/kkZ
fj r dhx; hA 1 cm2 vuqi zLFkdkV ds{ks=kQy oky sby sDVªkW
Mksdschp
dhnw j h120 cm gS A bl foy ; u dhpky dr k dk eku 5 × 10 S i k; k x; kA foy ; u dk pH 4 gS
–7
A bl nqcZ
y , d{kkj dh;
vEy dht y h; foy ; u esal hekUr eksy j pky dr k (limiting molar conductivity ( 0m )) dk eku Z × 102 S cm–1
gS
A Z dk eku gS
A
Sol. 6
Concentration = 0.0015 M
[HA]
 = 120 cm G = 5 × 10–7 S = R × A/
A = 1 cm 2
PH = –log(H+) = – log(0.0015 ) = 4
1
 =
15
K  1000 5  107  120  1000

MC = HA  = × 104 = 40
0.0015
MC 1
= =
M 15
M = 600 = Z × 102 sm7

Z = 6 Ans.
Paragraph :
Using the information which is available in three columns of table given below, give answer of
questions Q.31., Q.32 and Q.33.
Wave function n,l,m1 is a mathematical function, which value depends on spherical polar coordinates
(r, , ) and titrated from quantum numbers n, l and m1. Here, r is distance from nucleus, is
Colatitude and  is azimuth. In mathematical functions which are given below table, Z is atomic
number and a0 is Bohr Radius.
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
3
Zr
 Z 2 –
(i) n,l,m1    e a0
(I) 1s Orbital  a0 
(P)
(II) 2s Orbital (ii) a radial node (Q) nucleus per probability density
1

a30
5  zr 
 Z  2 – 2a 
(III) 2pz Orbital (iii) n,l,m1    re  0  cos  (R) nucleus per probability density
y
 a0 
is maximum
(IV) 3dz2 Orbital (iv) xy- plane is node (S) energy requires to excited a electron
27
from level n = 2 to n = 4, is times
32
to energy requires to excited a electron
from level n = 2 to n = 6
uhpsnhxbZVscy dsr hu dkW

y eksaesami y C/k l w
puk dk mi ; q
Dr <+
a
x l sl q
esy dj i z'uksaQ.31., Q.32 vkS
j Q.33 dsmRr j
nhft , &
rja
x Qy u] n,l,m , d xf.kr h; Qy u gSft l dk eku by sDVªkW
1
u dsxksy h; /kzq
oh; funZs'kka
d (r, , ) i j fuHkZ
j dj r k gSvkS
j
Doka
Ve l a
[ ; k n, l vkS
j m1 l svfHky f{kr gksrk gS
A ; gk¡ r uwfDy vl l snw j h]  dksfV' kj (Colatitude) gS ] vkS
j  fnUx' k
(azimuth) gS A Vscy esafn, x; sxf.kr h; Qy uksaesaZ i j ek.kqØeka
d gSvkS j a0 cksj f=kT; k (Bohr Radius) gS A
dkW
ye 1 dkW
ye 2 dkW ye 3
3
Zr
 Z 2 –
(i) n,l,m1    e a0
(I) 1s vkW
fcZ
Vy  a0 
(P)
(II) 2s vkW
fcZ
Vy (ii) , d f=kT; kRed (radial) uksM (Q) U; w
fDy vl i j i zkf; dr k ?kuRo
1
(Probability density)  a3
0
5  zr 
 Z  2 – 2a 
(III) 2pz vkW
fcZ
Vy (iii) n,l,m1    re  0  cos  (R) U; w
fDy vl i j i zkf; dr k ?kuRo
 a0 
(Probability density) vf/kdr e gS

A
(IV) 3dz2 vkW

fcZ
Vy (iv) xy- l er y , d uksMh; gS (S) by sDVªkW
u dksn = 2 voLFkk l sn = 4 voLFkk
r d mRr sft r dj usdhÅt kZ
] by sDVªkW
u dksn = 2
voLFkk l sn = 6 voLFkk r d mRr sft r dj usds
27
fy ; svko' ; d Åt kZl s xq
uk gS
A
32
31. For He+ ion, which of the followig option is incorrect ?

(A) (I) (i) (S) (B) (II) (ii) (Q) (C) (I) (iii) (R) (D) (I) (i) (R)
31. He vk; u dsfy ; sfuEufy f[ kr fodYi ks
+
aesal sdsoy xy r (Incorrect) la
; kst u gS%
&\
(A) (I) (i) (S) (B) (II) (ii) (Q) (C) (I) (iii) (R) (D) (I) (i) (R)
Sol. C
32. For orbital which are given in column 1, which of the following options has correct combination
for any hydrogen like species :
(A) (II) (ii) (P) (B) (I) (ii) (S) (C) (IV) (iv) (R) (D) (III) (iii) (P)
32. dkW
y e 1 esafn, x; svkWfcZVy (Orbital) dsfy ; sfuEufy f[ kr fodYi ksaesal sfdl hHkhgkbMªkst u&l eku Li h'kht (Species)
dsfy ; sdsoy l ghl a
; kst u gS%
&
(A) (II) (ii) (P) (B) (III) (ii) (S) (C) (IV) (iv) (R) (D) (III) (iii) (P)
Sol. A
27 1 1  1 1 
× 13.6 × 22    = 13.6 ×   
3  4 36   4 16 
27 8 3
× =
32 36 16
33. Which of the following options has correct combination for hydrogen atom ?
(A) (I) (i) (P) (B) (I) (iv) (R) (C) (II) (i) (Q) (D) (I) (i) (S)
33. gkbMªkst u i j ek.kqdsfy ; sfuEufy f[ kr fodYi ksaesl sdsoy l ghl a
; kst u gS
%
&
(A) (I) (i) (P) (B) (I) (iv) (R) (C) (II) (i) (Q) (D) (I) (i) (S)
Sol. D
34. The only CORRECT combination in which the reaction proceeds through radical mechanism is
(A) (IV) (I) (Q) (B) (III) (II) (P) (C) (II) (iii) (R) (D) (I) (ii) (R)
34. fuEufy f[ kr fodYi ksaesal sdsoy l ghl a
; kst u ft l esavfHkfØ; k ew
y d (radical) i zfØ; k } kj k c<+
r hgS
] gS
a
(A) (IV) (I) (Q) (B) (III) (II) (P) (C) (II) (iii) (R) (D) (I) (ii) (R)
Sol. D
35. For the synthesis of benzoic acid, the only CORRECT combination is
(A) (II) (i) (S) (B) (I) (iv) (Q) (C) (IV) (ii) (P) (D) (III) (iv) (R)
35. csUt ksbZ
d vEy dsl a
' y s"k.k (Synthesis) dsfy ; sfuEufy f[ kr fodYi ksaesal sdsoy l ghl a
; kst u gS%
&
(A) (II) (i) (S) (B) (I) (iv) (Q) (C) (IV) (ii) (P) (D) (III) (iv) (R)
Sol. A
36. The only CORRECT combination that gives two different carboxylic acid is
(A) (IV) (iii) (Q) (B) (II) (iv) (R) (C) (I) (i) (S) (D) (III) (iii) (P)
36. fuEufy f[ kr fodYi ksaesal sdsoy l ghl a
; kst u t ksfd nksfHkUu dkckZ
sfDl fy d vEy nsrk gS
(A) (IV) (iii) (Q) (B) (II) (iv) (R) (C) (I) (i) (S) (D) (III) (iii) (P)
Sol. D
[MATHEMATICS]
1 1 2
37. Let X and Y be two events such that P(X) = , P(X|Y) = and P(Y|X) = . Then
3 2 5
4 1 2 1
(A) P(Y) = (B) P(X'|Y) = (C) P  X  Y  = (D) P  X  Y  =
15 2 5 5
1 1 2
37. ekuk fd X vkS
j Y bl i zd kj dhnks?kVuk; sa(events) gSfd P(X) = , P(X|Y) = vkS
j P(Y|X) = gS
Ar c
3 2 5
4 1 2 1
(A) P(Y) = (B) P(X'|Y) = (C) P  X  Y  = (D) P  X  Y  =
15 2 5 5
Sol. A, B
1 1 2
(A) P(x) = P X | Y   P  Y | X 
3 2 5
P(x  y) 1 P(x  y) 2
 & 
P(y) 2 P(x) 5
2 1 2
 P(x  y)   
5 3 15
2
4
 15  1  P(y) 
P(y) 2 15
P(x) P(y)
2 1 2 2 4 2
 x '  P(x ' y) 15 1  
(B) P     3 15 15 15 15
y  P(y) 4 2 3 2
15  
15 15
8
(D) P(x  y)  P(x)  P(y)  P(x  y) 15
1 4 2 542 7
=    
3 15 15 15 15
38. Let f : R  (0,1) be a continuous function. Then, which of the following functions (s) has(have)
the value zero at some point in the interval (0,1) ?
 
x x
2 2
x
(A) e   f  t  sin t dt (B) f  x    f  t  sin t dt (C) x   f  t  cos t dt (D) x9 – f(x)
0 0 0
38. ekuk fd f : R  (0,1) , d l r r Qy u (continuous function) gS

A r c fuEu Qy uksaesal sdkS
u l sQy u¼
uksa
½dk ¼
ds½
eku vUr j ky (interval) (0,1) dsfdl hfcUnqi j ' kw
U; gksxk?
 
x x
2 2
x
(A) e   f  t  sin t dt (B) f  x    f  t  sin t dt (C) x   f  t  cos t dt (D) x9 – f(x)
0 0 0
Sol. C, D
f : R (0, 1)
(A) range of ex in (0, 1) is (1, e)
x
 f(x) sin t dt will be less than 1
0
(B) always +ve

x
2
(C) x  0
f(t) cos t dt

x
2
at x = 0 x  0
f(t) cos t dt 0

1
2
at x = 1 1  0
f(t) cos t dt
+ve
 will be zero in (0, 1)
(D) x – f(x) will be zero at x  (0, 1)
9
39. Let a, b, x and y be real numbers such that a – b = 1 and y  0. If the complex number z = x +
 az  b 
iy satisfies Im   = y, then which of the following is(are) possible value(s) fo x ?
 z 1 
(A) 1  1  y2 (B) 1  1  y2 (C) 1  1  y2 (D) 1  1  y2

39. ekuk fd a, b, x vkS
j y bl i zd kj dhokLr fod l ¡[ ; k; sa(real numbers) gSfd a – b = 1 vkS
j y  0 gS
A ; fn l fEeJ
 az  b 
l ¡[ ; k (complex number) z = x + iy, Im  z  1  = y dksl a
rq
"V dj r hgS
] r c fuEu esal sdkS
u l k¼
l s½x dk ¼
ds½
 
l EHkkfor eku gS
¼gS
½\
(A) 1  1  y2 (B) 1  1  y2 (C) 1  1  y2 (D) 1  1  y2
Sol. B,D
 ax  b  aiy 
a – b = 1, Im   y
 x  1  iy 
 (ax  b  aiy)(x  1  iy)  ay(x  1)  (ax  b)y

 Im  y  y
 (x  1)2  y2  (x  1)2  y2
 axy + ay – axy – by = y((x + 1)2 + y2)  (a – b)y = y((x + 1)2 + y2)
 1  (x  1)2  y2
x+1=± 1  y2
x  1  1  y2
x  1  1  y2
2
x=–1± 1y
x2 y2
40. If 2x – y + 1 = 0 is a tangent to the hyperbola  = 1, then which of the following CANNOT
T
a2 16
be sides of a right angled triangle ?
(A) a, 4, 1 (B) 2a, 4, 1 (C) a, 4, 2 (D) 2a, 8, 1
x2 y2
40. ; fn 2x – y + 1 = 0 vfr i j oy ; (hyperbola)  = 1 dh Li ' kZ
j s[kk (tangent) gSr ksfuEu esal sdkS
ulh
a2 16
l edks.kh; f=kHkq
t (right angle triangle) dhHkq
t k; saughagksl dr hgS
¼
gS½\
(A) a, 4, 1 (B) 2a, 4, 1 (C) a, 4, 2 (D) 2a, 8, 1
Sol. A,C,D
x2 y2
2x – y + 1 = 0  1
a2 16
m=2 tangent is
 4a2  16  1 y  mx  a2m2  b2
4a2 = 17 y  2x  4a2  16
17 17
a2  a 2x  y   4a2  16
4 2
Now check option.
41. Let [x] be the greatest integer less than or equals to x. Then, at which of the following points (s)
the function f(x) = cos((x + [x])) is discontinuous ?
(A) x = – 1 (B) x = 1 (C) x = 0 (D) x = 2
41. ekuk fd x l sNksVk ; k x dsl eku l cl scM+
ki w
. kkZ
a
d (integer) [x] gS
A r c f(x) = cos((x + [x])). fuEu esal sfdu
fcUnq
¼
vksa
½i j vl r r ~(discontinuous) gS?
(A) x = – 1 (B) x = 1 (C) x = 0 (D) x = 2
Sol. A,B,D
f(x) = xcos ((x + [x]))
x = n, f(x) = n cos(2n) = n
f(n+) = n cos  (2n + n) = n
f(n–) = n cos ((2n – 1)) = – n
For n = 0  limit
n = – 1, 1, 2  discontinuous
42. Which of the following is(are) NOT the square of a 3 × 3 matrix with real entries ?
1 0 0  1 0 0   1 0 0  1 0 0
0 1 0  0 1 0   0 1 0  0 1 0
(A)   (B)   (C)   (D)  
0 0 1 0 0 1  0 0 1 0 0 1
42. fuEu esal sdkS

u l k¼
l s½okLr fod l ¡[ ; kvksads3 × 3 vkO
;w
g (matrix) dk oxZughagS¼
gS
½\
1 0 0  1 0 0   1 0 0  1 0 0
   
(A) 0 1 0  (B) 0 1 0  (C)  0 1 0  (D) 0 1 0
   
0 0 1 0 0 1  0 0 1 0 0 1
Sol. A,C
From options square of the determinant value of matrices in option (A) and (C) is –1 which is not
real so options (A) & (C)
43. If a chord, which is not a tangent, of the parabola y2 = 16x has the equation 2x + y = p, and
midpoint (h,k), then which of the following is (are) possible value (s) of p,h and k ?
(A) p = – 1, h = 1, k = –3 (B) p = 2, h = 3, k = – 4
(C) p = – 2, h = 2, k = –4 (D) p = 5, h = 4, k = – 3
43. ; fn i j oy ; (parabola) y2 = 16x dh , d t hok (Chord), t ks Li ' kZ j s[kk (tangent) ughagS
] dk l ehdj .k
2x + y = p r Fkk e/; fcU
nq(midpoint)(h,k) gS
, r ksfuEu es
al sp,h , oe~k dsl EHkkfor eku gS
¼
gS½?
(A) p = – 1, h = 1, k = –3 (B) p = 2, h = 3, k = – 4
(C) p = – 2, h = 2, k = –4 (D) p = 5, h = 4, k = – 3
Sol. B
Eq of chord AB (with given middle point)
T = S1
yk – 8(x + h)= k2 – 16h
AB : yk – 8x = k2 – 8h ...(1)
Given eq AB : y + 2x = p
n
...(2)
k 8 k2  8h
(1) = (2)   
1 2 p
A
k 2  8h  4p (h,k)
k  4 16  8h  4p
4  2h  p
B
2h  p  4
Chek option.
44. For a real number , if the system
1  2   x   1
    
 1   y  1
=   of linear equations, has infinitely many solutions, then 1 +  + 2 =
 2  1  z   1

44. okLr fod l a
[ ; k (real number) dsfy ; s] ; fn j S
f[ kd l ehdj .k fudk; (system of linear equations)
1  2   x   1
   
 1   y  1
=   dsvuUr gy (infinitely many solutions) gS
] r c 1 +  + 2 =
 2  
 1  z    1

Sol. 1
 1  2 
 
  1 
D= =0
 2 
  1 
1(1 – 2) – ( – 3) + 2(2 – 2) = 0  1 – 2 – 2 + 4 = 0
1 + 4 = 22  4 – 22 + 1 = 0
(2 – 1)2 = 0  2 = 1,  = ±1
If  1   1
x+y+z=1 x–y+z=1
x+y+z=1 x–y+z=1
x + y + z = –1 –x + y – z = –1
No solution x–y+z=1
Infinite
Hence 1 +  + 2 = 1
Ans.  = –1
45. The sides of a right angled triangle are in arithmetic progression. If the triangle has area 24, then
what is the length of its smallest side ?
45. , d l edks.kh; f=kHkq
t (right angled triangle) dhHkq
t k; sal ekUr j Js<+
h (arithmetic progression) esagS
A ; fn bl dk
{ks=kQy 24 gSr c bl dh l cl sNksVhHkq
t k dhy EckbZD; k gS\
Sol. 6
a+d
a–d
(a – d)2 + a2 = a2 + d2
a
1
a. (a – b) = 24 a2 + d2 – 2ad + a2 = (a + d)2
2
a(a – d) = 48 ........(1) a2 = 2ad
 a
a a –  = 48 a  4d
 4 
39
a× = 48
4
48  4
a2 =
3
2
a = 64
a=8 d=2
Smallest side = 6

46. Let f : R  R be a differentiable function such that f(0) = 0, f   = 3 and f'(0) = 1. if
2

2  
g  x   f '  t  cos ec t  cot t cos ec t f t   dt for x   0,  , then lim g x =
x
 2 x0
  
46. ekukfd f : R  R bl i zd kj dkvody uh; Qy u (differentiable function) gSfd f(0) = 0, f  2  = 3 , oe~f'(0)
 

  2
=1 gS
A ; fn x   0,  ] r c lim
dsfy ; sg  x   f '  t  cos ec t  cot t cos ec t f t   dt gS g x =
 2 x
x0
Sol. 2

f(0) = 0, f  2  = 3, f'(0) = 1.
 

2
 
g(x) =  f '(t) cos ect– cot t.cos ect.f(t) dt
x
II I
using by parts
  
2 2 2 
=  f(t).cos ect  dt +  cot t cos ectf(t)dt   cot t.cos ectf(t)dt =  f(t) cos ect 
x x x
2
x

g(x) = f  2  .1 – f(x) cosec x
 
g(x) = 3 – f(x) cosec x  xlim

0
g(x)
f(x)  0 
 xlim 3 – f(x).cosec x 3 – xlim Apply L-Hospital rule
0 0 sin x  0 
f '(x) 1
3 – xlim
0 cos x
=3– =3–1=2
cos 0
47. For how many values of p, the circle x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y – p = 0 and the coordinate axes have
exactly three common points ?
47. p dsfdr usekuks adsfy ; soÙ̀k(circle) x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y – p = 0 , oe~funsZ
' kka
d v{kksa(coordinate axes) esadsoy
r hu fcUnqmHk; fu"B (common) gS?
Sol. 2
Centre(–1, –2) r= 5P = 2
x 1
–2 r = 2 P=0
–1
–1
12  22  P = 2 circle passes 3 points

 P = –1
 f2 – c > 0  4 – 1 > 0 = 3
5P = 1
P = –4
 g2 – c > 0  1 – 4 > 0 ×
48. Words of length 10 are formed using the letters A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J. Let x be the number of such
words where no letter is repeated ; and let y be the number of such words where exactly one
y
letter is repeated twice and no other letter is repeated. Then, =
9x
48. v{kj ksaA,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J l s10 y EckbZds' kCn cuk; st kr sgS Aekukfd x bl r j g dsmu ' kCnksadhl ¡[ ; kgSft uesafdl h
Hkhv{kj dhi q uj kof̀Ùk ughagksrhgS
] r Fkk y bl r j g dsmu ' kCnksadhl ¡[ ; k gSft u esadsoy , d v{kj dhi quj kof̀Ùk nksckj
y
gksrhgSo fdl hvU; v{kj dh i q
uj kof̀Ùk ughagksrhgS
Ar c =
9x
Sol. 5
A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J  10 letter
x = 10!
y = when exactly 1 letter is repacted twice.
10C × 8 ×2
9
x x
10C 10C
10
1
× 2
×1× 8 = = 50 9
2
y 50 9
 = 10 = 5
9x
Answer 49, 50, and 51 by appropriately matching the information given in the three
columns of thee following table
Column 1,2 and 3 contain conics, equation of tangent to the conics and point of contact, respectively
 a 2a 
(I) x2 + y2 = a2 (i) my = m2x + a (P)  2 , 
m m 
 –ma a 
(II) x2 + a2y2 = a2 (ii) y = mx + a m2  1 (Q)  , 
2 2 
 m 1 m 1 
 –a2m 1 
(III) y2 = 4ax (iii) y = mx + 2 2 (R)  2 2 , 
a m –1
 a m 1 a2m2  1 
 –a2m –1 
(IV) x2 – a2y2 = a2 (iv) y = mx + 2 2 (S)  2 2 , 
a m 1
 a m –1 a m  1 
2 2
49. For a = 2 , if a tangent is drawn to a suitable conic (Column 1) at the point of contact (–1, 1),
then which of the following options is the only CORRECT combination for obtaining its equation ?
(A) (I) (ii) (Q) (B) (I) (i) (P) (C) (III) (i) (P) (D) (II) (ii) (Q)
1
50. The tangent to a suitable conic (Column 1) at ( 3 , ) if found to be 3 x + 2y = 4, then which
2
of the following options is the only CORRECT combination ?
(A) (IV) (iv) (S) (B) (II) (iv) (R) (C) (IV) (iii) (S) (D) (II) (iii) (R)
51. If a tangent to a suitable conic (Column 1) is found to be y = x + 8 and its point of contact is
(8, 16), then which of the following options is the only CORRECT combination ?
(A) (III) (i) (P) (B) (I) (Ii) (Q) (C) (II) (iv) (R) (D) (III) (ii) (Q)
uhpsnhx; hVscy dsr hu dkW y kesaesami y C/k l w

puk dk mi ; q
Dr <a x l sl q
esy dj i z'uksa49,50 , oa51 dsmÙkj nhft ; sA
dkW
y e 1,2 r Fkk 3 esaØe' k%dkWfud (conic), dkW fud i j Li ' kZ
j s[kk (tangent) dk l ehdj .k r Fkk Li ' kZ
fcunq(point) of
contact) fn; sx; sgSA
dkW
ye 1 dkWye 2 dkWye 3
 a 2a 
(I) x2 + y2 = a2 (i) my = m2x + a (P)  2 , 
m m 
 –ma a 
(II) x2 + a2y2 = a2 (ii) y = mx + a m2  1 (Q)  , 
2 2 
 m 1 m 1 
 –a2m 1 
(III) y2 = 4ax (iii) y = mx + 2 2 (R)  2 2 , 
a m –1
 a m 1 a m  1 
2 2
 –a2m –1 
(IV) x2 – a2y2 = a2 (iv) y = mx + (S)  2 2 , 
a2m2  1
 a m –1 a2m2  1 
49. a= 2 dsfy ; smi ; q

Dr dkW
fud ¼dkWy e 1½i j , d Li ' kZ
j s[kk [ kha
pht kr hgSft l dk Li ' kZ
fcUnq(–1, 1) r c fuEu esal sdkS
u
l k fodYi bl Li ' kZ
j s[kk dk l ehdj .k i zkIr dj usdk dsoy l ghl a ; kst u gS
(A) (I) (ii) (Q) (B) (I) (i) (P) (C) (III) (i) (P) (D) (II) (ii) (Q)
1
50. ; fn mi ; qDr dkWfud (dkW
y e 1) dsfcUnq( 3 , ) i j Li ' kZ
j s[kk 3 x + 2y = 4 gS
u l kfodYi dsoy
2
l ghl a; kst u gS]
(A) (IV) (iv) (S) (B) (II) (iv) (R) (C) (IV) (iii) (S) (D) (II) (iii) (R)
51. ; fn mi ; q
Dr dkW
fud (dkW
y e 1) dsLi ' kZ
fcUnq(8,16) i j Li ' kZ
j s[kk y = x + 8 gS
u l kfodYi dsoy l gh
la; kst u gS]
(A) (III) (i) (P) (B) (I) (Ii) (Q) (C) (II) (iv) (R) (D) (III) (ii) (Q)
Sol. I, (ii), Q
II, (iv), R
III, (i), P
IV, (III), S
49. A
a 2
(I) x2 + y2 = 2
P : (–1, 1)
T:y–x=2
(II) x2 + 2y2 = 2
P (–1, 1) No tangent
(III) y2 = 4 2x No tangent
(IV) x – 2y = 2
2 2
No tangent
50. B
T: POC
 1
3x + 2y = 4  3, 2 
 
3
y x 2
2
3
m
2
3
a  2 , m2 
2
51. A
y=x+8 (8, 16)
m1
a=8
Answer 49, 50, and 51 by appropriately matching the information given in the three
columns of thee following table
Let f(x) = x + logex – xlogx, x  0,  
* Column 1 contains information about zeros of f(x), f'(x) and f"(x)
* Column 2 contains information about the limiting behavior of f(x), f'(x) and f"(x) at infinity.
* Column 3 contains information about increasing / decreasing nature of f(x) and f'(x)

(I) f(x) = 0 for some x  (1, e2) (i) xlim

f(x) = 0 (P) f is increasing in (0, 1)
(II) f'(x) = 0 for some x  (1, e) (ii) xlim


f(x) = – (Q) f is decreasing in (e, e2)
(III) f'(x) = 0 for some x  (0, 1) (iii) xlim


f'(x) = – (R) f' is increasing in (0, 1)
(IV) f"(x) = 0 for some x  (1, e) (iv) xlim


f"(x) = 0 (S) f' is decreasing in (e, e2)
52. Which of the following options is the only INCORRECT combination ?

(A) (I) (iii) (P) (B) (II) (iv) (Q) (C) (II) (iii) (P) (D) (III) (i) (R)
53. Which of the following options is the only CORRECT combination ?

(A) (I) (ii) (R) (B) (III) (iv) (P) (C) (II) (iii) (S) (D) (IV) (i) (S)
54. Which of the following options is the only CORRECT combination ?

(A) (III) (iii) (R) (B) (IV) (iv) (S) (C) (II) (ii) (Q) (D) (I) (i) (P)
uhpsnhx; hVscy dsr hu dkW

y eksaesami y C/k l w
puk dk mi ; q
Dr <a
x l sl q
esy dj i z'uksa52,53 , oa54 dsmÙkj nhft ; sA
ekuk fd f(x) = x + logex – xlogx, x  0,   gS A
* dkW
y e 1 esaf(x), f'(x) , oe~f"(x) ds' kw
U; ksadhl w
puk nhxbZgS A
* dkW
y e 2 esaf(x), f'(x) , oe~f"(x) dsvuUr dhr j Q l hek i j O
; ogkj (limiting behaviour at infinity) dhl w
puk
nhxbZgS A
* dkW
y e 3 esaf(x) , oe~f'(x) dso/kZeku @gkzkl eku (increasing/ decreasing) gksusdhi zÑfr (nature) dhl w puk
nhxbZgS A
dkW
ye 1 dkW
ye 2 dkW
ye 3
(I) f(x) = 0 fdl h x  (1, e2) dsfy ; s (i) xlim

f(x) = 0 (P) f esa(0, 1) o/kZ
eku gS
(II) f'(x) = 0 fdl hx  (1, e) dsfy ; s (ii) xlim


f(x) = – (Q) f esa(e, e2) gkzkl eku gS
(III) f'(x) = 0 fdl h x  (0, 1) dsfy ; s (iii) xlim


f'(x) = – (R) f' esa(0, 1) o/kZ
eku gS
(IV) f"(x) = 0 fdl hx  (1, e) dsfy ; s (iv) xlim


f"(x) = 0 (S) f' esa(e, e2) gkzkl eku gS
A
52. fuEu esal sdkS

u l k fodYi dsoy xy r l a
; kst u (only INCORRECT combination) gS\
(A) (I) (iii) (P) (B) (II) (iv) (Q) (C) (II) (iii) (P) (D) (III) (i) (R)
53. fuEu esal sdkS

u l k fodYi l ghl a
; kst u gS\
(A) (I) (ii) (R) (B) (III) (iv) (P) (C) (II) (iii) (S) (D) (IV) (i) (S)
54. fuEu esal sdkS

u l k fodYi dsoy l ghl a
; kst u gS?
(A) (III) (iii) (R) (B) (IV) (iv) (S) (C) (II) (ii) (Q) (D) (I) (i) (P)
Sol.
(I) Correct (i) Incorrect (P) Correct
(II) Correct (ii) Correct (Q) Correct
(III) Incorrect (iii) Correct (R) Incorrect
(IV) Incorrect (iv) Correct (S) Correct
52. D 53. C 54. C

For f = x + lnx – xlnx
(i) lim f(x)   (iii) f  (0, ) 1<<e

x 
(ii) f(1).f(e2) < 0 f  ()
1
For f '   ln x
x lnx
(i) f'(1).f'(e) < 0 1/x
(ii) f'(0).f'(1) > 0 1 e
(iii) lim f '(x)  

x 
1 1
For f ''  
x2 x
f'' < 0  f' 
lim f ''  0
x 
[PHYSICS]-PAPER-2 CODE - 4
1. A rocket is launched normal to the surface of the Earth, away from the Sun, along the line joining
the Sun and the Earth. The Sun is 3 × 105 times heavier than the Earth and is at a distance 2.5
× 104 times larger than the radius of the Earth. The escape velocity from Earth's gravitational
field is ve = 11.2 km s–1. The minimum initial velocity (vs) required for the rocket to be able to
leave the Sun-Earth system is closest to
(Ignore the rotation and revolution of the Earth and the presence of any other planet)
(A) vS = 62 km s–1 (B) vS = 22 km s–1 (C) vS = 72 km s–1 (D) vS = 42 km s–1
1. j kdsV Hkw
r y dsvfHky Ecor l w
; Z, oai F̀oh dkst ksM+
usoky h j s[kk esal w
; Zl snw
j dh r j Q (radially outward from the
direction of the sun) i z{ksfi r fd; k x; k gS
Al w ; Zi F̀ohl s3 × 105 xq uk Hkkj hgS, oai F̀ohdhf=kT; k l s2.5 × 104 xq uh
nwj hi j fLFkr gS
A i F̀ohdsxq
: Rokd"kZ . k{ks=kdsfy , i y k; u xfr (escape velocity) ve = 11.2 km s gS –1
a
A j kdsV dksl w
;Z
, oai F̀ohfudk; (Sun Earth system) dsxq : Rokd"kZ . kl seq
Dr gksusdsfy , de l sde i zkj afHkd osx (vS) dkfudVr e eku
gS&
(i F̀oh dh pØh; xfr vkS j i fj Hkze.k r Fkk fdl h vU; xzg dhmi fLFkfr dh mi s{kk dj sa A)
(A) vS = 62 km s–1 (B) vS = 22 km s–1 (C) vS = 72 km s–1 (D) vS = 42 km s–1
1. D
2GM 1 GMm
= 11.2; m (ve2) =
R 2 R
1 GMm G(KM)m
mu2 – – =0 M
2 R 2(nR) K(M)
u nR
1 2 GM KGM
u = +
2 R nR R
1 2 1 1 3  105
u = (ve)2 + (ve)2
2 2 2 2.5  104
= (11.2)2 + 12 (11.2)2
= 13 (11.2)2  u = 13 × 11.2 = 42
2. A person measures the depth of a well by measuring the time intgerval between dropping a stone
and receiving the sound of impact with the bottom of the well. The error in his measurement of
time is T = 0.01 seconds and he measures the depth of the well to be L = 20 meters. Take the
acceleration due to gravity g = 10 ms–2 and the velocityof sound is 300 ms–1. Then the fractional
error in the measurement, L/L, is closest to
(A) 5% (B) 1% (C) 3% (D) 0.2%
2. ,d O; fDr , d i RFkj dksdq , saesafxj kr sl e; vkS j dq
, sadhr y hesal a
?kV l smRiUu /ofu dsl e; va r j ky dk eki u dj dsdq , sa
dhxgj kbZdk i r k y xkr k gSA ; g l ek; ka r j ky dseki u esa=kq
fV T = 0.01 l sd sa
M, oadq , sadhxgj kbZL = 20 m eki r k gSA
xq
: Rokd"kZ
. kRoj .k g = 10 ms–2 , oa/ofu xfr 300 ms–1 nhxbZgS A L/L dseki u esafudVr e vkfa ' kd =kq
fV (fractional
error) gS&
(A) 5% (B) 1% (C) 3% (D) 0.2%
2. B
t 2L dL 1 2 1
t= +  dt = + × dl
v g 300 2 10 L
dL 0.22 dl
dt = + (dl)  0.01 = + 0.05 dl
300 20 300
3 dl
3 = 16 dl  dl =  × 100 = 0.95%
16 20
3. Consider an expanding sphere of instataneous radius R whose total mass remains constant. The
expansion is such that the instantaneous density  remains uniform throughout the volume. The
 1 d 
rate of fractional change in density   is constant. The velocity v of any point on the surface
  dt 
of the expanding sphere is proportional to
1
(A) R (B) (C) R2/3 (D) R3
R
3. , d i zl kj hxksy s(expanding sphere) dhr kR{kf.kd (instataneous) f=kT; k R , oanzO
; eku M vpj j gr sgS
A i zl kj ds
 1 d 
nkS
j ku bl dk r kR{kf.kd ?kuRo  i w
j svk; r u esa, dl eku j gr k gS, oavka
f' kd ?kuRo dhnj   vpj (constant) gS
A
  dt 
bl i zl kj hxksy sdsi `"B i j , d fcUnqdk osx v fuEu dsl ekuq
i kr hgksxk &
1
(A) R (B) (C) R2/3 (D) R3
R
3. A
M
4 4 3
R 3 =    × 3 R = M  R = K
3
 2 dR  d dR d 1 dR
  3R dt  + R3 = 0  3R2 = – R3 ×  R
  dt dt dt  dt
4. A symmetric star shaped conducting wire loop is carrying a steady

state current I as shown in the figure. The distance between the
diametrically opposite vertices of the star is 4a. The magnitude of
the magnetic field at the center of the loop is
0l 0l
(A) 3[2  3] (B) 6[ 3  1]
4 a 4 a
0l 0l
(C) 3[ 3  1] (D) 6[ 3  1]
4 a 4 a
4. tSl sfd fpf=kr fd; k x; kgS ] , d l fEer r kj s(symmetric star) dsvkdkj dspky d
esavi fj ofr Z
r /kkj k I cg j gh gSA ; gk¡ foi j hr ' kh"kksZ(diametrically opposite
vertices) dschp dh nw j h4a gS A pky d dsdsUnzi j pq Ecdh; {ks=k dk eku gksxk &
0l 0l
(A) 3[2  3] (B) 6[ 3  1]
4 a 4 a
0l 0l
(C) 3[ 3  1] (D) 6[ 3  1]
4 a 4 a
4. B
30°
a
H cos 30° = a  H =
cos 30
60°
0i
B= [sin 30° – sin 60°] 60° 60° 90°
4H cos 30
90° a
 i  12  1  3  0i H c 30° 30°
B= 0 
4  a  2

2   B = 4a 6 1  3   os
30
°
5. Consider regular polygons with number of sides n = 3, 4, 5 ...... as shown in the figure, The
center of mass of all the polygons is at height h from the ground. They roll on a horizontal surface
about the leading vertex without slipping and sliding as depicted,. The maximum increase in
height of the locus of the center of mass for each polygton is . Then  depends on n and h as
2   2   
(A)   h sin   (B)   h tan  
n  2n 
 1   2 
(C)   h   1 (D)   h sin  
   n 
 cos   
 n 
5. fp=k } kj k n' kkZ
; sl ecgq Hkq
t ksadhHkqt kvka
sdhl a[ ; k n = 3, 4, 5 ...... gS A l Hkhcgq Hkq
t ksadk l a
gfr dsUnz(center of mass)
vuq Hkw
fed r y l sh Å¡pkbZi j gS A ; sfcuk fQl y sf{kfr t r y i j i zfr xkeh' kh"kZ(leading vertex) dspkj ksavksj ?kw. kZ
u dj
vxzl fj r gksj gsgS A i zR; sd cgq Hkq
t dsl a gfr dsUnzdsj s[kki Fk (locus) dhÅ¡pkbZdhvf/kdr e of̀)  gS A r c  dhh vkS j n
i j fuHkZ
j r k fuEu esal snht k, xh&
2   2   
(A)   h sin   (B)   h tan  
n  2n 
 1   2 
(C)   h   1 (D)   h sin  
   n 
 cos   
 n 
5. C
 2  h
y cos h  = y–h 2
 n 
n y
 
 1 
=h   1

 cos 2  

  n  
 
  
6. Three vectors P,Q and R are shown in the figure. Let S be

any point on the vector R . The distance between the points
  
P and S is b | R | . The general relation among vectors P,Q

and S is -
     
(A) S  (1  b)P  bQ (B) S  (b  1)P  bQ
     
(C) S  (1  b)P  b2Q (D) S  (1  b2 )P  bQ
   
6. r hu osDVj P,Q , oaR fp=k } kj k n' kkZ
, x, gS
A osDVj R i j , d fcUnqS n' kkZ
; k x; k gS
A fcUnqP , oafcUnqS dschp dh
   
nwj h b | R | gS
A P,Q , oa S osDVj ksadschp l EcU/k gS&
     
(A) S  (1  b)P  bQ (B) S  (b  1)P  bQ
     
(C) S  (1  b)P  b2Q (D) S  (1  b2 )P  bQ
6. A
PS = bR
   
= b (Q  P) = S  P
   
S = bQ – bP + P
 
= (1 – b) P + bQ
 hc 
7. A photoelectric material having work-function 0 is illuminated with light of wavelength     .
 0 
The fastest photoelectron has a de Broglie wavelength d. A change in wavelength of the incident
light by results in a change d in d. Then the ratio d/ is proportional to
(A) 3d /  (B) 3d / 2 (C)  2d /  2 (D)  d / 
 hc 
7. i zd k' kfo| q
r i nkFkZ(photo electric material) ft l dkdk; ZQy u (work-function) 0 gS
] rja
x&nS
/; Z   
 0 
dsi zd k' k l si znhIr fd; k x; k gS

A nzqr i zd k' k by sDVªku dh Mh czksxy h (de Broglie) r j a
x&nS
/; Zd gS
A vki fr r i zd k' k
(incident light) dh r j a x&nS/; Zesadsi fj or Z u l sd dseku esad dk i fj or Z
u gksrk gS
A r c d/ dk vuq i kr
l ekuq
i kr hgksxk &
(A) 3d /  (B) 3d / 2 (C)  2d /  2 (D) d / 
7. B
1 hc
mv
v2 = KE = – 0
2 
h h
p = mv =   v = m
d d
1 h2 hc C1 C
m 2 2 = – 0  = 2 – 0
2 m  d  l2d 
2C1 C2 (Δλ)  d ( d )3
3 (d) = –  =
( d ) λ2
 2
8. A wheel of radius R and mass M is placed at the bottom of a fixed step of height R as shown in the
figure. A constant force is continuously applied on the surface of the wheel so that it just clims
the step without slipping. Consider the torque  about an axis normal to the plane of the paper
passing through the point Q. Which of the following options is/are correct?
Q
P
R
X
(A) If the force is applied at point P tangentially then  decreases continuously as the wheel
climbs.
(B) If the force is applied tangentially at point S then   0 but the wheel never climbs the step.
(C) If the force is applied normal to the circumference at point P then  is zero.
(D) If the force is applied normal to the circumeference at point X then  is constant.
, d f=kT; k R , oaæO ; eku M dk i fg; k (wheel) , d R Å¡pkbZoky sn+̀ <+l ksiku (step) dsr y i j j [ kk gS
A (t S
l sfp=k esa
fn[ kk; k x; k gS) i fg; sdksl ksi ku i j p<+ kusek=k dsfy ; s, d vpj cy i fg; sdsi `"B i j l r r (continuous constant
force) dk; Z j r gS A dkxt dsi `"B l svfHky Ec fn' kk esa(perpendicular to the plane of the paper)fcUnqQ l st kus
oky hv{k dsl ki s{k cy vk?kw . kZ ekfu; sA fuEu esa
sl sdkS
u¼ l k½l si zd Fku l ghgS ?
Q
P
R
X
(A) ; fn fcUnqP i j Li ' khZ

; cy (tangentially force) y xk; k t k; r c t S
l si fg; k l ksiku i j p<+
sxk oS
l s l r r ?kVsxkA
(B) ; fn fcUnqS i j Li ' khZ
; cy y xk; k t k; r c   0 gSfdUr qi fg; k l ksiku i j dHkhHkh ughap<+
sxkA
(C) ; fn fcUnqP i j i fg; sdhi fj f/k l svfHky Ec fn' kk esacy y xk; k t k; r c  ' kw
U; j gsxkA
(D) ; fn fcUnqX i j i fg; sdhi fj f/k l svfHky Ec fn' kk (normal direction) esacy y xk; k t k; r c  vpj j gsxkA
Sol. C, D
9. A right uniform bar AB of length L is slipping from its vertical position on a frictionless floor (as
shown in the figure.) At some instant of time, the angle made by the bar with the vertical is .
Which of the following statements about its motion is/are correct?
O
(A) When the bar makes an angle  with the vertical, the displacement of its midpoint from the
initial posiiton is proportional to (1–cos)
(B) The midpoint of the bar will fal vertically downward
(C) Instantaneous torque about the point in contact with the floor is proportional to sin 
(D) The trajectory of the point A is a parabola
, d L y EckbZdk n`<+n.M (rigid bar) AB vi uhÅ/okZ /kj fLFkfr l s?k"kZ

. kghu vuq Hkw
fed r y (frictionless horizontal
surface) i j fp=kkuq
l kj fQl y j gk gS
A l e; dsfdl h{k.k i j naM+} kj k Å/okZ/kj l scuk; k dks.k  gS
a
A fuEu esal sdkS
ulk
(l s
) iz
d Fku l ghgS
@gSa
\
O
(A) t c na
MÅ/okZ
/kj l s dks.kcukr kgSr c na
Mdse/; fcUnqdkfoLFkki u ml dsvkj a
fEHkd fLFkfr l s(1–cos) dsl ekuq
i kr h
gS
A
(B) na
M dk e/; fcUnqÅ/okZ
/kj uhpsdhvksj (vertically downward) fxj sxkA
(C) na
M+vkS
j Hkw
r y dsLi ' kZfcUnqdspkj ksar j Q r kR{kf.kd cy k?kw
. kZ(Instantaneous torque) sin  dsl ekuq
i kr h gS
(D) fca
nqA dk i ziFk i j oy f; d (parabolic path) gS
A
9. A,B,C
Centre of mass will fall vertically downwards as N & mg are in vertical direction
L L
Displacement of com = – cos  y
2 2
L
= (1 – cos ) A(x,y)
2 L/2
L
B = mg sin  C1
2
C2
L L/2 mg
x= sin  N
2
& y = L cos 
x
x2 y2 O
sin2 + cos2 = 1  + =1
L 
2
L2
2
 
10. The instantaneous voltages at three terminals marked X, Y and Z are given by
Vx = V0 sin t,
 2 
VY = V0 sin  t  3  and
 
 4 
VZ = V0 sin  t 
 3 
An ideal voltmeter is configured to read rms value of the potential difference between its termi-
nals. It is connected between points X and Y and then between Y and Z. The reading(s) of the
voltmeter will be
(A) independent of the choice of the two terminals
rms rms 1 rms 3

(B) Vxy  V0 (C) Vyz  V0 (D) Vxy  V0
2 2
10. r hu VfeZ
uy ksadsfcUnq
v ksaX, Y , oaZ dsr kR{kf.kd oksYVr k (instantaneous voltage) nhxbZgS
Vx = V0 sin t,
 2 
VY = V0 sin  t  3  vkS
j
 
 4 
VZ = V0 sin  t  3 
 
, d vkn' kZoksYVeki h(ideal voltmeter) nksfcUnq v ksadsfoHkokUr j dkvkj , e , l (root mean square, Vrms) eku nsrk
gSA ; g oksYVeki h fcUnqX , oaY l st ksM+
k t kr k gSfQj Y , oaZ l st ksM+k t kr k gS
A bl oksYVeki hdk eki u gksxk@gksxsa
A
(A) fdl hHkhnksfcUnq
v ksadsp; u i j fuHkZ
j ughadj r k
rms rms 1 rms 3

(B) Vxy  V0 (C) Vyz  V0 (D) Vxy  V0
2 2
10. A,D
  2        
vxy = vy – vx = v0 sin t  3   sin t  = v0 2 cos t  3  sin 3 
        
3
 3 v0 cos (t + /3)  vxy, RMS
=
2
v0  vyz = vz – vy
  4   2 
= v0 sin t  3   sin t  3  = v0 2 cost   sin / 3
    
3 v0 cos (t + )
y
11. A uniform magnetic field B exists in the region Region 1 Region 2 Region 3
3R
between x = 0 and x  (region 2 in the
2
figure) pointing normally into the plane of the
p ap er. A part i c l e w i t h charge + Q and
momentum p directed along x-axis enters
O
region 2 from region 1 at point P1 (y=–R). Which x
of the following option(s) is/are correct?
+Q P1
(y=-R)
2P
(A) For B  , the particle will re-enter region 1
3QR
3R/2
8 P
(B) For B  , the particle will enter region 3 through the point P2 on x-axis
13 QR
(C) For a fixed B, particles of same charge Q and same velocity v, the distance between the point
P1 and the point of re-entry into region 1 is inversely proportional to the mass of the particle.
(D) When the particle re-enters region 1 through the longest possible path in region2, the mag-
nitude of the change in its linear momentum between point P1 and the farthest point from y-axis
is P / 2 .
y
11. , d l eku pq
Ecdh; {ks=k (uniform magnetic field) B Region 1 Region 2 Region 3
3R
dkxt dsr y dsvfHky Ec fn' kk esax = 0 , oax  ds
2
chp ds{ks=k (fp=k esaregion 2) esal oZ =k (t S
l sfd fp=k esa
fn[ kk; k gS
), mi fLFkr gSA , d d.k ft l dk vkos'k +Q , oa
l aosx p gS ] og x- v {k d s v uqfn' k {ks=k 2 esa fcUnq O
P1 (y=–R) i j i z os'k dj r k gS
A fuEu esal sdkS
u l k (l s) x
dFku l ghgS
@gS
a
\ +Q P1
2P (y=-R)
(A) B  dsfy , ] d.k {ks=k 1 (region 1) esai q
u%i zos'k dj sxkA
3QR
3R/2
8 P
(B) B  dsfy , d.k {ks=k 3 (region 3) esax--v{k i j fcUnqP2 l si zos'k dj sxkA
13 QR
(C) fu; r B dsfy ,, dl eku vkos'kQ , oa, d l eku osx v oky sd.kksadsfy , fcUnqP1 , oa{ks=k 1 (region 1) esai q
u%i zos'k
fcUnqdhnw
j hdk va
r j d.kksadsnzO; eku dsO;qRØekuqi kr hgS
A
(D) t c d.k l cl sy Ecsl EHkoi Fk l s{ks=k 2 (region 2) l s{ks=k 1 (region 1) l si q
u%i zos'k dj r k gS
] r c fcUnqP1 vkS
j y-
v{k l sl cl snw
j fcUnqdsfy , j sf[ kd l a
osx dsi fj ek.k esacny ko P / 2 gS
A
11. A,B
To, enter in region (i)
mv mv 3R
r 
qB qB 2
p 3R P
r  
qB 2 qB
r
qB 2
 
P 3R r
2P
 B
3qR d
mv 3R

qB 2
Bq 2

P 3R
2P
B
3qR
d 3R / 2  qB  3R  q  8 P  24 12
sin  =  sin     = 
r mv 2P  13 qR  26 13
R
r (1–Cos ) = R  1 – Cos  =
r
RqB qR 8 P
1 – Cos  =  1 – Cos  = 
P P 13 QR
8 8 5
1 – Cos  =  Cos  = 1   Cos  =   = 
13 13 13
12. Two coherent monochromatic point sources S1 and S2 of wavelength  = 600 nm are placed
symmetrically on either side of the center of the circle as shown. The sources are separated by a
distance d = 1.8mm. This arrangement produces interference fringes visible as alternate bright
and dark spots on the circumference of the circle. The angular separation between two consecu-
tive bright spots is .Which of the following options is/are correct?
P1
P2
S1 S2
d
(A) The angular separation between two consecutive bright spots decreases as we move from P1
to P2 along the first quadrant
(B) At P2 the order of the fringe will be maximum
(C) A dark spot will be formed at the point P2.
(D) The total number of fringes produced between P1 and P2 in the first quadrant is close to 3000.
12. nksdy kl a
c/k , do.khZ(coherent monochromatic) fca nqL=kksr S1 , oaS2, ft udhr j a x nS/; Z = 600 nm gS, d oÙ̀k
dsdsanzdsnksuksavkS j l efer voLFkk esafLFkr gS(t S l sfp=k esafn[ kk; k x; k gS
)A L=kks
r S1 , oaS2 dschp dhnw j hd = 1.8
mm gS A bl O ; oLFkk } kj k O; fr fdj .kfÝUt sa(interference fringes) i zfr or hZnhIr , oavnhIr fpfÙk; ksa(spots) ds: i esa
, d oÙ̀k dhi fj f/k i j fn[ kr hgS A  nksØekxr nhIr fpfÙk; ksadschp dhdks.kh; nw j h(angular separation between
two consecutive bright spots) gS A fuEu esal sdkSu l k (l s) i zd Fku l ghgS@gSa
\
P1
P2
S1 S2
d
(A) i zFke oÙ̀ki kn esaP1 l sP2 r d t kusesanksØekxr nhIr fpÙkh; ksadschp dhdks.kh; nw
j h?kVr hgS
A
(B) P2 i j fÝUt ksadk Øe mPpr e gksxkA
(C) P2 i j , d vnhIr fcUnqcusxkA
(D) P1 , oaP2 dschp dsi zFke oÙ̀ki kn (first quadrant) esadq
y dj hc 3000 fÝUt sacusxhA
12. B,D
d cos  = n
th
3000
n S1 S2
cos  =
d
for n = 0
 = 90°
As cos varies by same value, we can see that reperation between values of  increases.
90°
At p2 d cos = n  d = n
d
n= = 3000 (max order) bright frigne

13. A point charge +Q is placed just outside an imaginary hemispherical surface of radius R as shown
in the figure. Which of the following statements is/are correct?
+Q
(A) The circumference of the flat surface is an equipotential

(B) The component of the electric field normal to the flat surface is constant over the surface.
Q
(C) Total flux through the curved and the flat surfaces is 
0
Q  1 
(D) The electric flux passing through the curved surface of the hemisphere is  2 1  
0  2
13. /kukRed fcUnqvkos'k +Q , d dkYi fud v/kZ xksy h; i `"B ft l dhf=kT; k R gS

] dsckgj j [ kk gS(t S
l k fd fp=k esafn[ kk; k x; k
gS)A fuEu es
al sdkSu l k (l s) i zd Fku l ghgS
@gS a
\
+Q
(A) l er y i `"B dhi fj f/k , d l efoHko i `"B (equipotential surface) gS

A
(B) fo| q
r {ks=k dk l er y i `"B l svfHky fEcr ?kVd i w
j si `"B i j vpy j gsxkA
Q
(C) ofØr , oal er y i `"B l sxq
t j usoky k dq
y ¶y Dl  gS
A
0
Q  1 
(D) v/kZ
xksy h; ofØr i `"B l sxq r ¶y Dl (electric flux) dk eku  2 1 
t j usoky sfo| q  gS
A
0  2
13. A,D
(A) As distance of energy point is same from the charge
Q
KQ
(B) E =
(R sec )2
Now, component  to the flat surface, R
E1 = E cos 
KQ KQ
= cos  = 2 cos3 
(R sec )2 R
E
qen KQ
Total flux =  = 0 (as qen = 0) (R sec )2
0
Flux through flat surface
 1 
= 2 (1 – cos )   = 2 1  
 2
R
So, flux through flat surface,
qQ R
1 = 4 × 
0
Q 21  1  Q 
1 
1 

1 =     1 = 2
4   2  0  2
 flux through curved surface
Q  1 
2 = – 2 1   [1 + 2 = 0]
0  2
14. A source of constant voltage V is connected to a resistance R and two ideal inductors L1 and L2
through a switch S as shown. There is no mutual inductance between the two inductors. The
switch S is intially open. At t = 0, the switch is closed and current begins to flow. Which of the
following options is/are correct?
S
R
+ V
– L1 L2
V
(A) At t = 0, the current through the resistance R is
R
(B) The ratio of the currents through L1 and L2 is fixed at all tmes (t>0)
V L1
(C) After a long time, the current through L2 will be R L  L
1 2
V L2
(D) After a long time, the current through L1 will be R L  L
1 2
14. nksvkn' kZi zsjd (ideal inductor) L1 , oaL2 vkS j , d i zfr j ks/k (resistance) R dks, d vpy oksYVr k V dsL=kksr l s, d
fLop S } kj k t ksM+ kt kr k gS(t S
l k fp=k esafn[ kk; k x; k gS
)A L1 , oaL2 dschp vU ; ksU; i zsjdRo (mutual inductance) ugha
gS A i zkj EHk esafLop S [ kqy k gS
A l e; t = 0 i j fLop ca n fd; k t kr k gSvkS j /kkj kcguh' kq : gksrhgS
A fuEu esal sdkS
u l k(l s)
i zd Fku l ghgS @gSa
\
S
R
+ V
– L1 L2
V
(A) t = 0 i j i zfr j ks/k R esai zokfgr /kkj k
R
(B) L1 , oaL2 esai zokfgr /kkj k dk vuq
i kr gj l e; (t>0) fu; r j gr k gS
A
V L1
(C) nh?kZ
d ky dsckn L2 esai zokfgr /kkj k R L  L gksxhA
1 2
V L2
(D) nh?kZ
d ky dsckn L1 esai zokfgr /kkj k R L  L gksxhA
1 2
14. B,C,D
 di1 
V – i R – L1  dt  = 0
 
 di2 
Also, V – i R – L2  dt  = 0
 
 di1   di2 
from above L1  dt  = L2  dt 
   
i1 i2
L1  di
0
1 = L2  di
0
2
L1i1 = L2i2
i1 L2
i2 = L1 (fixed)
V
i1 + i2 = ....(i)
R
Also, L1i1 = L2i2 ....(ii)
V  L2 
i1 =  
R  L1  L 2 
V  L1 
i2 =  
R  L1  L 2 
SECTION - 3
PARGRAPH - I
Consider a simple RC circuit as shown in figure 1.
Process-1: In the circuit the switch S is closed at t = 0 and the capcitor is fully charged to voltage
V0 (i.e., charging continues for time T >> RC). In the process some dissipation (ED) occurs across
the resistance R. The amount of energy finally stored in the fully charged capacitor is EC.
v0
Process-2: In a different process the voltage is first set set to and maintained for a charging
3
2v0
time T >> RC. Then the voltage is raised to without discharging the capacitor and again
3
maintained for a time T >> RC. The process is repeated one more time by raising the voltage to
V0 and the capacitor is charged to the same final voltage V0 as in process 1.
These two processes are depicted in figure 2
, d l k/kkj .k RC i fj i Fk dksnsf[ k; s] t S
l k fp=k 1 (figure 1) esan' kkZ
; k x; k gS
A
i zØe -1 (Process-1): t = 0, i j fLop S } kj ki fj i Fk i w . kZfd; kt kr k gS, oal a /kkfj =k i w
. kZ: i l soksYVr kV0 l svkosf' kr
gkst kr k gS
A (T >> RC l e; r d vkos"k.k py r k j gr k gS )A bl i z Øe esai zfr j ks/k R ds} kj k dq N fo| qr mt kZ{k; (energy
dissipated), E0 gksr hgS
Ai w
. kZ: i l svkosf' kr l a
/kkfj =kesal a
fpr mt kZ(stored energy in a charged capacitor) dk
eku EC gS A
v0
Øe-2 (Process-2): , d vy x i zØe esai gy s
i z+ oksYVr k dksvkosf' kr l e; T >> RC dsfy , vuq
j f{kr fd; k t kr k
3
2v0
gS
A r c fcuk l a
/kkfj =k vkos'k fol t Z
u ds] l e; dksT >> RC dsfy , vuq
j f{kr dj dsoksYVr k dks r d c<+
k; k t kr k gS
A
3
oksYVr k dksV0 r d c<+ kusdsfy , ; g i zØe , d vkS
j ckj nksgj k; k t kr k gS
Al a
/kkfj =k dksva
fr e oksYVr k V0 (t S
l k fd i zØe 1
esagS) r d vkosf' kr fd; k t kr k gS
A
; snksuksi zØe fp=k 2 (figure 2) esafn[ kk, x, gSA
V
Process1
V0
S
2V0/3
Process2
R T>>RC
V0/3
+
V C
T 2T t
Figure 1 Figure 2
15. In process 2, total energy dissipated across the resistance ED is -
1 2 1  1 CV 2  1
(A) ED = 3  2 CV0  (B) ED = 0 (C) ED = 3 CV02 (D) ED = CV02
  3 2  2
15. i zØe 2 dsnkS
j ku i zfr j ks/k ds} kj k dq
y {k; mt kZED gS&
1 2 1  1 CV 2  1
(A) ED = 3  CV0  (B) ED = 0 (C) ED = 3 CV02 (D) ED = CV02
2  3 2  2
15. B
Total energy dissipated
 1  v 2  1
ED = E1 + E2 + E3 =  c  0    3 = CV02
2  3   3
16. In process 1, the energy stored in the capacitor EC and heat dissipated across resistance ED are
related by -
1
(A) EC = ED (B) EC = ED ln 2 (C) EC = 2ED (D) EC = E
2 D
16. i zØe 1 esal a
/kkfj =k esal a
fpr mt kZEC vkS
j i zfr j ks/k R } kj k mt kZ{k; ED esal a
ca
/k gS&
1
(A) EC = ED (B) EC = ED ln 2 (C) EC = 2ED (D) EC = E
2 D
16. A
Energy stored in capacitor,
1
EC = CV2
2
Energy dissipated in the resistance,
ED = EC (by theory)
Paragraph - 2
One twirls a circular ring (of mass M and radius R) near the tip of one's finger as shown in figure
1. In the process the finger never loses contact with the inner rim of the ring. The finger traces
out the surface of a cone, shown by the dotted line. The radius of the path traced out by the point
where the ring and the finger is in contact is r. The finger rotates with an angular velocity 0. The
rotating ring rolls without slipping on the outside of a smaller circle described by the point where
the ring and the finger is in contact (Figure2). The coefficient of friction between the ring and the
finger is  and the acceleration due to gravity is g.
, d oÙ̀kkdkj oy ; (circular ring) (nzO
; eku M , oaf=kT; kR) , d ma
xy hdsi fj r %/kq
zr?kw
. kZ
u dj r kgS(t S
l kfp=k1 (figure
1) esan' kkZ; k x; k gS
) bl i z Øe esamaxy hoy ; dsva r fj d i `"B l sges'kk Li ' kZdj r hgS
A maxy h, d ' kad q(cone) dsi `"B dk
vuq j sf[ k; i Fk dk vuq l j .k dj r hgS
]tSl sdhfcUnq fdr j s[kk } kj k n' kkZ
; k x; k gS
A maxy h, oaoy ; dsLi ' kZfca nqdsvuq j sf[ k;
i Fk dhf=kT; k r gS A ma xy hdks.kh; osx 0 l s?kw. kZ
u dj j ghgS A oy ; r f=kT; k oky soR̀r dsckgj hi `"B i j fQl y u j fgr ?kw . kZ
u
(rolls without slipping) dj r k gS At S l k fp=k 2 (figure 2) esaoy ; , oama xy hdsLi ' kZfcUnq} kj k n' kkZ
; k x; kgS
A oy ;
, oama xy hdschp ?k"kZ . k xq
. kka
d (coefficient of friction) , , oaxq : Roh; Roj .k g gS
A
r
R
Figure 1 Figure 2
17. The minimum value of 0 below which the ring will drop down is -
3g g g 2g
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2(R  r) (R  r) 2(R  r) (R  r)
17. U; w
ur e 0 ft l dsde gksrsghoy ; fxj t k; sxk] og gS
3g g g 2g
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2(R  r) (R  r) 2(R  r) (R  r)
: 0744-2209671, 08003899588 | url : www.motioniitjee.com, :info@motioniitjee.com

17. B
V = (R–r)0
V = R
R = (R–r)0
f N
C2
V
IAoR
C1
mg
R
Nsin + f cos = mg
N cos – f sin = m02 (R–r)
sin    cos  g

cos    sin  20 (R  r)
sin  0 & cos  1
g
=
(R  r)
18. The total kinetic energy of the ring is
1 3
(A) M02 (R – r)2 (B) M02 (R – r)2 (C) M02 (R – r)2 (D) M02 R2
2 2
18. oy ; dhdq
y xfr t mt kZgS
1 3
(A) M02 (R – r)2 (B) M02 (R – r)2 (C) M02 (R – r)2 (D) M02 R2
2 2
Sol. A
1 1 (R  r)2
KE 
2

2

IAOR  2   2mR 2  20 R2
 0 (R  r) 
:   R 
 
2
K.E.  M20 R  R 
[CHEMISTRY]
19. The standard state Gibbs free energies of formation of C (Graphite) and C(diamond) at T = 298
K are
f G0[C(graphite)] = 0 kJ mol–1
f G0[C(diamond)] = 2.9 kJ mol–1
The standard state means that the pressure should be 1 bar, and substance should be pure at a
given temperature. The conversion of graphite [C(graphite)] to diamond [C(diamond)] reduces
its volume by 2×10–6 m3 mol–1. If C(graphite) is converted to C(diamond) isothermally at T = 298
K, the pressure at which C(graphite) is in equilibrium with C(diamond), is
[Useful information : 1 J = 1 kg m2s–2; 1 Pa = 1 kg m–1 s–2; 1 bar = 105 Pa]
(A) 29001 bar (B) 58001 bar (C) 14501 bar (D) 1450 bar
19. C (xz
sQkbV), C(ghjk) cuusdhT = 298 K i j ekud voLFkkk fxc dheq
Dr Åt kZ%
f G [C(xz
0
sQkbV)] = 0 kJ mol–1
f G0[C(ghj k)] = 2.9 kJ mol–1
ekud voLFkk dk er y c gSfd fn, x; sr ki eku i j nkc 1 bar gksuk pkfg, vkS j i nkFkZ' k) gksuk pkfg, A C (xzsQkbV) dk C
(ghj k) esai fj or Z
u bl dsvk; r u dks2×10 m mol ?kVkr k gS
–6 3 –1
A ; fn C(xzsQkbV) dk C(ghjk) esal er ki hi fj or Z
u fd; k
t k; sr ksog nkc ft l i j C (xszQkbV), C (ghjk) dsl kFk l kE; koLFkk esagS
] gS%
[mi ; ks
xhl w puk: 1 J = 1 kg m s ; 1 Pa = 1 kg m s ; 1 bar = 105 Pa]
2 –2 –1 –2
(A) 29001 bar (B) 58001 bar (C) 14501 bar (D) 1450 bar
Sol. C
At equilibrium
Ggraphite = DDiamond
G°graphite + Vgraphite . dp = G°Diamond + VDiamond. dp
(G°Diamond – G°graphite) = (Vgraphite – VDiamond) dp
2900J = 2 × 10–6m3 × (Pf – Pi)
29
Pf – Pi = × 108 Pa
a
2
29
Pf – Pi = × 108× 10–5
2
29000
= bar
2
29000
Pf = 1 + = 14501 bar
2
20. Which of the following combination will produce H2 gas ?

(A) Cu metal and conc. HNO3
(B) Zn metal and NaOH(aq)
(C) Au metal and NaCNI(aq) in the presence of air
(D) Fe metal and conc. HNO3
20. fuEufy f[ kr esal sdkS
ul k l a
; kst H2 xS
l mRikfnr dj sxk \
(A) Cu /kkr q, oal kUnzHNO3
(B) Zn /kkr q, oaNaOH(t y h; )
(C) Au /kkr q, oaNaCN(t y h; ) ok; qdh mi fLFkfr es a
(D) Fe /kkr q, oal kUnzHNO3
Sol. B
Zn + 2NaOH  Na2ZnO2 + H2
21. For the following cell,

Zn(s)|ZnSO4(aq)|| CuSO4(aq)|Cu(s)
When the concentration of Zn2+ is 10 times the concentration of Cu2+, the expression for G(in J
mol–1) is
[F is faraday constant; R is gas constant; T is temperature; E0 (cell) = 1.1V]
(A) 2303RT – 2.2F (B) –2.2F (C) 2.303RT + 1.1F (D) 1.1F
21. fuEufy f[ kr l S
y dsfy , ]
Zn(s)|ZnSO4(aq)|| CuSO4(aq)|Cu(s)
t c Zn2+ dhl kUnzrkCu2+ dhl kUnzrk l s10 xq
uk gSr ksG(in J mol–1) dsfy , O
;a
t d (expression) gS
a
A [F QS
j kMs
fu; r ka
d gS
; R xS
l fu; r ka
d ; T r ki eku vkS
j lS
y dsfy , E dk eku 1.1V gS
0
A]
(A) 2303RT – 2.2F (B) –2.2F (C) 2.303RT + 1.1F (D) 1.1F
Sol. A
2
Zn(s) + Cueq  Cu(s)
x 10x
G = –2 F (1.1) + RT ln (10)
= –2.2 F +2.303 RT
22. The order of basicity among the following compounds is
NH NH2
N NH HN N
H3C NH 2 H 2N NH
(I) (II) (III) (IV)
(A) IV > II > III > I (B) II > I > IV > III
(C) I > IV > III > II (D) IV > I > II > III
22. fuEufy f[ kr ; kS
fxdksaesa{kkj dr k dk Øe gS%
&
NH NH2
N NH HN N
H3C NH 2 H 2N NH
(I) (II) (III) (IV)
(A) IV > II > III > I (B) II > I > IV > III
(C) I > IV > III > II (D) IV > I > II > III
Sol. D
NH 1
NH2—C—NH 2
2 3
The electron density (1) N is very large because due to resonance electrondensity
23. Pure water freezes at 273 K and 1 bar. The addition of 34.5 g of ethanol to 500 g of water changes
the freezing point of the solution. Use the freezing point depression constant of water as 2 K kg
mol–1. The figures shown below represent plots of vapour pressure (V.P.) versus temperature (T).
[Molecular weight of ethanol is 46 mol–1]
Among the following, the option representing change in the freezing point is
1 Wa t 1 Wa ter
er
e
e
V.P./bar
V.P./bar
Ic
Ic
l
Wa ano
te e rh
r +e e r+
(A) rha
n ol (B) Wat
270 273 270 273

T/K T/K
Wa ter 1 Wa t
1 er
e
V.P./bar
V.P./bar
Ic
Ic
ol
r han Wa
e r+e te r +e
(C) Wat (D) rha
n ol
271 273 271 273

T/K T/K
23. ' kq
) t y 273 K vkS j 1 bar i j fgehHkw r (freezes) gksrk gSA 34.5 g , FksukWy dks500 g i kuh esaMky usi j foy ; u dk
fgekad cny t kr k gSA t y dk fgekad voueu fLFkj ka d (freezing point depression constant) 2 K kg mol–1 y sA
uhpsfn[ kk, fp=kok"i nkc (V.P.) dksr ki eku (T) dsfo: ) vky s[kksadksfu: fi r dj r sgS
a
AfuEufy f[ kr esal sfodYi t ksfgeka
d
esacny ko dksfu: fi r dj r k gS
] gS
a[, FksukW
y dk vk.kfod Hkkj 46 mol ] –1
1 Wa t 1 Wa ter
er
e
e
V.P./bar
V.P./bar
Ic
Ic
l
Wa ano
te e rh
r +e e r+
(A) rha
n ol (B) Wat
270 273 270 273

T/K T/K
Wa ter 1 Wa t
1 er
e
e
V.P./bar
V.P./bar
Ic
Ic
ol
r han Wa
e r+e te r +e
(C) Wat (D) rha
n ol
271 273 271 273

T/K T/K
Sol. B
Tf = i kf × m
nethanol
=1×2× W × 1000
H2O
34.5
=2× × 1000
46  500
34.5  2 69
= = =3
23 23
24. The order of the oxidation state of the phosphorus atom in H3PO2, H3PO4, H3PO3, and H4P2O is:-
(A) H3PO4> H3PO2 > H3PO3 > H4P2O6 (B) H3PO2> H3PO3 > H4P2O6 > H3PO4
(C) H3PO3> H3PO2 > H3PO4 > H4P2O6 (D) H3PO4> H4P2O6 > H3PO3 > H3PO2
24. H3PO2, H3PO4, H3PO3, vkS
j H4P2O esaQksLQksjl i j ek.kq
hvkW
Dl hdj .k voLFkk dk Øe gS
%
&
(A) H3PO4> H3PO2 > H3PO3 > H4P2O6 (B) H3PO2> H3PO3 > H4P2O6 > H3PO4
(C) H3PO3> H3PO2 > H3PO4 > H4P2O6 (D) H3PO4> H4P2O6 > H3PO3 > H3PO2
Sol. D
5 4 3 1
H3 PO4 > H4 P2 O6 > H3 PO3 > H3 PO2
25. The major product of the following reaction is
OH
 i NaNO ,HCl,0 C
 2
ii aq.NaOH 
NH2
+
O Na OH
(A) (B)
N2Cl Cl
OH
N=N OH
(C) (D)
N=N
25. fuEufy f[ kr vfHkfØ; k dk eq
[ ; mRikn gS%
&
OH
i NaNO ,HCl,0 C

 2
ii aq.NaOH 
NH2
+
O Na OH
(A) (B)
N2Cl Cl
OH
N=N OH
(C) (D)
N=N
Sol. C
OH OH
(i)NaNO2, HCl, 0°C
NH 2
aq. NaOH
—
O O
N=N H
tautomerisation
OH
N=N
26. The correct statement(s) about surface properties is(are)

(A) Cloud is an emulsion type of colloid in which liquid is dispersed phase and gas is dispersion
medium
(B) The critical temperature of ethane and nitrogen are 563K and 126 K, respectively. The
adsorption of ethane will be more than that of nitrogen on same amount of activated charcoal at
a given temperature.
(C) Adsorption is accompanied by decrease in enthalpy and decrease in entropy of the system
(D) Brownian motion of colloidal particles does not depend on the size of the particle but depends
on viscosity of the solution.
26. i `"B xq
. kksa(surface properties) dsckj sesal ghdFku gS ¼gSa
½
(A) ckny , d beY' ku i z d kj dk dksy kbMgSft l esanzo i fj f{kIr i zkoLFkk (dispersed phase) gSvkS j xS
l i fj {ksi.k ek/; e
(dispersion medium) gS A
(B) , Fks u vkS j ukbVªkst u dsØkafr d r ki eku (Critical temperatures) Øe' k%563 K vkS j 126 K gSA , d fn; sx; s
r ki eku i j l fØf; r pkj dksy dhl eku ek=kk i j , Fksu dk vo' kks"k.k ukbVªkst u dhvi s{kk vf/kd gksxkA
(C) vf/k' kks "k.k (Adsorption), fudk; dh , UVªkW i h?kVusvkS j , UFksYi h ?kVusdsl kFk gksrk gS
A
(D) dks y kbMhd.kksadhczkÅuhxfr d.kksadsl kbt i j fuHkZ j ughagksrhi j Urqfoy; u dh' ; kur k(viscosity) i j fuHkjZ dj r hgS A
Sol. B, C
Theoritical
27. Compounds P and R upon ozonolysis produce Q and S, respectively. The molecular formula of Q
and S is C8H8O. Q undergoes cannizzaro reaction but not haloform reaction, whereas S undergoes
haloform reaction but not cannizzaro reaction.
 3
i O / CH Cl
(i) R 
iiZn / H O 
2 2
Q
2
(C8H8O)
 3
i O / CH Cl
(ii) R 
iiZn / H O 
2 2
S
2
(C8H8O)
The option(s) with suitable combination of P and R, respectively, is(are)
(A) H3C and H3C

CH3
(B) H3C and CH3
H3C
—CH3
CH 3
(C) and
H3C CH3
H3C
CH 3
CH 3 CH 3
(D) and
CH3
H3C H 3C
27. ; kS
fxd P vkSj R dsvkst ksuhdj .k(ozonolysis) dj usi j Øe' k%Q vkS j S, mRiUu gksrsgSA mRikn Q vkS
j S dkvkf.od l w
=k
C8H8O gS AQ dhdS fut kj ksavfHkfØ; k(cannizzaro reaction) gksrhgSi j Ur qgky ksQkseZvfHkfØ; k (haloform reaction)
ughagksrh] t cfd S dhgky ksQkseZvfHkfØ; k gksrh gSi j Ur qdS
fut kj ksvfHkfØ; k ughagksrh A
 3
i O / CH Cl
(i) R 
iiZn / H2O 
2 2
Q
(C8H8O)
i O3 / CH2Cl2
(ii) R 
iiZn / H2O  S
(C8H8O)
P vkS
j R dsmfpr l a
; kst u oky k fodYi Øe' k%gS
(gS
)
(A) H3C j H3C

vkS
CH3
(B) H3C vkS

j CH3
H3C
—CH3
CH 3
(C) vkS
j
H3C CH3
H3C
CH 3
CH 3 CH 3
(D) vkS
j
CH3
H3C H 3C
27. B, C
CH2
CH Ozonolysis
(B) H3C— H3C— —CH=O + H–C–H
O
(C8H8O)
2
It gives cannizaro rx but not
haloform rxn
CH2 O
Ozonolysis
C —CH3 + H–C–H
CH3
[C8H 8O] O
It gives haloform but not
n
Cannizaro rx .
CH3
Ozonolysis
(C) CH=O + CH3—CH=O
CH 3 CH3
[C8H 8O]
n
It gives Cannizaro rx but not
n
haloform rx
CH3 CH3 O O
Ozonolysis
C–CH3 + CH3–C–CH3
CH 3
[C8H 8O]
n
It gives haloform rx but not
n
Cannizaro rx
28. For the following compounds, the correct statement(s) with respect to nucleophilic substitution
reactions is (are)
CH 3 CH3
Br Br H 3C—C—Br Br
CH 3
(I) (II) (III) (IV)
(A) I and II follow SN2 mechanism

(B) Compound IV undergoes iniversion of configuration
(C) The order of reactivity for I, III and IV is : IV > I > III
(D) I and III follows SN1 mechanism
28. U; q
fDy vksfQfy d i zfr LFkki u vfHkfØ; kvksa(nucleophilic substitution reactions) dsl UnHkZesafuEufy f[ kr ; kS
fxdksads
fy , l ghdFku gS
¼
gSa
½
CH 3 CH3
Br Br H 3C—C—Br Br
CH 3
(I) (II) (III) (IV)
(A) I vkSj II SN2 fØ; kfof/k dk vuq l j .k dj r sgS

a
A
(B) ; kS
fxd IV dsfoU; kl (configuration) dk i zrhi u (inversion) gksrk gS
A
(C) I, III vkSj IV dsfy , vfHkfØ; k' khy r k dk Øe gS: IV > I > III
(D) I vkSj III SN1 fØ; kfof/k dk vuq l j .k dj r sgS
a
A
Sol. A, D
29. In a biomolecular reaction, the steric factor P was experimentally determined to be 4.5. The
correct option(s) among the following is/are :
(A) Experimentally determined value of frequency factor is higher than that predicted by Arrhenius
equation
(B) The value of frequency factor predicted by Arrhenius equation is higher than that determined
experimentally
(C) The activation energy of the reaction is unaffected by the value of the steric factor
(D) Since P = 4.5, the reaction will not proceed unless an effective catalyst is used
29. , d f} v.kq
d vfHkfØ; k ea sf=kfoe foU; kl h?kVd (steric factor) P dk i zk; ksfxd eku 4.5 fu/kkZ fj r fd; k x; kA fuEufy f[ kr
esal sl ghfodYi gS ¼
gS
a½%
(A) vkof̀Ùk ?kVd (frequency factor) dk i z k; ksfxd eku vkj ghfu; l l ehdj .k } kj k vuq
ekfur eku l sT; knk gS A
(B) vkj ghfu; l l ehdj .k } kj k vuqekfur eku vkof̀r ?kVd (frequency factor) dsi zk; ksfxd eku l sT; knk gS A
(C) f=kfoe foU ; kl h?kVd dseku l svfHkfØ; k dh l fØ; .k Åt kZ(activation energy) vi zHkkfor j gr h gS A
(D) D; ksa
fd P = 4.5 gS ] t c r d i zHkkohmRizsjd dk mi ; ksx uk fd; k t k, ] vfHkfØ; k vkxsughac<+ sxh
Sol. B, C
 A / Z exp
Steric factor(P) = A / Z theo
 
A = frea. factor
Z = Collision freq.
usually P < 1
 Aexp < Atheo. Assuming 'Z' to be same
Here P > 1
 Aexp > Atheo
30. The option (s) with only amphoteric oxides is(are) :

(A) Cr2O3, BeO, SnO, SnO2 (B) ZnO, Al2O3, PbO, PbO2
(C) NO, B2O3, PbO, SnO2 (D) Cr2O3, CrO, SnO, PbO
30. dsoy mHk; Øeh(amphoteric) vkW
Dl kbMksaoky k¼
oky s½fodYi gS
¼
gSa
½%
(A) Cr2O3, BeO, SnO, SnO2 (B) ZnO, Al2O3, PbO, PbO2
(C) NO, B2O3, PbO, SnO2 (D) Cr2O3, CrO, SnO, PbO
Sol. A, B
31. Among the following, the correct statement(s) is(are) :

(A) Al(CH3)3 has the three-centre two-electron bonds in its dimeric structure
(B) BH3 has the three-centre two-electron bonds in its dimeric structure
(C) The Lewis acidity of BCl3 is greater than that of AlCl3
(D) AlCl3 has the three-centre two-electron bonds in its dimeric structure
31. fuEufy f[ kr esal sl ghdFku gS
@gS
a%
(A) Al(CH3)3 dhf} r ; hl a
j puk(dimeric structure) esaf=kdsUnz& nksby sDVªkW
u vkca
/k gS
A
(B) BH3 dhf} r ; hl a
j puk (dimeric structure) esaf=kdsUnz& nksby sDVªkW
u vkca
/k gS
A
(C) BCl3 dhy q
bZ
l vEy r k AlCl3 l svf/kd gS
A
(D) AlCl3 dhf} r ; hl a
j puk (dimeric structure) esaf=kdsUnz& nksby sDVªkW
u vkca
/k gS
A
Sol. A, B, C
32. For a reaction taking place is a container in equilibrium with its surroundings, the effect of
temperature on its equilibrium constant K in terms of change in entropy is described by
(A) With increase in temperature, the value of K for endothermic reaction increases because
unfavourable change in entropy of the surroundings decreases
(B) With increase in temperature, the value of K for exothermic reaction decreases because
favourable change in entropy of the surroundings decreases
(C) With increase in temperature, the value of K for exothermic reaction decreases because the
entropy change of the system is positive
(D) With increase in temperature, the value of K for endothermic reaction increases because the
entropy change of the system is negative
32. i fj os'k (surroudings) dsl kFk l kE; koLFkk esa, d i k=k esagksj gh, d vfHkfØ; k dsfy , ] , UVªkW
i hesacny ko dsvuq
l kj bl ds
l kE; koLFkk fLFkj ka
d K i j r ki eku dsi zHkko dk o.kZ
u , sl sfd; k t kr k gS
A
(A) r ki eku c<+usdsl kFk] Å"ek' kks"kh (endothermic) vfHkfØ; k dsfy , l kE; koLFkk fLFkj ka
d K dk eku c<+
r k gSD; ksa
fd
i fj os'k dhi zfr dw
y ,a
VªkW
i h esacny ko ?kVr k gS
(B)r ki eku c<+ usdsl kFk] Å"ek{ksih(exothermic) vfHkfØ; k dsl kE; koLFkk fLFkj ka
d K dk eku ?kVr k gSD; ksa
fd fj os'k dh
vuq
dwy ,a VªkW
i hesacny ko ?kVr k gS
A
(C) r ki eku c<+
usdsl kFk] Å"ek{ksih(exothermic) dsl kE; koLFkk fLFkj ka
d K dk eku ?kVr k gSD; ksa
fd fudk; dh, a
VªkW
i hesa
cny ko /kukRed gS
(D)r ki eku c<+ usdsl kFk] Å"ek{ksih(endothermic) vfHkfØ; k dsl kE; koLFkk fLFkj ka
d K dk eku ?kVr kk gSD; ksa
fd i fj os'k
dhvuq dwy ,aVªkW
i hesacny ko ?kVr k gS
A
Sol. A, B, C
Paragraph-1
Upon heating KClO3 in the presence of catalytic amount of MnO2, a gas W is formed. Excess
amount of W reacts with white phosphorus to give X. The reaction of X with pure HNO3 gives Y
and Z.
v uq
PNsn-1
MnO2 dhmi fLFkfr es
aKClO3 dk r ki u dj usi j , d xSl W dhvkf/kD; ek=k l Qsn QkLQksjl dsl kFk vfHkfØ; k dj dsX
nsrhgS
A X dh' kq
) HNO3 dsl kFk vfHkfØ; k Y r Fkk Z nsrh gS
A
33. Y and Z are, respectively :
(A) N2O5 and HPO3 (B) N2O3 and H3PO4 (C) N2O4 and H3PO3 (D) N2O4 and HPO3
33. Y vkS
j Z Øe' k%gS
(A) N2O5 vkS
j HPO3 (B) N2O3 vkS
j H3PO4 (C) N2O4 vkS
j H3PO3 (D) N2O4 vkS
j HPO3
34. W and X are, respectively :
(A) O2 and P4O6 (B) O2 and P4O10 (C) O3 and P4O6 (D) O3 and P4O10
34. W vkSj X Øe' k%gS
(A) O2 vkS
j P4O6 (B) O2 vkS
j P4O10 (C) O3 vkS
j P4O6 (D) O3 vkS
j P4O10
Sol. 33 & 34.
MnO2
KClO3 KCl + O2
250°C
W
P4
2HPO3 N2O5 HNO3

+ P4O10
z y
X
33. A
[N2O5, HPO3]
34. B
[O2, P4O10]
Paragraph-2
The reaction of compound P with CH3MgBr (excess) in (C2H5)2O followed by addition of H2O gives
Q. The compound Q on treatment with H2SO4 at 0°C gives R. The reaction of R with CH3COCl in
the presence of anhydrous AlCl3 in CH2Cl2 followed by treatment with H2O produces compound S.
[Et in compound P is ethyl group]
(H3C)3C
CO2Et
Q R S
P
v uq
PNsn-2
(C2H5)2O es a; kS
fxd P dhCH3MgBr dh vf/kdr k dsl kFk vfHkfØ; k dsmi j kUr t y Mky usi j Q fey r k gSA ; kS
fxd Q,
H2SO4 dsl kFk0°C i j foos pu dj usi j R nsrk gSA CH2Cl2 esaR dhfut y h; AlCl3 dhmi fLFkfr esa CH3COCl dsl kFk
vfHkfØ; k dsmi j kUr t y Mky usi j ; kS
fxd S mRiUu gksrk gS
A [; kS
fxd P ea
sEt , fFky xq
zi gS
]
(H3C)3C
CO2Et
Q R S
P
35. The reaction, Q to R and R to S, are :
(A) Friedel-Crafts alkylation and Friedel-acylation
(B) Dehydration and Friedel-Crafts acylation
(C) Friedel-Crafts alkylation, dehydration and Friedel-Crafts acylation
(D) Aromatic sulfonation and Friedel-Crafts acylation
35. Q l sR r FkkR l sS vfH kfØ; k, agS%
(A) ÝhMy &Øk¶V , fYdy hdj .k vkS j ÝhMy &Øk¶V , sfl y hdj .k
(B) fut Z y hdj .k vkS
j ÝhMy &Øk¶V , sfl y hdj .k
(C) ÝhMy &Øk¶V , fYdy hdj .k] fut Z y hdj .k vkSj ÝhMy &Øk¶V , sfl y hdj .k
(D) , s
j kseS
fVd l YQksusl u vkSj ÝhMy &, sfl y hdj .k
Sol. B
CH3 CH 3 CH3 CH3 CH3
OH
CH3 CO2 Et (i) CH3mgBr (excess) CH 3 H2SO4/O C
O
(ii) H2O
(Q)
CH3 CH 3
O
CH3
CH3–C–Cl/AlCl3
H 3C—C
(R)
O
(R)
Q to R involve dehydration and R to S involve friedel craft acylation.
36. The product S is :

COCH3 H3COC
(H3C)3C CH 3 (H3C)3C H3C CH 3
(A) (B)
H3C HO3S
CH 3 O
(H3C)3C (H3C) 3C CH 3
(C) (D)
COCH3 COCH3
36. mRikn S gS%
COCH3 H3COC
(H3C)3C CH 3 (H3C)3C H3C CH 3
(A) (B)
H3C HO3S
CH 3 O
(H3C)3C (H3C) 3C CH 3
(C) (D)
COCH3 COCH3
Sol. C
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) Examination (2017) (Code - ) (Page # 29)
[MATHEMATICS]
37. How many 3 × 3 matrices M with entries from {0,1,2} are there, for which the sum of the
diagonal entries of MTM is 5 ?
(A) 135 (B) 198 (C) 162 (D) 126
37. , sl sfdr us3 × 3 vkO
;w
g M gSft udhi zfof"V; k¡ (entries) {0,1,2} esagS, oe~MTM dhfod.khZ
; i zfof"V; ksa(diagonal
elements) dk ; ks x 5 gS?
(A) 135 (B) 198 (C) 162 (D) 126
Sol. B
 a1 a2 a3 
 
M  a4 a5 a6 
ai  {0, 1, 2}
a7 a8 a9 
 a1 a4 a7   a1 a2 a7 
   
MTM  a2 a5 a8  a4 a5 a6 
a3 a6 a9  a7 a8 a9 
 dij (MTM) = (a12 + a42 + a72) + (a22 + a52 +a82) + (a32 + a62 + a92)
9
2
5= a
i1
i
where a  {0, 1, 4}
i
2
9! 9876
(I) 5ai = 1, 4ai = 0   = 126
5!4! 24
(II) 1ai = 1, 1ai = 2, 7ai = 0
9!
  9  8  72
7!1!1!
Total = 72 + 126 = 198
38. Three randomly chosen nonnegative integers x,y and z are found to satisfy the equation x + y +z
= 10. Then the probability that z is even, is
5 6 1 36
(A) (B) (C) (D)
11 11 2 55
38. ; g i k; k x; k gSfd ; knf̀PNd (randomly) : i l sp; fur r hu v_ .kkRed i w
. kkZ
a
d (nonnegative integers) x,y , oe~
z l ehdj .k x + y +z = 10 dksl a rq
"V dj r sgS
A r c z dsl e (even) gksusdhi zkf; dr k (probability) gS
A
5 6 1 36
(A) (B) (C) (D)
11 11 2 55
Sol. B
x + y + z = 10
11
C1  9C1  7C1  5C1  3C1  1
12
C2
36  2 6
= 
12  11 11
(Page # 30) JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) Examination (2017) (Code - )
39. The equation of the plane passing through the point (1,1,1) and perpendicular to the planes 2x
+ y – 2z = 5 and 3x – 6y – 2z = 7, is
(A) 14x + 2y – 15z = 1 (B) 14x – 2y + 15z = 27
(C) – 14x + 2y + 15z = 3 (D) 14x +2y + 15z = 31
39. l er y ksa2x + y – 2z = 5 , oe~3x – 6y – 2z = 7 dsy Ecor ~vkS
j fcUnq(1,1,1) l sxq
t j usokysl er y dkl ehdj .kgS
(A) 14x + 2y – 15z = 1 (B) 14x – 2y + 15z = 27
(C) – 14x + 2y + 15z = 3 (D) 14x +2y + 15z = 31
Sol. D
î ˆj kˆ

np  2 1 –2
3 –6 –2

np = (–14, –2, –15)
P : –14(x – 1) – 2(y – 1) – 15(z – 1)

P : –14x – 2y – 15z + 31 = 0
P : 14x + 2y + 15z = 31
1
 
40. If y = y(x) satisfies the differential equation 8 x  
9  x dy =  4  9  x  dx, x > 0 and
 
y(0) = 7 , then y = (256) =
(A) 3 (B) 16 (C) 9 (D) 80
1
 
40. ; fn y = y(x) vody uh; l ehdj .k (differential equation) 8 x  
9  x dy =  4  9  x  dx, x >
 
0 dksl a
rq
"V dj r k gS, oe~y(0) = 7 gS
] r c y = (256) =
(A) 3 (B) 16 (C) 9 (D) 80
Sol. A
4 9 x  t
1 1 1
 · dx  dt
2 4 9 x 2 9 x 2 x
 dy = dt
y=t+
y= 4 9 x 
y(0) = 7   
 y(256)  4  9  16
= 45
=3
1 1
41. If f: R  R is a twice differentiable function such that f"(x) > 0 for all x  R, and f   = , f(1)
2 2
= 1, then
1 1
(A) f'(1)  0 (B)  f ' 1  1 (C) f'(1) > 1 (D) 0  f ' 1 
2 2
41. ; fn f: R  R , d bl i zd kj dkf} vody uh; (twice differentiable) Qy u gSfd l Hkhx  R dsfy ; sf"(x) > 0, , oe~
1
f   = 1 , f(1) = 1 gS
] rc
2 2
1 1
(A) f'(1)  0 (B)  f ' 1  1 (C) f'(1) > 1 (D) 0  f ' 1 
2 2
Sol. C
f"(x) > 0  x  R
1 1
f    , f(1) = 1
2 2
1 1
f' 
2
LMVT
1
f 1  f  
2 1 
f'() = 1    ,1
1 2 
2
1 
f'() = 1     2 ,1
 
 f'(1) > 1
42. Let S ={1,2,3,.....9}. For k = 1,2,.....,5, let NK be the number of subsets of S, each containing
five elements out of which exactly k are odd. Then N1 + N2 +N3 + N4 + N5 =
(A) 126 (B) 252 (C) 210 (D) 125
42. ekukfd S ={1,2,3,.....9} gS Ak = 1,2,.....,5 dsfy ; s]ekukNK l eq Pp; S dsmu mi l eq
Pp; ksadhl ¡[ ; kgSft uesi zR; sd
mi l eq
Pp; esa5 vo; o gS, oe~bu vo; oksaesafo"ke vo; oksadhl ¡[ ; k k gS
A r c N1 + N2 +N3 + N4 + N5 =
(A) 126 (B) 252 (C) 210 (D) 125
Sol. A
S : {1, 2, 3,....... 9} k = 1, 2, ....... 5
N 1 + N2 + N5 + N4 + N5 =
N1  5 element in which is odd
4 5
N1 = 4C4  5C1  5
N2  3, even 2, odd
N2 = 5C2  4C3  40
N3 = 2 even + 3 odd
N2 = 5C3  4C2  60
N4 = 1 even + 4 odd
N2 = 4C1 · 5C4  20
N5 = 5 odd
N5  5C5  1
Total  Ni  126
   

43. Let O be the origin and let PQR be an arbitrary triangle. The point S is such that OP . OQ + OR.OS
       
= OR.OP + OQ.OS = OQ.OR + OP.OS Then the triangle PQR has S as its
(A) circmcentre (B) Incentre (C) Centroid (D) orthocenter
43. ekuk fd O ew y fcUnq(origin) gS, oe~PQR , d LoS fPNd f=kHkq
t (arbitrary triangle) gS
A fcUnqS bl i zd kj gSfd
           
OP . OQ + OR.OS = OR.OP + OQ.OS = OQ.OR + OP.OS r c fcU nqS f=kHkq
t PQR dk gS
(A) i fj or̀ dsUnz(circmcentre) (B) vU r %dsUnz(Incentre)
(C) dsUnzd (Centroid) (D) y EcdsUnz(orthocentre)
Sol. D
Q (q)
(p) P R (r )
           
p . q + r . s = r .p + q. s = q. r + p . s
       
(I) p .( q – r ) + s .( r – q ) = 0 (p – s ).( q – r ) = 0
   
p – s  q – r
     
p .( q – s ) + r ( s – q ) = 0 

    
( p – r )( q – s ) = 0  Orthocentre

    
p – r  q – s 
98 k 1
k 1
44. If I =    dx , then
k 1 k  
49 49
(A) I < I (C) I < loge99 (D) I > loge99
50 50
98 k 1
k 1
44. ; fn I =     
dx r c
k 1 k
49 49
(A) I < I (C) I < loge99 (D) I > loge99
50 50
Sol. B,C
98 k 1
(k  1)
I=  x(x  1)
dx
k 1 k
98  k 1  1 1  
I=  (k  1)    x – x  1  dx 
k 1  k   
98
k 1
=  (k  1) ( n x – n(x  1)k
k 1
98
=  (k  1) ( n(k  1) – n(k  2) – nk  n(k  1)
k 1
98 98 98
=  (k  1)( n(k  1) – k.nk) –  (k  1). nk  2 – k. nk  1 +   nk(k  1) –  nk 
k 1 k 1 k 1
(Difference series)
 2  (99)100 
 I = (99  n 99) + (–99  n 100 +  n2) + (  n 99) =  n  99 
 (100) 
For option (B) :

Now Consider (100)99 = (1 + 99)99
99
C98 (99)98  99 C99 (99)99
= 99
C0 + 99
C1(99) + 99
C2(99)2 + ..... + 99
C97(99)97 +  99
  99

(value (99) ) (value(99) )
2  (99)99
 10099 > 2.(99)99  <1
(100)99
2  (99)100
 < 99 (on multiplying by 99)
(100)99
 I <  n99
For option (C) :
98 k 1 98 k 1
k 1 (k  1)dx
Since,  (x  1)2
dx   x(x  1)
k 1 k k 1k
98
 1 
   k  2   I
k 1
(on integration)
1 1 1 1 
 3  4  5  ......  100   I

  
98 terms
98 1 1 1 1
 < + + + ..... + <I
100 3 4 5 100
49
I>
50
Hence option (C) is correct.
45. If the line x =  divides the area of region R = {(x,y)R2 : x3  y  x, 0  x  1} into two equal
parts, then
1 1
(A) 4 + 42 – 1 = 0 (B) 0    (C) 24 – 42 + 1 = 0 (D)   1
2 2
45. ; fn j s[kk x =  {ks=k (region) R = {(x,y)R2 : x3  y  x, 0  x  1} ds{ks=kQy dksnkscj kcj HkkxksaesafoHkkft r
dj r hgS
] rc
1 1
(A) 4 + 42 – 1 = 0 (B) 0    (C) 24 – 42 + 1 = 0 (D)   1
2 2
Sol. C,D
3
x
O 1
 1 1
 (x  x3 )dx  (x  x3 )dx
0 2 0
 1
 x2 x4  1  x2 x 4 
      
 2 4 0 2  2 4 0
 22  4  1  1 1  1 1
     .
 4  22 4 4 2
1
22 – 4 =
2
42 2
42  2 4  1 t=
4
1
Check 'D' U t=1±
2
1 1
2 = t 2 = 1 + , 2 = 1 –
2 2
1
2t2 – 4t + 1 = 0 1>>
2
sin2x 
46. If g(x) =  sin1  t  dt , then

sin x
     
(A) g '   = 2 (B) g'    = 2 (C) g '   = – 2 (D) g'    = – 2
2   2 2   2
sin2x 
46. ; fn g(x) =  sin1  t  dt , rc

sin x
     
(A) g '   = 2 (B) g'    = 2 (C) g '   = – 2 (D) g'    = – 2
2   2 2   2
Sol. Bonus
cos 2x  cos 2x  sin 2x 

 cos x cos x  sin x
47. If f(x) = , then
sin x sin x cos x
(A) f(x) attains its maximum at x = 0

(B) f(x) attains its mininum at x = 0
(C) f'(x) = 0 at exactly three points in ( – ,)
(D) f'(x) = 0 at more than three points in ( –, )
cos 2x  cos 2x  sin 2x 
47. ; fn f(x) =  cos x cos x  sin x

, rc
sin x sin x cos x
(A) x = 0 i j f(x) dk vf/kdr e (miximum) gS A

(B) x = 0 i j f(x) dk U ;w
ur e (minimum ) gS A
(C) ( – ,) esadsoy r hu fcUnqv ksai j f'(x) = 0 gS A
(D) ( –, ) esar hu l svf/kd fcUnq v ksai j f'(x) = 0 gS
Aa
Sol. A,D
f(x) = cos 2x[1] + cos 2x [cos 2x] + sin 2x [–sin 2x]
cos 2x = cos2x – sin2x
f(x) = cos22x – (1 – cos22x) + cos 2x
= 2cos2 2x + cos 2x – 1 (cos 2x = t)
= 2t + t – 1
2
1
f(x) = 2[t2 + 1/2 t] –
2
1
= 2[(t + 1/4)2 – 1/16] –
2
= 2[(t + 1/4)2] – 1/8 – 1/2
= 2(cos 2x + 1/4)2 – 5/8 Maxm when x = 0
f'(x) = –2sin 2x – 4 sin 2x = 0
= [sin2 x + 2 (2 sin 2x cos 2x)] = 0
sin2x [1 + 4 cos 2x] = 0
sin 2x = 0 cos 2x = –1/4

2x = 0, , 2 2 solution

x = 0, ,
2
4 solution
48. Let  and  be non-zero real numbers such that 2(cos – cos ) + cos cos = 1. then which of
the following is/are true ?
   
(A) tan    3 tan   = 0 (B) tan    3 tan   = 0
2  2 2 2
   

(C) 3 tan    tan   = 0 (D) 3 tan    tan   = 0
2
  2 2
  2
48. ekuk fd  , oe~ bl i zd kj dhv' kw
U; okLr fod l ¡[ ; k; sa(nonzero real numbers) gSfd 2(cos – cos ) + cos
cos = 1 r c fuEu es al sdkS
u l k¼ l s½l R; gS¼gS½\
   
(A) tan    3 tan   = 0 (B) tan    3 tan   = 0
2
  2 2
  2
   

(C) 3 tan    tan   = 0 (D) 3 tan    tan   = 0
2
  2 2
  2
Sol. A,B
2(cos – cos) + cos. cos = 1
2cos + coscos – 2cos = 1
2cos(2 + cos) = 1 + 2cos
 2  
 1  tan 2 
1  2 
 1  tan2  
1  2 cos   3 
cos = 
2  cos  2 
1  tan
2 2
2 
1  tan
2
  
1  tan2 1  tan2  2  2 tan2
2  2 2
2   
1  tan 2  2 tan2  1  tan2
2 2 2
 
1  tan2 3  tan2
2  2
 
1  tan2 3  tan2
2 2
 1 
1  tan2 1  tan2
2  3 2
2  1 
1  tan 1  tan3
2 3 2
1  
tan2  tan2
3 2 2
 
tan2  3 tan2
2 2
     
 tan 2  3 tan 2   tan 2  3 tan 2   0
  
1  x 1  1  x   1 
49. Let f(x) = cos   for x  1. Then
1 X 1  x 
(A) xlim
 1
f(x) does not exist (B) xlim
 1
f(x) = 0
(C) xlim
 1
f(x) = 0 (D) xlim
 1
f(x) does not exist
1  x 1  1  x   1 
49. ekuk fd x  1 dsfy ; s] f(x) = cos   rc
1 X 1  x 
(A) xlim
 1
f(x) dkvfLr R
o ughgS¼
does not exist) (B) xlim
 1
f(x) = 0
(C) xlim
 1
f(x) = 0 (D) xlim
 1
f(x) dk vfLr Ro ughagS(does not exist)
Sol. B,D
1 – x(1 |1 – x |)  1 
f(x) = cos  1 – x 
|1 – x |  
1 – (1  h)[1  h] 1
x  1+ lim cos  
h0 (h) h
–(h2  2h) 1

 lim cos  
h0 h h
 (2) × (–1, 1) does not exist

1 – (1 – h)[1  h] 1
x  1– lim cos  
h0 (h) h
 1 – (1 – h2 )  1
lim   cos  
h0
 (h)  h
 0
50. If f:R  R is a differentiable function such that f'(x) > 2f(x) for all x  R, and f(0) = 1, then
(A) f'(x) < e2x in  0,   (B) f(x) is increasing in  0,  
(C) f(x) is decreasing in  0,   (D) f(x) > e2x in  0,  

50. ; fn f:R  R bl i zd kj dk vody uh; (differentiable) Qy u gSfd l Hkh x  R dsfy ; sf'(x) > 2f(x), , oe~
f(0) = 1 gS ] rc
(A)  0,   es
af'(x) < e2x (B)  0,   es
af(x) o/kZ
eku (increasing) gS
A
(C)  0,   esaf(x) gkzkl eku (decreasing )gS
a (D)  0,   esa f(x) > e2x
Sol. B,D
f:RR
f' > 2f
dy
– 2y > 0 LDE
dx
If = e –2dx = e–2x
 dy 
e–2x  dx  – 2ye
e–2x > 0
 
d(ye–2x )
>0
dx
H = ye–2x  H' > 0

H(0) = 1 H 
H(x) = f(x) e–2x > 0  H

f(x) > 0 & f(x) is inc.
ln f > 2x + 
f(x) > e2x . k
f(0) > k
1>k
f(x) > e2x  2e2x.
Paragraph 1
   
Let O be the origin, and OX , OY , OZ be three unit vectors in the directions of the sides QR ,
 
RP , PQ , respectively, of a triangle PQR.
v uq
PNsn 1
     
ekuk fd O ew y fcUnq(origin) gS, oe~OX , OY , OZ Øe' k%f=kHkq
t PQR dhHkq
t k; saQR , RP , PQ , dhfn' kkvksaesa
r hu , dd l fn' k (unit vector) gS A
51. If the triangle PQR varies, then the minimum value of cos(p + Q) + cos(Q + R) + Cos(R +P) is
3 5 5 3
(A) (B) (C)  (D) 
2 3 3 2
51. ; fn f=kHkq
t PQR i fj or hZgS(if the triangle PQR varies) , r c cos(p + Q) + cos(Q + R) + Cos(R +P) dk
u; wur e eku (minimum value) gS
3 5 5 3
(A) (B) (C)  (D) 
2 3 3 2
Sol.
R
oy ox
P Q
P Q
oz
51. D
 cos ( – R) + cos( – P) + cos ( – Q)
 –[cosP + cosQ + cosR]
3 3
 cosP + cosQ + cosR   minm = –
2 2
 
52. OX  OY =
(A) sin(P + R) (B) sin(Q + R) (C) sin(P + Q) (D) sin2R
 
52. OX  OY =
(A) sin(P + R) (B) sin(Q + R) (C) sin(P + Q) (D) sin2R
Sol. C
   
| ox  oy | = | ox | | oy | sin (180 – R)
 
| ox | | oy | {sin R}
= (1) (1) sin ( – (P + Q))

= sin (P + Q)
Paragraph 2
let p ,q be integers and let  be the roots of the equaion, x2 – x – 1 = 0, where    . For n =
0,1,2,....., Let an = pn +qn
FACT : If a and b are rational nubers and a + b 5 = 0, then a = 0 = b..
v uq
PNsn 2
ekuk fd p ,q i w . kkZ
a
d gS, oe~ l ehdj .k x2 – x – 1 = 0 dsew y gS, t gk¡    gSA n = 0,1,2,....., dsfy ; sekuk
fd an = p +q gS
n n
A
r F; : ; fn a , oe~b i fj esa
; l ¡[ ; kvksa(rational nubers) gS, oe~a + b 5 = 0 gS ] r c a = 0 = b gSA
53. If a4 = 28, then p + 2q =
(A) 12 (B) 14 (C) 7 (D) 21
53. ; fn a4 = 28 gS
] r c p + 2q =
(A) 12 (B) 14 (C) 7 (D) 21
Sol. A
a4 = 28
a4 = p4 + q4 = 28
p(1  5)4  q(1  5)4  28.24
p(6  2 5)2  q(6  2 5)2  28.24
p(3  5)2  q(3  5)2  28.22
p(9  5  6 5)  q(9  5  6 5)  28.22
p(7  3 5)  q(7  3 5)  56
7(p + q) + (p – q) 3 5 = 56
p+q=8|p–q=0
p = 4, q = 4
 p + 2q = 4 + 8 = 12
54. a12 =
(A) a11+ 2a10 (B) a11 – a10 (C) 2a11 + a10 (D) a11 + a10
54. a12 =
(A) a11+ 2a10 (B) a11 – a10 (C) 2a11 + a10 (D) a11 + a10
Sol. D
x2 – x – 1 = 0
1 5
x=
2
a0 = p + q
a1 = p + q
a2 = p2 + q2
a2 = P( + 1) + q( + 1)
a2 = p + q + (p + q)
a2 = a1 + a0
a3 = p3 + q3
a3 = p(2 + ) + q(2 + )
a3 = (p2 + qb2) + p + q
a3 = a2 + a1
 an = an –1 + an – 2
[PHYSICS]
1. An infinite line charge of uniform electric charge density  lies along the axis of an electrically
conducting infinite cylindrical shell of radius R, At time t = 0, the space inside the cylinder is filled
with a material of permittivity  and electrical conductivity . The electrical conduction in the
material follows Ohm’s law. Which one of the following graphs best describes the subsequent
variation of the magnitude of current density j(t) at any point in the material?
j(t) j(t)
(A) (B)
(0, 0) t (0, 0) t
j(t) j(t)
(C) (D)
(0, 0) t (0, 0) t
1. , d csy ukdkj vuUr fo| q r pky d dop dhf=kT; kR gS A csy u dsv{k i j , d vuUr j s[kh; fo| q
r vkos'k fLFkr gS ] ft l dk, d
l eku j s[kh; ?kuRo  gS
A csy u dsvUnj dht xg dksl e; t = 0 i j , d i nkFkZl sHkj k t kr k gS , ft l dk i j kfo| q r ka
d  , oa
fo| q
r pky dr kgSAi nkFkZesafo| q
r vkos'kdhpky dr kvkse~dsfu; e (Ohm’s law) dki ky u dj r hgS Ai j or hZl e; esai nkFkZ
esafdl hHkhfcUnqi j fo| qr /kkj k ?kuRo j(t) dsi fj ek.k esai fj or Z
u dk l cl svPNk o.kZ
u dkSul k y s[kkfp=k dj r k gS ?
j(t) j(t)
(A) (B)
(0, 0) t (0, 0) t
j(t) j(t)
(C) (D)
(0, 0) t (0, 0) t
Sol. A
+ +
t

I  I0e RC
j(t)
(0, 0) t
It is discharging of cylindrical capacitor.
2. In a historical experiment to determine Planck’s constant, a metal surface was irradiated with
light of different wavelengths. The emitted photoelectron energies were measured by applying a
stopping potential. The relevant data for the wavelenght () of incident light and the correspond-
ing stopping potential (V0) are given below :
Given that c = 3 × 108 ms-1 and e= 1.6×10-19 C, Planck’s constant (in units of J s) found from such
an experiment is
(A) 6.0×10-34 (B) 6.4×10-34 (C) 6.6×10-34 (D) 6.8×10-34
Iy ka
d fLFkj ka
d fudky usdsfy , , d , fr gkfl d i z;ksx esa, d /kkr qdhl r g l svy x&vy x r j a
xnS
/; Zdsi zd k' k l si znhIr fd; k
x; kA mRl ft Zr i zd kf' kd by sDVªkW
u dhÅt kZdksfuj ks/khfoHko (stopping potential) y xkdj eki kx; kA mi ; ksx esay k; sx,
vki fr r dhr j axnS /; Z () , oal EcfU/kr fuj ks/khfoHko (V0) dsvka
d M+
suhpsfn; sx, gS :
i zd k' kdhxfr c = 3 × 108 ms-1 r Fkkby sDVªkW

u dkvkos'ke= 1.6×10-19 C fn; kx; kgS
A bl i z;ksx l sfudky sx, Iy ka
d
fLFkj kad (Js ek=kd esa
) dk eku gS&
(A) 6.0×10-34 (B) 6.4×10-34 (C) 6.6×10-34 (D) 6.8×10-34
Sol. B
C = 3 × 108 m/s
e = 1.6 × 10–19 C
 in m
E =  + eV
hc
    eV1
1
hc
   eV2
2
1 1
hc     eV1  eV2
 1 2 
 1 1 
 h  3  108    1.6  1019 [2 – 1]
 0.3  106 0.4  106 
 0.4  106  0.3  106 
 h  3  108    1.6  10
19
 0.3  0.4  1012 
1.6  109
 h  0.12  1012  6.4  1034 Js
3  108  0.1  106 
3. A water cooler of storage capacity 120 liters can cool water at a constant rate of P watts. In a
closed circulation system (as shown schematically in the figure), the water from the cooler is
used to cool an external device that generates constantly 3 kW of heat (thermal load). The
temperature of water fed into the device cannot exceed 30° C and the entire stored 120 litres of
water is initially cooled to 10 °C. The entire system is thermally insulated. The minimum value of
P (in watts) for which the device can be operated for 3 hours is
Cooler
Hot
Cold
(Specific heat of water is 4.2 kJ kg-1 and the density of water is 1000 kg m-3)
(A) 1600 (B) 2067 (C) 2533 (D) 3933
120 y hVj {ker k oky k i kuh dk , d dw y j l eku nj P watts l si kuh dksB.Mk dj l dr k gS A , d cUn i fj l a pkj .k esa
(t S
l kO ; oLFkkfp=kesan' kkZ
; kx; kgS A), dw y j dsi kuhl s, d ckgj h; a
=kdksB.Mkfd; kt kr kgS ] t ksges'kk3 kW Å"ekmRiUu
dj r k gSA; a
=k dksfn; k x; k i kuhdk r ki eku 30° C l sT; knk ughagksl dr k , oai w j k 120 y hVj i kuhi zkj EHk esa10 °C r d
B.Mkfd; kx; kgS Ai w
j kfudk; r ki j ks/khgS
A bl ; a=kdksr hu ?k.Vsr d pky wj [ kusdsfy ; sde l sde fdr uh' kfDr P (watts
esa
) dht : j r gS \
Cooler
Hot
Cold
(i kuh dh fof' k"V Å"ek = 4.2 kJ kg-1 vkS

j i kuhdk ?kuRo = 1000 kg m-3)
(A) 1600 (B) 2067 (C) 2533 (D) 3933
Sol. B
Rate of cooling = P watts
Thermal load = 3 kW
Capacity = 120 litres.
Initially cooled to 10°C
Max. Temp = 30°C
Time of operation = 3 hours
Q = msT
= 120 × 4.2 × 20 × 103
= 10080000
= 10080 × 103 J
Heat = 3 × 103 × 3600 ×3
= 32400 × 103
Heat extracted = (32400 – 10080) × 103 = 22320 × 103
Now :
P ×3 × 3600 = 22320 × 103
 P = 2067 Watts
4. A uniform wooden stick of mass 1.6 kg and length  rests in an inclined manner on a smooth,
vertical wall of height h(<) such that a small portion of the stick extends beyond the wall. The
reaction force of the wall on the stick is perpendicular to the stick. The stick makes an angle of
30° with the wall and the bottom of the stick is on a rough floor. The reaction of the wall on the
stick is equal in magnitude to the reaction of the floor on the stick. The ratio h/ and the frictional
force f at the bottom of the stick are (g = 10 ms-2)
h 3 16 3 h 3 16 3
(A)  , f= N (B)  , f= N
 16 3  16 3
h 3 3 8 3 h 3 3 16 3
(C)  , f= N (D)  , f= N
 16 3  16 3
1.6 kg æO
; eku vkS
j  y EckbZdh, dl eku y dMhdh, d Ma Mh, d fpduh[ kM+ hnhokj , ft l dhÅ¡pkbZh(<) gS ] i j vkur
r j hdsl sbl r j g l sj [ khx; hgSfd Ma Mhdk , d NksVk l k Hkkx nhokj l sÅi j fudy k gq v k gS
A MaMhi j nhokj dk i zfr fØ; k
cy Ma Mhdsy Ec: i esagS A MaMhnhokj dsl kFk 30° dk dks.k cuk j ghgSvkS j MaMhdk vk/kkj , d ?k"kZ. k oky ht ehu i j gSA
nhokj l sMaMhi j i zfr fØ; k r Fkk t ehu l sMaMhi j i zfr fØ; k dhek=kk l eku gS
A h/ dk vuq i kr , oaMa
Mhdsvk/kkj i j ?k"kZ .k
cy f gS A (g = 10 ms-2)
h 3 16 3 h 3 16 3
(A)  , f= N (B)  , f= N
 16 3  16 3
h 3 3 8 3 h 3 3 16 3
(C)  , f= N (D)  , f= N
 16 3  16 3
Sol. D
l
mg cos 60  R1 l  x 
2
l 1 R1
R1sin30°
 mg ·  R1 l  x 
2 2
mgl 2  R1cos30° 30° x
  l  x l
x
4 3 2
°
 3l  8l  8x 30
R2 h
5l l/2
 x  mg
8
h
cos 30 
lx f
3 h

2 5l
l
8
h 3 3
 
l 16
R1 = R2 (given)
R1cos30°=f
R1
 R 2  mg
2
3R1
 mg
2
2
R1  mg  R 2
3
f = R1cos30°
16
f 
3
Note : Considering the reaction force to be Normal reaction only.
P
5. A parallel beam of light is incident from air at angle  on the side PQ

of a right angled triangular prism of refractive index n  2 . Light
undergoes total internal reflection in the prism at the face PR when
 has a minimum value of 45°. The angle  of the prism is
(A) 15° (B) 22.5° n= 2
(C) 30° (D) 45° Q R
5. ok; ql svkr hi zd k' k dh, d l ekUr j fdj .k&i q

a
t (parallel beam) , d l edks.k f=kHkq t h; P
fi zTe (right angled triangular prism), ft l dk vi or Z uka

d n  2 gS ] dsPQ r y
i j  dks.k l svki fr r gksrhgS A t c  dk U; w
ur e eku 45° gSr ksi zd k' k dk fi zTe dhPR
l rg ij iw . kZvka
r fj d i j kor Z
u (total internal reflection) gksrk gS A fi zTe dk dks.k 
D; k gksxk\
(A) 15° (B) 22.5° n= 2
Q R
(C) 30° (D) 45°
Sol. A
45° 90° 1
30° 45°
sin c =
45° 2
 2
1 sin 45° = 2 sin r

1
= sin r r = 30°
2
 + 120° + 45° = 180°
 + 165° = 180°
 = 180° – 165° = 15°
6. A conducting loop in the shape of a right angled isosceles triangle of height 10 cm is kept, such
that the 90° vertex is very close to an infinitely long conducting wire (see the figure). The wire is
electrically insulated from the loop. The hypotenuse of the triangle is parallel to the wire. The
current in the triangular loop is in counterclockwise direction and increased at a constant rate of
10 As-1. Which of the following statement(s) is (are) true?
, d l edks.kh; f=kdks.k pky dh; Qa

nsdhÅ¡pkbZ10 cm gS, oabl dh nksHkq
t k, al eku gS
A bl Qa
nsdk l edks.kh; fca
nq, d
vua
r y EckbZdspky dh; r kj dscgq
r ut nhd bl r j g l sj [ kkx; kgSfd f=kdks.kdkd.kZpky dh; r kj dsl ekukUr j gS¼
tSlk
fd fp=k esan' kkZ
; k x; k gS
½r kj r Fkk Qa
nk, d nw
l j sl sfo| q
r j ks/khgS
A f=kdks.kh; Qa
nsesa/kkj k okekor Z
~fn' kk esa, d l eku nj 10
As–1 l sc<+
r hgS
A fuEufy f[ kr esal sdkS
ul k@dkS
ul sdFku l R; gS
@gS\
10cm
90º
(A) The induced current in the wire is in opposite direction to the current along the hypotenuse.
(A) r kj es
ai zsfj r /kkj k d.kZesa/kkj k dsfoi j hr fn' kk esagS
A
(B) There is a repulsive force between the wire and the loop.
(B) Qa
ns, oar kj dse/; i zfr d"khZcy gS
A
 0 
(C) The magnitude of induced emf in the wire is    volt
 
 0 
amUiUu emf dk i fj ek.k    volt gS
(C) r kj es S
 
 0 
(D) If the loop is rotated at a constant angular speed about the wire, an additional emf of   
 
volt is induced in the wire.
 0 
(D) ; fn Qa
nsdks, dl eku dks.kh; xfr l sr kj dsv{k i j ?kq
ek; k t kr k gSr c r kj esa   volt i fj ek.k dk vfr fj ä emf
 
i zsfj r gksrk gS
A
Sol. B,C
i = 10 A/sec–1
(2xdx) 10cm I I
I
I
x
dx
2x
0 i
d1 = (2xdx)
2 x
0.1

8 = 0 i dx
 0

0i
= (0.1)

 0.1  di  
e1 = 0   = 0
 dt
  
 2 1
M = di1 = di2
dt dt
If we consider
di1 di
= 2
dt dt
0
2 =

 Net force between the loop and the wire is repulsive
Iin
90°
i
F1
F1
i
F2
i
7. A length-scale () depends on the permittivity () of a dielectric material. Boltzman constant (kB),
the absolute temperature (T), the number per unit volume (n) of certain charged particles and
the charge (q) carried by each of the particles. Which of the following expression(s) for  is(are)
dimensionally correct?
, d ya
ckbZ eki () dhfuHkZ j r k] i j kfo| qr i nkFkZdsi j kfo| q
r ka
d () cksYVt eku fLFkj ka
d (kB), i j e r ki (T), , d vk; r u esa
dqN vkosf' kr d.kksadhl a
[ ; k (n) ¼ la [ ; k ?kuRo½r Fkk gj , d d.k dsvkos'k (q) i j gksrhgS A dsfy , fuEufy f[ kr esal sl gh
foeh; r k oky k dkS
ul k@dkS
ul sl w
=k gS
@gS
a
\
 nq2   kB T   q2   q2 
(A) l   k T  (B) l   2  (C) l   n2 / 3k T  (D) l   en1 / 3k T 
 B   nq   B   B 
Sol. B,D
() = M–1 L–3 T4 A2
[KBT] = [E] = [M1L2T–2]
n = [L–3]
q = [A1 T1]
8. Two loudspeakers M and N are located 20 m apart and emit sound at frequencies 118 Hz an 121
Hz, respectively. A car is initially at a point P, 1800 m away from the midpoint Q of the line MN
and moves towards Q constantly at 60 km/hr along the perpendicular bisector of MN. It crosses
Q and eventually reaches a point R, 1800 m away from Q, Let v(t) represent the beat frequency
measured by a person sitting in the car at time t. Let vP, vQ and vB be the beat frequencies
measured at locations P, Q and R, respectively. The speed of sound in air is 330 ms-1. Which of the
following statement(s) is (are) true regarding the sound heard by the person?
nksy kmMLi hdj M , oaN t ksfd , d nw l j sl s20 m dhnw j hi j gS] Øe' k%118 Hz , oa121 Hz dh/ofu mRl ft Z r dj r s
gS
a
A fcUnqP j s[kk MN dsl ef} Hkkt d y a
c i j fLFkr gSr Fkk MN dse/; fcUnqQ l s1800 m dhnw j hi j gS A , d dkj fcUnq
P l sfcUnqQ dhr j Q 60 km/hr dhfLFkfr xfr l spy uk i zkj EHk dj r hgS A dkj Q fcUnqdksi kj dj va r r ksxRok fcUnqR ds
vkxspy ht kr hgS ] t gkafcUnqR fcUnqQ l s1800 m dhnw j hi j gSA dkj esacS
Bk O
; fDr l e; t i j foLi a n & vkof̀r v(t)
eki r kgS
A fcUnqP, Q,R i j foLi a
n & vkof̀r Øe' k%vP, vQ, vR gSA /ofu dhgokesaxfr 330 ms gS -1
A dkj esacS BsO; fDr } kj k
lq
uhx; h/ofu dsckj sesafuEufy f[ kr esal sdkS
ul k@dkS
ul sdFku l R; gS
@gS
a
\
v(t)
Q
vQ
R
t
(A) The plot below represents schematically the variation of beat frequency with time
(B) The plot below represents schematically the variation of beat frequency with time
(C) vP + vR = 2vQ
(D) The rate of change in beat frequency is maximum when the car passes through Q
(A) uhpsfn[ kk; k x; k y s[ kkfp=k foLi a
n & vkof̀r dk l e; dsl kFk i fj or Z
u dhO ; oLFkk dksn' kkZ
r k gS
A
(B) uhpsfn[ kk; k y s
[ kkfp=k foLi a
n & vkof̀r dk l e; dsl kFk i fj or Z
u dhO ; oLFkk dksn' kkZ
r k gS
A
(C) vP + vR = 2vQ
(D) t c dkj Q fcU nqdksi kj dj r hgSr ksfoLi a n & vkof̀r dhnj esavf/kdr e i fj or Z u gksrk gSA
Sol. A,C,D
v0 v0
1800 m
M N
Q
f=118 Hz 20 m
121 Hz
q = 221 – 218 = 3 Hz
1800 m
v0
v0 60 km/hr
P
 v  v0   v  v0 
f1P  f1   & f2P  f2  
 v   v 
 v  v0   v  v0 
& f1Q  f1   & f2Q  f2  
 v   v 
So,
p  f2P  f1P
R  f2R  f1R
P  R   f2P  f2R    f1P  f1R 
= f2 (2) – f1 (2)
= 2 (f2 – f1)
= 2Q
P + R = 2Q
9. A plano-convex lens is made of a material of refractive index n. When a small object is placed 30
cm away in front of the curved surface of the lens, an image of double the size of the object is
produced. Due to reflection from the convex surface of the lens, another faint image observed at
a distance of 10 cm away from the lens. Which of the following statement(s) is(are) true?
, d l er y & mÙky y sa l dsi nkFkZdk vi or Zuka
d n gSA t c , d NksVhoLr qdksy a sl odzi`"V dsl keus30 cm dhnw j hi j
j [ kr sgS
ar ksml oLr qdhnq
xq
uhl kbt dk i zfr fcEc cur k gS
A mÙky i `"V l si j kor Z
u dsdkj .k y sa
l l s10 cm dhnw
j hi j , d
{kh.k i zfr fcEc Hkh cur k gS
ul k@dkS
ul sdFku l R; gS
a
\
(A) The refractive index of the lens is 2.5
(A) y sa
l dk vi or Z uka
d 2.5 gS A
(B) The radius of curvature of the convex surface is 45 cm
(B) mÙky i `"V dh oØr k f=kT; k 45 cm gS A
(C) The faint image is erect and real
(C) {kh.k i z
fr fcEc okLr fod , oal h/kk gS
A
(D) The focal length of the lens is 20 cm
(D) y sa
l dhQksd l nw j h20 cm gS A
Sol. A,D
For reflection
O = 30 cm
1 1 1
fm = 10 – 30
 fm = 15 cm  R = 30 cm
For lens
convex mirror
O 10 cm
v
m = –2 =  v = 24 = 60 cm
u
1 1 1 1 1 1
– =+ f  f = +  f2 = 20 cm
v u 2 2 60 30
1 1
 
f2 = (n – 1)  R 
1  1 
 = (n – 1)  
20  30 
3
n= +1
2
 n = 2.5
10. Highly excited states for hydrogen-like atoms (also called Rydberg states) with nucles charge Ze
are defined by their principal quantum number n, where n>>1. Which of the following statement(s)
is(are) true?
Ze ukfHkdh; vkos'kdsgkbMªkst u dhr j g dsi j ek.kqdhvR; f/kd mÙksft r voLFkk¼ ft l sfj M~cxZvoLFkkHkhdgr sgS
a
½dksml ds
eq[ ; dka
Ve vad n (n>>1) l si fj Hkkf"kr fd; k t kr k gS
A fuEufy f[ kr esal sdkSul kW@dkS ul sdFku l R; gS@gS
a
\
(A) Relative change in the radii of two consecutive orbitals does not depend on Z.
(A) nksØekxr d{kksadhf=kT; k dk vki sf{kr va r j (Relative change)Z dsÅi j fuHkZ j ughadj r k gS
A
(B) Relative change in the radii of two consecutive orbitals varies as 1/n.
(B) nksØekxr d{kksadhf=kT; k dk vki sf{kr va r j 1/n dsl ekuq i kr gksrk gS
A
(C) Relative change in the energy of two consecutive orbitals varies as 1/n3.
(C) nksØekxr d{kk dh Åt kZdk vki s f{kr va
r j 1/n3 dsl ekuq i kr gksrk gSA
(D) Relative change in the angular momenta of two consecutive orbitals varies as 1/n.
(D) nksØekxr d{kks adsdks.kh; l a
osx dk vki sf{kr var j 1/n dsl ekuq i kr gksrk gSA
Sol. A,B,D
orbital :
r
&  relative change
r
n2
rn  0.529
Z
n  12  n2

n2
n2  1  2n  n2

n2
1 2n
 
 n2
1
  dependent on n.
n
z2
En  13.6
n2
E
Re lative change =
E
1 1

n  12 n2

1
n2
n2  n2  1  2n n2
 2

n2 n  1 1
 1  2n

n  12
1  2n

n2  1  2n
1 2n
 
n2  1  2n n2  1  2n
Doesn’t match with ‘C’
nh
Ln 
2
L n  n  1 1
Relative change =  
L n n
11. A transparent slab of thickness d has a refractive index n(z) that increases with z. Here z is the
vertical distance inside the slab, measured from the top. The slab is placed between two media
with uniform refractive indices n1 and n2 (>n1), as shown in the figure. ray of light is incident with
angle i from medium 1 and emerges in medium 2 with refraction angle f with a lateral
displacement l.
n = constant
1
n(2)
z d
n2 = constant l 2
Which of the following statement(s) is(are) true?

(A)  is independent of n2 (B)  is dependent on n(z)
(C) n1 sin 2 = n2 sin f (D) n1 sin l = (n2 – n1) sinf
11. 'd' eksVkbZds, d i kj n' khZi ê dk vi or Z
uka
d n(z) dkeku z c<+ kusl sc<+r kgS
A ; gk¡z i ê dsvUnj Åi j hl r g l seki hx; h
Å/okZ/kj nwj hgS
A i ê dksnksek/; eksadschp j [ kk x; k gSft uds, d l eku (uniform) vi or Z uka
d n1 , oan2(>n1) gS ]t S lk
dhfp=kesan' kkZ; kx; kgS A; gk¡n1 vkSj n2 fLFkj (constant) gS Ai zd k' kdh, d fdj .kek/; e 1 l si ê i j i dks.kl svki fr r
gSr Fkk ek/; e esai kf' oZ
a
d foLFkki u (lateral displacement) l l svi or Z uka
d dks.k f i j fudfl r gksrhgS A
n = constant
1
n(2)
z d
n2 = constant l 2
fuEufy f[ kr esal sdkS

ul k@dkSul sdFku l R; gS
@gS
a
?
(A)  dk eku n2 i j fuH kZ
j ughadj r k gS
A (B)  dk eku n(z) i j fuH
kZ
j dj r k gS
A
(C) n1 sin 2 = n2 sin f (D) n1 sin l = (n2 – n1) sinf
Sol. A,B,C
(A) l is independent of n2.
(B) l is dependent on n (z) as the lateral displacement varies as z varies.
(C) This is always true
n1 sin i = n2 sin f
12. An incandesecent bulb has a thin filament of tungstgen that is heated to high temperature by
passing an electric current. The hot filament emits black - body radiation. The filament is
observed to break up at random location after a sufficiently long time of operation due to
non - uniform evaporation of tungsten from the filament. If the bulb is powered at constant
voltage, Which of the following statement(s) is(are) true?
, d r ki nhIr cYc dsr Ur qdksfo| q r /kkj k dsi zokg l smPPk r ki eku i j xj e dj usi j VaxLVu r Ur qdf̀".kdk fofdj .k
(black-body radiation) mR l ft Z
r dj r k gS
A ; g ns[kk x; k gSfd y a c l e; dsi z;ksx dsckn Va xLVu r Ur qesavl eku
ok"i hdj .k dsdkj .k r Ur qfdl h Hkh t xg l sVwV t kr k gSA ; fn cYc dksfo| q r ' kfä , d fLFkj oksYVr k i j nh x; h gSr ks
ul k@dkSul sdFku l R; gS @gSa\
(A) The temperature distribution over the filament is uniform
(A) r Ur qi j r ki eku dk for j .k , d l eku gS A
(B) The resistance over small sections of the filament decreases with time
(B) r U
r qdsNksa VsHkkxksadk i zfr j ks/k l e; dsl kFk de gksrk t kr k gS
(C) The filament emits more light at higher band of frequencies before it breaks up
(C) VwVusl si gy sr Ur qmPp vkor̀ hi V~ Vh(high frequency band) dk i zd k' k i gy sl sT; knk mRl ft Z
r dj r k gS
(D) The filament consumes less electrical power towards the ends of the life of the bulb
(D) r Ur qvi uhvk; qdsvk[ kj hl e; esade fo| q r ' kfä dk i z;ksx dj r k gS
A
Sol. C,D
As the temperature increases, m decreases. So frequency of radiation increases with increase in
temperature and resistance increases. So current decreases and hence power consumed (P = Vi)
decreases (V is constant given)
 
13. The position vector r of a particle of mass m is given by the following equation r(t)  at3î  t2ˆj,
where  = 10/3 ms–3,  = 5 ms–2 and m = 0.1 kg. At t = 1 s, which of the following statement (s)
is (are) true about the particle?

(A) The velocity  is given by   (10iˆ  10j)
ˆ ms–1
 
ˆ Nms
(B) The angular momentum L with respect to the origin is given by L  –(5 / 3)k
 
(C) The force F is given by F  (iˆ  2j)N
ˆ
  ˆ Nm
(D) The torque r with respect to the origin is given by r  –(20 / 3)k

13. m æO; eku ds, d d.k dk fLFkfr &l fn' k r uhpsl ehdj .k esafn; k x; k gSr(t)  at3î  t2ˆj,
ft l esa = 10/3 ms–3,
 = 5 ms–2 , oam = 0.1 kg gS
A l e; t = 1 s i j , fuEufy f[ kr esal sdkS
ul k@dkS
ul sdFku l R; gS @gS
a
?
(A) osx dk eku   (10iˆ  10j)
ˆ ms–1 gS
A

(B) ew
y fcUnqdsfxnZdks.khl a
osx dk eku L  –(5 / 3)kˆ N m s gS
A

(C) cy dk eku F  (iˆ  2j)N
ˆ gS
A

(D) ew
y fcUnqdsfxnZ?kw
. kZ
u dk eku r  –(20 / 3)kˆ Nm gS
A
Sol. ABD
r (t) = t3î  t2ˆj
Given,  = 10/3 m/s3,  = 5 m/s2, m = 0.1 kg; at t = 1 s

v =  (3t ) î + 2 t ĵ
2

v  (10 î  10 ĵ)

dv 
= a = 6t î + 2 ĵ
dt
 
F = m a = 0.1 [6t î  2ĵ]
= 2î  ĵ
 
m (r  v)
 5
l =  3 k̂ Nms
  
  r F
= (t3 î  t 2 ĵ) × m (6t î  2t ĵ)
= m (2 t 3k̂  6 t3k̂)
20
= k̂ Nm
3
12 12
14. The isotope 5 B having a mass 12.014u undergoues  - decay to 6 C,12
6 C
has an excited state of
the nucleus (12

6 C*)
at 4.041 MeV above its ground state. If 12
5 B decays to 12
6 C* , the maximum
kinetic energy of the  - particle in units of MeV is
(1u = 931.5 MeV/c2, where c is the speed of light in vacuum).
l eLFkkfud (isotope) 12
5 B ft l dk nz
O; eku 12.014 u gS
] chVk {k; (-decay) dhi zfØ; k l s12
6 C es
ai fj ofr Z
r gkst kr k
gS
A 12
6 C
dh , d ukfHkdh; mÙksft r voLFkk  12
6 C  fuE
*
ur e voLFkk l s4.041 MeV Åi j gksrh gS
A vxj 12
6 B {k; gks
dj
12
6 C* es
ai fj ofr Z
r gksrk gSr kschVk d.k dhvf/kdr e xfr d Åt kZ(MeV dhek=kk esa
) D; k gks
xh \
(1 u = 931.5 MeV/c2), ; gk¡ c fuokZ
r esai zd k' k dhxfr gS
A
Sol. 9
* 0
–1
4.041MeV
Suppose – has (KE)max. = k
Total energy released, E = 931 (m) MeV
Mass defect, m = (12.014 – 12) 931.5
= 13.04 MeV
Now, E = 4.041 + K
K = E – 4.041 = 9 MeV
15. Two inductors L1 (inductance 1 mH, internal resistance 3 ) and L2 (inductance 2 ml internal
resistance 4), and a resistor R (resistance 12) are all connected in parallel across a 5V battery.
The circuit is switched on at time t = 0. The ratio of the maximum the minimum current (Imass/
Imin) drawn from the battery is
nksi zsjdksa(Inductors) L1 r FkkL2 dki zsjdRo Øe' k%1 mH , oa2 mH gS a
] , oavkar fj d i zfr j ks/kØe' k%34 gS
a
A bu nksuks
i zsa
j dksar Fkk , d i zfr j ks/kd R, ft l dk i zfr j ks/k 12  gS
] l Hkhdks, d 5 V dhcS Vªhl sl ekukUr j esat ksM+fn; k x; k gSA i fj i Fk
dksl e; t = 0 i j pky wfd; k t kr k gS
A cS
Vªhl sfudy hvf/kdr e , oaU; w
ur e /kkj kvksadk vuq
i kr (Imax/Imin) D; k gksxk\
Sol. 8
1mH
2mH
5V
Min. current is at t = 0
5
imin = A
12
Max. current is at t 
1   
R eq = 3 + 4 + 12
3
req = 
2
10
imax = A
3
imax 10 12
imin = 3 × 5 = 8
16. Consider two solid sphere P and Q each of density 8 gm cm–3 and diameters 1 cm and 0.5 cm,
respectively. Sphere P is dropped into a liquid of density 0.8 gm cm–3 and viscosity  = 3 poiseulles.
Sphere Q is dropped into a liquid of density 1.6 gm cm–3 and viscosity  = 2 poiseulles. The ratio
of the terminal velocities of P and Q is
8 gm cm–3 /kuR o oky snksBksl xksy sP r Fkk Q dk O
; kl Øe' k%1 cm , oa0.5 cm gS a
A xksy sP dks0.8 gm cm–3
/kuRo , oan = 3 poiseulles ' ; kuRo (viscosity) oky s, d r j y esafxj k; k t kr k gSvkS
j xksy sQ dks1.6 gm cm–3
/kuRo , oan = 2 poiseulles ' ; kuRo (viscosity) oky snw
l j sr j y esafxj k; k t kr k gS
A xksy sP , oaQ dsva
fr e osxksadk
vuqi kr D; k gksxk \
Sol. 3
P = 8 g/cm3 = Q
RP = 1 cm ; RQ = 0.5 cm
0.8g / cm3  R 1
P
  3 poise
l  1.6g / cm3
2
P
  2 poise
Applying :
2 r2
VT   0    g
9 
2 103  103 
VT1   8  0.8   103  10
9 3
2 103  103  0.25
VT2   8  1.6   103  10
9 2
7.2
VT1
 3 3
VT2 6.4
8
17. A metal is heated in a furnace where a sensor is kept above the metal surface to read the power
radiated (P) by the metal. The sensor has a scale that displays log2(P/P0) where P0 is a constant.
When the metal surface is at a temperature of 487 ºC, the sensor shows a value 1. Assume that
the emissivity of the metallic surface ramins constant. What is the value displayed by the sensor
when the temperature of the metal surface is raised to 2767ºC?
, d /kkr qdksHkV~
Vhesaxj e dj r sgq, ml dhfofdj .k ' kfä (P) dks/kkr qdsÅi j j [ ksgq , ,d l a
osnd (sensor) l si <+ r sgS
a
A
laosnd dk i Sekuk log2 (P/P0) dksi <+ r k gS
] ; gk¡ P0 , d fLFkj ka
d gS
A t c /kkr qdk r ki eku 487 °C gSr ksl a
osnd dk i Bu
1 gSA eku y hft ; sfd /kkr qdhl r g dhmRl t Z d r k fLFkj gS
A /kkr qdhl r g dk r ki eku 2767 °C r d c<+ kusi j l a
osnd dk
i Bu D; k gksxk \
Sol. 9
 P1 
log2  P  = 1
 0
 P1 = 2P0
P  T4
4
P2  3040 
 
P1 =  760  = (4)
4
 P2 = P1 (4)4 = (4)4 2P0

 P2   29 P0 
 log2  P  = log2  P  = 9
 0  0 
18. A hydrogen atom in its ground state is irradiated by light of wavelength 970Å. Taking hc/e =
1.237 × 10–6 eV m and the ground state energy of hydrogen atom as – 13.6 eV, the number
number of lines present in the emission spectrum is.
, d gkbMªkst u i j ek.kqdksml dhfuEur e voLFkk esa970 Å r j a xnS/; Zoky si zd k' k l si znhIr fd; k t kr k gS
A ; gk¡ i j hc/e =
1.237 × 10–6 eV m r Fkk gkbMªks t u i j ek.kqdhU; w
ur e voLFkk dhÅt kZ–13.6 eV gS S
A mRl ft Z
r ekukoy h(emission
spectrum) es aj s[kkvksadhl a
[ ; k D; k gksxh\
Sol. 6
Wavelength = 970 Å
n=4 –0.85
n=3 –1.51
n=2 –3.4
12.75
n=1 –13.6
12375
=  12.75 eV
970
Now we known that :
The energy gap corresponding to the given wavelenght is same as for n = 4 to n = 1.
n n  1
 Now for spectral lines =
2
4  4  1
 = 6 Lines
2
[CHEMISTRY]
19. The increasing order of atomic radii of the following group 13 elements is
(A) Al < Ga < In < Tl (B) Ga < Al < In < Tl
(C) Al > In < Ga < Tl (D) Al < Ga < Tl < In
fuEufy f[ kr l ew
g (group) 13 dsr Roksadh c<+
r hgq
bZi j ek.kqf=kT; kvksadk Øe gS
(A) Al < Ga < In < Tl (B) Ga < Al < In < Tl
(C) Al > In < Ga < Tl (D) Al < Ga < Tl < In
Sol. B
Al = 143 pm
Ga = 135 pm
In = 167 pm
Tl = 170 pm
20. Among [Ni(Co)4], [NiCl4]2–, [Co(NH3)4Cl2]Cl, Na2[CoF6]3+, Na2O2 and CsO2, the total number of
paramagnetic compounds is
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5
[Ni(Co)4], [NiCl4]2–, [Co(NH3)4Cl2]Cl, Na2[CoF6]3+, Na2O2 r FkkCsO2 es
avuq
pqEcdh; (paramagnetic) ; kS
fxdksa
dhdq
y la
[ ; k gS
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5
Sol. B
[NiCl4]2– = Ni2+ = 3d84s0
Na3[CoF6] = 3d6 4s0

4s 4d 4p
sp3d2
CsO2 = sp3d2
Cs+.O2– = superoxised as per M.I.
21. On complete hydrogenation, natural rubber produces

(A) ethylene-propylene copolymer (B) vulcanised rubber
(C) polypropylene (D) polybutylene
iw
. kZgkbMªkst uhdj .k i j i zkdf̀r d j cj D; k mRikfnr dj r hgS\
(A) , fFky hu-i z ksfi y hu l gcgq
yd (B) oYduhdr̀ (vulcanised) j cj
(C) i kWy hi zksfi y hu (D) i kW
y hC;w
fVy hu
Sol. A
n(CH2=CH2) + n(CH3–CH=CH2)
Ethylene Propylene
Polyethylene–Polypropylene
22. One mole of an ideal gas at 300 K in thermal contact with surroundings expands isothermally
from 1.0 L to 2.0 L against a constant pressure of 3.0 atm. In this process, the change in entropy
of surroundings (smax) in J K–1 is
(A) 5.763 (B) 1.013 (C) –1.013 (D) –5.763
, d vkn' kZxS
l dk, d eksy 300 K i j i fj os'k(surroundings) dsl kFkÅ"eh; l Ei dZ(thermal contact) esal er ki h;
voLFkk esa3.0 atm dsfLFkj nkc i j 1.0 L l s2.0 L r d i zl kfj r gksrk gS
A bl i zfØ; k esai fj os'k dh , UVªkW
i h esai fj or Z
u
(smax) J K–1 ek=kd es
a
] D; k gksxk \
(A) 5.763 (B) 1.013 (C) –1.013 (D) –5.763
Sol. C
E = q = w
0 = q – |PV|
0 = q – (3 ×1) atm
q = 3 atm L
Qsys.    3atm l   3 lit atm

ssurr = – T =  = .
surr. 300 300 kel
3
= × 101.3 J/kel
300
= –1.013 J/kel
23. P is the probability of finding the 1s electron of hydrogen atom in a spherical shell of infinitesimal
thickness, dr, at a distance r from the nucleus. The volume of this shell is 4r2dr. The qualitative
sketch of the dependence of P or r is:
(A) (B) (C) (D)
gkbMªkst u i j ek.kqds1s by sDVªkW

u dsukfHkd l sr nw
j hi j , d vuUr l w {e eksVkbZ , dr, dsxksy h; dks'kesai k; st kusdhi zkf; dr k
(probability) P gS A bl dks'k dk vk; r u 4r dr gS
2
A P ; k r i j fuHkZ
j r k dk xq. kkRed j s[kkfp=k gS
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Sol. B
r = 0, 4r2dr = 0
No. of radial modes = n––1
= 1 – 0 –1 = 0
24. The reagent(s) that can selectively precipitate S2– from a mixture of S2– and SO42– in aqueous
solution is(are)
(A) CuCl2 (B) BaCl2 (C) Pb(OOCCH3)2 (D) Na2[Fe(CN)5NO]
vfHkdkj d (reagent) t ksS2– r Fkk SO42– dsfeJ.k l sS2– dksoj .kkRed (selectively) vo{ksi } kj k t y h; foy ; u l s
i F̀kd dj l dr k ¼
l dr s½gS
@gS
a
(A) CuCl2 (B) BaCl2 (C) Pb(OOCCH3)2 (D) Na2[Fe(CN)5NO]
Sol. A
––
CuCl2 S CuS (black ppt.)
CuSO4 is not a ppt.
25. A plot of the number of neutrons (N) against the number of protons(P) of stable nucleus exhibits
upward deviation from linearity for atomic number, Z > 20. For an unstable nucleus having N/P
ratio less than 1, the possible mode(s) of decay is(are)
(A) –decay ( emission) (B) orbital or K-electron capture
(C) neutron emission (D) + -decay(positron emission)
LFkk; hukfHkdksadsU; w
VªkW
uksadhl a
[ ; k (N) fo: ) i zksVkW
uksadhl a
[ ; k (P) dk vky s[k i j ek.kqØekad ] Z > 20 dsfy ; sj S
f[ kdr k
l sÅ/oZeq[ khfopy u i znf' kZ
r dj r k gS
A , d vLFkk; hukfHkd dsfy ; sft l dk N/P vuq i kr 1 l sde gS] {k; dhl a
Hko fo/kk¼; sa
½
gS
@gS
a
(A) –{k; ( mRl t Z
u) (B) d{kh; vFkok K-by sDVªkWu i zxzg.k (capture)
(C) U
;wVªkW
u mRl t Z
u (D)  -{k; (i kW
+
ft VªkW
u mRl t Z
u)
Sol. B, D
According to theory
26. Positive Tollen's test is observed for

H O
CHO OH
Ph O
(A) H H (B) (C) Ph (D)
O Ph Ph
H
ul k ¼
dkS
ul s½fodYi l dkj kRed (Positive) VkW
y su i j h{k.k(Tollen's test) fn[ kkr k ¼
fn[ kkr s½gS¼
gS
a
½\
H O
CHO OH
Ph O
(A) H H (B) (C) Ph (D)
O Ph Ph
H
Sol. A, B, C
H O
CHO OH
Ph
H H, , Ph
H O
27. The correct statement(s) about the following reaction sequence is(are):
(i) O2 CHCl3/NaOH
Cumene (C9H12) +
P Q (major) + R(minor)
(ii) H 3O
NaOH
Q PhCH 2Br
S
(A) R is steam volatile
(B) Q gives dark violet coloration with 1 % aqueous FeCl3 solution
(C) S gives yellow precipitate with 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine
(D) S gives dark violet coloration with 1 % aqueous FeCl3 solution
fuEufy f[ kr vfHkfØ; k vfHkØe l sl a

ca
f/kr l ghdFku gS
@gS
a
D; q
ehu (Cumene) (C9H12) (i) O2 P CHCl3/NaOH Q (eq
[ ; ) + R(xkS
. k)
+
(ii) H 3O
NaOH
Q PhCH 2Br
S
(A) R Hkki ok"i ' khy (steam volatile) gS A
(B) 1 % t y h; FeCl3 foy ; u dsl kFk Q xgu cS a
xuhj a
x nsrk gS
A
(C) 2,4-MkbukbVªks Qsfuy gkbMªst hu (dinitrophenylhydrazine) dsl kFk S i hy k vo{ksir nsrk gS
(D) 1 % t y h; FeCl3 foy ; u dsl kFk S xgu cS a
xuhj a
x nsrk gS
Sol. B, C
CH3 CH3
CH OH OH
O CHO
(i) O2
+ + (P) CHCl3/NaOH (Q) (major)
(ii) H 3O CH3 – C – CH 3
OH
+ R(minor)
CHO
OH OCH2–Ph
CHO CHO
NaOH
(Q) PhCH 2Br
(S)
28. The crystalline form of borax has

(A) Tetranuclear [B4O5(OH)4]2– unit
(B) All boron atoms in the same plane
(C) Equal number of sp2 and sp3 hybridized boron atoms
(D) One terminal hydroxide per boron atom
7
ckS
j sDl (borax) dsfØLVy h; : i esa
(A) pr qukZ
fHkdh; [B4O5(OH)4]2– , dd (unit) gS A
(B) l HkhcksjkW
u i j ek.kq, d ghr y esagS a
(C) sp2 r Fkk sp3 l a d fj r (hybridized) cksjkW
u i j ek.kq
v ksadhl a
[ ; k l eku gS
A
(D) i z
fr cksjkW
u i j ek.kqi j , d vUr LFk (terminal) gkbMªksDl kW
bM gS A
Sol. A, C, D
OH
B
O O
HO B O B OH
O O
B
OH
29. The compound(s) with TWO lone pairs of electrons on the central atom is(are):
(A) BrF5 (B) ClF3 (C) XeF4 (D) SF4
; kS
fxd@; kS
fxdksa
] ft l ds@ft udsdsUnzh; i j ek.kqdsi kl nks, dkW
d hby sDVªkW
u ;q
Xe gS
@gS
a
(A) BrF5 (B) ClF3 (C) XeF4 (D) SF4
Sol. B, C
ClF3  3B.P. + 2L.P.
XeF4  4B.P. + 2L.P.
30. According to the Arrhenius equation,
(A) A high activation energy usually implies a fast reaction.
(B) Rate constant increases with increase in temperature. This is due to a greater number of
collisions whose energy exceeds the activation energy.
(C) Higher the magnitude of activation energy, stronger is the temperature dependence of the
rate constant.
(D) The pre-exponential factor is a measure of the rate at which collisions occur, irrespective of
their energy.
vkj Z
sfuvl (Arrhenius) l ehdj .k dsvuq l kj
(A) mPp l fØ; .k Åt kZ(activation energy) l kekU ; r %r hozvfHkfØ; k n' kkZ
r hgS
A
(B) r ki eku dsc<+
usl sosx&fLFkj ka
d (Rate constant) c<+r k gS
A ; g mu VDdj ksadhl a[ ; kc<+
usdsdkj .kgSft udhÅt kZ
l fØ; .k Åt kZl sT; knk gkst kr hgS
A
(C) l fØ; .k Åt kZdh ek=kk ft r uh mPp gks
xh] osx&fLFkj ka
d dhr ki eku i j fuHkZ
j r k mr uhgh i zcy gksxhA
(D) mudh Åt kZi j fopkj fd; sfcuk] i w oZpj ?kkar ka
d h xq
. kd (pre-exponential factor) VDdj ksadh nj (Rate of
collisions) dk eki d gS A
Sol. B, C, D
K = Ae Ea / RT
(B) K  T
by Increacing temperature rate constant also increases
K 2 Ea(T2  T1 ) K2
(C) log K  2.3RT T = K  Ea
1 1 2 1
(D) Ea  0
K = A
r = K.
31. The product(s) of the following reaction sequence is(are):

NH2
(i) Acetic anhydride/pyridine
(ii) KBrO3/HBr
+
(iii) H3O , heat
(iv) NaNO2/HCl, 273-278 K
(v) Cu/HBr
Br Br
Br Br Br
Br
Br Br
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Br Br Br
fuEufy f[ kr vfHkfØ; k vfHkØe dk (ds) mRikn gS
@gS
Br Br
Br Br Br
Br
Br Br
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Br Br Br
Sol. B
32. The diffusion coefficient of an ideal gas is proportional to its mean free path and mean speed. The
absolute temperature of an ideal gas is increased 4 times and its pressure is increased 2 times.
As a result, the diffusion coefficient of this gas increases x times. The value of x is.
, d vkn' kZxS l dk fol j .k xq . kka
d (diffusion coefficient) bl dsek/; eq Dr i Fk(mean free path) r Fkk ek/; pky
(mean speed) dsl ekuq i kfr d gSA, d vkn' kZxSl dki j e r ki eku 4 xq
ukc<+k; kt kr kgSvkSbl dknkc 2 xq
ukc<+
k; kt kr k
gSa
A i fj .kkeLo: i ] bl xS
l dk fol j .k xq . kka
d x xq
uk c<+t kr k gSa
A x dk eku gSa
A
Sol. 4
T3 / 2
Diffusion constant 
P
3/2
 4T  =4
T 3 / 2
2P P
33. In the following monobromination reaction, the number of possible chiral products is:
CH2CH2CH3
Br2(1.0 mole)
H Br
CH3 300°C
(1.0 mole)
(enantiomerically pure)
fuEufy f[ kr , dczksfeus'ku (monobromination) vfHkfØ; k esal EHkkfor fdj y (chiral) mRiknksadhl a
[ ; k gS
a
%
CH2CH2CH3
Br2(1.0 eks
y)
H Br
CH3 300°C
(1.0 eks
y)
(enantiomerically pure)
¼
, suS
fUV; ks
ej h; ' kq
)½
Sol. 5
CH2CH2CH3 CH2CH2CH3
Br2(1.0 mole)
H Br H Br
300°C *
CH 3 CH3
(1.0 mole) +
(enantiomerically pure) CH3
Br H
H Br
CH3
CH3 CH3
CH2–CH2–CH3
CH2 CH2
H Br Br H + H Br
+
H Br H Br
CH2– Br
CH3 CH3
34. The number of geometric isomers possible for the complex [CoL2Cl2]¯ (L = H2NCH2CH2O¯) is.
ladq
y [CoL2Cl2]¯ (L = H2NCH2CH2O¯) dsl a
Hkkfor T; kfer h; l eko; fo; ksa(geometric isomers) dhl a
[ ; k gS
a
A
Sol. 5
[M(AB)2a2]
a a a a a
A a B a A a A A A B
M M M
B A A B B B B B B A
B A A a a
35. The mole fraction of a solute in a solution is 0.1. At 298 K, molarity of this solution is the same
as its molality. Density of this solution at 298 K is 2.0 g cm–3. The ratio of the molecular weights
 MWsolute 
of the solute and solvent,   , is.
 MWsolvent 
, d foy s; dk , d foy ; u esaeksy fHkUu (mole fraction) 0.1 gS
a
A 298 K i j bl foy ; u dheksy j r k(molarity) bl dh
eksy y r k(molality) dsl eku gS a
A bl foy ; u dk ?kuRo 298 K i j 2.0 g cm–3 gS
a
A foy s; r Fkk foy k; d dsv.kq
Hkkj ksadk
 v.kq
Hkkj foys; 
vuq
i kr ]  v.kq
Hkkj foyk; d  , gS
 A

Sol. 9
XA = 0.1, M = m , D = 2gm/ml
0.1 mole 0.9 mole

m=M
0.1  1000 0.1  d  1000
= 
0.9  Mwsolvent 0.1M1  0.9M2 
0.1  1000 2
= 0.9  M 
2 0 .1M1  0.9M2 
0.1M2  0.1M1
= =2
0.9M2
M1 M1
1 + 9M = 2 , M = 9
2 2
M1
1
9M2
36. In neutral or faintly alkaline solution, 8 moles of permanganate anion quantitatively oxidize
thiosulphate anions to produce X moles of a sulphur containing product. The magnitude of X is.
mnkl hu vFkok /kw fey {kkj h; foy ; u (alkaline solution) esa8 eksy i j eS
xusV _ .kk; u (permanganate anion)
Fkk; ksl YQsV _ .kk; uksa(thiosulphate anions) dk ek=kkRed vkDl hdj .k dj X eksy l YQj (sulphur) vUr foZ
"V mRikn
mRikfnr dj r sgS a
AX dhek=kk gS a
A
Sol. 6
[MATHEMATICS]
PART - III : MATHEMATICS
SECTION – I
37. A computer producing factory has only two plants T1 and T2 produces 20% and plant T2 produces
80% of the total computers produced. 7% of computers produced in the factory turn out to be
defective. It is known that
P (computer turns out to be defective given that it is produced in plant T1)
= 10 P (computer turns out to be defective given that it is produced in plant T2),
where P(E) denotes the probability of an event E. A computer produced in the factory is randomly
selected and it does not turn out to be defective. Then the probability that it is produced in plant
T2 is
36 47 78 75
(A) (B) (C) (D)
73 79 93 83
,d l a x.kd (computer) fuekZ . k dj usoky sdkj [ kkusesadsoy nksl a ;a
=k (plant) T1 vkS j T2 gS
A dq y fufeZr la
x.kdksadk
20% l a ;a=k T1 vkSj 80% l a ;a
=k T2 fuekZ
. k dj r sgS
a
A dkj [ kkusesafufeZ
r 7% l a x.kd [ kj kc (defective) fudy r sgS aA; g
Kkr gS afd
P (l ax.kd [ kj kc fudy r k gS; fn ; g fn; k x; k gSfd l a x.kd l a;a=k T1 ea
sfufeZr gS)
= 10 P (l a x.kd [ kj kc fudy r k gS; fn ; g fn; k x; k gSfd l a x.kd l a;a=k T2 esafufeZ
r gS ),
t gk¡ P(E) , d ?kVuk E dhi zkf; dr k n' kkZr k gS
A dkj [ kkusesafufeZr ,d l ax.kd ; knP̀N; k pq uk t kr k gSvkS
j og [ kj kc ugha
fudy r k gSA r c ml dsl a ;a=k T2 esafufeZ
r gksusdhi zkf; dr k gSA
36 47 78 75
(A) (B) (C) (D)
73 79 93 83
Sol. C
7
T1 & T2 P(D) =
100
20
20% 80% P(T1) =
100
80
P(T2) =
100
P(D/T1) = 10P(D/T2)
P(D) = P(T1) P(D/T1) + P(T1) + P(T2) P(D/T2)
0.07 = 0.2 (10) + 0.8()
0.07 = 2 + 0.8
0.07 7 1
P(D/T2) =  = = =
2.8 280 40
1/4 D
T1 3/4
0.2
G
Exp
1/40 D
0.8
T2
39/40 G
39
0.8 
40 31.2
P(T2/ D ) = 
30 39 6  31.2
0.2   0.8 
40 40
31.2 312 104 52 26 78

= = = = = =
37.2 372 124 62 31 93
2 1
38. The least value of   R for which 4x   1 for all x > 0, is
x
1 1 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
64 32 27 25
1
; fn   R vkS ] r c 4x2   1 dsfy , dk U; w
j l Hkh x > 0 gS ur e eku D; k gksxk\
x
1 1 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
64 32 27 25
Sol. C
 R
1
4x2  1 x>0
x
4x3  1  x
4x3  x  1
x 1

4x3
x 1
y
4x3
3
dy x   x  1 3x

2
  =

x3  3x3  3x2  =0
dx x6 x6
2x3  3x2 x2 2x  3 

 =0  0
x6 x6
3
 x
2
2
 
4  27
1

27
1
min 
27
 
39. Let S = x   ,   : x  0,  2  , The sum of all distinct solutions of the equation 3 sec x + cosec
 
x + 2 (tan x – cot x) = 0 in the set S is equaL to
7 2 5
(A)  (B)  (C) 0 (D)
9 9 9
 
ekuk fd S = x   ,   : x  0,  2  gS
A l eq
Pp; S esal ehdj .k 3 sec x + cosec x + 2 (tan x – cot x) =
 
0 dsl HkhfHkUu gy ksa(all distinct solutions) dk ; ksx (sum) gS
A
7 2 5
(A)  (B)  (C) 0 (D)
9 9 9
Sol. C
3 1
 sinx + cosx = cos2x
2 2
 
cos  x –  = cos2x
 3 

x– = 2n ± 2x
3
+ve –ve
 
x– = 2x + 2x 3x = 2x +
3 3
 
x = –2x – 3x = (6n + 1)
3 3
 
x=– (6n + 1) x= (6n + 1)
3 9
  7 –5
x=– , x= , ,
3 9 9 9
  7 5
Sum = – + + –
3 9 9 9
–3    7 – 5
= =0
5
 
40. Let   . Suppose 1 and 1 are the roots of the equation x2 – 2xsec + 1 = 0 and 2 and
6 12
2 are the roots of the equation x2 + 2xtan + 1 = 0. If 1 > 1 and 2 > 2, then 1 + 2 equals
(A) 2  sec   tan  (B) 2 sec  (C) 2 tan  (D) 0
 
ekukfd      gS
A eku y hft ; sfd 1 vkS
j 1 l ehdj .kx2 – 2xsec + 1 = 0 dsew
y (roots) gS
avkS
j 2 vkS
j
6 12
2 l ehdj .k x2 + 2xtan + 1 = 0 dsew
y gS
a
A ; fn 1 > 1 vkS
j 2 > 2 gS
a
] r c 1 + 2 dk eku gS
A
(A) 2  sec   tan  (B) 2 sec  (C) 2 tan  (D) 0
Sol. C
2 sec   4 sec2  – 4
x=
2
x = sec ± tan
x = sec + tan
x = sec – tan
1 = sec – tan
1 = sec + tan
x2 + 2xtan – 1 = 0
4 tan2   4
–2 tan  
x=
2
x = –tan ± sec
2 = sec – tan
2 = –sec – tan
sec – tan – sec – tan
= –2tan
41. A debate club consists of 6 girls and 4 boys. A team of 4 members is to be selected from this club
including the selection of a captain ( from among these 4 members ) for the team. If the team
has to include at most one boy, then the number of ways of selecting the team is
(A) 380 (B) 320 (C) 260 (D) 95
, d okn&fookn l ewg (club) esa6 y M+ fd; k¡vkS
j 4 y M+ d sgS
a
A bl l ewg esal s, d pkj l nL; h; ny pq uuk gSft l esany ds
, d dIr ku (mUghapkj l nL; ksal s) dk pq
uko Hkhl fEefy r gSA ; fn ny esavf/kdr e , d y M+d k l fEefy r gksr c ny dkspqusa
t kusdsr j hdksadhl a
[ ; k gS
A
(A) 380 (B) 320 (C) 260 (D) 95
Sol. A
(6C4 + 4C1 6C3) 4C1
65 465 4
 2  32 4
 
(15 + 80)4
95 × 4 = 380
SECTION – II
42. In a triangle XYZ, let x, y, z be the lengths of sides opposite to the angle X, Y, Z respectively , and
sx sy sz 8
2s = x + y + z, If   and area of incircle of the triangle XYZ is , then
4 3 2 3
(A) area of the triangle XYZ in 6 6
35
(B) the radius of circumcircle of the triangle XYZ is 6
6
X Y Z 4 2 x  y 3
(C) sin sin sin  (D) sin  2   5
2 2 2 35  
ekuk fd f=kHkq
t XYZ esadks.kksaX, Y, Z dsl keusdhHkq
t kvksadhy Eckb; k¡Øe' k%x, y, z gS
avkS
j 2s = x + y + z gS
A ; fn
sx sy sz 8
  , vkS
j f=kHkq
t XYZ dsva
r oZ̀
Ùk dk {ks=kQy gS
] rc
4 3 2 3
(A) f=kHkq
t XYZ dk {ks=kQy 6 6 gS
35
(B) f=kHkq
t XYZ dsi fj oÙ̀k dh f=kT; k 6 gS
6
X Y Z 4 2 x  y 3
(C) sin sin sin  (D) sin  2   5
2 2 2 35  
Sol. A,C,D
sx sy sz
  
4 3 2
3s – ( x + y + z) = 9
s = 9
X
x  5

y  6  z y
 z  7


r=
s Y x Z
 2  8
 2  
 s  3
32 = 8s2
3 s  s  x   s  y   s  z  = 8s2
3{4× 3× 2} = 8 × 9

82 = 8
2 = 1 = 1
(A)  9.4.3.2  6 6
567 35
(B) R= =
46 6 4 6
x y z s  x  s  y  s  z 4
(C) sin  sin  sin = =
2 2 2 xyz 35
x  y z s(s  z) 3
(D) sin2   = cos2 2 = =
 2  xy 5
43.
2

A solution curve of the differential equation x  xy  4x  2y  4  dy
dx
y2
 , x > 0 passes through
the point ( 1, 3). Then the solution curve

(A) intersects y = x + 2 exactly at one point (B) intersects y = x + 2 exactly at two points
(C) intersects y = ( x + 2)2 (D) does NOT intersects y = ( x + 3)2
dy
ekukfd vody l ehdj .k  x2  xy  4x  2y  4   y2  0, x > 0, dk, d gy oØ fca
nq(1, 3) l sxq
t j r k gS
Ar c
dx
og gy oØ
(A) y = x + 2 dksBhd , d fca nqi j i zfr PNsfnr dj r k gS
(B) y = x + 2 dksBhd nksfca nq
v ksai j i zfr PNsfnr dj r k gS
(C) y = ( x + 2) dksi z
2
fr PNsfnr dj r k gS
(D) y = ( x + 3)2 dksi z
fr PNsfnr ughadj r k gS
Sol. A,D
x 2
 2xy  4x  2y  4  xy  dy
dx
2
y 0 x>0
 x  2 2
 y x  2  dy
dx
y 2
 x  2  x  2  y  .dy  y2dx
dy y2

dx  x  2   x  2  y 
y = v(x + 2)
dy dv
 v   x  2
dx dx
dv v2
 x  2  dx 
1v
v
dv v2  v  v2
 x  2 dx 
1v
1 v dx
dv  
v x2
1  dx
 v  1  dv   x  2
 
ln v  v   ln  x  2   c
ln   x  2  .v   v  c
y
ln y  c (1, 3)
x 2
3
ln3  c
3
c  1  ln3
y
ln y   1  ln3
x2
y y
ln    1 
3
  x 2
(A) y = x + 2
y
 ln    0
3
y = 3, x = 1
y
(C) ln  1  x  2
3
y
ln    x  1
3
2 2
(D) ln
 x  3 1
 x  3
3 x 2
2 2
 x 3
 x  3 e
1
x 2
2
Both solution are negative though it is given x  0
44. Consider a pyramid OPQRS located in the first octant  x  0, y  0, z  0  with O as origin, and OP
and OR along the x - axis, respectively. The base OPQR of the pyramid is a square with OP = 3.
The point S is directly above the midpoint T of diagonal OQ such that TS = 3. Then

(A) the acute angle between OQ and OS is
3
(B) the equation of the plane containing the triangle OQS is x – y = 0
3
(C) the length of the perpendicular from P to the plane containing the trianle OQS is
2
15
(D) the perpendicular distance from O to the straight line containing RS is
2
fopkj dhft ; s] , d l w
P; kdkj (pyramid) OPQRS t ksi zFke v"Bka' kd (first octant)  x  0, y  0, z  0 esafLFkr gS
]
ft l esaO ew
y fcUnqr Fkk OP vkS j OR Øe' k%x-v{k vkS
j y-v{k i j gS a
A bl l wP; kdkj dk vk/kkj OPQR , d oxZgSft l esa
OP = 3 gS A fcUnqS d.kZ(diagonal)OQ dse/; fcUnqT dsBhd Åi j bl i zd kj gSfd TS = 3 gS Ar c

(A) OQ vkS
j OS dschp dk U; w
udks.k gS
3
(B) f=kHkq
t OQS dksva
r foZ
"V dj usoky sl er y dh l ehdj .k x – y = 0 gS
3
(C) P l sf=kHkq
t OQS dksva
r foZ
"V dj usoky sl er y i j y Ec dhy a
ckbZ gS
2
15
(D) O l sRS dksva
r foZ
"V dj r hgq
bZl j y j s[kk dhy Ecor ~nw
jh gS
2
Sol. B,C,D
3
(A) tan =  2 A
3/ 2
S (3/2, 3/2, 3)
î ˆj ˆ
k
n̂  3 3 0
(B)
3/2 3/2 3
(0, 3, 0) R Q
3
n̂ = î (9) – ĵ (9) + k̂ (0)
n̂ = î – ĵ
P : 1(x – 3/2) – 1(y – 3/2)
(3/2, 3/2, 0)
P:x–y =0 T
(C) P : (3, 0, 0)
3–0
d= 3
2
2
(D) OS = 3/2, 3/2, 3 O 3 P(3î )

OS.V
|SM| =
|V| O

V = (3/2, –3/2, 3)
9 9
– 9
2
 4 4   6
9 9 3 6
 9
4 4
OM2 = OS2 – SM2 S R M
2
 9 9 
=   9 – ( 6 )2

 4 4 
9.6
= –6
4
5
= 6 4
 
15
=
2
45. Let RS be the diameter of the circle x2 + y2 = 1, where S is the point (1, 0). Let P be a variable
point (other than R and S) on the circle and tangents to the circle at S and P meet at the point Q.
Then normal to the circle at P intersects a line drawn through Q parallel to RS at point E. Then the
locus of E passes through the point(s)
1 1  1 1 1 1  1 1
(A)  3 ,  (B)  4 , 2  (C)  3 ,   (D)  4 ,  2 
 3    3  
ekukfd RS oÙ̀k x2 + y2 = 1 dkO ; kl gS] t gk¡fd S fca nq(1, 0) gSA ekuk fd P (R vkS j S l sfHkUu) oÙ̀ki j , d pj fcUnq
gSvkS
j oÙ̀k i j fcUnq
v ksaS vkS
j P i j [ kha
phxbZLi ' kZj s[kk, safcUnqQ i j fey r hgSA oÙ̀k dsfcUnqP i j vfHky Ec ml j s[kk dks] t ks
Q l sxq
t j r hgSr Fkk RS dsl ekukUr j gS ] fcUnqE i j i zfr PNsfnr dj r k gS A r c E dk fcUnq i Fk fuEu fcUnq
v ksal sxq
t j r k gS
A
1 1  1 1 1 1  1 1
(A)  ,  (B)  ,  (C)  ,   (D)  ,  
3 3 4 2  3 3  4 2
Sol. A,C
E(h,k)
 1  cos  
1, 
 sin  
P(cos , sin )
R S(1, 0)
 1  cos  
TP : x cos + y sin = 1 1, sin  
 
NP : y = (tan )x & L at || to RS
1  cos 
L:y=
sin 
K
tan 
h
tan = K
2.K K

1  K2 h
1 – y2 = 2x
y2 = 1 – 2x
46. Let f : R R, g : R R and h : R R be differentiable functions such that f(x) = x3 + 3x + 2,
g(f(x)) = x and h(g(g(x))) = x for all x  R. Then
1
(A) g'(2) = (B) h'(1) = 666 (C) h(0) = 16 (D) h(g(3)) = 36
15
ekuk fd f : R R; g : R R vkS
j h : R R , sl svody uh; Qy u gS
afd l Hkhx  R dsfy , f(x) = x3 + 3x +
2, g(f(x)) = x vkS
j h(g(g(x))) = x gS a
Ar c
1
(A) g'(2) = (B) h'(1) = 666 (C) h(0) = 16 (D) h(g(3)) = 36
15
Sol. B,C
f(x) = x3 + 3x + 2
f(0) = 2  g(2) = 0
f(–1) = –2  g(–2) = –1
f(1) = 6  g(6) = 1
f(2) = 16  g(16) = 2
f(3) = 38
f(6) = 111  g(111) = 6
f'(x) = 3x2 + 3

(B) h g  g  x    x 
x = 16
h(g(2)) = h(0) = 16
 
(C) h' g  g  x   g'  g  x   g'  x   1
x = 111
h'(1) g'(6) g'(111) =1
1 1
h' 1  1
6 111
h'(1) = 666
f(x)
47. Let f : (0, ) R be a differentiable function such that f'(x) = 2  for all x (0, ) and f(1)
x
Then
1 1 2
(A) lim f '  x   1 (B) lim xf  x   2 (C) lim x f '(x)  0 (D) f(x) 2 for all x  (0,2)
x 0   x0   x 0
f(x)
ekuk fd f : (0, ) R , d vody uh; Qy u , sl k gSfd l Hkhx (0, ) dsfy , f'(x) = 2  , vkS
j f(1) 1
x
gS
Ar c
1 1 2
(A) lim f '    1 (B) lim xf    2 (C) lim x f '(x)  0 (D)l H
khx(0,2)dsfy, f(x) 2
x 0 x x0 x x 0
Sol. A
f : 0,    R
f  x
f '  x  2 
x
dy y
2
dx x
dy
x  2x  y
dx
dy y
 2
dx x
1
I.F = e  x dx  x
y.x =  2x dx
y.x = x2 + C
C
yx
x
C
y'  1 
x2
1
f 
1 x
f'   2   
(A) xlim
0 x
  1
x
1
= 2  x.f  
x
 1   1 
f '   2 
 x  x  x2  1 
= 2 =  .f '
1 2
1 x2  x 
x
1 1
lim f '    2  f '  
x 0 x
  x
2l = 2
l =1
1
f 
x   1 
(B) lim    lim  2  f '    = 1
x o  1  x 0  x 

 
x
(C) lim x2.f '  x 


x 0
= xlim
0
 
2x2  x.f  x   C
(D) Not Bounded
3 1 2 
 
2 0 
48. Let P =  , where a  R. Suppose Q = [qij] is a matrix such that PQ = kI, where k  R,
3 5 0 
k k2
k  0 and I is the identity matrix of order 3. If q23 = – and det(Q) = , then
8 2
(A)  = 0, k = 8 (B) 4 – k + 8 = 0
(C) det (P adj(Q)) = 29 (D) det (Q adj(P)) = 213
3 1 2 
 
2 0 
ekuk fd P=  , t gk¡ a  R gS
A eku fy ft , fd Q = [qij] , d , sl k vkO
;w
g gSfd PQ = kI t gk¡ k  R,
3 5 0 
k k2
k0 vkS
j I r hu dksfV (order 3) dk r Rl ed vkO
;w
g gS
A ; fn q23 = – vkS
j det(Q) = gks] r c
8 2
(A)  = 0, k = 8 (B) 4 – k + 8 = 0
(C) det (P adj(Q)) = 29 (D) det (Q adj(P)) = 213
Sol. B,C
PQ = KI
Q = K . P–1
 5 10  
 
=K 3 6 3   4
 10 12 2 
12  20
3  4 8 = 12  20
24  32  12  20
12  12
  1
1
Q  K3.
P
K3 K2
 
12  20 2
8
K =4
2
2
(C) P.Q
2
 43  9
8 ×    2
 8 
2
(D) Q.P
K3 2
. P  43  8
P
29
49. The circle C1 : x2 + y2 = 3, with centre at O, intersects the parabola x2 = 2y at the point P in the
first quadrant. Let the tangent to the circle C1 at P touches other two circles C2 and C3 at R2 and
R3, respectively. Suppose C2 and C3 have equal radii 2 3 and centres Q2 and Q3 respectively, If
Q2 and Q3 lie on the y-axis, then
(A) Q2Q3 = 12 (B) R2R3 = 4 6
(C) area of the triangle OR2R3 is 6 2 (D) area of the triangle PQ2Q3 is 4 2
oÙ̀k C1 : x + y = 3 ft l dkdsUnzfcUnqO gS
2 2 ] i j oy ; x = 2y dksi zFke pr q
2 FkkZ
' kesafcUnqP i j i zfr PNsfnr dj r k gS
A ekuk
fd oÙ̀k C1 dsfcUnqP i j [ kha
phxbZLi ' kZ
j s[kk vU; nksoÙ̀kksaC2 vkS
j C3 dksØe' k%fcUnqv ksaR2 r FkkR3 i j Li ' kZdj r hgSa
A eku
y hft , fd C2 vkSj C3 nksuksadhf=kT; k, sa2 3 dscj kcj gSvkS
j mudsdsUnzfcUnqØe' k%Q2 vkS
j Q3 gS
a
A ; fn Q2 vkS
j Q3 y--
v{k i j fLFkr gS
a
] rc
(A) Q2Q3 = 12 (B) R2R3 = 4 6
(C) f=kHkq
t OR2R3 dk {ks=kQy 6 2 gS (D) f=kHkq
t PQ2Q3 dk {ks=kQy 4 2 gS
Sol. A,B,C
Equ. of circles
x2 + (y – a)2 = 12
Tangent at P
2x + y = 3
Solve with circles
2
3–y
  + (y – a)2 = 12
 2 
3y2 – 2y(3 + 2a) + (2a2 –15) = 0
D=0
 a2 – 6a – 27 = 0
(A) Q1Q2 =  |a1 – a2| = 144 = 12
(B) C1(0, 9) C2(0, –3)
normal normal
1 1
y–9= (x) y+3= x
2 2
x– 2y + 9= 0 x– 2y –3 = 0
On solving R2 R3 = 4 6
(C)  r from (0, 0) on 2x + y – 3= 0
P= 3
1
 = ×4 6 × 3
2
=4 2
1
(D) Area = × 12 × 1 = 6
2
SECTION – III
x
t2
50. The total number of distinct x  [0, 1] for which 1 t 4
dt  2x  1 is
0
x
t2
, sl sl HkhfHkUu x  [0, 1] ft udsfy ,  dt  2x  1 gS
] dhdq
y la
[ ; k gS
A
0
1  t4
Sol. 1
x
t2
g(x) = 1 t
0
4 dt – 2x + 1 = 0
f(0) = 1
1
t2
f(1) =  1  t4 –1 =0 –ve
0
<0
  atleast one solution
 g'(x) < 0  x  [0, 1]
  exactly one solution
51. Let m be the smallest positive integer such the coefficient of x2 in the expansion (1 + x)2 + (1 +
x)3 + .... + (1 + x)49 + (1 + mx)50 is (3n + 1) 51C3 for some positive integer n. The the value of
n is
ekuk fd m , sl k U; w
ur e /kukRed i w
. kkZ
a
d gSfd (1 + x)2 + (1 + x)3 + .... + (1 + x)49 + (1 + mx)50 dsfoLr kj
esax2 dk xq. kka
d (3n + 1) 51C3 fdl h/kukRed i w . kkZ
a
d n dsfy , gS
A r c n dk eku gS
A
Sol. 5
(1 + x)2 + (1 + x)3 + ..... + (1 + x)49 + (1 + mx)50
coff. x2 = 2C2 + 3C2 + ...... + 49C2 + m2 50C2 = (3n + 1) 51C3
3
C3 + 3C2 + ..... + 40C2
40
C3 + 40C2
50
C3 + m2 50C2 = (3n + 1) 51C2
50! 50! (3n  1)51
+ m2 =
3!.47! 2!.48! 3!.(48)
1 m2 (3n  1)51
+ =
3 48 483.48
48 + 3m2 = (3n + 1)51
3m2 + 48 ± 3n + 1 + 51
m2 = n.51 + 1
m2 = 1 + 51.n
m2 – 1
=n
51
51.n + 1 = m2
17.3.n + 1 = m2
n=5
1  3 i (z)r z2s 
52. Let z  , where i 
1 , and r, s  [1, 2, 3]. Let P   2s  and I be the identity
y
2  z zr 
matrix of order 2. Then the total number of ordered pairs (r, s) for which P2 = – I is
1  3 i (z)r z2s 
ekukfd z  gS
] t gk¡ i  1 vkS
j r, s  {1, 2, 3} gS a
A ekuk fd P   2s  vkS
j I nksdksfV (order
2  z zr 
2) dk r R
l ed vkO
;w
g gS
A r c osl HkhØfer ; q
Xe (r, s) ft udsfy , P2 = – I gS] dhdq y la
[ ; k gS
A
Sol. 1
z=w r, s  {1, 2, 3}
P2 = – I
(w)r w2s 
P =  2s 
 w (w)r 
 w2r  w4s (1)r wr 2s  wr 2s   1 0 

P2=  r r  2s r  2s 4s 2r  =  
(1) w w w w   0 1
 ((–1)r + 1) wr + 2s = 0  w2r + w4s = – 1
r=1
S=1 0 w 2 + w4 = – 1
S=2 0 w 2 + w8  – 1
S=3 0 w2 + w12  – 1
r=2
S=1  0
S=2  0
S=3  0
r=3
S=1 0 – 1
S=2 0 – 1
S=3 0 – 1
 Only one solution (1, 1)
x2 sin( x)
53. Let  R be such that lim  1. Then 6() equal
x 0 x  sin x
x2 sin(x)
ekuk fd  R bl i zd kj gSfd lim 1 gS
A r c 6() dk eku gS
A
x  x  sin x
Sol. 7
x2.sin(x)
  R h =1
x0 x  sinx
  x  
x2 sin   xx
h   x   =1
x 0 x  sinx
x3
 h =1
x 0  x3 
x   x  
 6 
x3
 h =1
x 0 x
x    1 
6
let = 1
x3  6
 h 1
x 0 x3
6

x x2 1  x3
54. The total number of distinct x  R for which 2x 4x2 1  8x2  10 is
3x 9x2 1  27x3
x x2 1  x3
, sl sl HkhfHkUu x  R, ft udsfy , 2x 4x2 1  8x2  10 gS
] dhl a
[ ; k gS
3x 9x2 1  27x3
Sol. 2
1 1 1  x3
x 2 2 1  23 x3  10
32
3 32 1  33 x3
1 1 1 1 1 1
x 2 2 1  x 2 22 23  10
32 6
3 32 1 3 32 33
 -x3 (( 1 – 2) (2 – 3) ( 3 – 1)) + x6 .2.3 ( 1 – 2) ( 2 – 3) ( 3 – 1) = 10

 – x3 (–1) (–1)(2) + 6x6 ((–1)(–1)(2)) = 10
 x3 2  12x3   10
 12x6 – 2x3 – 10 = 0
6x6 – x3 – 5 = 0
6t2 – t – 5 = 0
( t – 1) ( 6t + 5) = 0
5
t = 1, 
6
5
t = x3 = 1, 
6
1 /3
 5
x = 1,   
 6
[PHYSICS]
1. The electrostatic energy of Z protons uniformly distributed throughout a spherical nucleus of
3 Z(Z – 1)e2
radius R is given by E 
5 40R
The measured masses of the neutron, 11H, , 15

7 N and 15
8 O are 1.008665 u, 1.007825 u, 15.000109
15 15
u and 15.003065 u, respectively. Given that the radii of both the 7 N and 8 o nuclei are same, 1
u = 931.5 MeV/c (c is the speed of light) and e /(40) = 1.44 MeV fm. Assuming that the
2 2
15 15
difference between the binding energies of 7 N and 8 O is purely due to the electrostatic energy,,
the radius of either of the nuclei is (1 fm = 10 m) –15
(A) 2.85 fm (B) 3.03 fm (C) 3.42 fm (D) 3.80 fm

f=kT; k R oky s, d xksy kdkj ukfHkd esaZ i zksVksu l eku: i l sfor fj r gS
A , sl sukfHkd dhfLFkj fo| q
r Åt kZuhpsl ehdj .k esa
3Z(Z – 1)e2
AE 
nhxbZgS 40R
U; q
VªkW
u 11H, , 15
7 N , oa15
8 O
ukfHkdksads eki s x; s nzO
; eku Øe' k%1.008665 u, 1.007825 u, 15.000109 u , oa
15.003065 u gS
A 15
7 N
, oa15
8 o
ukfHkdksadhf=kT; k, sal eku nhxbZgS
A 1 u = 931.5 MeV/c2 (t gkac çdk' k dhxfr gS
)
vkS
j e2/(40) = 1.44 MeV fmA ; fn 15
7 N vkS
j 15
8 O
dhca
/kd Åt kZ
v ksdk va
r j fl QZ fLFkj fon~
;q
r Åt kZdsdkj .k gS
]
r ksnksuksaesal sfdl hHkh ukfHkd dhf=kT; k D; k gksxh\ (1 fm = 10–15m)
(A) 2.85 fm (B) 3.03 fm (C) 3.42 fm (D) 3.80 fm
Sol. C
15
7 N  7(11H)  8(10 n)
BE(N) = 0.123986 × 931.5 = 115.492959 MeV
15
8 O  8(11H)  7(10 n)
BE(O) = 0.12019 × 931.5 = 111.956985 MeV
3 e2
BE(N) – BE(O) = 3.535974 = [8(7) – 7 (6)]
5 4 ε 0 R
 R = 3.42 fm
2. An accident in a nuclear laboratory resulted in depostion of a certain amount of radioactive

material of half - life 18 days inside the laboratory. Tests revealed that the radiation was 64 times
more than the permissible level required for safe operation of the laboratory. What is the mini-
mum number of days after which the laboratory can be considered safe for use?
(A) 64 (B) 90 (C) 108 (D) 120
, d ukfHkdh; i z;ksx' kky k esanq ?kZ
Vuk dhot g l sj sfM; k, fDVo i nkFkZdhdq N ek=kk t ek gk x; h] ft l dhv/kkZ ;q
a18 fnuksadh
gS A i j h{k.k l si r k py k fd i z;ksx' kky k esafofdj .k dk Lr j l q
j f{kr Lr j l s64 xq. kk T; knk FkkA U; w
ur e fdr usfnuksadsckn
i z;ksx' kky k dke dj usdsfy , l q j f{kr gksxh\
(A) 64 (B) 90 (C) 108 (D) 120
Sol. C
64 = 26
 the material should decay for 6 half lines for a safe laboratory.
Thus answer = 18 × 6 = 108 days
3. A gas enclosed in a cylinder with movable frictionless piston. Its initial thermodynamic state at
pressure Pi = 105 m3 and volume vi = 10–3 m3 changes to a final state a Pf = (1/32) × 105 Pa and
Vf = 8 × 10–3 m3 in an adiabatic quasi - static process, such that P3V5 = constant. Consider
another thermodynamic process that brings the system from the same initial state to the same
final state in two steps : an isobaric expansion at Pi followed by an isochoric (isovolumetric)
process at volume Vf. The amount of heat supplied to the system in the two process in approxi-
mately
(A) 112 J (B) 294 J (C) 588 J (D) 813J
, d [ kks[ky scsy u] ft l esa, d ?k"kZ. k & j fgr py k; eku fi LVu y xk gS] esa, d xS l ca n gSA fudk; dhi zkj fEHkd Å"ekxfr dh
voLFkk ea sxSl dk ncko Pi = 10 m , oavk; r u Vi = 10 m gS
5 3 –3 3
a
A , d : ) ks"e LFkS fr ddYi dh çfØ; k] ft l esaP3V5 =
fLFkj ka
d gS] l sfudk; va fr e Å"ekxfr dhdhvoLFkk Pf = (1/32) × 105 Pa , oaVf = 8 × 10–3 m3 esai fj ofr Z r gkst kr k
gSA , d nw l j hÅ"ekxfr dhçfØ; k esaoghaçkj fEHkd , oava fr e voLFkk, ankspj .kksaesai w
. kZdht kr hgS ] i gy spj .k esaPi i j l eku
ncko of̀) dsckn , d nq l j spj .k esa, d l eku vk; r u çfØ; k Vf vk; r u i j gksrhgS A nkspj .kksaoky hi zfØ; k esafudk; dks
nhxbZÅ"ek dh ek=kk y xHkx gS A
(A) 112 J (B) 294 J (C) 588 J (D) 813J
Sol. C
P1
P1 = 105 P2 =
32
V1 = 10–3 V2 = 8V1
PV5/3 = K
 = 5/3
Q = nCPdT + n CVdT P
P1V1 8T1
5 3 T1
= n R (T2 – T1) + n R (T3 – T2)
2 2
5 3 1
= nR (8T1 – T1) + nR (T3 – 8T1)
2 2 P2V2
5 3
= nR (7T1) + nRTT3 – 12 nRTT1 V
2 2
35 3
= nRT
T1 – 12 nRT1 + nRT
T3
2 2
11 3
= nRT
T1 + nRT
T3
2 2
11 3
(100) + (25)
2 2
1100  75
=
2
1175
= = 588
2
4. The ends Q and R of two thin wires, PQ and RS, are soldered (Joined) together. Initially each of
the wires has a length of 1m at 10º. Now the end P is maintained at 10ºC, while the end S is
heated and maintained at 400 ºC. The system is thermally insulted from its surroundings. If the
thermal conductivity of wire PQ is twice that of the wire RS and the coefficient of linear thermal
expansion of PQ is 1.2 × 10–5 K–1. the change in length of the wire PQ is
(A) 0.78 mm (B) 0.90 mm (C) 1.56 mm (D) 2.34 mm
, d i r y sr kj PQ dsNksj Q dksvU; i r y s r kj RS dsNksj R i j Vka d k y xkdj t ksM+

k x; k gSA 10ºC i j nksuksar kj ksadh
y EckbZ1m gS A vc bl fudk; dsNksj P r FkkNksj S dksØe' k%10 ºC r Fkk400 ºC i j fLFkj j [ kkt kr k gS A ; g fudk; pkj ks
vksj l sÅ"ekj ks/khgS
A ; fn r kj PQ dhÅ"ekpky dr k r kj RS dhÅ"ek pky dr k l snq xquhgS A r Fkk r kj PQ dkj s[kh; Åf"er
of̀) xq. kka
d 1.2 × 10–5 K–1 gS ] r c r kj PQ dhy EckbZesai fj or Z
u dk eku gS
A
(A) 0.78 mm (B) 0.90 mm (C) 1.56 mm (D) 2.34 mm
Sol. A
P Q R S
1m 1m
P 2k Q K
 400°C
10°C R S
400  0 0  10
=
R R /2
400  0 2(0  10)
= dx
R R
x
420 = 30
10° 140°
420
0 = = 140°C T = 130x + 10
3
dl =  dx
–5
 dl   1.2  10 (130x)dx
l = 1.2 × 10–5 × 65 = 0.78mm

5. A small object is placed 50 cm to the left of a thin convex lens of focal length 30 cm. A convax
spherical mirror of radius of curvature 100 cm is placed to the right of the lens at a distance of 40
cm. The mirror is tilted such that the axis of the mirror is at an angle  = 30º to the axis of the
lens, as shown in the figure.
f=30cm
//
//
/

//
x
//
(0,0)
// ///
(–50,0)
R=
10
0
50 cm
cm
50  50 3,  50
If the origin of the coordinate system is taken to be at the centre of the lens, the coordinates (in
cm) of the point (x, y) at which the image is formed are
(A) (0, 0) (B) (50 – 25 3, 25) (C) (25,25 3) (D) (125 / 3,25 3)
, d NksVhoLr qdks30 cm Qksd l nw j h(focal length) oky s, d i r y smÙky (convax) oky s, d i r y smÙky y sa l dhckbZ a
vksj 50 cm dhnw j hi j j [ kk x; k gSA 100 cm dhoØr k f=kT; k oky s, d mÙky xksy kdkj ni Z . k dksy sa
l dhnkbZavksj 50
cm dhnw j hj [ kk x; k gSA ni Z. k dksbl r j g l s>qd k; k x; k gSfd ni Z
. k dk v{k y sa
l l s = 30º dksdks.k cukr k gS
]t Slk
fp=k esan' kkZ
; k x; k gS
A
f=30cm
//
//
/

//
x
//
(0,0)
// ///
(–50,0)
R=
10
0
50 cm
cm
50  50 3,  50
; fn funsZ
' ka
kd i ) fr dk ew
y fcUnqy sa
l dse/; esagksr kst gk¡ i zfr fcEc cuk gSml fca
nqdk funsZ
' ka
kd (x, y) l sa
VhehVj esa
] D; k
gksxk\
(A) (0, 0) (B) (50 – 25 3, 25) (C) (25,25 3) (D) (125 / 3,25 3)
Sol. Bonus
6. There are two Vernier calipers both of which have 1 cm divided into 10 equal divisions on the
main scale. The Vernier scale of one of the calipers (C1) has 10 equal divisions the correspond to
9 main scale divisions. The Vernier scale of the other caliper (C2) has 10 equal divisions that
correspond to 11 main scale divisions. The readings of the two calipers at shown in the figure.
The measured values (in cm) by calipers C1 and C2, respectively, are
2 3 4
C1
0 5 10
2 3 4
C2
0 5 10
(A) 2.85 and 2.82 (B) 2.87 and 2.83 (C) 2.87 and 2.86 (D) 2.87 and 2.87
nksofuZ; j dSfy i l Zbl r j g l sgS

afd mudseq [; iSekusdk 1 cm, 10 l r HkkxksaesafoHkkft r gS A , d dS fy i j (C1) dsofuZ ;j
iSekusi j 10 cj kcj Hkkx gSt ksfd eq [; iS
ekusds9 Hkkxksadscj kcj gS A nw
l j sdSfy i j (C2) dsofuZ ;j iSekusi j Hkh10 cj kcj
Hkkx gS
at ksfd eq [; iS ekusds11 Hkkxksadscj kcj gS
a
A nksuksadS
fui l Zdsi Buksadksfp=k esan' kkZ
; k x; k gS
A C1 r FkkC2 nqckj keki s
x, l gheku (cm esa ) Øe' k%gSA
2 3 4
C1
0 5 10
2 3 4
C2
0 5 10
(A) 2.85 , oa2.82 (B) 2.87 , oa2.83 (C) 2.87 , oa2.86 (D) 2.87 , oa2.87
Sol. B
LC1 = 1 MSD – 1 VSD LC2 = 1 MSD – VSD
10 VSD  9 MSD 11 VSD  10 MSD
9 10
1 MSD 1 VSD  MSD
10 11
9  10 
LC1 = 1 MS – MS LC2 = 1  11  MS
10  
1 1 1
= MSD =  × cm
10 11 10
1 1
= cm =– cm
100 110
1 1
C1 = 2.8 + 7 × C2 = 2.9 – 7 ×
100 110
= 2.87 = 2.83
7. Two thin circular discs of mass m and 4m, having radii of a and 2a, respectively are rigidly fixed
by a massless, rigid rod of length l  24 a through their centers. This assembly is laid on a firm
and flat surface, and set rolling without slipping on the surface so that the angular speed about

the axis of the rod is . The angular momentum of the entire assembly about the point 'O' is L
(see the figure) Which of the following is statement(s) is (are) true?
4m
z
m
l

l 2a
a
O
(A) The center of mass of the assembly rotates about the z-axis with an angular speed of /5.
(B) The magnitude of angular momentum of center of mass of the assembly about the point O is
81 ma2
(C) The magnitude of angular momentum of the assembly about its center of mass is 17ma2/2

(D) The magnitude of the z-component of L is 55ma2
m r Fkk4m nzO ; eku oky hnksi r y hoR̀r kdkj pf=kdk, ¡ ft udhf=kT; k, saØe' k%a r Fkk 2a gS] dsdsUnzksadksl  24 a y EckbZ
dhnzO ; eku & j fgr nz<+Ba Mhl st ksM+
k x; k gS
A bl l ew g dks, d et cw r l er y l r g i j fy Vk; k x; k gSvksj fQl y k; sfcuk

bl r j g l s?kqek; k x; k gSfd bl dhdks.kh; xfr Ba Mhdsv{k dsfxnZ gS Ai w
j sl ew
g dk fcUnq'O' dsfxnZdks.kh; l a osx L
(fp=k esans[ksa
) fuEufy f[ kr es
al sdkS ul k@dkSul sdFku l R; gS @gSa
\
4m
z
m
l

l 2a
a
O

(A) L dsz--?kVd dk i fj ek.k 55ma2gS A
(B) i w
j sl ew
g dsl a
gfr & dsUnzdksfcUnqz-v{k dsfxnZdks.kh; osx /5 l s?kw e j gk gS
A
(C) i w
j sl ew
g dk l a
gfr dsUnzdk fcUnqO dsfxnZdks.kh; l a osx dk i fj ek.k 81 ma2 gS A
(D) i w
j sl ew
g dsl agfr & dsUnzdsfxnZdks.kh; l a
osx dksi fj ek.k 17ma2/2 gS A
Sol. A,C
8. Light of wavelength ph falls on a cathode plate inside a vacuum tube as shown in the figure. The
work function of the cathode surface is  and the anode is a wire mesh of conducting material
kept at a distance d from the cathode. A potential difference V is maintained between the elec-
trode. If the minimum de Broglie wavelength of the electrons passing through the anode is e,
which of the following statement(s) is (are) true?
Light
Electrons
V
– +
(A) e decreases with increase in  and ph

(B) e is approximately halved, if d is doubled
(C) For large potential difference (V >> /e), e approximately halved if V is made four times
(D) e increases at the same rate as ph for ph < hc/
ph r j a
xnS/; Zdk i zd k' k fuokZ
r uy hdk dsva nj , d dSFkksM i j fxj r k gS
]tS l k fp=k esan' kkZ; k x; k gS
A dS FkksM+dh l r g dk
dk; ZQy u  gS, oa, uksMt ksfd , d pky dh; i nkFkZdsr kj ksadht ky hgS ] dS
FkksM+l sd nw j hi j fLFkr gSA by sDVªksMksadschp dk
foHkokUr j V fLFkj gS A ; fn , uksM dksi kj dj usoky sby sDVªksuksadh U; w
ur e Þnh czksXy hß r j a
xnS/; Ze gS] fuEufy f[ kr esal s
dkS
ul k@dkS
ul sdFku l R; gS
@gS
a
\
Light
Electrons
V
– +
(A) vxj ph < hc/gSr ksph dsl kFke , d l eku nj l sc<+ sxkA
(B)  vkS
j ph dksc<+ kusi j e de gksxkA
(C) d dksnqxquk dj usi j e y xHkx vk/kk gkst k, xkA
(D) mPp foH kokUr j (V >> /e), i j vxj V dkspkj c<+ k; k t k, r kse y xHkx vk/kk gkst k, xkA
Sol. C
hc
eV  
ph
hc 
v 
phe e
h
e 
2mE
h
e 
2meV
9. In an experiment to determine the acceleration due to gravity g, the formula used for the time
7(R – r)
period of a periodic motion is T = 2 . The values of R and r are measured to be (60 ± 1)
5g
mm and (m ± 1) mm, respectively. In five successive measurements, the time period is found to
be 0.52 sw, 0.56 s, 0.57 s, 0.54 s and 0.59. The least count of the watch used for the measure-
ment of time period is 0.01 s. Which of the following statement(s) is (are) true?
(A) The error in the measurement of r is 10%
(B) The error in the measurement of T is 3.57%
(C) The error in the measurement of T is 2%
(D) The error in the determined value of g is 11%
7(R – r)
xq
: Roh; Roj .k g dsfu/kkZ
j .k ds, d i z;ksx esai z;q =k T = 2
Dr vkor hZ& xfr dk l e; dky dk l w 5g
gS
A R r Fkkr
dkeki kx; keku Øe' k%(60 ± 1) mm r Fkk(10 ± 1) mm gS Ay xkr kj i ka

p eki u esa
eki kx; kl e; dky 0.52 sw, 0.56
s, 0.57 s, 0.54 s r Fkk0.59 gSA l e; dky dseki u dsfy , i z;ksx esay k; hx; h?kM+
hdkvYi Reka d 0.01 s gSAfuEufy f[ kr
esal sdkS
ul k@dkS
ul sdFku l R; gS
a\
(A) r dseki u esa=kq
fV 10% gS A (B) T dseki u es a=kq
fV 3.57% gS A
(C) T dseki u esa=kqfV 2% gSA (D) g dsfudky sx; seku es a=kq
fV 11% gS A
Sol. A,B,D
r 1
(a)  100   100  10%
r 10
7 R  r 
(b) T  2
5g
R = 60 ± 1
r = 10 ± 1
0.52  0.56  0.57  0.54  0.59

Tm 
5
= 0.556
T1 = 0.556 – 0.52 = 0.036
T2 = 0.556 – 0.56 = 0.004
T3 = 0.556 – 0.57 = 0.014
T4 = 0.556 – 0.54 = 0.016
T5 = 0.556 – 0.59 = 0.036
0.036  0.016  0.014  0.004  0.036

Tn 
5
T 0.020
  100 = 3.57%
T 0.556
42 7R  r 
(d) g
5T 2
g  R  r  T
 2
g R r T
2 2  0.02
 
50 0.556
 2 42 
    100
 50 55 
= 4 + 7.5
= 11.7 %
10. Consider two identical galvanometers and two identical resistors with resistance R. If the internal
of the galvanometers RC < R/2, which of the following statement(s) about any one of the
galvanometer is (are) true?
(A) The maximum voltage range is obtained when all the components are contained in series
(B) The maximum voltage range is obtained when the two resistors and one galvanometer are
connected in series, and the second galvanometer is connected in parallel to the first galvanometer
(C) The maximum current range is obtained when all the components are connected in parallel
(D) The maximum current range is obtained when the two galvanometers are connected in series
and the combination is connected in parallel with both the resistors
nks, d l eku xsYosuksehVj r Fkk , dl eku i zfr j ks/k R oky snksi zfr j ks/k fn; sx; sgSA ; fn xsYosuksehVj dk vka r fj d i zfr j ks/k RC <
R/2 gS ] r ksfdl hHkh, d xsYosuksehVj dsckj sesafn; sx, fuEufy f[ kr dFkuksaesal sdkS ul k@dkS ul sl R; gS @gS a
\
(A) i zkIr fd xbZoksYVr k i fj l j vf/kdr e gksxht c l Hkh?kVd Js.kh esat q M+sgq, gSA
(B) i z kIr fd xbZoksYVehVj i fj l j vf/kdr e gksxh t c nksi zfr j ks/kd r Fkk , d xsYosuksehVj Js.kh esat q MsgS ar Fkk nw l jk
xsYosuksehVj i gy sxsYosuksehVj dsl ekukUr j esat q M+
k gS
A
(C) i z kIr fd xbZ/kkj k i fj l j vf/kdr e gksxht c l Hkh?kVd l ekukUr j ea st qM+
sgSA
(D) i z kIr fd xbZ/kkj ki fj l j vf/kdr e gksxht c nksxsYosuksehVj Js.khesat q M+
sgSAr Fkk; sl a; kst u i zfr j ks/kdksadsl kFkl ekukUr j
ea
st qM+ k gSA
Sol. A,C
V = Ig (Rg + S)
if Rg and S is large V 
 Rg 
I  Ig  1  
 s 
if s  Rg 
Then I 
11. In the circuit shown below, the key is pressed at time t = 0. Which of the following statement (s)
is (are) true ?
40F 25k
–
V
+
50F 20F
+ –
Key 5V
(A) The voltmeter displays –5 V as soon as the key is pressed, and displays +5 after a long time
(B) The voltmeter will display 0 V at time t = In 2 seconds
(C) The current in the ammeter becomes 1/e of the initial value after 1 second
(D) The current in the ammeter becomes zero after a long time
uhpsfn[ kk, x, i fj IkFkesal e; t = 0 i j cVu (key) dksnck; kx; kgS

AfuEufyf[ kr esal sdkS
ul k@dkS
ul sdFku l R; gS
@gS\
40F 25k
–
V
+
50F 20F
+ –
Key 5V
(A) cVu dksnckr sgh oks
YVehVj –5 V fn[ kkr k gSt cfd y a csl e; dsckn oks+5 V fn[ kkr k gSafter a long time
(B) l e; t = In 2 seconds i j oks YVehVj ' kw U; oksYV fn[ kkr k gS
(C) 1 second dsckn vehVj es a/kkj k i zkj fEHkd /kkj k dks1/e xq . kk gksrh gS
A
(D) y a
csl e; dsckn vehVj esa/kkj k ' kw
U; gkst kr hgS
Sol. A,B,C,D
0V 5V
25k at t = 0 25k
5 – 0 5 – 0
V V
+ +
50F 50F
A A
(a) 5V  0V
+ – + –
Key 5V Key 5V
40F 40F
5 0 5 0
2.5V 2.5V
(b)
5V 5V
V = 5 (1 – e–t/RC)
RC = 1
V = 5 (1 – e–ln(2))
V = 2.5 V
 Potential difference is zero.
(c) I = I0(e–t/RC)
RC = 1
at t = 1 sec.
I = I0/e
(d) at = 
I=0
12. A block with mass M is connected by a massless spring with stiffness constant k to a rigid wall
and moves without friction on a horizontal surface. The block oscillates with small amplitude A
about an equilibrium position x0 . Consider two cases: (i) when the block is at x0; and (ii) when
the block is at x = x0 + A. In both the cases, a particle with mass m(<M) is softly placed on the
block after which they stick to each other. Which of the following statements (s) is (are) true
about the motion after the mass m is placed on the Mass M ?
M
(A) The amplitude of oscillation in the first case changes by a factor of , whereas in the
m+M
second case it remains unchanged
(B) The final time period of oscillation in both the case is same
(C) The total energy decreases in both the cases
(D) The instantaneous speed at x0 of the combined masses decreases in both the cases
, d nzO
; eku&j fgr fLi a
zx] ft udk nz<+
r kxq
. kka
d (stiffness constant) k gS
] ds, d Nksj i j M nzO
; eku dk , d xq
Vdk t q
M+k
gS
] r Fkk nw
l j sNksj dksnz<+nhokj l st ksM+ k x; k gS
A ; g xq Vdk , d l er y ni Z . k ?k"kZ
. k&j fgr l r g i j , d l arq
fy r fLFkfr
x0 dsfxnZNks Vsvk; ke A l snksy u dj r k gS A ; g¡k nksi fj fLFkfr ; kaekfu, %(i) t c xq Vdk x0 i j gSvkS j (ii) t c xqVdk
x = x0 + A i j gS A nksuka
si fj fLFkfr ; ksaesanzO
; eku m(<M) ds, d d.k dksxq Vdsi j /khjsl sbl i zd kj j [ kk t kr k gSdhog
rq
ja
r xq Vdsl sfpi dst kr kgSAd.kdksxq VdsdsÅi j dsckn xfr dsckjsesafuEufyf[ kr esal sdkS ul k@dk
S
ul sdFku l R; gS@gS\
M
(A) i gy h i fj fLFkfr esanksy u dk vk; ke , HkkT; (factor) l si fj ofr Z
r gksrk gS
] t cfd nw
l j h i fj fLFkfr esa; g
m+M
vi fj ofr Z
r j gr k gS A
(B) nks uksai fj fLFkfr ; ksaesanksy u dk va fr e l e; dky l eku gS
(C) nks uksai fj fLFkfr ; ksaesal Ei w
. kZÅt kZde gkst kr hgS A
(D) l fEefy r nz O; ekuksadhx0 i j r kR{kf.kd xfr nksuksai fj fLFkfr ; ksaesade gkst kr hgS
A
Sol. A,B,D
(a) M
MA = (m + M) 'A'
K k
M A  m  M  A'
M Mm
A' M

A mM
M  m 
(b) T  2
k
Time period remain same in both case. After m mass is pla ced on both block.
13. While conducting the Young’s double slit experiment, a student replaced the two slits with a large
opaque plate in the x-y plane containing two small holes that act as two coherent point sources
(S1,S2) emitting light of wavelength 600 nm. The student mistakenly placed the screen parallel to
the x-z plane (for z > 0) at a distance D = 3 m from the mid-point of S1S2, as shown schematically
in the figure. The distance between the sources d = 0.6003 mm. The origin O is at the intersection
of the screen and the line joining S1S2. Which of the following is (are) true of the intensity pattern
of the screen ?
Screen
O
y
S1 S2
x
d
d
(A) Straight bright and dark bands parallel to the x-axis
(B) The region very close to the point O will be dark
(C) Hyperbolic bright and dark bands with foci symmetrically placed about O in the x-direction
(D) Semi circular bright and dark bands centered at point O
, d fo| kFkhZus; ax nksfy LV oky si z;ksx (Young’s double slit experiment,) dj r sl e; nksfLy Vksadht xg , d cM+ h
l er y vi kj n' khZi V~
Vhdksx-y r y i j j [ k fn; kA bl i V~ VhesanksfNnzgSat ks600 nm r j a xnS /; Zi zd k' k mRiUUk dj usoky s
nksdy kl ac} fca nqL=kksrksa (S1, S2) dsl eku gS a
A fo| kFkhZusxy r hl si nsZ (screen) dksx-z r y ( z > 0) dsl ekukUr j
S1S2 dse/; fca nql sD = 3m dhnw j hi j j [ k fn; k] t S
l k dhO; oLFkk&fp=k esafn[ kk; k x; k gSA L=kksrksadschp fd nw j hd =
0.6003 mm gS A S1S2 dkst ksM+ usoky hj s[kkt gkai nsZl sfey r hgSogk¡i j ew y fcanqO gS A i nsZi j r hozrki zfr : i (intensity
pattern) dsfy , fuEufy f[ kr es al sdkS ul k@dkS ul sdFku l R; gS\
Screen
z
O
y
S1 S2
x
d
d
(A) fca
nqO i j dsfUnzr v/kZoÙ̀kh; nhIr r Fkk vnhIr i fV~
V; k¡
(B) x-v{k dsl ekukU r j nhIr r Fkk vnhIr l h/khi fV~
V; k¡
(C) fca
nqO dk fudVr e {ks=k vnhIr gksxk
(D) x-fn' kk es
afca
nqO dsfxnZl efer Qksd l ksadsl kFk vfr i j oy f; d (Hyperbolic) nhIr r Fkk vnhIr i fV~
V; k¡
Sol. B,D
(b) Fringes will be semi–circular.
d 0.6003  103
Now, 
 600  109
d 1
 103 
 2
So, the region very close to O is dark.
(d) Semi circular bright and dark fringes will be formed.
14. A rigid wire loop of square shape having side of length L and resistance R is moving along the x-
axis with a constant velocity v0 in the plane of the paper. At t = 0, the right edge of the loop
enters a region of length 3L where there is a uniform magnetic field B0 into the plane of the paper,
as shown in the figure. For sufficiently large v0, the loop eventually crosses the region. Let x be
location of the right edge of the loop. Let v(x), I(x) and F(x) represent the velocity of the loop,
current in the loop, and force on the loop, respectively, as a function of x. Counter-clockwise
current is taken as positive.
× ×
× ×
× ×
× ×
× ×
× ×
× ×
× ×
L × ×
v0 × ×
× ×
× ×
× ×
× ×
x
0 L 2L 3L 4L
Which of the following schematic plot(s) is(are) correct ? (Ignore gravity)
v(x)
I(x)
3L 4L
x
(A) (B) 0 L 2L
x
0 L 2L 3L 4L
I(x) I(x)
(C) (D)
x x
0 L 2L 3L 4L 0 L 2L 3L 4L
, d oxhZ; vkdf̀r oky k r kj dk nz<+Qa nk] ft l dsHkq
t k dhy ackbZL , oai zfr j ks/k R gS
] x-v{k dhfn' kk esa, d fLFkj xfr v0
l sbl dkxt dsIy su i j (palane of the paper) xfr eku gS A l e; t = 0 i j Qa nsdk nksfguk fdukj k 3L y ackbZdsfLFkj
pqa
cdh; {ks=k B0 esai zos'k dj r k gS A pq a
cdh; j s[kkvksadhfn' kk dkxt dsIy su dsy a cor ~va
nj dhvksj gS¼ tSl k fp=k esan' kkZ
;k
x; k gS
½| v0 dkeku i ; kZ Ir gksusi j va r r ksxRokQankpqa
cdh; {ks=kdksi kj dj r kgS A eku y hft , dhQa nsdhnkfguhHkq t kLFkku
x i j gS
A Qansdhxfr ] Qa nsesa/kkj k , oaQa nsi j cy dhx i j fuHkZ
j r k dksØe' k%v(x), I(x) , oaF(x) l sfu: fi r fd; k x; k
gSA okeor Z/kkj k dksi ksft fVo y saA
× ×
× ×
× ×
× ×
× ×
× ×
× ×
× ×
L × ×
v0 × ×
× ×
× ×
× ×
× ×
x
0 L 2L 3L 4L

ul k@dkS
ul sO
; oLFkk fp=k l ghgS\ (xq
: Rokd"kZ
. k ux.; ekus)
v(x)
I(x)
3L 4L
x
(A) (B) 0 L 2L
x
0 L 2L 3L 4L
I(x) I(x)
(C) (D)
x x
0 L 2L 3L 4L 0 L 2L 3L 4L
Sol. A,B
d
 
dt
dA
B
dt
dx
  Bl
dt
 = Blv

i
R
B2l2
F k
R
dv B2l2
mv  k
dx R
v x    B2l2
v0
dv 
0  Rm
dx
B2l2
v  v0  x
mR
PARAGRAPH1
A frame of reference that is accelerated with respect to an inertial frame of reference is called a
non-inertial frame of reference. A coordinate system fixed on a circular disc rotating about a fixed
axis with a constant angular velocity  is an example of a non-inertial fram of reference. The

relationship between the force Frot experienced by a particle of mass m moving on the rotating

disc and the force Fin experienced by the particle in an inertial frame of reference is
 
 
    
F rot  F in  2m  vrot     m    r   ,
   

where vrot is the velocity of the particle in the rotating frame of reference and  r is the position
vector of the particle with respect to the centre of the disc.
Now consider a smooth slot along a diameter of a disc of radius R rotating counter-clockwise with
a constant angular speed  about its vertical axis through its center. We assign a coordinate
system with the origin at the center of the disc, the x-axis along the slot, the y-axis perpendicular
 
to the slot and the z-axis along the rotation axis    k̂  . A small block of mass m is gently
 
^
placed in the slot at 
r = (R/2) i at t = 0 and is contained to move only along the slot.
, d funsZ
' kr a
=k t ks, d t M+
Roh; funsZ
' kr a
=k dhr q
y uk esaRofj r gks] vt M+
Roh; funsZ
' kr a
=k dgy kr k gS
A fLFkj dks.kh; osx l s
?kw
er hgq
bZfMLd i j c} (fixed) funsZ ' kr a
=kvt M+
Roh; r a=k dk , d mnkgj .k gSA m nzO ; eku dk, d d.k ?kw er hgqbZfMLd i j

xfr eku gS
A xfr eku d.k fMLd i j c} funsZ
'k ra
=k ds l ki s{k cy Frot r Fkk , d t M+
Roh; funsZ
'k ra
=k ds l ki s{k cy

Fin dksegl w A Frot vkS
l dj r k gS 
j F in dschp dk l a
ca
/k fuEufy f[ kr l ehdj .k esafn; k x; k gS
A
 
 
    
F rot  F in  2m  vrot     m    r    ,
   
; gk¡ i j vrot ?kw
er sgq
, funsZ
' kr a
=k esad.k dk osx gSr Fkk r d.k dk fMLd dse/; fca
nqdsl ki s{k fLFkfr l fn' k (position
vector) gS A
ekfu, fd R f=kT; k dh, d fMLd] ft l esaO ; kl dsl ekukUr j , d ?k"kZ

. kj fgr [ kka
pk gS
] , d fLFkj dks.kh; xfr l svi usv{k
i j okekor Zfn' kkesa?kw
e j ghgS
A , d funsZ
' kr a
=k ekfu, ft l dk ew
y fca
nqfMLd dse/; fca nqi j gS, oax-v{k [ k¡kpsdsl ekukUr j
 
gS eusoky hv{k dsl ekukUr j gS   k̂  1 m nzO
] y-v{k [ k¡kpsdsvfHky Ec i j gS, oaz-v{k ?kw ; eku oky s, d NksVsxq
Vds
 
dksl e; t= 0 i j r = (R/2) î fca

nqi j /khjsl sbl r j g l sj [ kk t kr k gSfd oksfl QZ[ k¡kpsesaghpy l dsA


m
R/2
15. The distance r of the block at time t is

R t R
(A) (e  e–t ) (B) cos t
4 4
R 2 t R
(C) (e  e–2 t ) (D) cos 2t
4 2
l e; t i j xq
Vdsdhnw
j hr dk eku gS%
R t R
(A) (e  e–t ) (B) cos t
4 4
R 2 t R
(C) (e  e–2 t ) (D) cos 2t
4 2
Sol. A
dv
mx2 = mv
dx
2xdx = vdv
v2 = 2x2 + C
R
At x = , v=0
2
 R2 2
O= +C
4
2 2
R
C=–
4
2R 2
 v2 = 2x2 –
4
2
R
v =  x2 –
4
dx 2 R2
= x –
dt 4
dx
 x – R2 / 4
2 
=  dt
On solving, we get option (A).

16. The net reaction of the disc on the block is

1 2 2 t –2 t ˆ ˆ 1 2 t – t ˆ ˆ
(A) m R(e – e )j  mgk (B) m R(e – e )j  mgk
2 2
(C) –m2R cos tj ˆ – mgk ˆ (D) m2R sin tjˆ – mgk ˆ
xq
Vdsi j fMLV dhusV i zfr fØ; k (net reaction) gS
%
1 ˆ
ˆ  mgk 1 ˆ
ˆ  mgk
(A) m2R(e2t – e–2 t )j (B) m2R(et – e– t )j
2 2
(C) –m2R cos tj ˆ

ˆ – mgk ˆ
ˆ – mgk
(D) m2R sin tj
Sol. B
Net reacn of the disc on the
block is obtained by
using
      
Frot = Fin + 2m( Vrot ×  ) + m(  × r ) × 
as
1
m2R(et – e–t) ĵ + mg k̂
2
PARAGRAPH 2
Consider an evacuted cylindrical chamber of height h having rigid conducting plates at the end
and an insulting curved surface as shown in the figure. A number of spherical balls made of a
light weight and soft material and coated with a conducting material are placed on the bottom
plated. The balls have a radius r << h. Now a high voltage source (HV) is connected across the
conducting plates such that the bottom plate is at +V0 and the top plate at –V0. Due to their
conducting surface, the balls will eventually collide with the top plate, where the plate and are
repelled by it. The balls will eventually collide with the top plate, where the coefficient of restitution
can be taken to be zero due to the soft nature the material of the balls. The electric field in the
chamber can be considered to be that of a parallel plate capacitor. Assume that there are no
collisions between the balls and the interaction between them is negligible. (Ignore gravity)
h ÅapkbZoky sfuokZ fr r (evacuated) , d csy ukdkj d{k dsnksuksaNksjksi j nksnzo (rigid) pky d i fV~ Vdk, agSvkS j ml dk
oØi `"V vpky d gS ]t Sl k dhfp=keesan' kkZ ; k x; k gSA de Hkkj oky heq y k; e i nkFkZl scuhgq ; hdbZxksy kdkj xksfy ; k¡] ft udh
l r g i j , d pky d i nkFkZdhi j r p<+ hgS] uhpsoky hi fV~ Vdk i j j [ khgq bZgSa
A bu xksfy ; ksdhf=kT; k r << h gS A vc , d
mPPk oksYVr k dk L=kksr (HV) bl r j g l st ksM+ k t kr k gSfd uhpsoky h i fV~ Vdk i j +V0 , oaÅi j oky h i fV~ Vdk i j
–V0 dk foH ko vk t kr k gS A pky d i j r dsdkj .k xksfy ; k¡ vkosf' kr gksd j i fV~Vdk dsl kFk l efoHko gkst kr hgSft l dsdkj .k
osi fV~
Vdkl si zfr df"kZ r gksrhgSA var r ksxRokxksfy ; ¡kÅi j hi fV~ Vdkl sVdj kr hgS ] t gk¡i j xksfy ; ksadsi nkFkZdheq y k; e i zd f̀r
dsdkj .k i zR; oLFkku xq . kka
d (coefficient of restitution) dks' kw U; fy ; k t k l dr k gS A d{k esafo| q r {ks=k dksl ekukUr j
i fV~
Vdk oky sl a /kkfj =k dsl eku ekuk t k l dr k gS A xksfy ; ksadh, d nw l j sl si kj Li fj d fØ; k , oaVdj ko dksux.; ekuk t k
l dr k gSA (xq : Rokd"kZ . k ux.; gS A)
A
–V0 e=0
–
V0
+
+V0
17. Which one of the following statements is correct?

(A) The balls will stick to the top plate and remain there
(B) The balls will bounce back to the bottom plate carrying the same charge they went up with
(C) The balls will bounce back to the bottom plate carrying the opposite charge they went up with
(D) The balls will execute simple harmonic motion between the two plates
fuEufy f[ kr esal sdkS ul k dFku l R; gS\
(A) xksfy ; k¡ nksuksai fV~
Vdkvksadschp l j y vkor Zxfr fu"i kn dj sa
xhA
(B) xksfy ; ¡k Åi j h i fV~Vdk i j fpi ddj oghaj g t kr hgS
a
(C) xksfy ; ¡k ft l vkos'k dsl kFk Åi j t kr hgSaml hvkos'k dsl kFk mNy dj fupy hi fV~ Vdk i j oki l vk t kr hgSA
(D) xksfy ; ¡k ft l vkos'k dsl kFk Åi j t kr hgS
aml dsfoi j hr vkos'k dsl kFk mNy dj fupy hi fV~
Vdk i j oki l vk t kr hgS
A
Sol. C
A
–V0 e=0
–
V0
+
+V0
Balls placed on +ve plate become positive charge and move upward due to electric field. These
balls on colliding with negative plate become negatively charged and move opposite to the direc-
tion of electric field.
18. The average current in the steady state registered by the ammeter in the circuit will be
(A) zero (B) proportional to the potential V0
(C) proportional to V01 / 2 (D) proportional to V02
i fj i Fk esay xk, vehVj esaLFkk; hvoLFkk esavkS
l r /kkj k
(A) V02 dsl ekuq i kr h gksxh (B) dk eku ' kw
U; gksxk
(C) V01 / 2 dsl ekuq
i kr h gksxh (D) V01 / 2 dsl ekuq
i kr h gksxh
Sol. D
qv
F  qE 
d
qv
ma 
d
qv
a
md
1 2
 d at
2
1 qv 2
d t
2 md
1
t2 
qv
 qv
1
t2 
v2
1
 t
v
q
 i
t
i 0 v2
[CHEMISTRY]
19. For the following electrochemical cell at 298 K,
Pt(s)|H2(g, 1 bar)|H+(aq, 1M)||M4+(aq), M2+ (aq)|Pt(s)
[M2  (aq)]
Ecell = 0.092 V when = 10x
[M4  (aq)]
0 RT
Given : EM4 /M2 = 0.151 V; 2.303 = 0.059 V
F
The value of x is
(A) –2 (B) –1 (C) 1 (D) 2
298 K i j fuEufy f[ kr oS
|q
r &j kl k; fud l sy (electrochemical cell)]
Pt(s)|H2(g, 1 bar)|H+(aq, 1M)||M4+(aq), M2+ (aq)|Pt(s)
[M2  (aq)]
dsfy ; sEcell = 0.092 V t c [M4 (aq)] = 10x
RT
eku y hft , fd : E0M 4
/M2 = 0.151 V; 2.303 = 0.059 V rc
F
x dk eku D; k gks
xk \
(A) –2 (B) –1 (C) 1 (D) 2
Sol. D
Anode
M+4 + H2 M+2 + 2H
M2 
0.06  
Ecell = E°cell – log  4 
2 M
 
M2
0.092 = 0.151 – 0.03 log
M4
M2 
 
= –0.06 = –0.03 log10 M4 
 
M2 
  [M2  (aq)]
M4  = 10
2
[Given = 10x]
  [M4  (aq)]
10x = 102
=x=2
20. THe qualitative sketches I, II and III given below show the variation of surface tension with
molar concentration of three different aqueous solution of KCl, CH3OH and CH3(CH2)11 OSO3 –Na+
at room temperature. The correct assignment of the sketches is
II
Surface tension
Surface tension
Surface tension
I III
concentration concentration concentration
(A) I : KCl II : CH3OH III : CH3(CH2)11OSO3–Na+

(B) I : CH3(CH2)11OSO3–Na+ II : CH3OH III : KCl
(C) I : KCl II : CH3(CH2)11 OSO3–Na+ III : CH3OH
(D) I : CH3OH II : KCl III : CH3(CH2)11 OSO3–Na+
uhpsfn; sxq . kkRed j s[kkfp=k I, II r Fkk III l kekU; r ki i j KCl, CH3OH r Fkk CH3(CH2)11 OSO3 –Na+ dsr hu fHkUu
t y h; foy ; uksadh eksy j l kUnzrk (concentration) dsl kFk i `"B r uko (Surface tension) dsi fj or Z u dksn' kkZ
r sgSa
A
j s[kkfp=kksadk l gh fufnZ "Vhdj .k D; k gS\
II III
i `"B r uko
i `"B r uko
I
i `"B r uko
l kUnz
.k l kUnz.k l kUnz.k
(A) I : KCl II : CH3OH III : CH3(CH2)11OSO3–Na+
(B) I : CH3(CH2)11OSO3–Na+ II : CH3OH III : KCl
(C) I : KCl II : CH3(CH2)11 OSO3–Na+ III : CH3OH
(D) I : CH3OH II : KCl III : CH3(CH2)11 OSO3–Na+
Sol. D
According to theory
21. In the following reaction sequence in aqueous solution, the species X, Y and Z, respectively,
are
Ag+ Ag+ with time
S2O32– X Y Z
Clear White Black
Solution Precipitate Precipitate
(A) [Ag(S2O3)2]3–, Ag2S2O3, Ag2S (B) [Ag(S2O3)3]5–, Ag2SO3, Ag2S
(C) [Ag(SO3)2]3–, Ag2S2O3, Ag (D) [Ag(SO3)3]3–, Ag2SO4, Ag2
t y h; foy ; u esafuEufy f[ kr vfHkfØ; k vfHkØe esa
] Li h'kht (species) X, Y r Fkk Z Øe' k%gS
%
&
+ +
Ag Ag with time
S2O32– X Y Z
l kQ l Qsn dkyk
foy; u vo{ks
i vo{kis
(A) [Ag(S2O3)2]3–, Ag2S2O3, Ag2S (B) [Ag(S2O3)3]5–, Ag2SO3, Ag2S
(C) [Ag(SO3)2] , Ag2S2O3, Ag
3–
(D) [Ag(SO3)3]3–, Ag2SO4, Ag2
Sol. A
Ag  with
S2O32–   X Ag
 Y 
time
Z
clearsol white ppt Black PPt
3
X =  Ag S2O3 2  clearsol.
y = Ag2S2O3 white ppt
22. The geometries of the ammonia complexes of Ni2+, Pt2+ and Zn2+, respectively, are
(A) octahedral, square planar and tetrahedral
(B) square planar, octahedral and tetrahedral
(C) tetrahedral, square planar and octahedral
(D) octahedral, tetrahedral and square planar
Ni2+, Pt2+ r Fkk Zn2+ dsveks fu; k l a
dq y ksadhT; kfefr ; k¡ Øe' k%gS
a
(A) v"VQy dh; ] oxZl er y h r Fkk pr q"Qy dh;
(B) oxZl er y h] v"VQy dh; r Fkk pr q"Qy dh;
(C) pr q
"Qy dh; ] oxZl er y hr Fkk v"VQy dh;
(D) v"VQy dh; ] pr q"Qy dh; r Fkk oxZl er y h
Sol. A
2
Ni2+  Octahedral  Ni NH3 6 
2
Pt2+  sq. planar  Pt NH3 4 
2
Zn2+  Tetrahedral  Zn NH3 4 
23. The correct order of acidity for the following compounds is
CO2H
CO2H CO2H CO2H
HO OH OH
(I) (II) (III) (IV)
OH OH
(A) I > II > III > IV (B) III > I > II > IV (C) III > IV > II > I (D) I > III > IV > II
fuEufy f[ kr ; kS
fxdksadhvEy r k dk l ghØe gS
CO2H
CO2H CO2H CO2H
HO OH OH
(I) (II) (III) (IV)
OH OH
(A) I > II > III > IV (B) III > I > II > IV (C) III > IV > II > I (D) I > III > IV > II
Sol. A
– –
O O
CO2H H H
C
HO OH O O
+
(I) –H
– –
O O
CO2H H
C
OH O
+
(II) –H
CO2H
(III) (–I)
OH
CO2H
1
(IV) Acidity  (–I) 
(M)
OH
24. The major product of the following reaction sequence is

O
(i) HCHO (excess)/NaOH, heat

+
(ii) HCHO/H (catalytic amount)
O OH
O O O O OH O O
HO
(A) (B) (C) (D)
OH
fuEufy f[ kr vfHkfØ; k vfHkØe dk eq
[ ; mRikn gS
O
(i) HCHO (v f/kd ek=kk)/NaOH, Å"ek

(ii) HCHO/H (mR i zsjd ek=kk)(Catalytic amount)
+
O OH
O O O O OH O O
HO
(A) (B) (C) (D)
OH
Sol. A
25. According to Molecular Orbital Theory,

(A) C22 is expected to be diamagnetic
(B) O22+ is expected to have a longer bond length than O2
(C) N2+ and N2 have the same bond order
(D) He2+ has the same energy as two isolated He atoms
v.kqd{kd fl ) kUr (Molecular Orbital Theory) dsvuq
l kj
(A) C22 i z
R; kf' kr : i l si zfr pq
Ecdh; (diamagnetic) gS A
(B) O2 dh vkca
2+
/k y EckbZ(Bond length) i zR; kf' kr : i l sO2 dhvkca
/k y EckbZl sy EchgS
A
(C) N2 r Fkk
+
dhvkca
N2 /k dksfV (Bond order) l eku gSA
(D) He2 dh Åt kZnks, dy (isolated) He i j ek.kq
+
v ksadhÅt kZdsl eku gS
A
Sol. A,C
According to M.O.T.
C22– does not have any unpaired electron
N2+ & N2– has 2.5 (same B.O.) B.O.
26. Mixture(s) showing positive deviation from Raoult's law at 35°C is(are)
(A) carbon tetrachloride + methanol (B) carbon disulphide + acetone
(C) benzene + toluene (D) phenol + aniline
feJ.k t ks35°C i j j kmYV fu; e (Raoult's law) l s/kukRed fopy u i znf' kZ
r dj r k gS¼
dj r sgS
a
½
(A) dkcZu VsVªkDy ksjkbM+ esFksukW
y (B) dkcZu Mkbl YQkbM + , l hVksu
(C) cs
Ut hu + VW kYohu (D) QhukWy + , fuy hu
Sol. A, B
27. The CORRECT statement(s) for cubic close packed (ccp) three dimensional structure is(are)
(A) The number of the nearest neighbours of an atom present in the topmost layer is 12
(B) The efficiency of atom packing is 74%
(C) The number of octahedral and tetrahedral voids per atom are 1 and 2, respectively
(D) The unit cell edge length is 2 2 times the radius of the atom
?kuh; fufcM l adq fy r (cubic close packed) (ccp) f=kfoeh; l a j puk dsfy ; sl ghdFku gS
@gSa
(A) , d i j ek.kqt ksl oks
Z
Pp i j r (topmost layer) esami fLFkr gSml dsfudVr e i zfr osf' k; ksa¼ i M+
ksfl ; ksa
½dhl a
[ ; k 12 gS
A
(B) i j ek.kqdh l adqy u {ker k74% gS
(C) v"VQy dh; r Fkk pr q "Qy dh; fj fä ; ksadhl a
[ ; k i zfr i j ek.kqØe' k%1 o 2 gS
(D) , d dksf"Bdk dsdksj (unit cell edge) dhy EckbZi j ek.kqdhf=kT; k dk 2 2 xq
uk gS
A
Sol. B, C, D
A=9
B = 74%
C = O.V and T.V. per atom are 1 and 2 respectively
D = r = 2 a
2 × 2r = 2a
a= 2 2 r
28. Extraction of copper from copper pyrite (CuFeS2) involves

(A) crushing followed by concentration of the ore by froth-flotation
(B) removal of iron as slag
(C) self-reduction step to produce 'blister copper' following evolution of SO2
(D) refining of 'blister copper' by carbon reduction
dkW
i j i kbj kbV (CuFeS2) l sdkW
ij ¼
r k¡ck½dsfu"d"kZ
. k esa
sD; k l a
fy Ir gS¼
gS
a
½\
(A) ny u r Fkk Qsu&Iy ou (froth-flotation) } kj k v; Ld dk l kUnz.k
(B) y ks
gsdk /kkr q
ey ds: i esfu"dkl u
(C) SO2 fudkl dsi ' pkr **QQks y snkj r k¡csa
** (blister copper) dsmRikn dsfy ; sLo%
&vi p; u dk i x
(D) dkcZ u vi p; u } kj k **QQksy snkj r k¡csa
** (blister copper) dk ' kks/ku
Sol. A, B, C
29. The nitrogen containing compound produced in the reaction of HNO3 with P4O10
(A) can also be prepared by reaction of P4 and HNO3
(B) is diamagnetic
(C) contains one N–N bond
(D) reacts with Na metal producing a brown gas
HNO3 dh P4O10 dsl kFk vfH
kfØ; k esamRikfnr ukbVªkst u vUr foZ
"V ; kS
fxd
(A) P4 r Fkk HNO3 dhvfHkfØ; k l sHkh cuk; k t k l dr k gS
(B) i z
fr pqEcdh; (diamagnetic) gS
(C) esa, d N–N cU/k vUr foZ "V gS
(D) Na /kkr ql svfH kfØ; k dj , d Hkw
j h(Brown) xS l mRikfnr dj r k gS
Sol. B, D
P4O10 + HNO3  H3PO4 + N2O5
Dehyrating agent
(B) Diamagnetic
(D) Na + N2O5  NaNO3 + NO2

Corporate Head Office : Motion Education Pvt. Ltd., 394 - Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota-5 (Raj.)
30. For 'invert sugar' the correct statement(s) is(are)

(Given: specific rotations of (+)-sucrose, (+)-maltose, L-(–)-glucose and L-(+)-fructose in
aqueous solution are +66°, +140°, –52° and +92°, respectively)
(A) 'invert sugar' is prepared by acid catalyzed hydrolysis of maltose
(B) 'invert sugar' is an equimolar mixture of D-(+)-glucose and D-(–)-fructose
(C) specific rotation of 'invert sugar' is –20°
(D) on reaction with Br2 water, 'invert sugar' forms saccharic acid as one of the products
^vi or̀ ' kdZ
j k^ ('invert sugar') dsfy ; sl ghdFku gS
@gS
a
(fn; k gS%
(+)-l w
Økst (sucrose), (+)-ekW YVkts (maltose), L-(–)- Xyw d kst (glucose) r Fkk L-(+)-ÝqDVkst (fructose)
dk t y h; foy ; u esafof' k"V /kq
zo.k (specific rotations) Øe' k%+66°, +140°, –52° r Fkk +92° gS )
(A) 'vi or̀ ' kdZ
j k' ekWYVkst dsvEy &mRizsfj r (acid catalyzed) t y &vi ?kVu l s(hydrolysis) cuk; k t kr k gS
(B) 'vi or̀ ' kdZ
j k' D-(+)-Xy w d kst r Fkk D-(–)-Ýq DVkst dk l ev.kq d (equimolar) feJ.k gS
(C) 'vi or̀ ' kdZ
j k' dk fof' k"V /kzq
o.k ?kw
. kZ
u –20° gS
(D) Br2 t y l svfH kfØ; k dj usi j 'vi or̀ ' kdZ j k' mRiknksaesal s, d mRikn ds: i esa
]lS d sfj d vEy (saccharic acid)
cukr h gS
Sol. B, C
According to theory
31. Reagent(s) which can be used to bring about the following transformation is (are)
O O O O
C O C
H OH
O O
COOH COOH
(A) LiAlH4 in (C2H5)2O (B) BH3 in THF
(C) NaBH4 in C2H5OH (D) Raney Ni/H2 in THF
fuEufy f[ kr : i kUr j .k dsfy ; sfdu vfHkdkj d (vfHkdkj dks) (reagent(s)) dk mi ; ksx fd; k t k l dr k gS
¼
gSa
½\
O O O O
C O C
H OH
O O
COOH COOH
(A) (C2H5)2OesaLiAlH4 (B) THF esaBH3
(C) C2H5OH es
aNaBH4 (D) THF esaj kus(Raney) Ni/H2 esa
Sol. C
BH2 in NaBH4
32. Among the following, reaction(s) which gives(give) tert-butyl benzene as the major product is
(are)
Br
Cl
(A) (B)
NaOC 2H5 AlCl 3
OH
(C) H2SO4 (D) BF3OEt2
fuEufy f[ kr esaVVZ
&C;w
fVy csUt hu (tert-butyl benzene) eq
[ ; mRikn ds: i esansusoky hvfHkfØ; k(; s) gS¼
gS
a
½
Br
Cl
(A) (B)
NaOC 2H5 AlCl 3
OH
(C) H2SO4 (D) BF3OEt2
Sol. B, C, D
AlCl3
For 'B' Cl
+AlCl4
1, 2 Hydride
shift
For 'C'
H+
PARAGRAPH 1
Thermal decomposition of gaseous X2 to gaseous X at 298 K takes place according to the following equation :

X (g)   2X(g)
2
The standard reaction Gibbs energy, rG°, of this reaction is positive. At the start of the reaction,
there is one moe of X2 and no X. As the reaction proceeds, the number of moles of X formed is
given by . Thus, equilibrium is the number of moles of X formed at equilibrium. The reaction is
carried out at a constant total pressure of 2 bar. Consider the gases to behave ideally.
(Given : R = 0.083 L bar K–1 mol–1)
v uq
PNsn 1
298 K i j xS
l h; (gaseous) X2 dk xS l h; X esaÅ"ek&vi ?kVu (thermal decomposition) fuEufy f[ kr l ehdj .k

X (g)  
 2X(g)
2
dsvuq l kj gksrkgS
A bl vfHkfØ; kdhekud vfHkfØ; kfxCl Åt kZ(standard reaction Gibbs energy), rG°, /kukRed
gSA vfHkfØ; k dsi zkj EHk esaX2 dk 1 eksy gSr Fkk X ughagS At S l s&t S
l s; g vfHkfØ; k c<+ r hgS] fufeZ
r X dseksy ksadhl a
[ ; k
} kj k nht kr hgS A bl i zd kj ] l kE; koLFkk i j fufeZ
r X dseksy ksadhl a [ ; k equilibrium gS
A vfHkfØ; k 2 bar dsfLFkj dq y nkc i j
dht kr hgS A eku y safd xS l savkn' kZO; ogkj dj r hgSA (fn; k x; k gS: R = 0.083 L bar K–1 mol–1)
33. The equilibrium constant Kp for this reaction at 298 K, in terms of equilibrium, is
82equilibrium 82equilibrium 42equilibrium 42equilibrium
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2  equilibrium 4  2equilibrium 2  equilibrium 4  2equilibrium
298 K i j bl vfHkfØ; k dk equilibrium dsi n esal kE; koLFkk fLFkj ka
d (equilibrium constant) KP D; k gksxk \
82equilibrium 82equilibrium 42equilibrium 42equilibrium
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2  equilibrium 4  2equilibrium 2  equilibrium 4  2equilibrium
Sol. B
X2  2X(g) G° > 0
1 0
1  eq 2 eq –RT lnKeq > 0
RT lnKeq < 0
 2

2.303RT log  2 2
. 2 < 0
1   / 2 
22 82equilibrium
kp = =
1  2 / 4 4  equilibrium
34. The Incorrect statement among the following, for this reaction is
(A) Decrease in the total pressure will result in formation of more moles of gaseous X
(B) At the start of the reaction, dissociation of gaseous X2 takes place spontaneously
(C) equilibrium = 0.7
(D) KC < 1
bl vfHkfØ; k dsfy ; sfuEu esal svl R; dFku gS
(A) dq
y nkc ds?kVusdsi fj .kke Lo: i xS l h; X dsvf/kd eksy cusa xsA
(B) vfHkfØ; k dsi zkj EHk esaxS
l h; X2 dk fo; kst u Lor %i zofr Z
r (spontaneous) gksrk gS
A
(C) equilibrium = 0.7
(D) KC < 1
Sol. C
2.303 × 0.083 × 298 log (kp) < 0
82
<1
4  2
9 2 < 4
2 < 4/9
< 2/3
k c  RT < 1
Kc < 1/RT
Kc < 1
PARAGRAPH 2
Treatment of compound O with KMnO4/H+ gave P, which on heating with ammonia gave Q. The
compound Q on treatment with Br2/NaOH produced R. On strong heating, Q gave S,which on
further treatment with ethyl 2-bromopropanoate in the presence of KOH followed by acidific tion,
gave a compound T.
(O)
v uq
PNsn 2
; kS
fxd O dhKMnO4/H+ l sfØ; k usP fn; k] ft l usveksfu; k dsl kFk xeZdj usi j Q fn; kA ; kS
fxd Q usBr2/NaOH ds
l kFk fØ; k dj us i j R mRikfnr fd; kA i zcy : i l s xeZdj us i j Q us S fn; k ft l us , fFky 2-czkseksizksisuksv ksV
(ethyl 2-bromopropanoate) dsl kFkKOH dhmi fLFkfr es avkxsfØ; kdhft l dsi ' pkr ~vEy hdj .kus; kS
fxd T fn; kA
(O)
35. The compound R is
O O O
NH2
Br NHBr
NBr
(A) (B) Br (C) NHBr (D)
NH2
O O O
; kS
fxd R gS
O O O
NH2
Br NHBr
NBr
(A) (B) Br (C) NHBr (D)
NH2
O O O
Sol. A
(O)
(T) Alanine
36. The compound T is

(A) glycine (B) alanine (C) valine (D) serine
; kS
fxd T gS
(A) Xy kbl hu (B) , y kuhu (C) oS
y hu (D) l sjhu
Sol. B
(O)
(T) Alanine
[MATHEMATICS]
PART - III : MATHEMATICS
SECTION – I
Single Correct
 1 0 0
 
4 1 0
37. Let P =  and I be the identity matrix of order 3. If Q = [qij] is a matrix such that P50 –
16 4 1
q31  q32
Q = I, then equals
q21
(A) 52 (B) 103 (C) 201 (D) 205
 1 0 0
 
4 1 0
37. ekuk fd P=  vkS
j I r hu dksfV (order 3) dk r Rl ed vkO
;w
g (identity matrix) gS
A ; fn Q = [qij] , d
16 4 1
q31  q32
vkO
;w
g bl i zd kj gSfd P50 – Q = I gS
] rc q21
dk eku gS
A
(A) 52 (B) 103 (C) 201 (D) 205
Sol. B
 1 0 0
 
P   4 1 0 Q  qij 
16 4 1
P50 – Q = I Q = P50 – I
0 0 0
 
P  I  4 1 0 0
= I + 4R
4 1 0
P50 = [ I + 4R ] 50 = I + 50( 4R ) + 50C

2(4R)
2 +........
0 0 0  0 0 0
where R2  0 0 0 , R3  0 0 0
 
1 0 0  0 0 0
 P50  I  50  4R   50  49 .16.R 2
2
= 200 R + 19600 R 2
 0 0 0  0 0 0  0 0 0
     
 200 0 0    0 0 0   200 0 0
800 200 0  19600 0 0 20400 200 0
q31 = 20400 q32 = 200 q21 = 200
q31  q32 20400  200 206

 
 q21 200 2 =103
38. Let bi > 1 for i = 1, 2, ...., 101. Suppose loge b1, loge b2, ...., loge b101 are in Arithmetic Progression
(A.P.) with the common difference loge2. Suppose a1, a2, ....., a101 are in A.P. such that a1 = b1
and a51 = b51. If t = b1 + b2 + .... + b51 and s = a1 + a2 + .... + a51, then
(A) s > t and a101 > b101 (B) s > t and a101 < b101
(C) s < t and a101>b101 (D) s < t and a101 < b101
38. ekukfd i = 1, 2, ...., 101 dsfy , bi > 1 gS
Aeku y hft , fd loge b1, loge b2, ...., loge b101 l koZ
var j (common
difference) loge2 oky hl eka
r j Js.kh(A.P.) esagS
A eku y hft ; sfd a1, a2, ....., a101 l eka
r j Js.khesabl i zd kj gSfd
a1 = b1 r Fkk a51 = b51 ; fn t = b1 + b2 + .... + b51 r Fkk s = a1 + a2 + .... + a51 gS a
] rc
(A) s > t vkSj a101 > b101 (B) s > t vkS j a101 < b101
(C) s < t vkSj a101>b101 (D) s < t vkS j a101 < b101
Sol. B
b1, b2, b3 ...... b101  G.P. CR=2
a1, a2, a3 ....... a101  A.P.
a1 = b1 ...(1) a51 = b51 = b1 . 250 ...(2)
a51 = a1 + 50d = b1 250 ...(3)
(1  251 )
t = b1 = b1 (251 – 1) = 50d
12
51
s= [2a1  (50)d]
2
51 
=
2 

2b1  b1 250  b1 
 
51  2 
= 2b1  (250.b1  b1 )
2  2 
51
s= [2b1  2b1 (250  1)]
2
51
= [b1  250 b1 ]  st
2
now a101 = a1 + 100 d
 b1 250  b1 
= b1 + 100  50

 
= b1 (251 – 1)
b101 = b1.2100
 a101  b101
13
1
39. The value of 
k 1   (k  1)    k 
is equa lto
sin    sin   
4 6  4 6 
(A) 3  3 (B) 2(3  3) (C) 2( 3  1) (D) 2(2  3)
: 0744-2209671, 08003899588 | url : www.motioniitjee.com, :info@motioniitjee.com

13
1
39. 
k 1   (k  1)    k 
dk eku gS
sin    sin  4  6 
 4 6   
(A) 3  3 (B) 2(3  3) (C) 2( 3  1) (D) 2(2  3)

Sol. C
  k   (k – 1)  
13sin   –  
 4 6 4 6 
2 
k 1 sin
  (k – 1)    k
4  6  sin  4  6 
   
13
   k 
2  cot  4  (k – 1) 6  – cot  4 
k 1
6 
       12    13  
2 cot – cot     ......  cot    – cot   
 4 4 6 4 6  4 6  
     
2 cot – cot 2   
 4  4 6 
    
2 1 – cot    
  4 6 
  1 
 1 – 
3 
2 1– 

 1 
 1 
 3 
 3 –1
2 1 – 
 3  1 
 3  1 – 3  1 2 3 –1
2  =2× × = 2( 3 –1)
 3 1  3 1 3 –1

2
x2 cos x
40. The value of  dx is equal to
 1  ex

2
2 2
(A) 2 (B) 2 (C) 2  e / 2 (D) 2  e / 2
4 4

2
x2 cos x
40.  dx dk eku gS
A
 1  ex

2
2 2
(A) 2 (B) 2 (C) 2  e / 2 (D) 2  e / 2
4 4
Sol. A
 /2 x2 cos x
f(x) = 
– / 2 1  ex
dx
0 x2cosx  /2 x2cosx
f(x) = 
– / 2 1 e x
 
0 1  ex
x = –t
dx = dt
0 t2 cos t  /2 x2 cos x
f(x) = –   /2 1  e–t
dx + 
0 1  ex
 /2
f(x) =  x2 cos x dx
0
 /2
[x2 sin x]0 / 2 – 2  x sin x
0
 /2
2   /2 
– 2  –x cos x 0  
0
cos xdx 
4  
2
– 2[0 + 1]
4
2
–2
4
41. Area of the region {(x, y)  R2 : y  | x  3 |,5y  x  9  15} is equal to
1 4 3 5
(A) (B) (C) (D)
6 3 2 3
41. {ks=k (region) {(x, y)  R2 : y  | x  3 |,5y  x  9  15} dk {ks=kQy (area) gS

1 4 3 5
(A) (B) (C) (D)
6 3 2 3
Sol. B
A B C
–9 –4 –3
3 1
1 1 
Area =
2
· 10 · 2 —  ·5·1 –
 2 

4
(x  3) dx – 
3
(x  3)
3 1
5 2 2
= 10 – + ((x  3))
3 /2
– (x  3)3 / 2
2 3 4
3 3
5 2 2
= 10 – – [0 – [1]] – [8] – 0]
2 3 3
15 2 16
= – –
2 3 3
45  4  32 5
= =
6 2
45  36 9 3
= =
6 6 2
42. Let P be the image of the point (3, 1, 7) with respect to the plane x – y + z = 3. Then the equation
x y z
of the plane passing through P and containing the straight line   is
1 2 1
(A) x + y – 3z = 0 (B) 3x + z = 0 (C) x – 4y + 7z = 0 (D) 2x – y = 0
42. ekuk fd fcUnq(3, 1, 7) dk] l er y x – y + z = 3 dsl ki s{k (with repect to), i zfr fcEc (image) P gS
Ar c fcUnqP
x y z
l sxq
t j usoky svkS
j l j y j s[kk   dks/kkj .k dj usoky sl er y dk l ehdj .k gS
A
1 2 1
(A) x + y – 3z = 0 (B) 3x + z = 0 (C) x – 4y + 7z = 0 (D) 2x – y = 0
Sol. C
x  3 y  1 z  7 2(3  1  7  3)
  
1 1 1 3
x 3 y 1 z 7
   2  2 x = 3 – 4, y = 1 + 5, z=7–4
1 1 1
(–1, 5, 3)
x y z
1 5 3
=0
1 2 1
x(5 – 6) –y(–1 – 3) + z(–2 – 5) = 0

– x + 4y – 7z = 0
x – 4y 7z = 0
x
  n  n  n
 nn  x  n  x   ...  x   
  2  n 
43. Let f(x) = lim
n  , for all x > 0. Then
 n   2 n2  
2
 
 n! x2  n2  x2  ...
 
4 
x   
n2  
 
1 1 2 f ' 3 f ' 2 

(A) f    f 1 (B) f    f   (C) f ' 2   0 (D) f 3  f 2
2 3 3    
x
  n  n  n
 nn  x  n  x   ...  x   
  2  n 
43. ekuk fd l Hkhx > 0 dsfy , f(x) = lim
n 
gS
Ar c
 n   2 n2  
2

 n! x2  n2  x2    ...  x  2  
4  n 
 
1 1 2 f ' 3 f ' 2 
(A) f  2   f 1 (B) f  3   f  3  (C) f ' 2   0 (D) f 3  f 2
         
Sol. B,C
x
 n
 nn  n
   x  r  
 
lim
f(x) = n   2 n2  
 n!  x  2  
   r  

x
 1  
n


  

n 
r / n  
lim 
= n
  2 n2  
  

x  2
r  

x 
  n  r   n2  
=  ln  x  –  ln    ln  x2  2  
(r / n)  n  r  
n   
1  1
1
 1 
 ln  x   dt – ln t dt –  ln  x2  2  dt 
nf(x) = n  t  t  
0  0
 
1 1 
 ln(xt  1)dt – ln(x2 t2  1)dt 
f(x) ×   

0 0 
x
 1 z 
ln f(x) ×  ln  1  z
1
2 

dz
>0 0<x<1
f '(x)  1 x 
x(x) = = ln  2 
f(x) 1  x 
<0 x>0
(D) 0 1 2 3
3
(C) f'(2)= f(2) ln  5   0
 
 1 x 
f'(x) = f(x) ln  2  < 0
1  x 
44.
3
 3

Let a,b  R and f : R  R be defined by f  x   acos x  x  b x sin x  x . Then f is 
(A) differentiable at x = 0 if a = 0 and b = 1
(B) differentiable at x = 1 if a = 1 and b = 0
(C) NOT differentiable at x = 0 if a = 1 and b = 0
(D) NOT differentiable at x = 1 and a = 1 and b = 1
44. j f : R  R, f  x   acos  x3  x   b x sin  x3  x  l si fj Hkkf"kr gS

eku fd a, b  R vkS Ar c f
(A) x = 0 ij vody uh; (differentiable) gS; fn a = 0 vkS
j b=1
(B) x = 1 i j vody uh; gS; fn a = 1 vkS
j b=0
(C) x = 0 i j vody uh; ughagS; fn a = 1 vkS
j b=0
(D) x = 1 i j vody uh; ughagS; fn a = 1 vkS
j b=1
Sol. A,B
f(x) = a cos (|x|(|x2 – 1|)) + b|x| sin|x| |x2 + 1|
a=0 b = 1 f(x) = |x| sin|x| |x2 + 1|
a=1 b = 0 f(x) = a cos(|x| (|x2 + 1|)
45. Let f : R   0,   and g : R  R be twice differentiable function such that f" and g" are continuous
f x  g  x 
functions on R. Suppose f'(2) = g(2) = 0, f " 2   0 and g' 2   0 . If lim
    = 1, then
x 2 f ' x g' x
(A) f has a local minimum at x = 2

(B) f has a local maximum at x = 2
(C) f"(2) > f(2)
(D) f(x) – f"(x) = 0 for at least one x  R
45. ekukf : R   0,   vkS
j g : R  R , sl snksckj vody uh; (twice differentiable) Qy u gSfd R i j f" vkS
j g" l a
rr
f x  g  x 
(continuous) Qyu gS
A eku yhft , fd f'(2) = g(2) = 0, f " 2  0 vkS A ; fn lim
j g' 2  0 gS     =1
x 2 f ' x g' x
gS
] rc
(A) x = 2 i j f dk LFkkuh; fuEur e (local minimum) gS
(B) x = 2 i j f dk LFkkuh; mPpr e (local maximum) gS
(C) f"(2) > f(2)
(D) de l sde , d x  R dsfy , f(x) – f"(x) = 0 gS
Sol. A,D
f : R  (0, ) ; g : R  R
f'(2) = g(2) = 0 ; f"(2)  0 g'(x)  0
f(x)g(x)
lim =1
x 2 f '(x)g '(x)
f(x) g '(x)  f '(x) g(x)

lim 1
x 2 f "(x) g '(x)  f '(x) g"(x)
f(2) g'(2)
 1  f "(2)  f(2)
f "(2) g'(2)
 1   1 
46. let f :   ,2   R and g :   ,2   R be functions defined by f(x) = [x2 – 3] and g(x) = |x| f(x)
 2   2 
+ |4x – 7| f(x), where [y] denotes the greatest integer less than or equal to y for y  R . Then
 1 
(A) f is discontinuous exactly at three points in   2 ,2
 
 1 
(B) f is discontinuous exactly at four points in   2 ,2
 
 1 
(C) g is NOT differentiable exactly at four points in   2 ,2 
 
 1 
(D) g is NOT differentiable exactly at five points in   2 ,2 
 
 1   1
46. ekuk fd Qy u f :   ,2   R vkS
j g :   ,2   R , f(x) = [x2 – 3] vkS
j g(x) = |x| f(x) + |4x – 7| f(x)
 2   2 
l si fj Hkkf"kr gS
a
] t gk¡ y  R dsfy , y l sde ; k y dscj kcj dsegÙke i w
. kkZ
a
d (greatest integer less than or equal
to y) dks[y] n~ okj k n' kkZ
; k x; k gS
Ar c
 1 
(A)   2 ,2 esaf Bhd r hu (exactly three) fcUnq
v ksai j vl a
r r (discontinuous) gS
 
 1 
(B)   2 ,2 esaf Bhd pkj (exactly four) fcUnq
v ksai j vl a
r r gS
 
 1 
(C)   2 ,2  esag Bhd pkj (exactly four) fcUnq
v ksai j vody uh; p (differentiable) ughagS
 
 1 
(D)   2 ,2  esag Bhd i k¡p (exactly five) fcUnq
v ksai j vody uh; (differentiable) ughagS
 
Sol. B,C
 1   1 
f: – ,2  R; g : – ,2  R
 2   2 
f(x) = [x2 – 3] : g(x) = |x| f(x) + |4x – 7| f(x)
g(x) = |x| ([x2] – 3) + |4x – 7| ([x2] – 3)
 1
–x(–3) – (4x – 7)(–3) ; – 2 x  0 1

 –3x  3(4x – 7) ; 0 x 1
1 2
=  –1
x(–2) | 4x – 7 | (–2) ; 1  x  2


15x  7
= 
 9x
 1 
47. Let a, b  R and a2 + b2  0. Suppose S = z  C : , t  R, t  0 ; where i = 1 .
 a  ibt 
If z = x + iy and z  S, then (x, y) lies on
1  1 
(A) the circle with radius and centre  , 0  for a > 0, b  0
2a  2a 
1  1 
(B) the circle with radius – and centre   , 0  for a < 0, b  0
2a  2a 
(C) the x-axis for a  0, b = 0

(D) the y-axis for a = 0, b  0
 1 
47. ekuk fd a, b  R vkS A eku y hft , fd S = z  C : a  ibt , t  R, t  0 , t gk¡i =
j a2 + b2  0 gS 1 gS
A ; fn
 
z = x + iy vkS
j z  S gS
] r c (x, y)
1  1 
(A) ml oÙ̀k i j gSft l dhf=kT; k vkS nzfcUnq 2a , 0  gSt c a > 0, b  0
j dsa
2a  
1  1 
(B) ml oÙ̀k i j gSft l dhf=kT; k – vkS snzfcUnq  2a , 0  gSt c a < 0, b  0
j da
2a  
(C) x-v{k i j gSt c a  0, b = 0

(D) y-v{k i j gSt c a = 0, b  0
Sol. A,C,D
 1 
s  z  c : z  : t  R : t  0
 a  bti 
z = x + iy
a  bti a
x  iy   x 2
a2  b2 t2 a  b2 t 2
bt
y
a2  b2t 2
a2  b2 t2
x2  y2  2
a 2
 b2 t2 
x
x2  y2 
a
1 1
g , f = 0, r 
2a 4a2
1  1 
=  2a ,0 
2a  
48. Let P be the point on the parabola y2 = 4x which is at the shortest distance from the centre S of
the circle x2 + y2 – 4x – 16y + 64 = 0. Let Q be the point on the circle dividing the lie segment
SP internally. Then
(A) SP = 2 5
(B) SQ : QP = ( 5  1) : 2
(C) the x-intercept of the normal to the parabola at P is 6
1
(D) the slope of the tangnet to the circle at Q is
2
48. ekuk fd i j oy ; y2 = 4x i j P , d , sl k fcUnqgSt ksoÙ̀k x2 + y2 – 4x – 16y + 64 = 0 dsdsUnzfcUnqS l sU; w
ur e
nw
j hi j gS
A ekuk fd oÙ̀k i j fcUnqQ , sl k gSfd og j s[kk[ ka
M SP dksvka
r fj d foHkkft r dj r k gS
Ar c
(A) SP = 2 5
(B) SQ : QP = ( 5  1) : 2
(C) i j oy ; dsfca
nqP i j vfHky Ec (normal) dk x-va
r%[ k.M 6 gS
1
(D) oÙ̀k dsfcUnqQ i j Li ' kZ
j s[kk dh<ky (slope) gS
2
Sol. A,C,D
y2 = 4x
dy 4 2
let P(x1, y1) then = = y
dx 2y 1
y1 y1  8 y2=4x S (2, 8)
 mNr at P = – = x 2 Q
2 2
P
y1 8  y1
= 2 ×4
2 y1  8
y13  8y1  64  8y1

y1 = 4  x1 = 4
 P(4, 4)
now SP = (4  2)2  (4  8)2
= 4  16  20  2 5  (A) 
& SQ : QP = 2 : (2 5  2)
= 1 : ( 5  1)
= ( 5  1) : (4)  (B) ×
equation of Normal
y – 4 = – 2(x – 4)
y + 2x = 12
 xint = 6  (C)
1
Now tangent at Q will be  r to the common normal y + 2x = 12 is slope of tangent will be =
2
 (D)
49. Let , ,   R. Consider the system of linear equations

ax + 2y = 
3x – 2y = 
Which of the following statement(s) is(are) correct ?
(A) If  = – 3, then the system has infinitely many solutions for all values of  and 
(B) If   – 3, then the system has a unique solution for all values of  and 
(C) If  +  = 0, then the system has infinitely many solutions for  = – 3
(D) If  +   0, then the system has no solutions for  = – 3
49. ekuk fd , ,   R gS
A bu j S
f[ kd l ehdj .kksadsfudk; (system of linear equations) i j fopkj dhft ,
ax + 2y = 
3x – 2y = 
ul k dFku l ghgS\
(A) ; fn  = – 3, r c vkS j dsl Hkhekuksadsfy , fudk; dsvuUr (infinitely many) gy gS
(B) ; fn   – 3, r c  vkS j dsl Hkh ekuksadsfy , fudk; dk vf} r h; (unique) gy gS
(C) ; fn  +  = 0, r c  = – 3 dsfy , fudk; dsvuU r gy gS
(D) ; fn  +   0, r c  = – 3 dsfy , fudk; dk dks bZgy ughagS
Sol. B, C, D
a, ,   R
ax + 2y = 
3x – 2 y = 
(A)  = –3
– 3x + 2y = 
3x – 2y = 
if     solution  (C)
If    no solution  (D)
(B)   3
ax + 2y = 
3x – 2y = 
non parallel lines hence unique solution   & 
1 ˆ ˆ ˆ
50. Let ˆ be a unit vector in R3 and
û  u1î  u 2ˆj  u3k ŵ  (i  j  2k) . Given that there exists a
6
 3
 
vector v in R such that û  v = 1 and ˆ ˆ  v)  1 . Which of the following statement(s)
w·(u
is(are) correct ?

(A) There is exactly one choice for such v

(B) There are infinitely many choices for such v
(C) If û lies in the xy-plane then |u1| = |u2|
(D) If û lies in the xz-plane then 2|u1| = |u3|
50. j ŵ  1 (iˆ  ˆj  2k)

ekuk fd R3 esaû  u1î  u 2ˆj  u3kˆ , d ek=kd l fn' k (unit vector) gSvkS ˆ gS
A fn; k gq
v k gSfd
6
 
R3 esal fn' k v dk vfLr Ro bl i zd kj gSfdû  v= 1 vkS
j w·(u
ˆ ˆ  v)  1 gS
ul k dFku l ghgS
\
(A) bl i zd kj ds v dsfy , Bhd , d (exactly one) p; u l aHko gS

(B) bl i zd kj ds v dsfy , vuUr (infinitely many) p; u l a Hko gS
(C) ; fn û , xy--l er y i j gSr c |u1| = |u2| gS
(D) ; fn û , xz--l er y i j gSr c 2|u1| = |u3| gS
Sol. B,C
ˆ
û  u1î  u2ˆj  u3k
1 ˆ ˆ ˆ
ŵ  (i  j  2k)
6
 
ˆ  v | 1
|u ˆ ˆ  v)  1
w·(u
ˆ | |u
|w v | sin Q cos Q = 1
ˆ || ˆ
cos Q = 1
 Q = 0º

 ŵ is  to plane containg û and v

Þ ŵ is to û as well as v
Paragraph for Question Nos. 51 to 52

Football teams T1 and T2 have to play two games against each other. It is assumed that the
outcomes of the two games are independent. The probabilities of T1 winning, drawing and losing
1 1 1
a game against T2 are , and , respectively. Each team gets 3 points for a win, 1 point for a
2 6 3
drawn and 0 point for a loss in a game. Let X and Y denote the total points secored by teams T1
and T2, respectively, after two games.
v uq
PNsn Question Nos. 51 to 52
Qq
VckW
y ny ksaT1 vkS
j T2 dks, d nw
l j sdsfo#) nks[ ksy (games) [ ksy usgS
a
A; g eku fy ; kx; kgSfd nksuksa[ ksy ksadsi fj .kke
1 1
, d nw
l j si j fuHkZ
j ughadj r sAny T1 dsny T2 dsfo#) , d [ ksy esat hr us]cj kcj gksusvksj gkj usdhi zkf; dr kØe' k% ·
2 6
1
vkS
j gS
A i zR; sd ny t hr usi j 3 va
d ] cj kcj hi j 1 va
d vkS
j gkj usi j 0 va
d vft Z
r dj r kgS
A ekukfd nks[ ksy ksadsi ' pkr
3
ny T1 vkS
j ny T2 ds} kj k vft Z
r dq
y va
d Øe' k%X vkS
j Y gS
A
51. P(X > Y) is

1 5 1 7
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 12 2 12
51. P(X > Y) dk eku gS
1 5 1 7
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 12 2 12
Sol. B
1 1 1
P  T1w   , P  T1D   , P  T1L  
2 6 3
3 1 0
x>y  1| 2
T1
1 1 1
P  W, WD    
2  2 6 
1 6  2
= 
2  12 
8 1
= 
24 3
1 1 1
P D and W =  
6 2 12
1 1 4 1 5
 P(x > y ) =      B
3 12 12 12 12
52. P(X = Y) is
11 1 13 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
36 3 36 2
52. P(X = Y) dk eku gS
11 1 13 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
36 3 36 2
Sol. C
x=y
for T1
P(W, L) + P ( L, W) + P ( D, D)
1 1 1 1 1 1
= 2  3  3  2  6  6
     
1 1 1 1 1 13
  =  
6 6 36 3 36 36

x2 y2
Let F1(x1, 0) and F2(x2, 0), for x1 < 0 and x2 > 0, be the foci of the ellipse +  1 . Suppose
9 8
a parabola having vertex at the origin and focus at F2 intersects the ellipse at point M in the first
quadrant and at point N in the fourth quadrant.
v uq
PNsn Question Nos. 53 to 54
x2 y2
ekuk fd F1(x1, 0) vkS
j F2(x2, 0) (ft l esax1 < 0, x2 > 0) nh?kZ
oÙ̀k (ellipse) + 1 dhukfHk; k¡(Foci) gS
a
A
9 8
ekuk fd , d i j oy ; (parabola) ft l dk ' kh"kZ(vertex) ew y fcUnq(origin) i j vkS
j ukfHk (focus) F2 i j gS
] nh?kZ
oÙ̀k dks
i zFke pr q
FkkZ
a
' k (first quadrant) esaM i j vkS
j pr q
FkZpr q
FkkZ
a
' k (fourth quadrant) esaN i j i zfr PNsfnr dj r k gS
A
53. The orthocentre of the triangle F1MN is
 9  2   9  2 
(A)   10 , 0  (B)  3 , 0  (C)  10 , 0  (D)  3 , 6 
       
53. f=kHkq
t F1MN dk y a
cdsUnz(orthocentre) gS
 9  2   9  2 
(A)   10 , 0  (B)  3 , 0  (C)  10 , 0  (D)  3 , 6 
       
Sol. A
3 
 , 6
 2 
M
Q R (6, 0)
F1
(–1, 0) F1
(1, 0)
N
3 
 ,– 6 
2 
8 1
e2 = 1 – =
9 9
82
y2 =
9
1
e=
3
y2 = 4x
x2 4x
+ =1
9 8
8x2 + 36x = 72
2x2 + 9x = 18
2x2 + 9x – 18 = 0
3
(2x – 3)(x + 6) = 0 x=
2
6 –2 6

mF1N = 5 5
–
2
5  3
y– 6 = 2 6  x – 2 
Put y = 0
15
–12 = 5x –
2
15 15 – 24 –9
5x = – 12 = =
2 2 2
9
x=–
10
54. If the tangents to the ellipse at M and N meet at R and the normal to the parabola at M meets the
x-axis at Q, then the ratio of area of the triangle MQR to area of the quadrilateral MF1NF2 is
(A) 3 : 4 (B) 4 : 5 (C) 5 : 8 (D) 2 : 3
54. ; fn nh?kZ
oÙ̀k dsfcUnq
v ksaM vkS
j N [ kha
phxbZi j Li ' kZ
j s[kk, ¡(tangents) R i j fey r hgS
avkS
j i j oy ; dsfcUnqM i j vfHky a
c
x-v{k dksQ i j fey r k gS
] r c f=kHkq
t MQR ds{ks=kQy vkS
j pr q
Hkq
Z
t (quadrilateral) MF1NF2 ds{ks=kQy dk vuq
i kr
(ratio) gS
(A) 3 : 4 (B) 4 : 5 (C) 5 : 8 (D) 2 : 3
Sol. C
Eqn to normal
y2 = 4x
dy
2y =4
dx
dy 4 2
= =
dx 2. 6 6
Eqn to normal
– 6
y– 6 = (x – 3/2)
2
y=0
6
– 6 =– (x – 3/2)
2
3
2+ =x
2
7
x=
2
7 
Q =  2 ,0 
 
1  7 1 5 5 6
MOR =
2
× 6  6 – 2  = 2 6 × 2 =
4
1 5 1
MF1NF2 = 2  6  2  – 2 6  2 
   
1
= 2 6 (2) = 2 6
2
5 6
MOR
4 = 5/8
MF1MF2 =
2 6
PHYSICS
1. A bullet is fired vertically upwards with
1 1 MR 2 v2
velocity  from the surface of a spherical v2 +
mv ×
planet. When it reaches its maximum height, 2 2 2 R2
its acceleration due to the planet’s gravity is 3 3
1/4th of its value at the surface of the planet. m × 32 + m × 30 × 20 = m.v2
4 4
If the escape velocity from the planet is
3 3
mu22 + m × 27 × 10 = m2
vesc  v N , then the value of N is (ignore 4 4
energy loss due to atmosphere) 3 27
= m × 3 2 + 300 m = + 30
Sol. 2 4 4
g 3 147
v22 = ; v2 = 7
2 h 4 4
 h  8 h
1   = ; 1 R = 2 =1
R e  4 e Re 3. Two spherical stars A and B emit blackbody
 radiation. The radius of A is 400 times that
h = Re of B and A emits 104 times the power emitted
GMe.m 1 GMem  A 
Re + Mv2 = 2R from B. The ratio    of their wavelengths
2 e  B
GMem GMe A and B at which the peaks occur in their
1 respective radiation curves is
m2 = 2R ; =
2 e Re Sol. 2
ve = 2 v0
ve = 2gR e R 400R
 v e  2v  Nv
A TB
= gR e B = TA
N=2 P = eA T4
PA = e. 4 (400 R)2 × TA4
2. Two identical uniform discs roll without PB = e. 4pR2 × TB4
slipping on two different surface AB and CD (400R)2 × TA4 = 104 × TB4
(see figure) starting at A and C with linear 16 × 104 × TA4 = 104 × TB4
speeds v1 and v2, respectively, and always TB
remain in contact with the surfaces. If they TA = 2
reach B and D with the same linear speed
4. A nuclear power plant supplying electrical
and v1 = 3 m/s, then v2 in m/s is (g = 10
power to a village uses a radioactive material
m/s2)
of half life T years as the fuel. The amount of
fuel at the beginning is such that the total
power requirement of the village is 12.5% of
the electrical power available from the plant
at that time. If the plant is able to meet the
total power needs of the village for a
maximum period of nT years, then the value
of n is
Sol. 3
T
Sol. 7 50%
25%
Page 1
2T
3T
5. A young ’s d ouble slit interfere nce Image for mirror

15cm
arrangement with slits S1 and S2 is immersed
in water (refractive index = 4/3) as shown in
the figure. The positions of maxima on the
1 1 1 1 1 1
surface of water are given by x2 = p2m22– + =–  = –
d2, where  is the wavelenght of light in air v (15) 10 v 15 10
(refractive index = 1), 2d is the separation 2 3 1
between the slits and m is an interger. The = =–
30 30
value of p is
v (30)
v = – 30 cm & m1 = – =– =–2
u (15)
Image from lens
1 1 1
– =
v u f
1 1 1
 + =
Sol. 3 v 20 10 20cm
S1
x2 air 1 1 1
d2  =
d v 10 20
 v = – 20 cm
m2 = – 1
4/3 water |M1| = |m1 × m2| = 2
2
d In air for lens
2 d
x
 1 1 2 
S2 =      R = 10 cm
2
x =pm –d 2 2 2 2 f  2  R 
When dipped
4 
  1 x2  d2 = m 1 3 6  2  2 2 4 2
 3  =    1   = × = =
f' 2 7  10  7 10 70 35
= 9. m2 2 – d2
p2 = 9 ; p=3 1 2 1 87
= – =  m2 = 7  |M2| = 14
v' 35 10 140
6. Consider a concave mirror and a convex lens |M2|/|M1| = 7
(refractive index = 1.5) of focal length 10
cm each, separated by a distacne of 50 cm 7. An infinitely long uniform line charge
in air (refractive index = 1) as shown in the distribution of charge per unit length  lies
figure. An object is placed at a distacne of parallel to the y-axis in the y-z plane at
15 cm from the mirror. Its erect image formed
by this combination has magnification M1. 3
z a (see figure). If the magnitude of the
When the set-up is kept in a medium of 2
refractive index 7/6, the magnification flu x of the ele ctric field thro ugh the
M2 rectangular surface ABCD lying in the x-y
becomes M2. The magnitude M is
1 L
plane with its centre at the origin is n (0
0
permittivity of free space), then the value of

n is
Sol. 0007
Page 2
3
mix =
2
1 4  1 2
Mmix = =3
11
RT
Vs =
Mw
Sol. 0006 Vmix  mix MHe 3 3 4 6
 
2n VHe = He Mmx = 2 5 3
=
5
2n
360 
r
; 60  r  60 1
360 Vrms 
R  MV

3r 40  3r VHe MH2 2 1
n=6 VH2 = MHe = 4
=
2
Since angle is 60° hence total flux will be
1/6th of total flux. 10. In an aluminum (Al) bar of square cross
section, a square hole is drilled and is filled
8. Consider a hydrogen atom with its electron with iron (Fe) as shown in the figure. The
in the nth orbital. An electromagnetic radiation electrical resistivities of Al and Fe are 2.7 ×
of wavelength 90 nm is used to ionize the 10–8 m and 1.0 × 10–7 m, respectively.
atom. If the kinetic energy of the ejected The electrical resistance between the two
electron is 10.4 eV, then the value of n is (hc faces P and Q of the composite bar is
= 1242 eV nm) 2475
Sol. 0002 (A) 
64
12420 1875
E  13.6 eV (B) 
900 64
KE = 10.2 eV
1875
 Diff. = 13.6 – 10.2 = 3.4 eV (C) 
Energy of electron in nth orbital 49
2475
z2 (D) 
|E| = 13.6 2 eV = 3.4 eV 132
n
Sol. B
z=1
The connection is in parallel
n2 = 13.6/3.4 = 4
n=2 A  A A 
RA = A A = (49  106  4  106 )
9. A container of fixed volume has a mixture of
one mole of hydrogen and one mole of helium
in equilibrium at temperature T. Assuming 2.7  10 8  50  10 3
= = 3 × 10–5
the gases are ideal, the correct statement(s) 45  10  6
is (are)
Fe  Fe F  10 7  50  10 3
(A) The average energy per mole of the gas RFe = = 6 =
mixture is 2RT. AFe (4  10 ) 4  10  6
(B) The ratio of speed of sound in the gas
25 25
= × 10–7–3+6 = × 10–4
mixture to that in helium gas is6 /5 . 2 2
(C) The ratio of the rms speed of helium R A R Fe
atoms to that of hydrogen molecules is 1/2. R = R F
(D) The ratio of the rms speed of helium A Fe
atoms to that of hydrogen moleucles is 25

3  10 5   10  4
1/ 2 . 2
Sol. A,B,D = 25
3  10 5   10  4
3RT 5RT 2
1  1
Emix. = 2 2 = 2RTT
11
CPmix = 3R Page 3
1 1
3  10 5  12 .5  10 4 = MSD = cm = 0.25 mm
= 5 40
3  105  12.5  10  4 SCREW GAUGE
1 pitch = 100 div. = 2 LSD = 2 Linear scale
12.5  3  10 9 div.
=
128  10 5 If 1 pitch = 2 (L.C. of Ver.) = 0.5 mm
375 375 1 pitch
 × 10–10+5  × 10–5  L.C. of screw = = 0.005 mm
128 128 100
1 LSD = 0.5 mm
3750 1875
 × 10–6   1 pitch 1mm
128 64 L.C. of screw = = = 0.01 mm
100 100
11. For photo-electric effect with incident photon
13. planck’s constant h, speed of light c and
wavelenght , the stopping potential is V0.
gravitational constant G are used to form a
Identify the correct variation(s) of V0 with 
unit of length L and a unit of mass M. Then
and 1/.
the correct option (s) is (are).
(A) M  c (B) M  G
(A) (B) (C) L  (D) L 
h G
Sol. A,C,D
h
P=

(C) (D) h
M1L1T–1 =
L1
L2  h
Sol. A,C
L h
hc hc 
–  = ev0 ; v0 = –
λ eλ e 14. Two independent harmonic oscillators of
y = mx – c equal mass are oscillating about the origin
with angular frequencies 1 and 2 and have
12. Consider a Vernier capplipers in which each total energies E1 and E2, respectively. The
1 cm on the main scale is divided into 8 equal variations of their moments p with positions
divisions and a screw grauge with 100 x are shown in the figures. If a/b = n2 and a/
divisions on its circular scale. Inthe Vernier R = n, then the correct equation(s) is (are)
callipers, 5 divisions of the Verner scale
coincide with 4 divisions on the main scale p p
and in the screw gauge, one complete Energy=E1 Energy=E2
rotation of the circular scale moves it by two b
divisions on the linear scale. Then : x x
(A) If the pitch of the screw gauge is twice a R
the least count of the Vernier callipers, the
least count of the screw gauge is 0.01 mm.
(B) If the pitch of the screw gauge is twice
the least count of the Vernier callipers, the 2 2
least count of the screw gauge is 0.005 mm. (A) E12 = E22 (B)   n
(C) If the least count of the linear scale of 1
the screw gauge is twice the least count of E1 E2

the Vernier callipers, the least ount of the (C) 12 = n2 (D)   
screw gauge is 0.01 mm. 1 2
(D) If the least count of the linear scale of Sol. B,D

the screw gauge is twice the least count of v=
the Vernier callipers, the least count of the A 2  x2
screw gauge is 0.005 mm. or v = 2 (A2 – x2)
2
Sol. B,C or v2 = 2A2 – 2 x2

VERNIER or v2 + 2x2 = 2A2
1cm = 8MSD  1MSD = 1/8 cm v2 x2 x=0 x=A
5 VSD = 4 MSD  L.C. = 1 MSD – 1 VSD or 2 2 + =1
 A A2
Page 4
as A = a m1 a = b 4R
x=
a 1 5
= m = n2 (given)
b 1 16. The figures below depict two situtions in
a which two infinitely long static line charges
R =n (given) of constant positive line charge density  are
kept parallel to each other. In their resulting
1 electric field, point charges q and –q are kept
E1 = m 22 A22
2 in equilibrium between them. The point
1 charges are confined to move in the x direc-
E2 = m 22 R2 tion only. If they are given a small displace-
2
ment about their equilibrium positions, then
b 1
m1A1 = b  m1a = b  1 =  the correct statement(s) is (are)
am mn2
1
m2A2 = R  m2R = R  2 =
m
1 x x
1 1 +q –q
2 = mn2 × m = n2
E1 E2
1 = 2 (A) Both charges execute simple harmonic
motion.
15. A ring of mass M and radius R is rotating (B) Both charges will continue moving in the
with angular speed  about a fixed vertical direction of their displacement.
axis passing through its centre O with two (C) Charge +q executes simple harmonic
M motion while charge –q continues mov-
point masses each of mass at rest at O.. ing in the direction of its displacement.
8
These masses can move radially outwards (D) Charges –q executes simple harmonic
along two massless rods fixed on the ring as motion while charge +q continues
shown in the figure. At some instant the an- moving in t he d irec tion of its
displacement.
8
gular speed of the system is  and one of Sol. C
9 (1) (2) (1) (2)
3
the masses is at a distance of R from O. Att
5 F1 F2
this instant the distance of the other mass 2k
from O is. d d
–q
2 +q
(A) R
3
d
1
(B) R Right  d  Right  d 
3
3  force due to (2)  force due to (2)
(C) R  & due to (1)   while due to (1) .
5
0 Thus Fnet is leftwards. This Fnet is rightwards
4
(D) R  SHM  No SHM
5
Sol. D
17. Two identical glass rode S1 and S2 (refractive
Li = Lf
index = 1.5) have one convex end of radius
8 of curvature 10 cm. They are placed with the
mR2 =  (I1 + I2 + I2 + Iring)
9 curved surfaces at a distance d as shown in
the figure, with their axes (shown by the
 m  3 2 m 2  dashed line) aligned. When a point source of
8  2
mR2 =   8  5 R   8 x  mR  light P is placed inside rod S1 on its axis at a
9     distance of 50 cm from the curved face, the
on solving we get light rays emanating from it are found to be
Page 5
parallel to the axis inside S2. The distance d is 
(A) If B is along ẑ , F  (L+R)
S1
P
S2

(B) If B is along x̂ , F= 0
50 cm d

(A) 60 cm (B) 70 cm (C) If B is along ŷ , F  (L+R)

(C) 80 cm (D) 90 cm (D) If B is along ẑ , F= 0
Sol. B Sol. A,B,C
S1 S2 If magnetic field is uniform, then we can

x
define L (length vector) for whole of the wire.
50cm
2 1 2  1
  
v u R L

1 1.5 1  1.5 L = 2 (L + R)
 
v 50 10
  
1 15 5 Net force on wire will be F = i (L  B)
      
v 500 100 if L  B , then F =i | L | | B | = 2i (L + R) B
1 1 3   
  if L || B , then F = 0
v 20 100
53
 19. Match the nuclear processes given in column
100
1 2 I withthe appropriate option(s) in column II.
 Column I Column II
v 100
(A) Nuclear fusion (P) Absorption of
100
v  50 thermal neutrons
2
now for S2 by 235 (B)
92 U
2 1 2  1
  (B) Fission in a (Q) 60 nucleus
v u R 27 Co
u=–x nuclear reactor
v (C) –decay (R) Energy production
1.5 1 1.5  1 in stars via
– = hydrogen
 x 10
x = +20 conversion to
d = 50 + 20 = 70 cm helium
(D) y-ray emission (S) Heavy water
18. A concutor (shown in the figure) carrying (T) Neutrino emission
constant current I is kept in the x-y plane in Sol. A (R),(T)
 B (P),(Q),(S)
a uniform magnetic field B . If F is the
C (Q),(R),(T)
magnitude of the total magnetic force acting D (P),(Q),(R)/(P),(Q),(R),(T)
on the cond ucto r, t hen the correct
statement(s) is (are)
Page 6
20. A particle of unit mass is moving along the
x-axis under the influence of a force and its U
total energy is conserved. Four possible forms
of the potential energy of the particle are
given in column I (a and Uo are constants).
Match the potential energies in column I to
the corresponding statement(s) in column II. x
Column I Column II x=0
2
 2
U x 
(A) U1(x)  0 1    
2   a   2
U0  x  x2
(P) The force acting on the particle is zero at (C) U3 =   2
2  a ea
x=a.
2
U0 x
(B) U2 (x)   a
2  
(Q) The force acting on the particle is zero at
x=0.
2   x 2 
U0  x 
(C) U3(x)  exp    
2  a    a  
x 1  x  3
(R) The force acting on the particle is zero at U  = U
x=–a. (D) U4 = 0  a  3  a 
2     3
 x 1  x 3 
U0 AT x = – a
(D) U4 (x)      
2
 a 3  a   4 U0 U
U4 = =– 0
(S) The particle experiences an attractive force 3 2 3
At x = a,
towards x=0 in the region x  a .
2 U0 U0
U0 U4 = × =
(T) The particle with total energy can oscil- 3 2 3
4
late about the point x=–a. 1 x3
– 3 =0
Sol. A(P),(Q),(R),(T) a a
B(Q),(S)
C(P),(Q),(R),(S) 1 x2
= 3 =x=±a
D(P),(R),(T) a a
U
2
 2 U
U x 
(A) U1 = 0 1   a  
2    
X U=0
2 –a +a x
x
Umin at 1 –   = 0
 a
–U0/3
x = ± a, F = 0 at x = ± a
U0  X2 
(B) U2 =
 
2  A2 
 
Page 7
CHEMISTRY
SECTION 1 (MAXIMUM MARKS :32) 23. Among the triatomic molecules/ions, BeCl2 ,
• This section contains EIGHTS questions N–3 , N2O, NO2 , O3, SCl3, ICl–2 , I–3 , and XeF2,
• The answer to each question is a SINGLE the total number of linear molecule(s)/ion(s)
DIGIT INTEGER ranging from 0 to 9, both where the hybridization of the central atom
inclusive doe s not have cont ri buti on from the
• For each question, darken the bubble corre- d-orbital(s) is
sponding to the correct integer in the ORS [Atomic number: S = 16, Cl = 17, I = 53 and
• Marking scheme: Xe = 54]
+4 If the bubble corresponding to the an- Sol. 4
swer is darkened
0 In all other cases
21. The total number of lone pairs of electrons in

N2O3 is.
Sol. 8
24. Not considering the electronic spin, the
degeneracy of the second excited state (n=3)
of H atom is 9, while the degeneracy of the
second excited state of H– is
Sol. 3
25. All the energy released from the reaction

22. For the octahedral complexes of Fe3+ in SCN–
X  Y, r G° = –193 kJ mol–1 is used for oxi-
(thiocyanato-S) and in CN– ligand environ-
dizing M+ as M+  M3+ + 2e–, E° = – 0.25V.
ments, the difference between the spin-only
Under standard conditions, the number of
magnetic moments in Bohr magnetons (when
moles of M+ oxidized when one mole of X is
approximated to the nearest integer) is.
converted to Y is
[Atomic number of Fe = 26]
[F = 96500 C mol–1]
Sol. 4
Sol. 4
x  y
r, G° –193 kJ mol–1
[Fe(SCN)6]3– M+ m+3 + 2e
E° = – 0.25 V
G = + 2 × F × 1/4
F 96500
n=5 G 
2 2
µ= n(n  2) = 5(5  2) = 35 = 5.916 48250
G = kJ/mole
1000
G = 48.25 Kj/mole
193
Number of mole = =4
48.25
26. If the freezing point of a 0.01 molal aqueous

solution of a cobalt (III) chloride-ammonia
µ= n(n  2) = 1(1  2) =3 = 1.73 complex (which behaves as a strong elec-
Difference of µ = 5.916 – 1.73 = 4.184
trolyte) is –0.0558 °C, the number of
integer value = 4.
chloride(s) in the coordination sphere of the
Page 9
complex is
[Kf of water = 1.86 K kg mol–1] O O
Sol. 1 (5) (6)
Tf  ik f m
0.0558 O
i =3
1.86  0.01
(7)
i = 1 + (n–1) = n = 3
n = 3 suggest ‘3’ ions
 2Cl– ions as counter ions O O
Hence 1 Cl– ion in coordination sphere.
(3) (8)
Ans. 1
27. The total number of stereoisomers that can

exist for M is O
H3 C CH3 (9)
SECTION 2 (MAXIMUM MARKS :40)

H3C O
M
Sol. 2 • This section contains Ten Questions.
• Each question has Four Options (A), (B), (C)
and (D) one or more than one of these for
H3 C CH3 Option(s) is (are) correct.
• For each question darken the Bubbles corre-
sponding to all the correct option(s)is the
ORS.
*
• Marking Scheme:
H3C O +4 If only the bubble(s) corresponding to all
M the correct option(s) is(are) darkned
0 If none of the bubbles is darkned
–2 In all other cases
28. The number of resonance structures for N is
OH
NaOH 29. Fe3+ is reduced to Fe2+ by using
N
(A) H2O2 in presence of NaOH
(B) Na2O2 in water
Sol. 9
(C) H2O2 in presence of H2SO4
(D) Na2O2 in presence of H2SO4
O O Sol. (A,B)
(1) (2)
O O
(3) (4) Na2O2 + H2O  NaOH + H2O2
Page 10
T2
T1
30. The % yield of ammonia as a function of time in (D)

the reaction
N2(g) + 3H2(g) 2NH3(g), (g) H < 0 time
at (P, T1) is given below Sol. B
Initially on increasing the temperature rate
constant increases there for % yield increases
but after, equilibrium keq decereses on incresing
T1 the temperature there for % yield decreases.
31. If the unit cell of a mineral has cubic close

packed (ccp) array of oxygen atoms with m
fraction of octahedral holes occupied by alu-
time
If this reaction is conducted at (P, T2), with minium ions and n fraction of tetrahedral holes
the % yield of ammonia as a function of time occupied by magnesium ions, m and n, re-
is represented by spectively, are
1 1 1
(A) , (B) 1,
2 8 4
T2 1 1
1 1
(C) , (D) ,
T1 2 2 4 8
Sol. A
(A)
No. of octahedral voids - 4
4m ×(+3) = by ‘Al’
No. of tetrahedral voids = 8
time
8n  (2) = by Mg
 12 m + 16 n = 8
3m + 4n = 2
m = 1/2
T1 n = 1/8
Ans. 4
T2 32. Comp ound (s ) that on hy drog enat i on
(B) produce(s) optically inactive compound(s)
is(are)
time
(A)
T1
(B)
T2
(C)
time
Page 11
(C)
(D) (A) (B)
Sol. (B, D)
(C) (D)
Achiral molecule
Sol. D
Achiral molecule
33. The major product of the following reaction
is
(A) (B)
35. The structure of D-(+)- glucose is

(C) (D)
CHO
H OH
Sol. (A) HO H
H OH
H OH
CH2OH
The structure of L.(–)glucose is

34. In the following reaction, the major product
is :
CHO CHO
HO H H OH
H OH HO H
HO H H OH
(A) (B)
HO H HO H
CH2OH CH2OH
Page 12
configuration
CHO CHO (D) when Cr2+ is used as a reducing agent,
the chromium ion attains d 5 electronic
HO H HO H
configuration
HO H HO H Sol. (A,B,C)
H OH HO H
(c) (D)
HO H H OH
CH2OH CH2OH
Sol. A
Complete mirror image of ‘D’ glucose is L–
Glucose.
It will take one electron so act as oxidizing
agent.
CHO
HO H
H OH
HO H
HO H
CH2OH
L(–)
It will released one electron so act as
reducing agent.
Q.36 The major product of the reaction is
H3C CO2H Q.38 Copper is purified by electrolytic refining of
blister copper. The correct statement(s)
CH 3 NH 2 about this process is (are)
(A) Impure Cu strip is used as cathode
H3C NH 2 (B) Acidified aqueous CuSO4 is used as elec-
trolyte
(A)
CH3 (C) Pure Cu deposits at cathode
OH
(D) Impurities settle as anode-mud
H3C CO2H Sol. (B,C,D)
(B)
CH 3 OH
SECTION 3 (MAXIMUM MARKS :16)
H3C CO2H
• This section contains TWO questions.
(C) • Each question contains two columns, Col-
CH 3 OH umn I and Column II.
• Column I has four entries (A), (B), (C) and
H3C NH 2 (D)
(D) • Column II has five entries (P), (Q), (R), (S)
CH3 OH and (T)
• Match the entries in Column I with the cenries
Sol. (C) in Column II.
• One or more entries in Column I may match
37. The correct statement (s) about Cr2+ and with one or more entries in Column II.
Mn3+ is (are) [Atomic no. of Cr = 24 and Mn • The ORS contains a 4 × 5 matrix whose lay-
= 25] out will be similar to the one shown below :
(A) Cr2+ is reducing agent
(B) Mn3+ is an oxidising agent
(C) Both Cr2+ and Mn3+ exhibit d4 electronic
Page 13
(P) q = 0
(A) (P) (Q) (R) (S) (T) (Q) w = 0
(R) Ssys < 0
(B) (P) (Q) (R) (S) (T) (S) U = 0
(T) G = 0
(C) (P) (Q) (R) (S) (T) Sol. A–RT, B–PQS, C–PQS, D– ST or PQST
(A) H2O(l, 1 atm, 273 K) H2O (s, 1 atm, 273K)
(D) (P) (Q) (R) (S) (T) q  0 , w  0, Ssys < 0, U  0, G = 0
(B) Free expansion ideal gas.
q  0 , w  0, S > 0, U  0, G < 0
• For each entry in Column I, darken the bubbles (C) q  0 , w  0, Ssys > 0, U  0, G < 0
of all the matching entries. For example, if (D) Ssys = 0, U  0, G = 0
entry (A) in Column I match with entries (Q),
(R) and (T), then darken these three bubbles
in the ORS. Similarly, for entries (B), (C) and
(D).
• Marking scheme :
For each entry in Column I
+2 If only the bubble(s) cooresponding to all
the correct match(es) is(are) darkned
0 If none of the bubbles is darkned
39. Match the anionic species given the Column
I that are present in the ore(s) given in
Column II.
Column I Column II
(A) Carbonate (P) Siderite
(B) Sulphide (Q) Malachite
(C) Hydroxide (R) Bauxite
(D) Oxide (S) Calamine
(T) Argentite
Sol. (A)  PQS ; (B)  T; (C)  QR; (D)  R ;
Siderite  FeCO3
Malachite  Cu(OH)2.CuCO3
Bauxite  Al2O3.2H2O
AlOx(OH)3–2x
0<x<1
[AlO0.5(OH)2]x
x=2
Calamine  ZnCO3
Argentite  Ag2S
40. Match the thermodynamic processes given

under Column I with the expressions given
under Column II.
Column-I
(A) Freezing of water at 273 K and 1 atm
(B) Expansion of 1 mole of an ideal gas into a
vacuum under isolated conditions
(C) Mixing of equal volumes of two ideal gases
at constant temperature and pressure in an
isolated container
(D) Reversible heating of H2(g) at 1 atm from
300 K to 600 K, followed by reversible cool-
ing to 300 K at 1 atm
Column-II
Page 14
MATHEMATICS
Q.41 The minimum number of times a fair coin y = – tx + 2at + at3
needs to be tossed, so that the probability of at t = – 1 y = – tx + 2at + at3
getting at least two heads is at least 0.96 is. at t = 1
Sol. 8 y=x–2–1 y=–x+2+1
at least two heads y=x–3 y=–x+3
= total – [no head - exactly 1 head] y–x+3=0 y+x–3=0
n n
Circle (x – 3)2 + (y + 2)2 = r2
 1  n 1  centre (3, – 2) radius r
= 1 –   2   C1  2    0.96

     2  3  3 2  3  3
r r
n n 2 3
1 1
1 – 0.96    + n  
2
  2 2
r
n 2 r 2
1
0.04    .(1 + n)
2 |  2 | r
1n r 2 So r2 = 2.
0.04  n = 8 minimum n is 8.
2n Q.44 Let f : R  R be a fucntion defined by
Q.42 Let n be the number of ways in which 5 boys
[x], x  2
and 5 girls can stand in a queue in such a f(x) =  0, x  2 , where [x] is the greatest
way that all the girls stand consecutively in 
the queue. Let m be the number of ways in i nt eg er l es s than or eq ual to x,
which 5 boys and 5 girls can stand in a queue
2
in such a way that exactly four girls stand x  (x2 )
consecutively in the queue. Then the value If I = 
–1
2  (x  1) dx, then the value of
m
of is. (4I – 1) is.
n
Sol. 5 Sol. 0
n = 6! × 5!
5! I
2
 
xf x2
m = 5! . 6C2 .
4! 1!
. 2! . 4!  2  f  x  1 dx
1
6
m 5! . C2 .5!.2!.4!
n
=
4! .1!.6!.5! I
1 xf x2   dx +
2
 
x f x2
dx +
 2  f  x  1  2  f x  1 
6  6  2  4! 1 1
= = 5.
2 1 4  3  2 1 6
Q.43 If the normals of the parabola y2 = 4x drawn
2 xf x2  
at the end points of its latus rectum are  2  f x  1 
dx
2
tangents to the circle (x – 3)2 + (y + 2)2 = r2,
then the value of r2 is. 2
x
Sol. 2  0
y2 = 4x (1,2)
t=1
 2 dx  0
1
2
(3,0)  x2  1
(1,0) I  
 4  4
 1
(1,–2) 4I – 1 = 0
t=–1
Page 15
Q.45 A cylindrical container is to be made from Sol. 3
certain solid material with the following

constraints : It has a fixed inner volume of V x2 
6
mm3, has a 2 mm thick solid wall and is open
at the top. The bottom of the container is a F(x) =  2 cos2 tdt
solid circular dise of thickness 2 mm and is x
of radius equal to the outer radius of the
container.  2 
F’(x) = 2cos2  x   . 2x – 2cos2 x .1
If the volume of the material used to make  6
the container is minimum when the inner
radius of the container is 10 mm, then the  2   2 
F”(x) = – 4cos  x  6  .sin x  6  .2x.2x
   
V
value of is.
250  2  y
Sol. 4 + 2cos2  x   .2
 6
2mm + 4 cosx . sinx
r
F”(0) = 0

h + 2 cos2   .2
6
x
=3 1/2
2mm 
M = (r + 2) n – r n + (r + 2) .2
2 2 2
 f(x)dx  F '()  2
0
2
 r  2  V r  v 2 f() = F”()
M=    r  2  .2
 r2 r2 f(0) = F”(0) = 3
2
v r  2  2
M= 2
 V   r  2  .2 Q.47 The number of distinct solutions of equation
r
5
dm 0–8 4  cos22x + cos4x + sin4x + cos6x + sin6x = 2
 v  3  2   2 r  2  .2 4
dr  r r 
in the interval [0, 2] is
 –8 40  Sol. 8
v    2 12   0
 1000 1000  5
cos2 2x + 1 – 2sin2 x cos2 x + 1 – 3 sin2 x
4
 –48 
v   48  0 cos2 x = 2
 1000 
5
v = 1000 p cos2 2x – 5 sin2 2x = 0
Now 4
5 5
V 1000 cos2 2x – sin2 2x = 0
  4 4 4
250 250
x2 
 5
6 cos 4 x= 0
4
Q.46 Let F(x) =  2 cos2 t dt for all x  R and
cos 4 x= 0
x
 x  [0, 2]
 1 4x  [0, 8]
f : 0,   [0, ) be a continuous function.
 2 Total number of solutions 8
Q.48 Let the curve C be the mirror image of the
 1
For a  0,  , if F'(a) + 2 is the area of the parabola y2 = 4x with respect to the line x +
 2 y + 4 = 0. If A and B are the points of inter-
region bounded by x = 0, y = 0, y = f(x) and section of C with the line y = –5, then the
x = a, then f(0) is. distance between A and B is.
Page 16
Sol. 4  x g(x) 
y2 = 4x  e|x| ; x  0 
(at2, 2at) (t2, 2t),  a =1 =e |f(x)|
=  
 1 ; x  0
x  t2 y  2t 2(t2  2t  4)
 
1 1 2  g(h)  0 
x – t2 = – t2 – 2t – 4 = hlim
0    g'(0)
 h 
x = – 2t – 4
x  4 h(x)
 t (C) f(h(x)) = g|h(x)| ; |h(x)|  0
 2  | h(x) |
y – 2t = – t2 – 2t – 4
y = – t2 – 4 h(x)
= g(e|x|)
(x  4)
2 | h(x) |
y=– 4
4
4y = –x2 – 8x – 16 – 16 g(e|h|)  1 g(eh )  1
F'(0+) = hlim
0 = hlim
0
x2 + 4y + 8x + 32 = 0 h h
y=–5 (given)
F'(0+)  f'(0–).
x2 – 20 + 8x + 32 = 0
x2 + 8x + 12 = 0   
x = – 6, x = – 2 Q.50 Let f(x) = sin  6 sin  2 sin x   for all x  R
A(–6, –5), B(–2, –5)   
AB = |–6 + 2| = 4 
Q.49 Let g : R  R be a differentiable function and g(x) = sinx for all x  R. Let (fog) (x)
2
with g(0) = 0, g’(0) = 0 and g’(1)  0. denote f(g(x)) and (gof) (x) denote g(f(x)).
 x Then which of the following is (are) true?
 g(x), x  0
|x|
Let f(x) =  and h(x) = e|x|
 0, x  0  1 1
 (A) Range of f is – 2 , 2 
for all x  R. Let (foh) (x) denote f(h(x)) and  
(hof)(x) denote h(f(x)), Then which of the
following is (are) true?  1 1
(B) Range of fog is – 2 , 2 
(A) f is differentiable at x = 0  
(B) h is differentiable at x = 0
f(x) 
(C) foh is differentiable at x = 0 (C) Lim =
x 0 g(x) 6
(D) hof is differentiable at x = 0
Sol. A,D (D) There is an x  R such that (gof)(x) = 1
g : R  R : g(0) = 0; g'(0) = 0 ; g'(1)  0 Sol. A, B, C
 x   
 | x | g(x) ; x  0 (A) f(x) = sin  6 sin  2 sin x  
f(x) =    
 0 ; x0  x  R  – 1  sin x  1
h   
g(h) –  sin x 
F'(0 ) = lim
+ | h | 2 2 2
0
h0 h
      
– 1  sin  2 sin x   1  – 6  6 sin  2 sinx   6
   
 e|x| |x| |x|
 |x| g(e ) ; e  0  x R    1
| e | 1
 –  sin 6 sin 2 sin x  2
f(h(x)) =  2
ehg(eh )
 1
 lim  eh
  1 1
h0 h Range f   , 
 2 2
Page 17
Sol. A,C,D
   
(B) f{g(x)} = sin  6 sin  2 sin  2 sin x    P
   
again  120° 
c4 3 b4 3
    
–  sin  sin x  
2 2 2  2 30° 30°
Q  R
a  12
  
– 1  sin  2 sin  2 sin    1 
   | a | 12

| b | 4 3
1        1
  sin    sin  sin  sin x    
   
2  6  2 2    2 ab  c  0
  
 1 1 b  c  a
Hence Range f{g(x)} =   ,     
 2 2 | b |2  | c |2 2b.c | a|2

48 + | c |2 48  144
     
sin  sin  sin x   sin  sin x  
 6  2  6  2    | c |2  144 – 96 = 48
lim
(C) x  0     6 
sin x sin  sin x 
2 6 | c | 4 3
2 

     | c |2 
(D) 2 sin  sin  6 sin  2 sin x     1 (A)  | a|
   
48
     – 12 = 12
2
  –  sin sinx 
6 6 2  6 
| c |2  48
(B)  | a| =  12
1    1
  2  sin  6 sin  2 sin x    2 = 36
  
   
1     1 (C) | a  b  c  a |
– sin 2  sin  sin  6 sin  2 sin x     sin 2
      
2| b  c | 2 b2c2  (b.c)2
 
Q.51 Let PQR be a triangle. Let a = QR ,
      = (48)2  (24)2
b = RP and c = PQ . If | a | = 12, | b | = 4 3
  = 2(24 3)  48 3
and b.c = 24, then which of the following is
  
(are) true? (D) a  b  c
     
| c |2  a  b  2a.b  c
(A) –| a | = 12
2  
 144 + 48 + 2a.b  48
| c |2 
(B)
2
+ | a | = 30  
a.b  72
   
(C) | a  b  c  a | = 48 3 Q.52 Let X and Y be two arbitrary, 3 × 3 non-zero,
skew-symmetric matrices and Z be an
  arbitrary 3 × 3, non-zero, symmetric matrix.
(D) a.b = –72
Page 18
Then which of the following matrices is (are)
skew symmetric? Q.54 In R3, consider the planes P1 : y = 0 and
(A) Y3Z4 – Z4Y3 (B) X44 + Y44 P2 : x + z = 1, Let P3 be a plane, different
(C) X Z – Z X
4 3 3 4
(D) X23 + Y23 from P1 and P2, which passes through the
Sol. C,D intersection of P1 and P2. If the distance of
xT = – x , yT = – y, zT = z the point (0, 1, 0) from P3 is 1 and the
(a)  = y3z4 – z4y3 distance of a point (, , ) from P3 is 2, then
T = (y3z4)T – (z4y3)T which of the following relations is (are) true?
= (zT)4 (yT)3 – (yT)3 (zT)4 (A) 2 +  + 2 + 2 = 0
= – z4y3 + y3z4 (B) 2 –  + 2 + 4 = 0
T =  symmetric (C) 2 +  – 2 – 10 = 0
(b)  = x44 + y44
T = (xT)44 + (yT)44 (D) 2 –  + 2 – 8 = 0
= x44 + y44 Sol. B,D
T =  symmetric P1 : y = 0
(c)  = x4z3 – z3x4 P2 : x + z = 1
T = (zT)3 (xT)4 – (xT)4 (zT)3 P3 : P1 + P2 = 0
= z 3 x 4 – x 4 z3 x + y + z = +1
T = –  Skew Symmetric New for  :
(d)  = x23 + y23 d = 12
 = (xT)23 + (yT)23
T = – x23 – y23 D    0 1
1
T = –  Skew Symmetric 1  2  1
Q.53 Which of the following values of  satisfy the ( – 1)2 = 2 + 2

equation 1 – 2 = 2
 = – 1/2
(1  )2 (1  2)2 (1  3)2
P3 : x – y/2 + z = 1
(2  )2 (2  2)2 (2  3)2
=–648? New distance for () = 2
(3  )2 (3  2)2 (3  3)2
(A) –4 (B) 9

(C) –9 (D) 4    1
Sol. B,C 2 2
1
1 1
2 2 2 4
1    1  2  1  3 
2   2 2  2 2 2  3 2 2    2  2
= – 648 2
3   2 3  2 2 3  3 2 9
2 –  + 2 – 2 = ± 6
2
1 2  2 –  + 2 = 8 or 2 –  + 2 = – 4
1 1 1
4 4 2 1 2 3
= – 648  Q.55 In R3, let L be a straight line passing through
2 1 4 9 the origin. Suppose that all the points on
9 6 
L are at a constant distance from the two
planes P1 : x + 2y – z + 1 = 0 and P2 : 2x –
 1 2 1  1 1 1 y + z – 1 = 0. Let M be the locus of the feet
 2 
  4 4 1  1 2 3 of the perpendiculars drawn from the points
= – 648 
 9 6 1  1 4 9 on L to the plane P1. Which of the following

points lie(s) on M?
(2 (–4)) × 2 = – 648
83 = 648  5 2  1 1 1
(A)  0,– ,–  (B)  – ,– , 
 6 3  6 3 6
Page 19
 5 1  1 2
(C)  – ,0,  (D)  – , 0, 
 6 6  3 3
0 0 1
Sol. A, B 1 12
t1 t2 = – 4   = 2 2 t1 t1 1
î ˆj ˆ
k
12
n̂  1 2 1 t t2 1
2
2 1 1
1  1 h2 t  1 t2 t   3 2
ˆ 5)
 î(2  1)  ˆj(1  2)  k(  2 2 1
2 2 2 
 î  3j ˆ
ˆ  5k |t1 t2 |t1 – t2|| = 12 2
x y z |t1– t2| = 3 2
 
1 3 5
t1 – t2 = 3 2 , or – 3 2
x y z
 then equation of line   4
1 2 1 t1  = 3 2  t12 + 3 2 t1 + t2 = 0
(, 2, –) t1
 + 4 +  + 1 = 0 or t12 – 3 2 t1 + 4 = 0
 = – 1/6
x  1/6 y  2 /6 z 1/6  t1 = 2 & t2 = 2 2
= = A,B, only good
1 3 5  P(at12, 2at1)
1 1
Q.56 Let P and Q be distinct points on the t1 = 2 2 , a = t1 = 2
2 2
parabola y2 = 2x such that a circle with
PQ as diameter passes through the veriex O 1 1  1 1
of the parabola. if P lies in the first quadrant P   (8), 2 
2 2  P   (2), 2   2  
and the area of the triangle OPQ is 3 2 ,
then which of the following is (are) the  4, 2 2  
P  1, 2 
coordiantes of P?
Q.57 Let y(x) be a solution of the differential

(A) 4,2 2  
(B) 9,3 2  eqution (1 + ex)y’ + yex = 1. If y(0) = 2,
then which of the following statements is
1 1 
(C)  4 ,


2
(D) 1, 2  (are) true?
(A) y(–4) = 0 (B) y(–2) = 0
Sol. A, D
(C) y(x) has a critical point in the interval
y2 = 2x (–1, 0)
1 2  (D) y(x) has no critical point in the interval (–1, 0)
P :  2 t1 t1 
  Sol. A,C
y(x)
mPO . mQO = – 1 (1 + ex) y1 + ex y = 1
t1  0 . tx  0 dy ex 1
 1 x y =
1 2 1 2 dx 1e 1  ex
t 0 t 0 Intergrating factor
2 2
4 
ex
dx
 1 e  x
 eln (1 e
x
)
 1  ex
1/2
1  ex
(1 + ex) y =  x
dx  c
(1 + ex)y = x + c
y(0) = 2 (1 + 1)2 = 0 + c (c = 4)
Page 20
Q.58 consider the family of all circles whose For each entry in Column I
centers lie on the straight line y = x. +2 If only the bubble(s) cooresponding to
If this family of circles is represented by the all the correct match(es) is(are) darkned
differential equation Py” + Qy’ + 1 = 0,
where P, Q are fucnti ons of x, y and 0 If none of the bubbles is darkned
dy d2 y –1 In all other cases

y’ (here y’ = , y” = ), then which of Q.59 Column I
dx dx2
the following statement is (are) true? (A) In R2, if the magnitude of the projection
(A) P = y + x
vector of the vector î  ˆj on 3iˆ  ˆj is 3
(B) P = y – x
(C) P + Q = 1 – x + y + y’ + (y’)2 and if a = 2  3 , then possible value(s) of
(D) P – Q = x + y – y’– (y’)2 || is (are)
Sol. B,C (B) Let a and b be real numbers such that
centre lie on 2
–3ax – 2, x  1
y=x the function f(x) =  2 is
 bx  a , x 1
x 2 + y2 + 2ax + 2ay + c = 0
differentiable for all x  R. Then possible
2x + 2yy’ + 2a + 2ay’ = 0 value(s) of a is (are)
 (2  2yy ')
2a = (C) Let   1 be a complex cube root of unity.
1  y' If (3 – 3 + 22)4 + 3 + (2 + 3 – 32)4 + 3 +
2 + 2(y’)2 + 2yy’’ + 2ay’’ = 0 (– 3 + 2 + 32)4 + 3 = 0, then possible
2x  2yy ' value(s) of n is (are)
2 + 2(y’)2 + 2yy’’ – y ''  0
1  y' (D) Let the harmonic mean of two positive
2 + 2y’ + 2(y’)2 + 2(y’)3 + 2yy’’ + 2yy’y’’ – 2 real numbers a and b be 4. If q is positive
× y’’ – 2yy’y’’ = 0 real number such that a, 5, q, b is an
y’’ (2y – 2x) + y’(2 + 2y’ + 2(y’)2) + 2 = 0 arighmetic number such that a, 5, q, b is an
y’’ (y – x) + y’(1 + y’ + (y’)2) + 1 = 0 arithmetic progression, then the value(s) of
|q – a| is (are)
P=y–x
Q = 1 + y' + (y’)2 Column II
(P) 1 (Q) 2
Section 3 (Maximum Marks :16)
• This section contains TWO questions. (R) 3 (S) 4
• Each question contains two columns, Column (T) 5
I and Column II.
Sol. (A)  P,Q (B)  P,Q (C)  P,Q,S,T
• Column I has four entries (A), (B), (C) and (D)
• Column II has five entries (P),(Q),(R),(S) and (T) (D)  Q,T
• Match the entries in Column I with the cenries
in Column II.  
3iˆ  ˆj
• One or more entries in Column I may match (A)  î  ˆj · 2
 3
with one or more entries in Column II.

• The ORS contains a 4 × 5 matrix whose
layout will be similar to the one shown below :  3 
  3
• For each entry in Column I, darken the 2 2
bubbles of all the matching entries. For
example, if entry (A) in Column I matc with  3  2 2 ...(1)
entries (Q), (R) and (T), then darken these
three bubbles in the ORS. Similarly, for
=2+ 3 ...(2)
entries (B), (C) and (D).
• Marking scheme : (2) & (1)
Page 21
b = a + 3d = a + 3(5 – a)
| 3 + | = 2 3
= 15 – 2a
putting value of b in
|(2 + 3 ) 3 + | = 2 3
2a(15  2a)
42 
a  15  2a
 2 3 + 3 +  = ± 2 3
2(15 – a) = 15a – 2a2
+tive –tive 2a2 – 2a – 15a + 30 = 0
2a2 – 17a + 30 = 0
=0 4 = – 4 3  (a – 6) (2a – 5) = 0
a = 6 q = 10 – a = 4
 =2 =– 3 5 15
a= q=
2 2
  = 2 – 3 = – 1  |q – a| = 2, 5 Ans. (Q, T)
Q.60 Column I
 3ax2  2 x 1
(B) f(x)   2 (A) In a triangle XYZ, let a, b and c be the
bx  a x1
lengths of the sides opposite to the angles
f(x) is conts X, Y and Z, respectively. If 2(a2 – b2) = c2
–3a – 2 = b + a2 ...(1) sin(X – Y)
Function is differenceble and  = , then possible values of
sinZ
 6ax x 1 n for which cos(n) = 0 is (are)
f '(x)  
 b x 1 (B) In a triangle XYZ, let a, b and c the
–6a = b ...(2) lengths of the sides opposite to the angles
–3a – 2 = – 6a + a2 X, Y and Z, respectively. If 1 + cos2X – 2cos2Y
 a2 – 3a + 2 = 0 a
(a – 1) (a – 2) = 0 = 2sinX sinY, then possible value(s) of is
b
a = 1, 2 (are)
b = – 6, –12
(C)   1 (C) In R2, let 3iˆ  ˆj , î  3j
ˆ and î  (1 – )j
ˆ
(3 – 3 + 22)4n + 3 + (2 + 3 – 32)4n+3
be the position vectors of X, Y and Z with
+ (–3 + 2 + 32)4n + 3 = 0
respect to the origin O, respectively. If the
(3 – 3 + 22)4n + 3 + 4n + 3 (22 + 3 – 3)4n + 3
distance of Z from the bisector of the acute
1 3
+ (–3 + 22 + 3)4n + 3 = 0  
4n3 angle OX with OY is then possible
2
(3 – 3 + 22)4n + 3 value(s) of || is (are)
 4n 3 1  (D) Suppose that F() denotes the area of
1    4n3   0
 the region bounded by x = 0, x = 2, y2 = 4x
 
and y = |x – 1| + |x – 2| + x, where
again (3 – 3 + 22)  0
1 8
 1 + 4n. 3 + 4n 3  0   {0, 1}. Then the value(s) of F() + 2,
  3
1 when  = 0 and  = 1, is (are)
1 + 4n + 4n = 0
 Column II
 n = 1, 2, 4, 5
is (P, Q, S, T) Ans. (P) 1 (Q) 2
2ab (R) 3 (S) 5

(D) given 4 = ...(1)
ab (T) 6
1 1 1 Sol. (A)  P,R,S (B)  P (C)  P,Q (D)  S,T
, ,
a q b  A.P..
Let a, 5, q, b be
a, a + d, a + 2d, a + 3d
d = (5 – a)
q = a + 10 – 2a = (10 – a)
Page 22
x (C) x  3, 1
c b
y 1, 3 
(A)
y z  , (1  )
a z
2(a2 – b2) = c2 (iˆ  ˆj)

2(sin2x – sin2y) = sin2z CQ
2sin(x + y) sin(x – y) = sin2z

 1  3
sin(x  y) 1 x–y=0 
 2 2
sin z 2
2 – 1 = 3
 1 2 = 4
cos  n    n = 1, 3, 5 =2
 2
(D)
x
c b
(B)
y
a z
(1 – cos 2y) + (cos 2x – cos 2y) = 2 sinx siny
2sin2y + 1 – 2 sin2x – 1 + 2sin2y = 2 sinx siny
4sin2y – 2 sin2x 2sinxsiny 9 = 4X
a2 + ab – 2b2 = 0
2b2 – a2 = ab 9
x
a2 + 2ab–ab – 2b2 = 0 4
a(a+2b) – b(a+2b)=0
2
 
a
=1 2  x3 / 2 
b  3x  2 
 (3  2 x)dx =  3 
0 
 2 0
2
=  3x  4 x3 / 2 
 3 0
 4  8
= 6  2 2   2
 3  3
=6
Page 23
.com
JEE(Advance)-2015
Previous Year Paper with Solutions

Eduncle.com
Call us : 9982853222
-
(PHYSICS) P-2
1. For a radioactive material, its activity A and    60, n  3
rate of change of its activity R are defined as A
dN dA 1 d 3 8 3
= – and R = – , where N(t) is the  dn
dt dt 2 dn 2 2
2 4 3
3 2
number of nuclei at time t. Two radioactive
sources P (mean life ) and Q (mean life 2) d
2
have the same activity at dn
t = 0. Their rates of change of activities at 3. In the following circuit, the current through
the resistor R (=2) is I amperes. The value
RP n
t = 2 are RP and RQ, respectively. If R = , of I is -
Q e
then the value of n is - R(=2) 1
Sol. 2
8
2
A  A0e1t
2
dA 6
 1A 0e 1t
4
dt
10
 dA  6.5V
   t
 dt P  1A0e 1  2  1 
 
 dA  2 A 0e2t e 12
 
 dt Q
n=2
2. A monochromatic beam of light is incident
at 60° on one face of an equilateral prism of Sol. 1 Amp. (Using two times wheatstone bridge)
refractive index and emerges from the
opposite face making an angle  (n) with the 4. An electron in an excited state of Li2+ ion has
angular momentum 3h/2. The de Broglie
normal (see the figure). For n = 3 the value wavelength of the electron in this state is
d pa0 (where a0 is the Bohr radius). The value
of  is 60° and = m. The value of m is -
dn of p is -
Sol. 2
60°
Sol. 2
  i    60 n2
1 × sin 60° = n × sin r1 r0  a0 z=3
z
 3 nh 3h
r1  sin1   Also mvr  
 2m  2 2
By snell’s law n = 3
 e– is present in 3rd orbital.
 3 
1  sin   n sin  60  sin1    De-broglie wavelength ()
  2n   h h
 3 4n2  3 1 3    
p mv
sin     
 2 2 2 2 mvr = 3h / 2
Differentiating w.r.t. n : 3h
 mv  = 2a0
3 8n 2r
cos  d  · dn Hence p = 2
2 2 4n2  3  2
Page 2
5. A large spherical mass M is fixed at one 7. The densities of two solid spheres A and B of
position and two identical point masses m the same radii R vary with radial distance r
are kept on a line passing through the centre r
5
r
of M (see figure). The point masses are as A (r) = k  R  and B(r) = k   ,
connected by a rigid massless rod of length l   R 
and this assembly is free to move along the respectively, where k is a constant. The
line connecting them. All three masses moments of inertia of the individual spheres
i n teract onl y th rough th ei r mu tu al about axes passing through their centres are
gravitational interaction. When the point IB n
mass nearer to M is at a distance r = 3l from IA and IB, respectively. If I = , the value
A 10
M, the tension in the rod is zero for m = k of n is -
 M  Sol. 6
  . The value of k is -
 288  2
dI  dm·x2
M m m 3
dm =  × 4x2 · dx
2  x
r l dIA  k·  4x4dx
Sol. 7 3  R
For B
2 kx5
dIB   5 4x 4dx
3 R
R
Writing the net force on system : 2k
 ·4 x5dx
3R
GMm GMm GMm Gm 0
2
 2 2

3l  4l   l2
 3l 
8k 9
x ·dx
2m m 3R5 
GM M 2M 2m 8k R 6 4kR5
 2
 2
 2  2  . 
9l 16l 9l l 3R 6 9
M M 8k R10 8k R 5 9R
   2m IB    · 
16 9 3R 5
10 3 10 4kR5
9M  16M n=6
  2m
144 8. Four harmonic waves of equal frequencies
7M and equal intensities I0 have phase angles 0,
  2m
144 /3, 2/3 and . when they are superposed,
7M the intensity of the resulting wave is nI0. The
 m
288 value of n is -
 k=7 Sol. 3
6. The energy of a system as a function of time

t is given as E(t) = A2 exp (–t), wher a =
0.2 s–1. The measurement of A has an error
of 1.25%. If the error in the measurement of
time is 1.50%, the percentage error in the
value of E(t) at t = 5 s is -
Sol. 4 I  I1  I2  2 I1I2 cos 
 A2et   0.2 = 2I0 + 2I0 cos 60°

= 3I0
lnE  2 ln A  t n=3
dE dA
2  dt 9. In terms of potential difference V, electric
E A
= (2×1.25×10–2) + (0.2 × 7.5 × 10–2) current I, permittivity 0, permeability 0 and
= 2.5 × 10–2 + 1.5 × 10–2 speed of light c, the dimensionally correct
equation (s) is (are)
dE (A) 0 I2 = 0V2 (B) 0 I = 0V
 4  102
E (C) I = 0cV (D) 0cI = 0V
:0744-2209671, Toll Free 180030702299 | url : www.motioniitjee.com, :info@motioniitjee.com Page 3

Sol. A,C 11. In plotting stress versus strain curves for two
materials P and Q, a student by mistake puts
(a)  0 I2   0 V 2 strain on the y-axis and stress on the x-axis
1 as shown in the figure. Then the correct
C statemetn(s) is (are)
 00
(A) P has more tensile
0I2  0 V2 strength than Q
(B) P is more ductile
0 V 2 1
2 
Strain
 2 than Q
0 I 0 0 (C) P is more brittle P
1 V2 1 than Q
2 2
 2 0 Q
C I C2 0 (D) Th e You ng’s
1 Nm2 modulus of P is more
k   than that of Q
40 C2 Stress
Sol. A,B
(c) I = 0CV The maximum stress is called the breaking
again matches. (solved & get) strength (stress) or tensile strength.
10. Consider a u ni form sph erical charge The materials of the wire which break as soon
distribution of radius R1 centred at the origin as stress is increased beyond elastic limit are
O. In this distribution, a spherical cavity of called brittle. While the materials of the wire,
radius R2, centred at P with distance OP = a which have a good plastic range are called
= R1 – R2 (see figure) is made. If the electric ductile.
  plastic region
field inside the cavity at position r is E(r ) ,
then the correct statement(s) is (are) Strain
R2
P
P
Q
a
R1
O
proportional Stress breaking
limit strength
elastic
 limit
(A) E i s u n iform, i t s magni t u de i s
independent of R2 but its direction depends 12. A spherical body of radius R consists of a fluid
on r of constant density and is in equilibrium under
 its own gravity. If P(r) is the pressure at
(B) E is uniform, its magnitude depends on
R2 and its direction depends on r r (r < R), then the corect option(s) is (are)

(C) E i s u n iform, i t s magni t u de i s P(r  3R / 4) 63
independent of a but its direction depends (A) P (r = 0) = 0 (B) =
P(r  2R / 3) 80

on a
 P(r  3R / 5) 16 P(r  R / 2) 20
(D) E is uniform and both its magnitude and (C) = (D) =
 P(r  2R / 5) 21 P(r  R / 3) 27
direction depends on a
Sol. D Sol. B,C
R2
(dm) g = dP. dA
r(4G)
(.dA) dr. = dp. dA
a 3
R1 0 2 R
 dP = 4G  rdr
p 3 r
R
4G2  2 
 p= .  
E is uniform & both its magnitude & direction 3  2 r
  p  (R2 – r2)
depends on a due to the vector nature of E .
Page 4 Corporate Head Office : Motion Education Pvt. Ltd., 394 - Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota-5 (Raj.)
13. A parallel plate capaitor having plates of area
S and plate separation d, has capacitance C1
in air. When two dielectrics of different
relative permittivities (1 = 2 and 2 = 4) are
introduced between the two plates as shown
in the figure, the capacitance becomes C2.
C2
The ratio C is - (A) If V2 - 2V1 and T2 = 3T1, then the energy
1
d/2 1
stored in the spring is PV
4 1 1
(B) If V2 = 2V1 and T2 = 3T, then the change
S/2 in internal energy is 3P1V1
(C) If V2 = 3V1 and T2 = 4T, then the work
–
7
+
S/2 done by the gas is PV
3 1 1
(D) If V2 = 3V1 and T2 = 4T1, the heat supplied
17
to the gas is PV
d 6 1 1
(A) 6/5 (B) 6/5 Sol. A,B / B
(C) 7/5 (D) 7/3 Change in internal energy
Sol. D
P1V1  nRT1
U  nCV dT
3 
 n  R  3T1  T1 
2 
3
 nR  T1  = 3nRT1 So option B
2
U = 3P1V1
0 A P1V1 nRT1
C1  C 
P2 V2 nRT2
d
P1V1 nRT1

P2 2V1  nR  3T1 
4 7
1 =
3 3
3
7C P2  P1
C2  2
3
1 P
w  2V1  1  P1  2V1 
14. An ideal monoatomic gas is confined in a 2 2
horizontal cylider by a spring loaded piston
(as shown in the figure). Initially the gas is at P1V1 5
  2V1P1  P1V1
temperature T1, pressure P1 and volume V1 2 2
and the spring is in its relaxed state. The gas V1 = A
is then heated very slowly to temperature T2, dV = V2 – V1 = Ax = V1
pressure P2 and volume V2. During this process V1
the piston moves out by a distance x. Ignoring x
A
the friction between the piston and the cylider,
the correct statement(s) is (are). F = kx = (P2 – P1) A
3  16. Two spheres P and Q of equal radii have
kx   P1  P1  A densities 1 and 2 , respectively. The spheres
2 
are connected by a massless string and
P1 placed in liquids L1 and L2 of densities 1 and
kx  A
2 2 and viscosities 1 and 2, respectively. They
1 float in equilibrium with the sphere P in L1
E  kx2
2 and sphere Q in L2 and the string being taut
1    (see figure). If sphere P along in L2 has
kx x 
2 terminal velocity VP and Q in L1 has terminal

1 P  V  P V velocity VQ , then
  1 A  1   1 1
2 2  A  4 
So option (A) Ans A will come only when | VP | 1
we have considered that pressure on spring side is (A)  =  L1
| VQ | 2 P
constant. 
Now for heat supply | VP | 2
(B)  =
9 | VQ | 1
U  P1V1 L2
2   Q
(C) VP.VQ  0
PV 1 9  29  
W  1 1 ; Q  P1V1    = P1V1
3 3 2  6 (D) VP .VQ  0
Sol. A,D
236 140
15. A fission reaction is given by 92 U  38 Xe 4 3 4
94 1 R g  T  1 R3g
+ 38 Sr + x + y, where x and y are two 3 3
236
particles. Considering U to be at rest, the 4
92   1  1  R g  T
kinetic energies of the products are denoted 3
by KXe, KSr, KX (2MeV) and Ky (2 MeV),
respectively. Let the binding energies per
236 140 94
nucleon of 92 U, 54 Xe and 38 Sr be 7.5
MeV, 8.5 MeV and 8.5 MeV, respectively.
Considering different conservation laws, the
correct option (s) is (are)
(A) x=n, y = n, KSr = 129 MeV, KXe = 86 MeV
(B) x=p, y = e–, KSr = 129 MeV, KXe = 86 MeV 4 4
2 R 3g  T  2 R 3g
(C) x=p, y = n, KSr = 129 MeV, KXe = 86 MeV 3 3
(D) x=n, y = n, KSr = 86 MeV, KXe = 129 MeV
Sol. A 4
  2  2  R g  T
236
3
92 U
 X140 +
54
Sr94 + x + y
38
From conservation of charge x, y are neutrons

Again using energy conservation
(B.E.)U = 7.5 × 236 = 1770 mev
(B.E.)Xe = 8.5 × 140 = 1190 mev
= Released energy
1 – 1 = 2 – 2
= KXe + K Sr + KX + Ky
2 – 1 = 2 – 1
neglecting momentum of x,y
1 – 2 = 1 – 2
219 = KXe + KSr + 4
4 4
 KXe + KSr = 215 2 R3g  1 R3g  2RvP
3 3
P2
For constant momentum K =
2m
1
K
m
mXE > mSr
VP   1
 2
K XE < K Sr VQ 1  2
2 2    g Sol. A,C
VT  r
9 
 = density of fluid
 = density of object
VP    2  1  1
 1
VQ 2  2  1  2
 2  1  2  1
1  n 
Paragraph-1 For TIR =   C  sin  2 
Light guidance in an optical fiber can be  n1 
understood by considering a structure  r = 90° – 
comprising of thin solid glass cylider of  n (sin i) = n1 sin r = n1 cos 
refractive index n1 surrounded by a medium  n sin im  n1 cos c
of lower refractive index n 2. The light
guidance in the structure takes place due to n22
 n1 1   n12  n22
successive total internal reflections at the n12
interface of the media n1 and n2 as shown in
the figure. All rays with the angle of incidence 1 2
NA = sin im = n1  n22
i less than a particular value im are confined n
in the medium of refractive index n1. The Now put values.
numerical aperture (NA) of the structure is
defined as sin im. 18. If two structures of same cross-sectional
area, but different numerical apertures NA1
n1>n2 and NA2 (NA2 < NA1) are joined longitudinally,
Air the numerical aperture of the combined
Cladding n2
structure is -
Core NA1NA 2
i n1 (A) NA  NA (B) NA1 + NA2
1 2
(C) NA1 (D) NA2
Sol. D
Which is lesser
17. For two structures namely S 1 with n 1 = Paragraph-2

In a thin rectangular metallic strip a constant
45 / 4 and n2 = 3/2, and S2 with n1 = 8/5 current I flows along the positive x-direction,
and n2 = 7/5 and taking the refractive index as shown in the figure. The length, width and
of water to be 4/3 and that of air to be 1, the thickness of the strip are l, w and d,
correct option (s) is (are) 
respectively. A uniform magnetic field B is
(A) NA of S1 immersed in water is the same
applied on the strip along the positive y-
as that of S2 immersed in a liquid of refractive
direction. Due to this, the charge carries
16 experience a net deflection along the z-
index
3 15 direction. This results in accumulation of
(B) NA of S1 immersed in liquid of refractive charge caries on the surface PQRS and
16 apperance of equal and opposite charges on
index is the same as that of S 2 the face opposite to PQRS. A potential
15 difference along the z-direction is thus
immersed in water developed. Charge accumulation continues
(C) NA of S1 placed in air is the same as that until the magnetic force is balanced by the
of S2 immersed in liquid of refractive index electric force. The current is assumed to be
4 uniformly distributed on the cross section of
the strip and carried by electrons.
15
(D) NA of S1 placed in air is the same as that
of S2 placed in water
20. Consider two different metallic strips (1 and
l y 2) of same dimensions (length l, width w and
t hickness d) wit h carrier densit ies n 1 and n2,
I K I respectively. Strip 1 is placed in magnetic
w x
S R field B1 and strip 2 is placed in magnetic field
B2, both along positive y-directions. Then V1
d M and V2 are the potential differences developed
z
P Q between K and M in st rips 1 and 2,
respectively. Assuming that the current I is
the same for both the strips, the correct
option (s) is (are).
19. Consider two different metallic strips (1 and (A) If B1 = B2 and n1 = 2n2, then V2 = 2V1
2) of the same material. Their lengths are (B) If B1 = B2 and n1 = 2n2, then V2 = V1
the same, widths are w 1 and w 2 and (C) If B1 = 2B2 and n1 = n2, then V2 = 0.5V1
thicknesses are d1 and d2, respectively. Two (D) If B1 = 2B2 and n1 = n2, then V2 = V1
points K and M are symmetrically located on Sol. A,C
the opposite faces parallel to the x-y plane I1 = I2
(see figure). V1 and V 2 are the potential
differences between K and M in strips 1 and n1 e A1 v d1 = n2 eA2 vd2
2 , respectively. Then, for a given curent I
 n1 v d1 = n2 vd2
flowing through them in a given magnetic
field strength B, the correct statement(s) is V1 V2
(are). n1 w B = n2 w B
1 1 2 2
(A) If w1 = w2 and d1 = 2d2, then V2 = 2V1
(B) If w1 = w2 and d1 = 2d2, then V2 = V1 If B1 = B2 then n1V1 = n2 V2
(C) If w1 = 2w2 and d1 = d2, then V2 = 2V1
(D) If w1 = 2w2 and d1 = d2, then V2 = V1
Sol. A,D
E V
qE = q Vd B  Vd = =
B wB
I = neA Vd
Now, I1 = I2  A1 v d1 = A2 vd2
V1 V2
 w1 d2 w B = w2 d2 w B
1 2
 d1 V1 = d2 V2
d1 = 2d2  V2 = 2V1
d1 = d2  V1 = V2
(CHEMISTRY) P-2
–log[Ka(HY)] = – log ( C22 )
• This section contains EIGHT questions.
• The answer to each question is a SINGLE PKa(HX) – PKa(HY) = – log C112 ) + log( C2 22 )
DIGIT INTEGER ranging from 0 to 9. both
inclusive. C 2
• For each question, darken the bubble corre-   2  
log  2   
sponding to the correct integer in the ORS.  C1  1  
• Marking scheme :
+4 If the bubble corresponding to the  0.1 2
answer is darkened. log  10  
 0.01 
0 In all other cases.
log(10)3
=3
21. Three moles of B2H6 are completely reacted
with methanol. The number of moles of 23. A closed vessel with rigid walls contains 1
boron containing product formed is.
mol of 238
92 U and 1 mole of air at 298K. Con-
Sol. 6
B2H6 + 6MeOH  2B(OMe)3 + 3H2
sidering complete decay of 238 206
92 U to 82 Pb ,
1 mol B2H6 formed 2 mol of B(OMe)3
Hence, 3 mol B2H6 formed 6 mol of B(OMe)3 the ratio of the final pressure to the initial
pressure of system at 298K is.
Sol. 9
22. The molar conductivity of a solution of a weak U238
92 82Pb
206
+ 8 2He4
4
acid HX (0.001 M) is 10 times smaller than 8 mole 2He produces.
the molar conductivity of a solution of a weak Pf 9n
  9
acid HY (0.10 M). If 0 —  0 — , the differ-- Pi 1
x Y
ence in their pKa values, pKa (HX) – pKa(HY),is
24. In dilute aqueous H 2SO 4 , the complex
(consider degree of ionization of both acids
diaquodioxalatoferrate(II) is oxidized by
to be <<1)
MnO4–. For this reaction, the ratio of the rate
Sol. 3
of change of [H+] to the rate of change of
Hx X– + H+
[MnO4–] is.
0.01(1–1) 0.011 0.011 Sol. 8
  
M(Hx) = M(H ) + M(X )
[Fe(H O) (C O )] + MnO–4
2 2 2 4
–2
 
M (HY) = M (H ) + 
M (Y  )
Acidic
  (HY)
(Hx) M 1 = 0.10×2 M
+2
Mn
2 CM
1 = 0.10 2  = 10  [fe(H2O)2(C2O4)2]2– + MnO–4
1 M Mn+2 + Fe+3 + CO2
If = 5 If = 5
2
Ka(HX) = C1 1
Ka(HY) = C2 22
–log[Ka(HX)] = – log ( C12 )

+ 2–
8H + [Fe(H2O) 2(C2O4)2] + MnO4
III.
+2 +3
Mn + Fe + 4CO2 + 6H2O
–
1 d[H ] d[MnO4 ]
–  =8
8 dt dt IV.
25. The number of hydroxyl group(s) in Q is

Sol. 4
CHO
P I.
(Gatterman Koch.
Q synthesis)
Sol. 4 OH
CH
OH
II.
0ºC dil. KMnO4

–H2O
OH CHO
OH
OH
OH
No. of hydroxyl group is four

CHO
26. Among the following the number of
reaction(s) that produce(s) benzaldehyde is III.
I. (Rosenmund)
CHO
IV.
II.
27. In the complex acetylbromidodicarbonylbis

triethylphosphine iron (II) the number of Fe-
C bond(s) is
Sol. 3
CH3C = O en Cl NH3
C O en
Fe Co Co en
C O
Br– en NH3
Cl
(Et3P)2
Cis Trans
28. Among the complex ions, [Co(NH2–CH2–CH2–

NH3 H2O
NH 2 –) 2 Cl 2 ] +, [C rCl 2 (C 2 O 4 ) 2 ] 3– , NH3 H2O NH3 NH3
[Fe (H2O)4(OH)2]+, [Fe(NH3)2(CN)4], [Co(NH2–
Fe Fe
CH 2–C H 2–N H 2) 2(N H 3)Cl] 2+ a nd
[Co(NH3)4(H2O)Cl]2+, the number of complex NH3 Cl NH3 NH3
NH3 Cl
ion(s) that show(s) cis-trans isomerism is-
Cis Trans
Sol. 6
en Cl Cl • This section contains EIGHTS questions
• Each question has FOUR options (A,) (B), (C)
Co en Co en & (D). ONE OR MORE THAN ONE of these
four options(s) is(are) correct
en Cl Cl • For each question, darken the bubble(s) cor-
responding to all the correct option(s) in the
Cis Trans ORS
• Marking scheme:
+4 If only the bubble(s) corresponding
C2O4 Cl Cl
to all the correct option(s) is(are) darkened
0 If none of the bubbles is darkened
Co C2O4 Co C2O4
C2O4 Cl Cl 29. The major product U in the following

Cis Trans reactions is
+
CH2 = CH–CH3,H radical initiator, O2
T U
H2O H2O CN high pressure, heat
CN H2O H2O
Fe Fe H
H2O O H3C CH3
CN H2O H2O O
H2O CN
(A) CH3 (B) O O H
Cis Trans
CN CN NC NH3 CN H
NH3
O CH2
Fe Fe O O O H
(C) CH 2 (D)
CN NH3 NC
CN NH3 CN
Cis Trans
Sol. B
CH3 CH3 HO
CH
+
CH2 = CH–CH3,H
high pressure, heat (D)
Cumene
N=N
radical initiator, O2
CH3 CH3
Sol. A
C–O–O–H NH2
N2Cl
NaNO2, HCl
0°C
OH NaOH
30. In the following reactions, the major
product W is Ph
|
NH OH N
2
||
NaNO2, HCl , NaOH N
V W
0°C
OH
31. The correct statement(s) regarding, (i) HClO,

(ii) HClO2, (iii) HClO3 and (iv) HClO4 is (are)
(A) N=N OH (A) The number of Cl = O bonds in (ii) and
(iii) together is two
(B) The number of lone pairs of electrons on
Cl in (ii) and (iii) together is three
(C) The hybridixation of Cl in (iv) is sp3
(D) Amongst (i) to (iv), the strongest scid is (i)
Sol. B, C
OH
(i) H – O – Cl
(B) N=N
(ii) HO – Cl = O
HO – Cl = O
(iii)
O
OH O
N=N (iv) HO – Cl = O
(C)
O
32. The pair(s) of ions where BOTH the ions are

precipitted upon passing H2S gas in presence
of dilute HCl, is(are)
(A) Ba2+, Zn2+ (B) Bi3+, Fe3+
(C) Cu2+, Pb2+ (D) Hg2+, Bi3+
Sol. C, D
II A Group
33. Under hydrolytic conditions, the compounds

used for preparation of linear polymer and V(r)
for chain termination, respectively, are (C) 0 r
(A) CH3SiCl3 and Si(CH3)4
(B) (CH3)2SiCl2 and (CH3)3SiCl
(C) (CH3)2SiCl2 and CH3SiCl3
(D) SiCl4 and (CH3)3SiCl
Sol. B
R R R R R
R Si O Si O Si O Si O Si R
R R R R R V(r)
0 r
(D)
34. When O2 is adsorbed on a metallic surface,
electron transfer occurs from the metal to
O2. The TRUE statements(s) regarding this
adsorption is (are)
Sol. (C)
(A) O2 is physisorbed
(B) heat is released
Q.36. In the following reactions, the product S is
(C) Occupancy of 2p of O2 is increased
(D) bond length of O2 is increased H 3C
i. O3
Sol. B,C,D
R
ii. Zn, H2O
35. One mole of a monatomic real gas satisfies
the equation p(V – b) = RT where b is a NH3
S
constant. The relationship of interatomic V(r)
and interatomic distance r for the gas is given H 3C
N
by
(A)
H 3C N
V(r)
(A) 0
(B)
r
N
(C)
HC
3
N
V(r)
(B) 0
(D)
r HC
3
Sol. A (Consider heat capacity of all solutions as
O 4.2 g–1 K–1 and density of all solutions as 1.0
H3C CH3 g mL–1)
C
i. O3 O
H
ii. Zn, H2O C 37. Enthalpy of dissociation (in kJ mol–1) of acetic
H acid obtained from the Expt. 2 is
NH3 (A) 1.0 (B) 10.0
O O (C)24.5 (D) 51.4
H3C C–H H3C C–H Sol. A
HCl + NaOH  NaCl
NH2 NH3 100 mili mole (1)
CH2–C CH2–C
H H 100
OH O
 (57.0)KJ = mC T  (5.7)  200  4.2  5.7
1000
O (2)
OH
CH
NH2 NH
CH2
CH2 OH
OH
– H2O
 100  100
H3C – Hº   57   C T  (5.6)  200  4.2  5.6 
N 1000  1000
= 57  Hº  57   5.6 
10 10 10  5.7 
 This section contains TWO paragraphs  0.1 
 Based on each paragraph, there will be TWO 57    Hº
 5.7 
questions
= 1 KJ/mole
 Each question has FOUR options (A), (B), (C)
38. The pH of the solution after Expt. 2 is
and (D). ONE OR MORE THAN ONE of ORS
(A) 2.8 (B) 4.7
 Marking scheme:
(C) 5.0 (D) 7.0
+4 If only the bubble(s) corresponding to all
the correct option (s) is (are) darkened ç; ksx 2 dsi ' pkr foy ; u dk pH gSA
0 If none of the bubbles is darkened (A) 2.8 (B) 4.7
–2 In all other cases (C) 5.0 (D) 7.0
PARAGRAPH 1 Sol. B
When 100 mL of 1.0 M HCl was mixed with PH = 5 – log(2) + log (1)
100 mL of 1.0 M NaOH in an insulated beaker PH = 4.7
at constant pressure, a temperature increase
of 5.7ºC was measured for the beaker and PARAGRAPH - 2
its contents (Expt. 1). Because the enthalpy In the following reactions
of neutralization of a strong acid with a strong Pd-BaSO 4 i. B2H6
base is a constant (–57.0 kJ mol–1), this C8H6 C8H8 X
H2 ii. H2O2 NaOH, H2O
experiment could be used to measure the
calorimeter constant. In a second experiment H2O
(Expt.2), 100, mL of 2.0 M acetic acid (Ka -
2.0 × 10–5) was mixed with 100 mL of 1.0 M HgSO4, H2SO 4
NaOH (under identical conditions to Expt.1 )
where a temperature rise of 5.6ºC was
measured.
C CH CH=CH2
i. EtMgBr, H 2O
C 8H8O Y Pd–BaSO4
ii. H+, heat H2
B2H 6/H2O2,
NaOH, H2O
PARAGRAPH - 2
OH
In the following reactions
Pd-BaSO 4 i. B2H6
C8H6 C8H8 X
H2 ii. H2O2 NaOH, H2O
40. The major compound Y is
H2O
HgSO4, H2SO 4 CH3
(A)
i. EtMgBr, H 2O
C 8H8O + Y
ii. H , heat CH3
(B)
39. Compound X is
O CH2
CH3
(A) CH3 (C)
OH CH3
CH3
(B) CH3 (D)
Sol. D
OH
(C)
C CH
COH
(D)
+
H2O/Hg
H2SO4
Sol. C
C–CH3
O
EtMgBr
H2O
OH
CH3–C–CH2–CH3 CH3
+
H CH3
(MATHEMATICS) P-2
Q.41 Let m and n be two positive integers greater 1  12  9x 

1
  e9x 3tan
x
2 
dx

 ecos(n ) – e  0
 1 x 
than 1. If lim   = –  e  then the
0  m    Put 9x + 3tan–1x = t
   2
 3   3 
m 9   dx  dt   9  = dt
value of is  1  x2  1  x
2
 dx
n
ekuk fd nks/kukRed i w
. kkZ
a
d m r Fkk n , d (1) l scM+
sgS 
3
 ecos(n ) – e  
4
(integers greater 1) ; fn lim  m
 =
 0    3
  9 3
  4 et dt = e9  4 1
0
e m
–  rc dk eku gS  3  3 3
2 n loge 1    9  9
Sol. 2
Q.43 Let f : R  R be a continuous odd fucntion,
 ecos n  e  e which vanishes exactly at one point and f(1)
lim  m

 0    2 x
  1
2
=
2  f(t) dt for all x 
lim 
 n
  e e
 
n
cos  1
 
 1 cos n  1 

e  x
–1
2 [–1, 2] and G(x) =

 0


  n
m  n
cos   1 


2  t | f(f(t)) | dt for all x 
–1
e2n  –1  e F(x) 1
   2  n – m = 1 [–1, 2]. If lim
m  2  x 1 G(x) 14
m 1
2n – m = 0, 2n – m = 0, 2  
n 2
1
ekukfd f : R  R , d l a
r r fo"ke Qyu gSft l dkeku
9x  3 tan–1 x
 12  9x2 
Q.42 If  =  (e )
 1  x2  dx
  dsoy , d fcUnqi j gh ' kw
U; gksrk gSr Fkk f(1) =
1
0 2
where tan–1x takes only principal values, then x
 3  ekuk fd l Hkhx  [–1, 2] dsfy, F(x) =  f(t) dt

the value of  loge | 1   | –  is –1
 4 
x
1
–1  12  9x2  , oal Hkhx[–1,2] dsfy, G(x) =  t | f(f(t)) | dt
 (e9x  3 tan x
)
; fn  =  1  x2  dx
–1
0  
F(x) 1 1
t gk¡tan–1x dsoy eq
[ ; ekuksa(principal values) dks A ; fn lim
gS rc f   dk eku gS
x 1 G(x) 14 2
 3 
] r c  loge | 1   | – 4  dk eku gS
ysrk gS
 
Sol. 7
Sol. 9
f(x) is odd.
f(0) = 0. 7
z=–
1 2
f 1  (A) & (C)
2
2y = 9
x
F  x  f  t   F'  x   f  t  x   1,2  y = 9/2
 1  2x + y + z
x x 9 7
 f  t  dt  f  t  dt 8+ 
1 1
lim x
 lim 0 x
2 2
x 1 x 1
 
t f f  t  dt    
tf f  t  dt   tf  f  t   dt
1 1 0 2
8+ 9
2
1
f x  1  k   k 
 lim  2  Q.45 For any integer k, let k =   + i sin  ,
x 1 xf f  x    1  14
f   7   7 
2 where i = –1 . The value of the expression
1
7  f  12
2 |  k 1 – k |
   k 1
is.
Q.44 Suppose that p , q and r are three non- 3
coplanar vectors in R3. Let the components | 

k 1
4k–1 – 4k–2 |
   
of a vector s along p , q and r be 4, 3 and
 k   k 
5, respectively. If the components of this fdl hHkhi w
. kkZ
a
d k dsfy, k =  7  + i sin  7 
          
vector s along ( –p  q  r ), ( p – q  r ) and
   12
( –p – q  r ) are x, y and z, respectively, then | 
k 1
k 1 – k |
the value of 2x + y + z is t gk¡i = –1 rc O
;a
td 3 dk
  
ekuk fd r3 esap , q r Fkk r r hu vl er yh; l fn' k gSA | 

4k–1 – 4k–2 |
   
ekukfd l fn' k s ds?kVd Øekxr l fn' kksap , q , oar eku gS

dsvuq fn' k Øe' k%4, 3 vkS j 5 gSA ; fn s ds?kVd
      Sol.
Øekxr l fn' kksa ( –p  q  r ), ( p – q  r ) , oa k
i
   k = e 7
( –p – q  r ) dsvuqfn' k Øe' k x, y vkS
j z gS
a
] r c 2x

i (k 1)
+ y + z dk eku gSA k+1 = e 7
Sol. 0009 12
     | k 1  k |
s  4p  3q  5r ...(1) k 1
         
s  x(p  q  r)  y(p  q  r) + z(p  q  r) 12
 k    k 
= k1 cos(k 1) cos i sin (k 1) sin
   7 7 7 7
= (– x + y – z) p + (x – y – z) q + (x+y+z) r
....(2) 
let 
comparing (1) & (2) 7
–x+y–z=4 ...(A) 12
(2k  1)   
x–y–z=3 ...(B) 
k 1
 2 sin
2
sin  i2 sin cos(2k  1)
2 2 2
x+y+z=5 ...(C)
(B) & (C)
2x = 8  x = 4
(A) & (B)
– 2z = 7
12 Q.47 The coefficient of x 9 in the expansion of
  (2k  1) 

k 1
2 sin i  cos
2  2
 i sin(2k  1) 
2
(1 + x)(1 + x2)(1 + x3)...(1 + x100) is.
(1 + x)(1 + x2)(1 + x3)...(1 + x100) dsfoLr kj es
a
12
     x9 dsxq. kka
d dk eku gS
 2 sin 14  2  sin 14   12 = 24 sin
14
k 1 Sol. 8
3 (1+x) (1 + x2) (1 + x3) ...... (1 + x100)
  4k 1   4k 2 = (1 + x) (1 + x2) (1 + x3) ...... (1 + x9)
k 1 (0, 9) + (1, 8), + (2, 7), + (3, 6), (4, 5), (1,
3 2, 6), (1, 3, 5), (2, 3, 4)

k 1
cos(4k  1)  cos(4k  2)) Q.48 S uppose t h at th e foci of t h e ell i pse
+ i(sin (4k – 1) – sin (4k – 2))| x2 y2

+ = 1 are (f1,0) and (f2,0) where f1 > 0
3
9 5
    and f2 < 0. Let P1 and P2 be two parabolas
= 
k 1
(2 sin(8k  3)    i  2 sin sin(8k  3) 
2
   2 2  with a common vertex at (0, 0) and with foci
3
at (f1, 0) and (2f2, 0), respectively. Let T1 be
    a tangent to P 1 which passes through
  2 sin
2
  2 sin  3  6 sin
 2  14
k 1 (2f2, 0) and T2 be a tangent to P2 which passes
Q.46 Suppose that all the terms of an arithmetic through (f1, 0). If m1 is the slope of T1 and
progression (A.P.) are natural numbers. If the m2 is the slope of T 2, then the value of
ratio of the sum of the first seven terms to
 1 
the sum of first eleven terms is 6 : 11 and the  2  m22  is.
seventh term lies in between 130 and 140, m 
 1 
then the common difference of this A.P. is.
ekukfd , d l ekUr j Js.kh(arithmetic progression x2 y2
ekuk fd nh?kZor̀ + = 1 dhukfHk; k¡(f1,0) vkS
j
9 5
(A.P.)) dsl H kh i n /ku i w
. kkZ
a
d gS A bl l ekUr j Js.khesa
(f2,0) t gk¡f1 > 0 vkS
j f2 < 0. gS
A ekuk fd P1 , oaP2
; fn i gysl kr (7) i nksads; ksx vkS j i gysX; kj g (11)
nksi j oy; (parabolas) gSft udhukfHk; k¡ Øe' k%(f1,
i nksads; ksx dk vuq i kr 6 : 11 gSr Fkk l kr ok¡i n 130
0) , oa(2f2, 0) gSr Fkknks uksads' kh"kZ(vertex) (0, 0)
vkSj 140 dschp esafLFkr gS ] r c bl l ekUr j Js.kh ds
gS Aekukfd P1 dhLi ' kZj s[kkT2 fcUnq(2f2, 0) l s, oaP2
l koZvUr j (common difference) dk eku gS
dhLi ' kZj s[kk T2 fcUnq(f1, 0) l sxq t j r hgS
A ; fn T1 dh
S7 6 i zo.kr k (slope) m1 gksvkS j T2 dh i zo.kr k m2 gksr c
Sol. 
S11 11
 1 
n  2  m22  dk eku gS
a
7 [2a  6d] m 
6  1 
2 
n 11
11 [2a  10d] x2 y 2
2 Sol.  1
9 5
14a  42d
6 5 4 2
2a  10d e2 = 1 – =  e=
14a + 42d= 12a + 60d 9 9 3
2a = 18d  2 
(a= 9d) f1   3   , 0   (2, 0)
T7 = a+6d = 9d + 6d = 15d  3 
130 <15d < 140 f2  (–2, 0)
P1 : (0, 0), focus (2, 0)
130 140
d y 2 = 4(2)x = 8x
15 15 P2 : (0, 0), focus (–4, 0)
8.6 < d < 9.3 y2 = – 4(4) x = – 16x
 d n  d  9 T1 : y – 0 = m1 (x + 4)
y = m1x + 4m1
a 2 1 6 1 4 1
8m1 = m = m   0 
1 1
2 11 2 9 2
1      
m12 = ......(1)    
2 6 3 4 3 3 2
T2 : y = m2(x – 2)  3 3
y = m2 x – 2 m2  
2 4 2
8 Q.50 Let E1 and E2 be two ellipses whose centers
– 2m2 = – m
2 are at origin. The major axes of E1 and E2 lie
 (m22 = 2) ......(2) along the x-axis and the y-axis, respectively.
Now Let S be t he circle x 2 + (y – 1)2 = 2. The
straight line x + y = 3 touches the curves S,
1
 m22 = 2 + 2 = 4 E 1 and E 2 at P, Q and R, respectively.
m12
SECTION 2 (Maximum Marks : 32) 2 2
Suppose that PQ = PR = . If e1 and e2
 This section contains EIGHT questions 3
 Each question has FOUR options (A), (B), are t he eccent ri ci t es of E 1 an d E 2 ,

(C) and (D). ONE OR MORE THAN ONE respectively, then the correct expression(s)
of these four option(s) is(are) correct is (are)
 For each question, darken the bubble(s) 7

43
c orresponding to all the correc t (A) e12  e22 = (B) e1 e2 =
40 2 10
option(s) in the ORS
 Marking scheme :
2 2 5 3
+4 If only the bubble(s) corresponding to (C) e1  e2 = (D) e1 e2 =
8 4
all the correct option(s) is(are) darkened
0 If none of the bubbles is darkened ekukfd E1 vkS j E2 nksnh?kZ
or̀ gS
aft udsdsUnzewy fcUnqgS
A
–2 In all other cases E1 vkSj E2 dh nh?kZv{kk; saØe' k%y-v{k vkS j x-v{k i j
fLFkr gS A ekuk fd S: x + (y – 1) = 2 , d or̀ gS
2 2
A
 6  4 l j y j s[kkx + y = 3, oØksaS, E1 vkS j E2 dksØe' k%P,
Q.49 If  = 3sin–1   and  = 3 cos–1   , where
 11  9 Q vkS j R i j Li ' kZdj r h gSA ekuk fd PQ = PR =
the inverse trigonometric functions take only
the principal values, then the correct 2 2
gS
A ; fn e 1 v kS
j e 2 Øe' k%E 1 v kS
j E2
option(s) is(are) 3
(A) cos > 0 (B) sin < 0 dhmRdsZ
nzrk (eccentricities) gS
a
] r c l ghdFku gS¼
gS
a
½
(C) cos( + ) > 0 (D) cos < 0
43 7
 6  4
(A) e12  e22 = (B) e1 e2 =
40 2 10
; fn f  = 3sin–1   vkS
j  = 3 cos–1  9  , t gk¡
 11   
i zfr yke f=kdks.kfer h; Qyu (inverse trigonomet- 2 2 5 3
(C) e1  e2 = (D) e1 e2 =
8 4
ric functions) ds oy eq
[ ; eku (principal values)
gh ysrsgS a
] r c l gh dFku gS¼ gSa
½ Sol. AB
x2 + (y – 1)2 = 2
(A) cos > 0 (B) sin < 0 (3 – y)2 + (y – 1)2 = 2
(C) cos( + ) > 0 (D) cos < 0 9 + y2 – 6y + 2y2 – 2y + 1
Sol. B, C, D =2
2y2 – 8y + 8 = 0
6 4 y2 – 4y + 4 = 0
  3 sin1 ,   3 cos1 ,
11 9 y=2
 6  4  (x = 1)
sin  cos 
3 11 3 9
4 1
e12 = 1 – =
5 5
now
1 7 8  35 43
(A) e12 + e22 = + = =
5 8 40 40
1 7 7
(B) e1e2 = =
5 8 2 10
now Q & R will be 1 7 8  35

(C) |e12 – e22| =  =
5 8 40
 2 2 2 2 
 1  .cos , 2  sin  

 3 3  27
= 40
 2 2  1  2 2  1  Q.51 Consider the hyperbola H : x2 – y2 = 1 and a
(+)  1  3  , 2  3  
  2  2   circle S with center N(x2, 0). Suppose that H
and S touch each other at a point P(x1, y1)
 2 2 1 8 with x1> 1 and y1 > 0. The common tangent
 1  3 , 2  3    3 , 3  on E2
    to H and S at P intersects the x-axis at point
M. If (l, m) is the centroid of the triangle
 2 2 5 4 PMN, then the correct expression(s) is(are)
(–)  1  3 , 2  3    3 , 3  on E1
   
d 1
x2 y2 (A) dx >1
now E2 : 2 + 2 = 1 1 3x12 1
a b
1 8 x
x 8y dm
tangent at  3 , 3   + 1
  3a2 3b2 (B) dx
1
3  x12 – 1  for x > 1
1
comparing with x + y = 3
d 1
1 8 1
  (C) dx >1
3a2 3b2 3 1 8 1 1 3x12 1
 
1 1 3a2 3b2 3
dm 1
3a2 = 3 b2 = 8 (D) dy >0
1 3 1
a2 = 1 b2 = 8
ekuk fd H : x2 – y2 = 1 , d vfr i j oy; (hyper-
x2 y2
i.e. + =1 bola) gSvkS j S , d or̀ gSft l dk dsUnzN(x2, 0) gS A
1 8
ekukfd H vkS j S , d nw
l j sdksfcUnqP(x1, y1) i j Li ' kZ
1 7
 e22 = 1 – = dj r sgS
a
] t gk¡x1> 1 vkS j y1 > 0 gS A fcUnqP i j ] H vkS
j
8 8
S dhl ekU ; Li ' kZx-v{kdksfcUnqM i j i zfr PNsn dj r h
x2 y2 gSA; fn (l, m) f=kHkqt PMN dkdsa nzd (centroid) gS ]
E1 : + 1
a2 b2
r c l gh dFku gS¼ gS
a
½
5 4
tangent at  ,  d 1
3 3
(A) >1
dx1 3x12 1
5x 4y
+ =1
3a2 3b2 x
dm
comparing x + y = 3
5 4 1
(B) dx
1
3  x12 – 1  for x > 1
1
 
3a2 3b2 3
a2 = 5, b2 = 4
1 dl 1
d 1
(C)
dx1
=1+
3x12 for x1 > 1
dx1 3x12
y1 1
dm 1 (B) m  x12  1
(D) = for y1 > 0 3 3
dy1 3
Sol. A, B, D 
2x1

x1
dm 1  1 

dx1 3  2 x12  1  3 x12  1

(C) wrong
P y1
(D) m
M N 3
(1, 0)
dm 1
C 
dy1 3
Q.52 The option(s) with the values of a and L that
satisfy the following equation is(are)
H : x2 – y2 = 1
4
S : (x – x2)2 + y2 = r2 t 6
 e (sin at  cos4 at)dt
2 2
(x – x2) + y = (x2 – x1) + 2
y12 0
=L?
Tangent to H at P 
t 6 4
x x1 – y y1 = 1  e (sin
0
at  cos at)dt
 1 
M ,0 
 x1 
e4  – 1
r
again equation of line  to PM at P will pass (A) a = 2, L =
e – 1
Through N
ie xy1 + x1y + C = 0
e4   1
Put (x1y1) (B) a = 2, L =
x1y1 + x1y1 + C = 0 e  1
 eqn of PN is
xy1 + x1y – 2x1y1 = 0 e4  – 1
putting y = 0 we get (C) a = 4, L =
e – 1
xy1 = 2x1y1
(x = 2x1) ie. N (2x1, 0)  (x1, 0)
 (x2 = 2x1) e4   1
(D) a= 4, L =
e  1
 1 
Now P(x1, y1), M  x , 0  , N(2x1, 0)
 1 
 1 
 3x1  x y 
1
 , 1
 centroid (l, m)  3 3 
 
 
1
ie. 3l = 3x1 + x 3m = y1
1
3dl 1
(A) 3 2
dx1 x1
fuEufyf[ kr esal sa vkS
j L dsdkS
ul k ¼
l s½eku l ehdj .k 3 t et 5 t
e  e
8 8 42  1 [cos2t + 2sin2t ] + 16
 
4
t 6
 e (sin at  cos4 at)dt 5 1
 et  cos 4t dt  e t cos 6  dt
32 

0 16

=L
t 6 4 3
 e (sin
0
at  cos at)dt 
32 
et cos tdt
3 t et 5 t
dksl a
rq
"V ¼
dj r s½gS
a\ e  cos 2  2 sin2t  
 e
8 2

8 4  1  16
e4  – 1
(A) a = 2, L = 5 et
e –1  (cos4t + 4sin4t)
16 1  162
e4   1 1 et
(cos4t + 6sin6t)
(B) a = 2, L = 32 1  362
e  1
3 e t
4 (cost + 2sint)
e –1 32 1  2
(C) a = 4, L = 
e –1 3  e
e  3 e
[cos4] [cos]
e4   1
8 2

8 4  1 
32 1  2
(D) a= 4, L =
e  1 3

1

5

5

1
1  362  
 
8 8 42  1 16 16 1  162 32  
4
 e  sin  e 
t 6  1 
t  cos 4 t dt 6 
2
5
5

1

3
 6 
2
0
16 

4 2  1 
1  162 2 1  36 2  
2 1  2   16 
  
42  1

Sol.
 e  sin 
t 6
t  cos4 t dt e  2 5 1 3 
0 6  5   
16  17 65 290 2 5  
t
e sin6 tdt   e t cos4 t dt
1  6 2 5 5 1 3 
t =        
t
16  8 17  a 65 2 145 2 5  
e sin6 dt   et cos4 dt
2
e4   1
e t
3
dt   et
1  cos 2 e  1
 8 1  cos 2  4
dt
Q.53 Let f, g : [–1, 2]  R be continuous functions
et which are twice differentiable on the interval
 8 (1 – 3 cos2 + 3cos22 – cos32 + 2 + (–1, 2). Let the values of f and g at the points
4 cos2 + 2dcos22) –1, 0 and 2 be as given in the following table:
et
8 (3 + cos2 + 5cos22 – cos32)dt x=–1 x=0 x=2
3 t 1 et
f(x) 3 6 0
e  cos 2t  2 sin2t 
8 8 42  1  g(x) 0 1 –1
5 t 1  cos 4t 
+ e dt In each of the intervals (–1, 0) and (0, 2)
8 2
the function (f – 3g)" never vanishes. Then
1 t  cos 6t  3 cos t  the correct statement(s) is(are)
 e dt
8 4 (A) f'(x) – 3g'(x) = 0 has exactly three
solutions in (–1, 0)  (0, 2)
(B) f'(x) – 3g'(x) = 0 has exactly one
solution in (–1, 0)   
(C) f'(x) – 3g'(x) = 0 has exactly one ekukfd l Hkh x   – 2 , 2  dsfy, ] f(x) = 7tan8x
 
solution in (0, 2) + 7tan6x – 3tan4x – 3tan2x gS ] r c l gh dFku gS
(D) f'(x) – 3g'(x) = 0 has exactly two ¼gS
a
½
sol utions i n (–1 , 0) and exactly two
 /4  /4
solutions in (0, 2) 1
ekuk fd f, g : [–1, 2]  R l a r r Qyu gSt ksfd
(A) 
0
xf(x)dx 
12 (B) 
0
f(x)dx  0
var j ky (–1, 2) esanksckj vodyuh; (twice differ-

 /4  /4
entiable) gS A ekuk fd f vkSj g dseku] fcUnq
v ksa –1, 1
0 r Fkk 2 i j fuEu l kj .khes
an' kkZ
, x, gS:
(C) 
0
xf(x)dx 
6 (D) 
0
f(x)dx  1
Sol. A
x=–1 x=0 x=2 f(x) = 7tan8x + 7 tan6x – 3 tan4x – 3tan2x
f(x) 3 6 0  /4
g(x) 0 1 –1  f  x  dx = 7tan 8
x+ 7tan6 x - 3 tan4
0
/4
; fn i zR; sd var j ky (–1, 0) r Fkk (0, 2) esaQyu (f – =   
T tan6 x tan2 x  1  3 tan2 x tan2  1 dx  
3g)" dH khHkh' kwU; dk eku ughaysrk gS] r c l ghadFku 0
gS¼ gS
a
½ /4
(A) (–1, 0)  (0, 2) es

af'(x) – 3g'(x) = 0 dsr hu =   T tan 6
z  3 tan2 x sec2  dx
0
ghgky (three solutions) gS Tan x = t
(B) (–1, 0) es
a
, f'(x) – 3g'(x) = 0 ds, d ghgky sec2 × dx = dt
(exactly one solution) gS
A 1
6
=  7t  3t2dt
(C) (0, 2) es
a
] f'(x) – 3g'(x) = 0 ds, d gh gky 0
(exactly one solution)
1
(D) f'(x) – 3g'(x) = 0 dks(–1, 0) es
anksgh gy =  t7  t3 
 0
(exactly two solutions) gSvkS
j (0, 2) esnksghgy gS
= 0 option B
Sol. B&C
h(x) = f(x) – 3g(x) /4
(f – 3g)" Never vanishes I=  
x 7 tan6 x  3 tan2 x sec2 
(–1 to 0) 0
/4
–1 0 2
(f–3g) 3 3 3
I=  x.tan2 x.sec2 x 7 tan4 x  3 dx  
0
B & C as (f – 3g)" Never vanishes /4

Q.54 Let f(x) = 7tan8x + 7tan6x – 3tan4x – 3tan2x 
 x tan7 x  tan3 x 
0 
  
for all x   – ,  . Then the correct /4
 2 2 tan7 x  tan3 xdx
expression(s) is(are).
– 
0
 /4  /4
1 /4
(A) 
0
xf(x)dx 
12 (B) 
0
f(x)dx  0
I=  
tan3 x tan4 x  1 dx 
0
 /4  /4
1 /4
(C) 
0
xf(x)dx 
6 (D) 
0
f(x)dx  1
=–  
tan3 x 1  tan2 x tan2  1 dx  
0
1 1
= –t
3
t
2

 1 dt m  f(x)dx  M
0 1/2
1 So f(x) fis increasing

1  t 4 t6 
5 3
=  t  t dt   4  6  1 
0  0 incresing  ,1 
2 
1 1 64 192
=   f'(x)max. = = 96
4 6 24 24
2 1 f(1)  f(1 / 2)
=  .  96 =
24 12 1/2
96 × 1/2 = f(1)
192x2 1
Q.55 Let f'(x) = for all x Î R with f   f(1) = 48
2  sin x 4
2
1 1
M=   48  12
1 2 2
= 0. If m 
 f(x) dx  M, then the possible
1/2
192
f'(x)min. = 8  192
values of m and M are 3 24
(A) m = 13, M = 24
192 f(1)  0

1 1 24 1/2
(B) m = ,M=
4 2 192 1
  f(1)
(C) m = –11, M = 0 24 2
(D) m = 1, M = 12 1 1 192 1
m=    =1
2 2 2 24 2
192x
ekuk fd l Hkh x  R dsfy, f'(x) = Q.56 Let S be the set of all non-zero real numbers
2  sin4 x
a such that the quadratic equation ax2 – x +
1 a = 0 has two distinct real roots x1 and x2
1
, oaf  2  = 0. ; fn m  f(x) dx  M, r c m vkS
j satisfying the inequality |x1 – x2| < 1.
 
1/2
 Which of the following intervals is(are) a
subset(s) of S?
M dsl gh l a Hko eku gS¼ gS
a
½
(A) m = 13, M = 24  1 1   1 
(A)  – 2 , –  (B)  – , 0
 5  5 
1 1
(B) m = ,M=
4 2
 1   1 1
(C) m = –11, M = 0 (C)  0,  (D)  , 
 5  5 2
(D) m = 1, M = 12
Sol. D ekuk fd S mu l Hkh ' kw U; srj (non-zero) okLr fod
192x 3 la[ ; kvksaa dk l eq Pp; (set) gSft uds fy, } ?kkr h
f'(x) = l ehdj .k ax – x + a = 0 dsnksfofHkUu okLr fod ew
2
y
2  sin4 x
x1 r Fkk x2 vl fedk |x1 – x2| < 1 dksl a rq
"V dj r sgS
A
1
f  = 0 fuEufyf[ kr va r j kyksaesal sdkS ul k ¼
l s½l eq
Pp; S ds
2
mi l eqPP; gS¼ gS
a
½\
always +ve
 1 1   1 
(A)  – 2 , –  (B)  – , 0
 5  5 
 bl [ k. M esanksvuq
PNsn gS
 1   1 1
(C)  0,  (D)  , 
 i zR; sd vuq
PNsn i j nksi z'u gS
 5  5 2
 i zR; sd i z'u esapkj fodYi (A), (B), (C) r Fkk (D)
gSA nu pkj fodYi ksesa, d ; k , d l svf/kd foYi l gha
x1
Sol. x2 – x +  = 0
gSA
x2  i zR; sd i z'u ds fy, l Hkh l gh fodYi ¼fodYi ksa ½ ds
|x1 – x2| < 1 vuq : i cq y cq
y s¼cq
y cq
y ksa
½dksvks- vkj - , l = esadkyk
(x1  x2 )2  4x1x2  1 dj saA
 va
d u ; ksuk %
2
1 +4 ; fn fl QZl H
kh l gh fodYi ¼fodYi ks½dsvuq
:i
  4 1
 cq
y cq
y s¼cq
y cq
y ksa
½dksdkyk fd; k t k;
0 ; fn dks
bZHkh cq
y cq
y k dkyk u fd; k gks
1  42
1 –2 vU
; l Hkh voLFkkvksaesa

PARAGRAPH 1
Let F : R  R be a thrice differentiable
 1  42 
0 1 fucntion. Suppose that F(1) = 0, F(3) = –4
 2 
  and F'(x) < 0 for all x  (1/2, 3). Let f(x) =
xF(x) for all x  R.
1
0 41 vq
uPNsn 1
2
ekukfd F : R  R , d Qyu gSt ksr hu ckj vodyuh;
1
4< <5 (thrice differentiable) gS A ekuk fd F(1) = 0,
2
F(3) = –4 vkS j l HkhF'(x) < 0 dsfy, ] x  (1/2,
1 3) dsfy, f(x) = xF(x) gS A ekuk fd l Hkhx  R ds
4< 1 < 52
2 fy, ] f(x) = xF(x) gSA
42 < 1 52 – 1 > 0
1  1  1  Q.57 The correct statement(s) is(are)

2 <      0
4  5  5 (A) f'(1) < 0 (B) f(2) < 0
1 (C) f'(x)  0 for any x  (1, 3)

1 1 1
– <  < ...(1) a<    ...(2) (D) f'(x) = 0 for some x  (1, 3)
2 2 5 5
(1)  (2) fuEufyf[ kr esal sl gh dFku gS
A¼gS
½
1 1 1 1 (A) f'(1) < 0 (B) f(2) < 0
– <<–  <<
2 5 5 2 (C) fdl hH
kh f'(x)  0 dsfy, x  (1, 3)
SECTION 3 (Maximum Marks : 16) (D) dq N f'(x) = 0 dsfy, x  (1, 3)
 This section contains TWO paragraphs Sol. F(1) = 0, F(3) = – 4
 Based on each paragraph, there will be f(x) = x F(x) f'(x) < 0  x  (1/2,3)
TWO questions f'(x) = F(x) + xF'(x)
 
 Each question has FOUR options (A), (B), –ve –ve
(C) and (D). ONE OR MORE THAN ONE always –ve
OF these four option(s) is(are) correct ½
f'(1) < 0 A
0 1 2 3
 For each question, darken the bubble(s) f(2) < 0 B
c orresponding to all the correc t f'(x)  0 C
option(s) in the ORS f'(x) = 0 D
So option A, B, C 4
 Marking scheme :
+4 If only the bubble(s) corresponding to
all the correct option(s) is(are) darkened
0 If none of the bubbles is darkened
[ k. M 3 (vf/kdr e va
d : 16)
3 3 3
x2 F'(x)dx = –12 and x3 F"(x)dx = 40,  x2 (f '(x)  F(x))  3(12)  40
Q.58 If 
1

1
 1
then the correct expression(s) is(are) 9f'(3) – 9F(3) – (f'(1) – F(1)) + 36 = 40
9f'(3) + 36 – f'(1) + 0 + 36 = 40
(A) 9f'(3) + f'(1) – 32 = 0
9f'(3) – f'(1) + 32 = 0 Option C
3 PARAGRAPH 2
(B)  f(x) dx = 12 Let n1 and n2 be the number of red and black
1 balls, respectively, in box I. Let n3 and n4 be
(C) 9f'(3) – f'(1) + 32 = 0 the number of red and black balls, respectively,
3 in box II.
(D)
 f(x) dx = –12
1
vuq
PNsn 2
3 3
ekuk fd ckW
Dl I esan1 yky csa
n vkS
j n2 dkyh xsa
n gS
AW
; fn 2 3
F'(x)dx = –12 r Fkk x F"(x)dx = 40, ekuk fd ckW
Dl II esan3 yky xa
sn vkS
j n4 dkyhxa
sn gS
A
x 
1 1 Q.59 One of the two boxes, box I and box II, was
gS
] r c l gh dFku gS selected at random and a ball was drawn
(A) 9f'(3) + f'(1) – 32 = 0 randomly out of this box. The ball was found
to be red. If the probability that this red ball
3
1
(B)  f(x) dx = 12 was drawn from box II is , then the correct
1
3
(C) 9f'(3) – f'(1) + 32 = 0 option(s) with the possible values of n1, n2,
n3 and n4 is(are)
3
(A) n1 = 3, n2 = 3, n3 = 5, n4 = 15
(D)
 f(x) dx = –12
1
(B) n1 = 3, n2 = 6, n3 = 10, n4 = 50
3 3 (C) n1 = 8, n2 = 6, n3 = 5, n4 = 20
3 3
Sol.  x F '(x)dx  12  x F "(x)dx  40 (D) n1 = 6, n2 = 12, n3 = 5, n4 = 20
1 1
ckW
Dl I vkSj ckW
Dl esal s] ; knP̀p; k (at random) , d
3
3 ckW
Dl dkspq uk x; k vkS
j bl pq usgq , ckW
Dl l s] ; knP̀p; k
 x2F(x)  2xF(x)dx  12
 1  , d xsa
n fudkyhx; hA; g xsa n yky j ax dhi kbZx; hA; fn
1
1
bl yky xsa
n dsckW
Dl II l sfudkyst kusdhi zkf; dr k
3 3
9F(3) – F(1) – 2 xF(x)dx  12  gS
] r c fuEufyf[ kr esal sn1, n2, n3 vkS
j n4 dsl ghl a
Hko
1 eku gS
3 (A) n1 = 3, n2 = 3, n3 = 5, n4 = 15
– 36 – 0 – 2 f(x)dx  12 if  (B) n1 = 3, n2 = 6, n3 = 10, n4 = 50
1 (C) n1 = 8, n2 = 6, n3 = 5, n4 = 20
3 (D) n1 = 6, n2 = 12, n3 = 5, n4 = 20

2 f(x)dx  24 I II
1 R B R B
Sol.
3 n1 n2 n3 n4
if  f(x)dx  12 Option D
1 1 n3
.
3 2 n3  n4 1

3 p(II/R) = 1 n3 1 n1 3
 x F "(x)dx  40  .
2 n3  n4 2 n1  n2
1
3 n3 (n1  n2 ) 1
3
 x3F '(x)  3x2F '(x)dx  40 = n (n  n )  n (n  n )  3
 1  3 1 2 1 3 4
1
Sol. C,D
5(6)
(A) n1 n1  1
5(6)  3(20)
P(R) n  n · n  n  1
1 2 1 2
30 1
= = n2 n1
30  60 3
+ n n ·n n 1
1 2 1 2
10(9) 99 1
(B) = =
10.9  3(60) 90  180 3 n1
= (n  n ) = 1
5(14) 70 7 1 2
(C) = =
5.14  8(25) 70  200 27
5(18) 90 9 3
(D) =   .
5.18  6(25) 90  180 24 8
Q.60 A ball is drawn at random from box I and

transferred to box II. If the probability of
drawing a red ball from box I, after this trans-
1
fer, is , then the correct option(s) with the
3
possible values of n1 and n2 is(are)
(A) n1 = 4 and n2 = 6
(B) n1 = 2 and n2 = 3
(C) n1 = 10 and n2 = 20
(D) n1 = 3 and n2 = 6
ckW
Dl I esal s; knP̀p; k (at random) , d xsa n fudkyh
t kr hgSvkS
j ml sckWDl II esai zfr LFkkfi r (transfer) dh
t kr hgS
A ; fn bl i zfr LFkki uk dsckn] ckW Dl I esal s, d
1
yky xsa
n fudkyusdhi zkf; dr k gS
] r c fuEufyf[ kr esa
3
l sn1 vkS
j n2 dsl ghl a
Hko eku gS
(A) n1 = 4 and n2 = 6
(B) n1 = 2 and n2 = 3
(C) n1 = 10 and n2 = 20
(D) n1 = 3 and n2 = 6
PHYSICS
1. A transparent thin film of uniform thickness and 2. A sudent is perfarming an expernment using a
refractive index n1=1.4 is coated on the convex resonance column and a tuning fork of frequency
spherical surface of radius R at one end of a long 244 s-1. He is told that the air in the tube has been
solid glass cylinder of refractive index n2 = 1.5, as replaced by another gas (assume that the column
shown in the figure. Rays of light parallel to the axis remains filled with the gas). If the minimum hight at
of the cylinder traversing through the film from air which resonance occurs is (0.350  0.005)m, the
to glass get focused at distance f1 from the film, gas in the tube is
while rays of light traversing from glass to air get
focused at distance f2 from the film. Then (useful information : 167RT  640 J1 / 2 mole -1/2,
140RT = 590 J1/2 mole-1/2. The molar masses M is
garms are given in the options. Take the values of
10
for each gas as given there.)
M
 10 7 
(A) Neon  M=20, = 
 20 10 

(A) f1  3R
 10 3 
(B) f1  2.8R (B) Nitrogen  M=28, = 
 28 5 

(C) f2  2R
 10 9 
(D) f2  1.4R (C) Oxygen  M=32, = 
 32 16 

Sol. A,C
Air to Glass  10 17 
(D) Argon  M=36, = 
 36 32 
1.4 1 1.4  1 
V1 -  = R
.....(1)
Sol. D
f = 244 Hz
1.5 1.4 1.5  1.4 
– V = .....(2) = 0.35   = 1.4 m
V 1 R 4
From (1) and (2)
 (RT )
V = 244 × 1.4 = 314.6 =
1.5 0 .5 M
f1 = R  f1 = 3R 5  (RT ) 
For Neon : V =  
Glass to Air 3 M 
1.4 1.5 1.4  1.5 0.1 RT 10 RT 7 RT

=  . =
V1 –  = (R )
=
R
....(3) 12 M 6 10 6
1.4 1  1.4 RT
1 0.4 For N2 : V =
– V = = .....(4) 20
V 1 (R) R
7 RT 7RT
For O2 : V = =
1 0.5 5 32 160
f2 = R
5 RT 5RT
For argon : V = =
 f2 = 2R 3 36 108
3. A parallel plate capacitor has a dielectric slab of 4. One end of a taut string of length 3m along the x
dielectric constant K between it plates that covers axis is fixed at x = 0. The speed of the waves in the
1/3 of the area of its plates, as shown in the figure. string is 100 ms-1. The other end of the string is
The total capacitance of the capacitor is C while vibrating in the direction so that stationary waves
that of the portion with dielectric in between C1. are set up in the string. the possible waveform of
When the capacitor is charged, the plate area cov- these stationary waves is (are)
ered by the dielectric get charge Q1 and the rest of
x 50t
the area gets charge Qz. The electric field in the (A) y (t) = A sin cos
dielectric is E1 and that in the other portion is E2. 6 3
Choose the correct option/options. ignoring edge x 100t
effects. (B) y (t) = A sin cos
3 3
5x 250t
(C) y (t) = A sin cos
6 3
5x
(D) y (t) = A sin cos 250 t
2
Sol. A,C,D
V = 100 m/s
L = 3m
At x = 0  node
E1 E1 1 At x = 3 antinode
(A) =1 (B) =
E2 E2 K Satisfying the condition in the equations on
putting x = 3, sinkx should be equal to as it
Q1 3 C 2+K is an antinode.
(C) = (D) =
Q2 K C1 K x  50  6 
sin    
Sol. A,D 6  3 
 0A 5x  250 6 
C0  sin    
d 6  3 5
5x  250 
sin    2
2  5 
5. At time t = 0, terminal A is the circuit shown

in the figure is connected to B by a key and an
alternating current I(t) = I0cos(t) with I0=1A and
=500 rad s-1 starts flowing in it with the initial di-
7
rection shown in the figure. At t . the key is

switched from B to D. Now onwards only A and D
are connected. A total charge Q flows from the bat-
tery to charge the capacitor fully. If C=20F, R=10
and the battery is ideal with emf of 50V, identify the
correct statement (s).
q = C 0V
q  C0
q1 k
q2 = 2 (A) Magnitude of the maximum charge on the
7
E1 capacitor before t  is 1 × 10-3 C.
6
E2 = 1 (B) The current in the left part of the circuit just
k 2 (K  2) 7
C= C + C = C0 before t is clockwise.
3 0 3 0 3 
(K  2) (C) Immediately after A is connected to D, the cur-
C
= rent in R is 10A.
C1 K
(D) Q = 2×10-3C.
Sol. C,D 7. In the figure, a ladder of mass m is shown leaning
against a wall. It is in static equilibrium making an
angle  with the horizontal floor. The coefficient of
friction between the wall and the ladder is 1 and
that between the floor and the ladder is 2. The
normal reaction of the wall on the ladder is N1 and
that of the floor is N2. If the ladder is about to slip,
I = I0 cos t then
I0 1 1
V0 = = =
c 50.0  20  10 6 10  10 3
1
= = 100
10  2
V = 100 cos (t – /2)
V = 100 sin t
q0 = CV = 20 × 10–6 × 100 (A) 1 = 0 2  0 and N2 tan  mg
7 2
= 2 × 10–3 sin  ×
6
(B) 1  0 2  0 and N1 tan  mg
7 2
= 2 × 10–3 sin
6 mg
(C) 1  0 2  0 and N2 
    1   1 2
= 2 × 10–3   sin  6  
  
(D) 1  0 2  0 and N1 tan  mg
= –10–3 C 2
Sol. C, D
6. A light source, which emits two wavelengths
1 = 400nm and 2 = 600 nm, is used in a Young’s
double slit experiment. If recorded fringe widths for
1 and 2 are  1 and  2 and the number of fringes
from them within a distance y on one side of the
central maximum are m1 and m2 respectively, then
(A) 2>1
(B) m1>m2
(C) From the central maximum, 3rd maximum
of 2 overlaps with 5th minimum of 1
(D) The angular separation of fringes from 1
is greater than 2.
Sol. A, B, C
D
= 400 nm  1 = (400) N1 = 2N2
d
N2 = mg + 1N1
D
= 600 nm  2 = (600)  2>1 By torque balance:
d
l
y mg cos  = (1N1 cos  + N1 sin ) l
no. of fringes = 2

mg
B  cos  = 1N1 cos  + N1 sin 
2
Angular separation :   
D d 1 = 0
Hence 1  2 mg
cos  = N1 sin 
D D 2
Checking (C)  3×600× = 9 × 400 ×
d 2d mg
 N1 tan  =
D D 2
 1800 = 1800 2 = 0
d d
 N1 = 0
 The given option is true
8. Two ideal batteries of emf V1 and V2 and these 10. Heater of an electric kettle is made of a wire of
resistances R1, R2 and R3 are connected as shown in lenght L and diameter d. It takes 4 minutes to raise
the figure. The current in resistance R2 would be the temperature of 0.5 kg water by 40 K. This heater
zero if is replaced by a new heater having two wires of the
same material, each of length L and diameter 2d.
The way these wires are connected is given in the
options. Howe much time in munutes will it take to
raise the temperature of the same amout of water
by 40 K?
(A) 4 if wires are in parallel
(B) 2 if wires are in series
(C) 1 if wires are in series
(D) 0.5 if wires are in parallel
(A) V1 = V2 and R1 = R2 = R3
(B) V1 = V2 and R1 = 2R2 = R3 Sol. B,D
(C) V1 = 2V2 and 2R1 = 2R2 = R3
(D) 2V1 = V2 and 2R1 = R2 = R3
Sol. A,B,D
V2
Since P =
R
R
Series : Req = time  half
2
R 1
Parallel : Req = time  times
8 8
VA = VB 11. A horizontal circular platform of radius 0.5 m

and mass 0.45 kg is free to rotate about its axis.
V1 = iR1 ....(i)
Two massless spring toy-guns, each carrying a steel
V2 = iR3 .....(ii) ball of mass 0.05 kg are attached to the platform at
(i)/(ii) a distance 0.25b m from the centre on its either
sides along its diameter (see figure). Each gun si-
V1 R1 multaneously fires the balls horizontally and perpen-
V2 = R 3 dicular to the diameter in opposite directions. After
leaving the platform, the balls have horizontal speed
of 9 ms-1 with respect to the ground. The rotational
9. Let E1(r), E2(r) and E3(r) be the respective speed of the platform in rad s-1 after the balls leave
the platform is
electric fields at a distance r from a point charge Q,
an infinitely long wire with constant linear charge
density , and an infinite plane with uniform surface
charge density . If E1(r0) = E2(r0) = E3(r0) at a given
distance r0, Then Sol. 0004
Li = Lf
(A) Q  4r02 0 = I – 2mvr
 I = 2mvr
(B) r0  2mvr 2  0.09  0.9
2 = = ×2 = 4
I 0.45  0.5  0.5
(C) E1 r0 / 2   2E2 r0 / 2 
12. A uniform circular disc of mass 1.5 kg and radius
(D) E2 r0 / 2   4E3 r0 / 2  0.5 m is in itia lly at rest on a horizon tal
frictionle ss s urfa ce. Three force s of equ al
Sol. C magnitude F=0.5 N are applied simultaneously along
 r  KQ 4KQ the three s ides of an
E1  0    2
2
   r0 
2
r0 equilateral triangle XYZ with it
2 vertices on the perimeter of
  the disc (see figure). One
second after applying the
4K 8K
  2r0  forces, the angular speed of
r02 r0 the disc is rad s-1 is
Sol. 0002 14. A galvanometer gives full scale deflection with
0.006 A current. By connecting it to a 4990  resis-
tance, it can be converted into a voltmeter of range
2n
0 - 30 V. If connected to a  resistance, it
246
becomes an ammeter of range 0 - 1.5 A. The value
of n is
Sol. 0005
2 3F cos 60  R 3F 2
= = = . 2
I I 2 (MR )
3F 3(0.5)
= =
MR 2 (1.5)(0.5)2 ig = 0.006 Amp.
=2 6
 = t 30 = [4990+ Rg]
1000
=2×1=2
 4990 + Rg = 5000
13. Consider an elliptically shaped rail PQ in the ver-  Rg = 10 
tical plane with OP = 3 m and OQ = 4 m. A block of
mass 1 kg is pulled along the rail from P to Q with a
force of 18 N, which is always parallel to line PQ
(see the figure given). Assuming no frictional losses,
the kinetic energy of the block when it reaches Q is
(n × 10) Joules. The value of n in (take acceleration
due to gravity = 10ms-2)
s 0.006 6
 
10 1.494 1494
60 10
s=  
1494 249
 n=5
Sol. 0005
15. A thermodynamic system is taken from an initial
state i with internal energy Ui = 100 J to the final
state f slong two different paths iaf and ibf, as sche-
matically shown in the figure. The work done by the
system alo ng t he p aths af, ib and bf a re
Waf = 200 J, Wib = 50 J and Wbf = 100 J respectively.
The heat supplied to the system along the path iaf,
ib and bf are Qiaf, Qib and Qbf respectively. If the
internal energy of the system in the state b is Ub =
200 J and Qiaf = 500 J, the ratio Qbf /Qid is
wmg + wF =  KE
1
-1×4×10+18×5 = ×1×v2
2
V2
-40+90 =  KE = 50
2
 n = 0005
Sol. 0002 Sol. 0005
Qbf

Qib = ?? VA = 100 3 cos 30 î + 100 3 sin 30° ĵ
wiaf = 0 + 200 = 200
= 100 î  50 2 ĵ
Qiaf = 500 Thus Uiaf = 300
 Uibf = 300 
VB = x cos 60° î + x sin 60° ĵ
But Uib = 100 Thus Ubf = 200
 Qib = Wib + Uib = 50 + 100 = 150 x x 3
Qbf = Wbf + Ubf = 100 + (200) = 300 = + ĵ
2 î 2
Qbf 300
Ratio Q = =2   x  x 3 
150  
ib
VB  VA =  2  150  î +  2  50 3  ĵ
   
16. To find the distance d over which a signal can As A sees B at 90° to its line of motion hence
be seen clearly in foggy conditions, a railways engi- 
the angle between – x axis and VBA = 60°
neer uses dimensional analysis and assumes that
the distance depends on the mass density  of the x 3
 50 3
fog, intensity (power/area) S of the light from the 2
signal and its frequency f. The engineer finds that d tan 60° = x
150 
is proportional to S1/n. The value of n is 2
Sol. 0003
x x
L [ML–3]a [MT–3]b [T–1]c 150 – = – 50
2 2
L  [Ma+b] [L–3a] [T–3b–c]
x = 200
a+b=0 .....(1) 
Hence VBA =  50 î  50 3 ĵ
–3a = 1
a = –1/3 and b = 1/3 ......(2) 
| VBA | = (50)2  (50 3 )2
n = 0003
= 50 × 2 = 100 m/s
17. Airplanes A and B are flying constant velocity in 500
the same vertical plane at angles 30° and 60° with Thus time to collide = = 5 sec
100
respect to the horizontal repectively as shown in
the figure. The speed of A is 100 3 ms1 . At time t 18. A rocket is moving in a gravity free space with a
= 0 s, an observer in A finds B at a distance of 500 constant acceleration of 2 ms-2 along + x direction
m. This observer sees B moving with a constant (see figure). The length of a chamber inside the
velocity perpendicular to the line of motion of A. If rocket is 4 m. A ball is thrown from the left end of
at t = t0, A just escapes being hit by B, t0 in seconds the chamber is +x direction with a speed of 0.3 ms-
1
is relative to the rocket. At the same time, another
ball is thrown in -x direction with a speed of 0.2 ms-
1
from its right end relative to the rocket. The time
in seconds when the two balls hit each other is
Sol. 0002 & 0008
4 = 0.2 × t × 1/2 × 2 × t2 0i  x0 
 t = 1.9 =  
2  x1(x0  x1 ) 
~
— 2 sec.
r1 B2 x0 (x0  x1 )x1
Thus r = B = x (x  x ) × (x  2x )
19. Two parallel wires in the plane of the paper are 2 1 1 0 1 0 1
distance X0 apart. A point charge is moving with

speed u between the wires in the same plane at a r1 x0 3x1
r2 = (x 0  2x1 ) = (3x1  2x1 ) = 3
distance X1 from one of the wires. When the wires
carry current of magnitude l in the same direction,
the radius of curvature of the path of the point 20. During Searle’s experiment, zero of the
charge is R1. In contrast, it the currents l in the two Vernier scale lies between 3.20×10-2 m and 3.25×10-
2
wires have directions opposite to each other, the m of the main scale. The 20th division of the Ver-
nier scale exactly coincides with one of the main
X0 scale divisions. When an additional load of 2 kg is
radius of curvature of the path is R2. If  3 , the
x1 applied to the wire, the zero of the Vernier scale still
lies between 3.20 ×10-2 m and 3.25×10-2 m of the
R1 main scale but now the 45th division of Vernier scale
value of is coincides with one of the main scale divisions. The
R2
length of the thin metallic wire is 2 m and its cross-
Sol. 0003 sectional area is 8 × 10-7 m2. The least count of the
Vernier scale is 1.0×10-5 m. The maximum percent-
ag e error in t he Young ’s
modulus of the wire is
Sol. 0004
Acc. to S7earle's experiment:
mg y
=
A 
Same direction: mg
y=
A
0i 1 1 
B1 =    dy d()
2 x
 1 x 0  x1  =
y d
0i (x0  2x1 ) dy 1  105
= 2x (x  x )  = × 100
1 0 1 y 25  105
=4%
Mv 2 MV = 0004
qVB = r=
r qB
Opp. direction :
0i 1 1 
B2 =   
2 x
 1 x 0  x1 
CHEMISTRY
21. The correct combination of names of isomeric 23. An ideal gas in a thermally insulated vessel
alcohols with molecular formula C4H10O is/are: at internal pressure = P1, volume = V1 and
(A) tert-butanol and 2-methylpropan-2-ol abs olut e te mperature = T 1 e xpan ds
(B) tert-butanol and 1, 1-dimethylethan-1- irreversibly against zero external pressure,
ol as shown in the diagram. The final internal
(C) n-butanol and butan-1-ol pressure, volume and absolute temperature
(D) isobutyl alcohol and 2-methylpropane-1- of the gas are P2, V2 and T2, respectively.
ol For this expansion,
Sol. ACD
isomeric alcohol of C4H10O.
Pext=0
Pext=0 Irreversible
OH is ter. butanol or 2-methyl propan- P2, V2, T2
2-ol P1, V1, T1
is n-butanol or butan-1-ol
OH
Thermal insulation
OH is (A) q = 0 (B) T2 = T1
iso butyl alcohol or 2-methyl
(C) P2V2 = P1V1 (D) P2V2 = P1V1
propan-1-ol. Sol. ABC
(A) q = 0 adiabatic process
22. The reactivity of compound Z with different (B) T2 = T1
halogens under appropriate conditions is given since Pext = 0, w = 0
below : U = w + q = 0 + 0
mono halo substituted derivative when X2 = l2 (C) P2V2 = P1V1
OH since n and T are constant
X2 (D) PV = constant
di halo substituted derivative when X2 = Br2
is applicable only for ideal gas in reversible
C(CH3)3
Z
adiabatic process.
Tri halo substituted derivative when X2 = Cl2 24. The correct statement(s) for the orthoboric
acid is/are :
The obs erved pat tern of e lectrophilic (A) It behaves as a weak acid in water due
substitution can be explaind by : to self ionization.
(A) the steric effect of the halogen (B) Acidity of its aqueous solution increases
(B) the steric effect of the tert-butyl group upon addition of ethylene glycol.
(C) the electronic effect of the phenolic group (C) It has a three dimensional sructure due
(D) the electronic effect of the tert-butyl to hydrogen bonding.
group (D) It is a weak electrolyte in water.
Sol. ABC Sol. BD
OH 25. The pair(s) of reag ents tha t yield

paramagnetic species is/are :
I (A) Na and excess of NH3
(B) K and excess of O2
Products
(C) Cu and dilute HNO3
C(CH3)3 (D) O2 and 2-ethylanthraquinol
Sol. ABC
OH OH Na + NH3  Paramagnetic solution due to
Cl Cl
presence of solvated electron
Br
K + O2  KO2 (O2– ion is paramagnetic, MOT)
Cu + HNO3  NO + Cu(NO3)2 (both NO and
and Cu(NO3)2 are paramagnetic)
C(CH3)3 C(CH 3)3
Br Cl
are explained by steric effect of halogen &
O2 +
t-butyl group and electronic effect of phenolic
group.
+ H2O2 (both are dimagnetic)

26. In the reaction shown, below, the major
product(s) formed is/are : 28. Upon heating with Cu2S, the reagent(s) that
give copper metal is/are :
(A) CuFeS2 (B) CuO
(C) Cu2O (D) CuSO4
Sol. C
Cu2O + Cu2S  Cu + SO2 (self reduction)
29. Hydrogen bonding plays a central role in the
following phenomena :
H (A) ice floats in water.
(B) Higher Lewis basicity of primary amines
N CH3 than tertiary amines in aqueous solutions.
(C) Formic acid is more acidic than acetic
O + CH3COOH
acid.
(A) (D) Dimerisation of acetic acid is benzene.
NH2 Sol. ABD
O 30. For the reaction :

I– + ClO3– + H2SO4  Cl– + HSO4– + I2
The correct statement(s) in the balanced
equation is/are :
(A) Stoichiometric coefficient of HSO4– is 6.
(B) Iodide is oxidized
(B) + CH3COOH (C) Sulphur is reduced
(D) H2O is one of the products.
Sol. ABD
H +6 +6
6I– + ClO3– + 6H2 S O4  Cl– + 6H S O4– + 3I2
N CH3 nf = 1 nf = 6 + 3H2O
O + H2O 31. A list of species having the formula XZ4 is
(C) H given below.
N CH3 XeF 4, SF 4, SiF 4, BF 4–, BrF 4–, [Cu(NH 3)4]2+,
[FeCl4]2–, [CoCl4]2– and [PtCl4]2–
O O Defining shape on the basis of the location
of X and Z atoms, the total number of species
having a square planar shape is.
Sol. 4
XeF4, BrF4–, [Cu(NH3)4]2+, [PtCl4]2–
(D)
32. The total number(s) of stable conformers
with non-zero dipole moment for the
following compound is (are).
Sol. A Cl
Br CH3
••
CH3–C–O–C–CH3 Br Cl
CH3
SNAE Sol. 3
Cl Br
Br CH3 Br CH3
+ CH3COOH
27. In a galvanic cell, the salt bridge µ  0, µ  0,
Br CH3 CH3 Cl
(A) does not participate chemically in the
Cl Cl
cell reaction.
(B) stops the diffusion of ions from one CH 3
electrode to another.
Br CH3
(C) is necessary for the occurrence of the
cell reaction.
µ  0.
(D) ensures mixing of the two electrolytic Cl Br
solutions.
Cl
Sol. AD
33. Consider the following list of reagents :
Acidified K2Cr2O7, alkaline KMnO 4, CuSO 4,
H2O2, Cl2, O3, FeCl3, HNO3 and Na2S2O3. The
total number of reagents that can oxidise
aqueous iodide to iodine is.
Sol. 7
K2Cr2O7, CuSO4 , H2O2 , Cl2, O3, FeCl3
These compound liberats iodine from iodide
ion.
34. Among PbS, CuS, HgS, MnS, Ag2S, NiS, CoS,
Bi2S3 and SnS2, the total numer of BLACK 38. A compound H2X with molar weight of 80 g is
coloured sulphides is : dissolved in a solvent having density of 0.4 g
Sol. 7
m–1 . Assuming no change in volume upon
PbS, CuS, HgS, Ag2S, NiS, CoS, Bi2S3
These compound are black in colour. dissolution, the molality of a 3.2 molar solution
is.
35. Consider all possible isomeric ketones, Sol. 8
including stereoisomers of MW = 100. All these
Let’s take 1 litre of solution since its molarity
isomers are independently reacted with NaBH4
(NOTE : stereoisomers are also reacted is 3.2 it should contain 3.2 moles of solute.
separately). The total number of ketones that According to question on mixing 3.2 moles
give a racemic product(s) is/are. solute to one litre (1000 ml) solvent above
Sol. 5 solution can be prepared since no change in
Ketone with Mw = 100 is C6H12O volume upon dissolution.
O O n
m=
W / 1000
O here n = moles of solute
O O O
O W = weight of solvent in grams
W=V×d
R s = 1000 ml × 0.4 gm/ml
CH 3 CH 3 = 400 gm
las t to opt ically a ctive ke tone s gives 3.2
distereomeric pair with NaBH4. m= =8
400 /1000
36. MX2 dissociated into M2+ and X– ions in an
aqueous solution with a degree of dissociation 39. If the value of Avogadro number is 6.023 ×
(at of 0.5. The rat io of the observed 10 23 mol –1 and the value of Boltzmann
depression of freezing point of the aqueous constant is 1.380 × 10–23 J K–1, then number
solution to the value of the depression of of significant digits in the calculated value of
freezing point in the absence of ionic the universal gas constant is.
dissociation is . Sol. 4
Sol. 2 k = 1.380 × 10–23 J K–1 has 4 significant digits
MX2 M2+ + 2X– and NA = 6.023 × 1023 mol–1 has 4 significant
1 – –
digits
1–0.5
hence R = k × NA has also four significant
= 0.5 0.5 1
digits
Tf obs i =2
Tf th 40. The total number of distinct naturally
occurring amino acids obtained by complete
37. In an atom, the total number of electrons acidic hydrolysis fo the peptide shown below
having quantum numbers n = 4, |ml| = 1 and
is :
1
ms = – is.
2 O
Sol. 6 H
H H
n=4 O O O O N
l = 0, 1, 2 , 3 N N N
N N N
|ml| = 1 (only in p, d & f orbital)
N CH 2 O O CH2 O
ms = –1/2 H H
H
O
Sol. 1
Distinct naturally occuring amino acids mean
-amine acids.present in living beings i.e.,
glycine.
MATHEMATICS
   43. Let f:(0, )  R be given by

41. Let f :  – ,   R be given by
 2 2 x
1
(t  )
t
dt
f(x) = (log (secx + tanx))3 f(x) 1
x
e
t .
Then
Then
(A) f(x) is an odd function
(A) f(x) is monotonically increasing on [1, )
(B) f(x) is an one-one function
(B) f(x) is monotonically decreasing on (0, 1)
(C) f(x) is an onto fucntion
(D) f(x) is an even function 1
Sol. A,B,C (C) f(x) + f   = 0, for all x  (0, )
x
   (D) f(2x) is an odd function of x on R
f :  ,   R Sol. A,C,D
 2 2
f(x) = (log(sec x + tan x))3  1
  x 
f'(x) = 3(log (sec x + tan x))2 sec x e  x  1   1 
f'(x) = –   x 
x
 x   2  
f'(–x) = 3(log(sec x – tan x))2 sec x = f'(x) x e 
  x 
 f'(x) is even f(x) is odd
 1  1  1
  x   x    x 
x x x
42. Let a  R and let f : R  R be given by = e

e 
2.e 
  0
f(x) = x5 – 5x + a x x x
Then
 1
(A) f(x) has three real roots if a > 4 2x   t 
dt
(A) f(2x) = e  t
(B) f(x) has only one real root if a > 4  2 x t
(C) f(x) has three real roots if a < – 4 f(2x) = – f(2x) f is odd (D)
(D) f(x) has three real roots if –4 < a < 4
Sol. B,D 44. For every pair of continuous functions f, g :
f(x) : R  R aR
[0, 1]  R such that max {f(x) : x  [0, 1]} =
f(x) = x5 – 5x + a
max {g(x): x  [0,1]}, the co rre ct
Consider x5 – 5x + a = 0
or x5 – 5x = – a statement(s) is (are):
let f(x) = x5 – 5x g(x) = – a (A) (f(c))2 + 3f(c) = (g(c))2 + 3g(c) for some
= x(x4 – 5) c  [0,1]
f'(x) = 5x4 – 5 = 5(x2 + 1)(x2 – 1) (B) (f(c))2 + f(c) = (g(c))2 + 3g(c) for some
F''(x) = 20x3 c  [0,1]
y (C) (f(c))2 + 3f(c) = (g(c))2 + g(c) for some
c  [0,1]
(D) (f(c))2 = (g(c))2 for some c  [0,1]
Sol. A,D
Let Max. f(x) at x = c1
1/4 4 x & Max. g(x) at x = c2
(–5 , 0)
1/4
then f(c1) – g(c1)  0 &
–1 +1 (5 , 0) f(c2) – g(c2)  0
So f(c) – g(c) = 0 where c  [c1, c2]
–4 By IVT
45. Let M and N be two 3 × 3 matrices such that

(1) –a < –4 one solution  a > 4 MN = NM. Further, if M  N2 and M2 = N4,
(2)–4 < –a < 4 3 solution  4 > a > –4 then
(3) –a = 4, –4  2 (A) determinant of (M2 + MN2) is 0
(4) –a > 4  one solution a < –4 (B) there is a 3 × 3 non-zero matrix U such
that (M2 + MN2)U is the zero matrix
(C) determinant of (M2 + MN2)  1
(D) for a 3 × 3 matrix U, if (M2 + MN2)U
equals the zero matrix then U is the zero
matrix
Sol. A,B     
(A) b  (b · z)(z – x)
M2 – N4 = 0
 (M + N2) (M – N2) = 0 ( MN = NM)     
(B) a  (a · y)(y – z)
as M – N2  0
 |M + N2| = 0      
(C) a · b  –(a · y)(b · z)
So A & B are correct options
    
46. A circle S passes through the point (0, 1) (D) a  (a · y)(z  y)
and is orthogonal to the circles (x – 1)2 + y2
Sol. A,B,C
= 16 and x2 + y2 = 1. Then  
(A) Radius of S is 8 (B) radius of S is 7 Given x . y  1
(C) centre of S is (–7, 1)  
y.z  1
(D) centre of S is (–8, 1)  
Sol. B,C z.x  1
Let S : x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0    
Now a = ( x × ( y × z ))
pass (0, 1)       
1 + 2f + c = 0 a = (( x . z ) y – ( x . y ) z )
S & S1 orthogonal   
a = ( y – z )
2(-1)(g) + 2(0) (f) = c – 15
   
–2g = c – 15 Now a . y = (y2 – y . z )
S & S2 or thogonal  
2(0) (g) + 2(0) (f) = c – 1 a . y = (2 – 1)
c–1=0  
= a . y
c = 1, g = 7  f = –1     
S : x2 + y2 + 14x – 2y + 1 = 0  a = (a.y ) (y – z ) (B)
r=7     
Similarly b = ( b . z ) ( z – x ) (A)
C : (–7, 1)
         
47. Let M be a 2 × 2 symmetric matrix with inte- a . b = ( a . y ) ( b . z ) {( y – z ).( z – x )}
ger entries. Them M is invertible if    
= ( a . y ) ( b . z ) {1 – 2 – 1 + 1}
(A) the first column of M is the transpose of      
the second row of M a .b = – ( a . y ) (b . z ) (C)
(B) the second row of M is the transpose of
the first column of M 49. Let f : [a, b]  [1, ) be a continuous func-
(C) M is a diagonal matrix with nonzero en- tion and let g : R  R be defined as
tries in the main diagonal
(D) the product of entries in the main diago- 
nal of M is not the square of an integer  0 if x  a,
 x
Sol. C,D 
a a f(x) =

a
f(t)dt if a  x  b,
(A) M    M is not invertible b
a a f(t)dt if x b

a
a a
(B) M =    M is not invertible Then
a a
(A) g(x) is continuous but not differentiable at a
a 0  (B) g(x) is differentiable on R
(C)    M is invertible
0 b  (C) g(x) is continuous but not differentiable at b
b a (D) g(x) is continuous and differentiable at ei-
(D) M =    |M| = bc – a2 clear M is
a c  ther a or b but not both
invertible. Sol. A,C
f : [a, b]  [1, )
  
48. Let x , y and z be three vectors each of (A) g(x) is continuous
magnitude 2 and the angle between each at x = a
Clearly not derivable
 
pair of them is . If a is a nonzero vector as f(a)  1 which is RHD
3
    while LHD is 0
perpendicular to x and y × z and b is a is (B) in wrong
  again (C) is correct as at x = b
nonzero vector perpendicular to y and z ×
continous But not derivable

x , then (D) is wrong
So, A & C
50. From a point P(), perpendiculars PQ and 0
PR are drawn respectively on the lines y = x, = 0+60  2x (x 2 )(1  x2 )4 dx (put 1 – x2= t)
1
z = 1 and y = – x, z = – 1. If P is such that
QPR is a right angle, then the possible value 0 1 
= – 60  (1  t) (t)4 dt = 60   = 2
(s) of  is(are) 1  30 
(A) 2 (B) 1
52. Let f : R  R and g : R  R be respectively
(C) –1 (D)  2
given by f(x) = [x] + 1 and g(x) = x2 + 1.
Sol. C Define h : R  R by
y = x, z = 1
y = – x, z = – 1 max {f(x), g(x)} if x  0,
h(x) = 
 min {f(x), g(x)} if x  0
x y z –1
= = = The number of points at which h(x) is not
1 1 0
differentiable is
Q(, , 1)
Sol. 0003
x y z 1
= = =
–1 1 0 g(x)
|||
||| f(x)
|||
R (–, , –1) |||
||
|||
|
     ˆ
QP · PR = 1 ( – )i  ( – )j  (  1)k  (0,1)
(  )i  ( – )j  (  1)k

ˆ = 0
 
( – )( + ) + ( – )( – ) + 2 – 1 = 0
2 +  –  –  + 2 –  –  +  + 2 – 1 = f(x) = | x | + 1
0 g(x) = x2 + 1
32 – 2 – 1 = 0 ...(i) max(f(x), f(g)) x  0
 h(x) = 
 
PQ · (i  j) = 0 min(f(x), g(x)) x  0
–+–=0 No of non differentiable points = 3.
= ...(ii)
   53. Let n  2 be an integer. Take n distinct points
and PR · (–i  j) = 0 on a circle and join each pair of points by a
– ( + ) +  –  = 0 line segment. Colour the line segment joining
=0 ...(iii) every pair of adjacent points by blue and
from (i) (ii) and (iii) the rest by red. If the number of red and
(i)  32 – 22 – 1 = 0  2 = 1   = ± 1 blue line segments are equal, then the value
But at  = 1 of of n is
PQ Sol. 0005
So answer is (C) n2 n
1
2
n-Blue lines
1  d2  total lines = n C2 3
51. The value of
 4x3  2 (1  x2 )5  dx is
0  dx  Red lines = n C2 – n
4
Sol. 0002
given 5
1  d2 
 4
x3  2 (1  x2 )5  dx n
0  dx  C2 – n = n
I 
  
II
n(n – 1)
1
= 2n
1
2
d d
= 4x3 . (1 – x2)5 –  12x2 . (1  x2 )5 dx n2 – n = 4n
dx 0 0 dx
n2 = 5n
1 n = 5.
=–  12x2 (2x) 5(1  x 2 )4 dx
0
54. The slope of the tangent to the curve Sol. 0004
(y – x5)2 = x(1 + x2)2 at the point (1, 3) is a, ar, ar2
Sol. 0008
(y – x5)2 = x(1 + x2)2 (1, 3) a(1  r  r2 )
= ar + 2
3
 dy 
2(y – x5).   5x 4  =x.2(1 + x2).2x + (1 + a + ar + ar2 = 3ar + 6
 dx 
a + ar2 = 2ar + 6
x2).1 a(r – 1)2 = 6  a = 6, r – 1 = 1
 dy 
2(y – x5)   5x 4  = (1 + x2) (5x2 + 1) a2  a – 14 36  6 – 14
 dx   = = 4.
a1 7
 dy 
2(3 – 1)   5  = (1 + 1) (5 + 1) = 12
 dx  57. Let f:[0, 4]  [0, ] be defined by f(x) =
cos–1 (cosx). The number of points x  [0,
dy 4] satisfying the equation.
–5=3
dx
10  x
dy f(x) = is
=8 10
dx
Sol. 0003
Similar to teaching notes
f : [0, 4]  [0, ]
10  x
   f(x) = cos–1 (cos x) f(x) =
55. Let a,b and c be three non-coplanar unit 10
vectors such that the angle between every
–1
y=cos (cos x)
 
pair of the m is . If
3
       4
a  b  b  c  pa  qb  rc , where p, q and r x
0  2 3 10
10  x
y
p2  2q2  r2 10
are scalars, then the value of
q2
Number of solution = number of points of
is intersection = 3
Sol. 0004 58. The largest value of the non-negative inte-
       ger a for which
(a  b) + (b  c) = pa + qb + rc
   1 x
Taking dot product with a,b & c  ax  sin(x  1)  a 1 x 1
lim    is
x 1  x  sin(x  1)  1  4
p r
0= +q+  p + 2q + r = 0
2 2 Sol. 0000
1 q r 1 x
0+ =p+ +  2p + q + r = 2  a(x  1)  sin(x  1)  1
2 2 2 Lim   
x 1  (x  1)  sin(x  1)  4
1 p q
+0= + + r  p + q + 2r = 2
2 2 2 1 x
 sin(x  1) 
1 1 1 a 
p= ,q=– ,r=  x 1 
 1
2 2 2 Lim   
x 1
 1 sin(x  1)  4
1 1  (x  1) 
1
p2  2q2  r2 2 2 =4
 = 2
q2 1   a  1 1
2   
 1  1  4
b (–a + 1)2 = 1
56. Let a, b, c be positive integers such that –a + 1 = 1 or –a + 1 = –1
a
a=0 or a = 2 (rejected)
is an integer. If a, b, c are in geometric pro- Max value of a = 0
gression and the arithmetic mean of a, b, c
a2  a  14
is b + 2, then the value of is
a1
59. For a point P in the plane, let d1(P) and
only for 1st quad
d2(P) be the distances of the point P from (i)
h>0, k  0
the lines x – y = 0 and x + y = 0 respectively.
The area of the region R consisting of all (A) h  k 2 2 h–k+h+k 4 2
points P lying in the first quadrant of the
plane and satisfying 2  d1(P) + d2(P)  4 is 2 h 2 2
Sol. 0006
(B) h < k 2 2 k–h+h+k 4 2
x–y=0&x+y=0
h–k hk 2  k  2 2
d1 = , d2 = A  (2 2)2 – ( 2)2
2 2
A = 8 – 2 = 6.
d1 60. Let n1 < n2 < n3 < n4 < n5 be positive inte-

d2
x=y gers such that n1 + n2 + n3 + n4 + n5 = 20.
Then the number of such distinct arrange-
ments (n1, n2, n3, n4, n5) is
Sol. 0007
Only 7 possible combination and each
combination can be arranged in only one way
2  d1 + d2  4 1, 2, 3, 4 10
1, 2, 3, 5 9
h–k hk 1, 2, 3, 6 8
2 + 4
2 2 1, 2, 4, 5 8
1, 2, 4, 6 7
2 2  |h – k| + |h + k|  4 2 1, 3, 4, 5 7
2, 3, 4, 5 6
 Ans = 7
.com
JEE(Advance)-2014
Previous Year Paper with Solutions

Eduncle.com
Call us : 9982853222
-
PHYSICS
1. A metal surface is illuminated by light of two Sol. A

different wavelengths 248 nm and 310 nm. The maxi- 912×R2 = 5.7×10–18×1×[T4–(300)4] × 4 R2
mum speeds of the photoelectrons corresponding to  108 (121) = T4
these wavelengths are u1 and u2, respectively. If  T = 330 K
the ratio u1 : u2 = 2 : 1 and and hc= 1240 eV nm,
the work function of the metal is nearly 4. During an experiment with a metre bridge,
(A) 3.7 eV (B) 3.2 eV the galvanometer shows a null point when the jockey
(C) 2.8 eV (D) 2.5 eV is pressed at 40.0 cm using a standard resistance of
Sol. A 90 , as shown in the figure. The least count of the
scale used in the metre bridge is 1 mm. The un-
12400
E1 = =5eV known resistance is
2480
12400
E2 = = 4eV
3100
 5 =  + 4k .....(1)
4= +k .....(2)
On solving
11
 = = 3.66 = 3.7 eV (A) 60  0.15
3
(B) 135  0.56
(C) 60  0.25
2. If Cu is the wavelength of K X-ray line of (D) 135  0.23
copper (atomic number 29) and M0 is the wave- Sol. C
length iof the K X-ray line of molybdenum (atomic R × 60 = 90 × 40
number 42), then the ratio Cu/Mo is close to
(A) 1.99 (B) 2.14 2
R = 90 × 
(C) 0.50 (D) 0.48 1
Sol. B n R = n 90 + n 2 + n 1
By Mosley’s Law :
dR d 2 d 1
f = a (z – 1) =  + 
R 2 1
c
As v = f  f = dR 0 .1 0.1
 = +
 Inverse relation and hence : 60 60 40
dR = 0.1 + 0.15
1 = 0.25

(Z  1)2  R = (60 ± 0.25) 
2
1  Z2  1   1 (42  1)2
=    = = 2.14 1
2    0 (24  1)2 5. A planet of radius R  ×(radius of Earth)
 Z1  1  10
has the same mass density as Earth. Scientists dig
3. Parallel rays of light of intensity I=912 R
Wm-2 are incident on a spherical black body kept in a well of depth on it and lower a wire of the same
5
surroundings of temperature 300 K. Take Stefan-
Boltzmann constant =5.7×10-8Wm-2K-4 and assume length and of linear mass density 10-3 kgm-1 into it.
that the energy exchange with the surroundings is If the wire is not touching anywhere, the force ap-
only through radiation. The final steady state plied at the top of the wire by a person holding it in
temeprature of the black body is close to place is (take the radius oif Earth=6×106m and the
(A) 330 K (B) 660 K acceleration dur to gravity on Earth is 10 ms-2)
(C) 990 K (D) 1550 K (A) 96 N (B) 108 N
(C) 120 N (D) 150 N
Page 2
Sol. B Sol. D
1
R= R
10 e
9  x 
 dF =  .dx. 10 1  R e / 10


2
R  Re   10
e
= 10 –3 
× 1 50     ×
  50   R e 2
1 1  h = T cos ( + /2)
= 10–3 × 6 × 106   
 50 900  2s
= 108 h= cos ( + /2)
bg
6. A wire, which passes through the hole in a small 8. Charges Q, 2Q and 4Q are uniformly distributed in
bead, is bent in the form of quarter of a circle. The three dielectric solid spheres 1,2 and 3 of radii R/2,
wire is fixed vertically on ground as shown in the R and 2R respectively, as shown in figure. If magni-
figure. The bead is released from near the top of tudes of the electric fields at point P at a distance R
the wire and it slides along the wire without friction. from the centre of spheres 1,2 and 3 are E1, E2 and
As the bead moves from A to B, the force it applies E3 respectively, the
on the wire is
(A) E1>E2>E3 (B) E3>E1>E2

(A) always radially outwards. (C) E2>E1>E3 (D) E3>E2>E1
(B) always radially inwards. Sol. C
(C) radially outwards initially and radially in
KQ 2KQ
wards later. E1 = 2 E2 =
(D) radially inwards intially and radially out R R2
wards later. 4KQ.R KQ
E3 =
Sol. D (2R)3 = 2R 2  E2 > E1 > E3
By theory
9. A tennis ball is dropped on a horizontal smooth
7. A glass capillary tube is of the shape of a trun- surface. It bounces back to its original position af-
cated cone with an apex angle  so that its two ter hitting the surface. The force on the ball during
ends have cross sections of different radii. when the collision is proportional to the length of com-
dipped in water vertically, water rises in it to a height pression of the ball. Which one of the following
h, where the radius of its cross section is b. If the sketches describes the variation of its kinetic en-
surface tension of water is S, its density is , and ergy K with time t most appropriately? The figures
its contact angle with glass is , the value of h will are only illustrative and not to the scale.
be (g is the acceleration due to gravity)
(A) (B)
2s 2s
(A) cos      (B) cos     
bg bg
2s 2s (C) (D)
(C) cos     / 2  (D) cos     / 2 
bg bg
Page 3
Sol. B Sol. C
V = gt
1  0ia2  oi
 cos
 KE = m (gt)2
2
 Relation is parabolic

2a h 2

2 3/2
2 a2  h2
10. A point source S is placed at the bottom of a 0i

transparent block of height 10 mm and refractive  cos
2 a2  h2
index 2.72. It is immersed in a lower refractive index
liquid as swhon in the figure. It is found that the
light emerging from the block to the liquid forms a a 2

circular bright spot of diameter 11.54 mm on the top
of the block. The refractive index of the liquid is
a 2
h 
2 3/2 
 a2  h2 
a 2

a 2
h 
2 1/2 
(A) 1.21 (B) 1.30 a2 4


Sol.
(C) 1.36
C
(D) 1.42 a 2
h 2
 2
11 .54 a2 = 0.4a2 + 0.4h2

2 0.6a2 = 0.4h2
2
sin C =  11.54  3 2
   100 h2 = a
 2  2
n h  1.2 a
Also sin C =
2.72
5.77 M 12. consider d>>a, and the loop is rotated about its
=
133 .3 2.72 diameter parallel to the wires by 30° from the posi-
n = 1.36 tion shown inthe figure. If the currents in the wires
are in the opposite directions, the torque on the
Paragraph 11 & 12
The figure shows a circular loop of radius a with two loop at its new position will be (assume that the net
long parallel wires (numbered 1 and 2) all in the field due to the wires is constant over the loop)
plane of the paper. The distance of each wire from
the centre of the loop is d. The loop and the wires 0l2a2 0l2a2
(A) (B)
are carrying the same current I. The current in the d 2d
loop is in the counterclockwise direction if seen from
above. 30l2a2 30l2a2
(C) (D)
d 2d
Sol. B
11. When d  a but wires are not touching the loop,

it is found that the net magnetic field on the axis of
the loop is zero at a height h above the loop. In
that case
(A) current in wire 1 and wire 2 is the direction PQ  = MB sin 
and RS, respectively and h  a
2 oi
(B) current in wire 1 and wire 2 is the direction PQ = ia2× sin 300
and SR, respective and h  a 2d
(C) current in wire 1 and wire 2 is the direction PQ
and SR, respectively and h  1.2a  oi2a2 1  oi2 a2
=  
(D) current in wire 1 and wire 2 is the direction PQ d 2 2d
and RS, respectively and h  1.2a
Page 4
Paragraph 13 & 14 Paragraph 15 & 16
In the figure a containner is shown to have a movalble A spray gun is shown in the figure where a piston
(without friction) piston on top. The container and pushes air out of a nozzle. A thin tube of uniform
the piston are all made of perfectly insulating mate- cross section is connected to the nozzle. The other
rial allowing no heat transfer between outside and end of the tube is in a small liquid container. As the
inside the container. The container is divided into piston pushes air through the nozzle, the liquid from
two compartments by a rigid partition made of a the containwer rises into the nozzle and is sdprayed
thermally conducting material that allows slow trans- out. For the spray gun shown, the radii of the piston
fer of heat. The lower compartment of the con- and the nozzle are 20 mm and 1 mm respectively.
tainer is filled with 2 moles of an ideal monatomic The upper end of the container is open to the
gas at 700 K and the upper compartment is filled atmosphere.
with 2 moles of an ideal diatomic gas at 400 K. The
heat capacities per mole of an ideal monatomic gas
3 5
are CV  R,CP  R , and those for an ideal diatomis
2 2 15. If the piston is pushed at a speed of 5 mms-1, the
5 7 air comes out of the nozzle with a speed of
gas are C V  R,CP  R . (A) 0.1 ms-1 (B) 1 ms-1
2 2 -1
(C) 2 ms (D) 8 ms-1
Sol. C
From equation of continuity
A1V1 = A2V2
(20)2 × 5 × t = (1)2 × v × t
v = 400 × 5 = 2000 mm/s
= 2 m/s
16. If the density of air is a and that of the liquid

13. Consider the partition to be rigidly fixed so that l, then for a given piston speed the rate (volume
it does not move. When equilibrium is achieved, the per unit time) at which the liquid is sprayed will be
final temperature to the gases will be proportional to
(A) 550 K (B) 525 K a
(A) l (B) a l
(C) 513 K (D) 490 K
Sol. D l
(C) a (D) l
3
2× R (700 – T) Sol. A
2
5
= 2R (T – 400) + R (T – 400) × 2
2
T = 490 K
14. Now consider the partition to be free to move

without friction so that the pressure of gases in
both compartments is the same. Then total work Pressure at point in nozzle  P
done by the gases till the time they achieve equilib- P = P 0 – 1  a V 12 .....(1)
rium will be 1
P = P0 –  V 2 – lgh ......(2)
(A) 250 R (B) 200 R 2 l 2
(C) 100 R (D) -100 R equation (1) and (2)
Sol. D 1 1
 V2=  V 2 + lgh
|Q1| = |Q2| 2 a 1 2 l 2
Neglecting the term regh
5 7
× 2 × R (700–T) = × 2 × R (T – 400) a
2 2 V2 = V
l 1
 T = 525 K
Rate of liquid flow = AV2
W.D. by lower gas = 2 × R × 175 = 350 R
W.D. upper gas = 2 × R × 125 = 250 R a a
= AV1 l Rate of liquid flow  l
 net W.D. = –100 R
Page 5
17. A person in a lift is holding a water jar, which List I List II
has a small hole at the lower end of its side. When
P. Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 all positive 1. +x
the lift is at rest, the water jet coming out of the
hole hits the floor of the lift at a distance d of 1.2 m Q. Q1, Q2 positive; Q3, Q4 negative 2. -x
from the person. In the following, state of the lift’s R. Q1, Q4 positive; Q2, Q3 negative 3. +y
motion is given in list I and the distance where the
S. Q1, Q3 positive; Q2, Q4 negative 4. -y
water jet hits the floor of the lift is given in List II.
Match the statements from List I with those is List Code :
II and select the correct answer using the code (A) P-3, Q-1, R-4, S-2
given belsow the lists.
(B) P-4, Q-2, R-3, S-1
List I List II
P. Lift is acceleration vertically up. 1. d = 1.2 m (C) P-3, Q-1, R-2, S-4
Q. Lift is accelerating vertically 2. d> 1.2 m (D) P-4, Q-2, R-1, S-3
with an acceleration less than
Sol. A
the gravitational acceleration.
R. Lift is moving vertically up with 3. d < 1.2 m
constant speed.
S. Lift is falling freely. 4. No water
leaks out of the
jar
Code :
(A) P-2, Q-3, R-2, S-4
(B) P-2, Q-3, R-1, S-4
(C) P-1, Q-1, R-1, S-4 (P) All +ve 
(D) P-2, Q-3, R-1, S-1
Sol. C
(Q) Q1, Q2 +ve 
Q3, Q4 –ve 
2h
d = vt = 2gh = 2h which is independent
g
of g.
But when the lift falls freely no water leaks
out of the jar as geff = 0.
18. For charges Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 of same magni-

tude are fixed along the x axis at x = -2a, -a, +a
and +2a, respectively. A positive charge q is placed (R) Q1, Q3 –ve 
on the positive y axis at a distance b > 0. Four
potions of the signs of these charges are given in
List I. The direction of the forces on the charge q is
given in List II. Match List I with List II and select
the correct answer using the code given below the Q2, Q3 –ve
lists.
(S) Q1, Q3 +ve 
Q2, Q4 –ve
Page 6
19. Four combinations of two thin lenses are
1 1 1
given in List I. The radius of curvature of all curved 
surface is r and the refractive index of all the lenses feq 2r 2r
is 1.5. Match lens combinations in List I with their feq = -r
focal length in List II and select the correct answer
using the code given below the lists. 1 3  1 1
  1   
List I List II f1 =  2  r r 
1
P. 1. 2r =
r
1 3   1 1 1
 1   
f2 =  2   r 
=
2r
Q. 2. r/2
1 1 1
  feq = 2r
feq r 2r
R. 3. -r P- 2 Q-4 R-3 S- 1
20. A block of mass m1 = 1 kg another mass

S. 4. r m2=2kg are placed together (see figure) on an
inclined plane with angle of inclination . Various
Code : values of  are given in list I. The coefficient of
(A) P-1, Q-2, R-3, S-4 static and dinamic friction between the block m2
(B) P-2, Q-4, R-3, S-1 and the plane are equal to =0.3. In List II expres-
(C) P-4, Q-1, R-2, S-3 sions for the friction on block m2 are given. Match
(D) P-2, Q-1, R-3, S-4 the correct expression of the friction in List II with
Sol. D the angles given in List I, and choose the correct
option. The acceleration due to gravity is denoted by g.
1  L   1 1 
=    1  R  R 
f  m   1 2 
List I List II
1 3  1 1  1 12 P.  = 5° 1. m2g sin 
   1    Q.  = 10° 2. (m1+m2) g sin 
f1  2  r r  f1  2  r
R.  = 15° 3. m2 g cos 
S.  = 20° 4. (m1+m2) g cos q
1 1 1 1 1 r
   feq  Code :
f1 r feq r r 2 (A) P-1, Q-1, R-1, S-3
(B) P-2, Q-2, R-2, S-3
1 3 1
  1 (C) P-2, Q-2, R-2, S-4
f1  2 r (D) P-2, Q-2, R-3, S-3
1 1 Sol. D
 There will be no slipping if friction
f1 2r
balances the net force acting downwards
1 1 1 1 1 along the incline
  
feq f1 f2 feq r fsmax =  m2 g cos 
feq = r Fo rc e in t he do wnw ard d ire ct ion is (m 1
+ m 2 ) g s i n  t h u s a n g le a t w h i c h
s lip ping st a rt s
(m1 + m2) g sin  =  m2 g cos 
0.3  2
tan  = = 0.2
3
given tan 11.5° = 0.2
1 1 Thus  = 11.5°
 Thus for angles less than 11.5° there won’t
f1 2r be any slipping hence friction is static and
equal to (M1 + M2) g sin  for greater than
1 3   1 1 11.5° the friction is dynamic and is equal to
  1   
f2  2  r   m2 g cos .
Page 7
CHEMISTRY
21. For the identification of -naphthol using dye The correct order of their boiling point is :
test, it is necessary to use (A) I > II > III (B) III > II > I
(A) dichloromethane solution of -napthol (C) II > III > I (D) III > I > II
(B) acidic solution of -naphthol Sol. B
(C) neutral solution of -naphthol 1
(D) alkaline solution of -naphthol Boiling point  surface area 
branching
Sol. D
25. Assuming 2s-2p mixing is NOT operative, the

paramagnetic species among the following is:
(A) Be2 (B) B2
(C) C2 (D) N2
Sol. (C)
if 2s-2p mixing is not allowed then MOD will
be like O2.
* 
 2p y    2p y 
 ||   || 
1s * 1s 2s *2s 2px     *2px.
 2pz   * 2p 
 z 
26. The product formed in the reaction of SOCl2

22. For the elementary reaction M  N, the rate with white phosphorous is :
of disappearance of M increases by a factor (A) PCl3 (B) SO2Cl2
of 8 upon doubling the concentration of M. (D) SCl2 (D) POCl3
The order of the reaction with respect to M Sol. (A)
is : P4 + SOCl2  PCl3 + SO2 + S2Cl2
(A) 4 (B) 3 white
(C) 2 (D) 1 27. The major product in the following reaction
Sol. (B) is
r = K [M]x
8r = K [2M]x
 x=3
23. For the process

H2O (l)  H2O (g) (A)
at T=100ºC and 1 atomsphere pressure, the
correct choice is :
(A) Ssystem > 0 and Ssurroundings > 0 (B)
(B) Ssystem > 0 and Ssurroundings < 0
(C) Ssystem < 0 and Ssurroundings > 0
(D) Ssystem > 0 and Ssurroundings < 0
Sol. (B) (C) (D)
H2O (l) + Heat  H2O (g)
 Ssystem > 0 Sol. D
& Ssurroundings < 0
24. Isomers of hexane, based on their branch-

ing, can be divided into three distinct classes
as shown in the figure.
(I)
(II)
(III)
Page 8
28. Hydrogen peroxide in its reaction with KlO4 Paragraph For Question 31 and 32
and NH2OH respectively, is acting as a X and Y are two volatile liquids with molar weights
(A) reducing agent, oxidising agent of 10g mol–1 and 40g mol–1 respectively. Two cotton
plugs, one soaked in X and the other soaked in Y,
(B) reducing agent, reducing agent
are simultaneously placed at the ends of a tube of
(C) oxidising agent, oxidising agent length L = 24cm, as shown in the figure. The tube is
(D) oxidising agent, reducing agent filled with an inert gas at 1 atmosphere pressure
Ans. (A) and a temperature of 300 k. Vapurs of X and Y react
to form a product which is first observed at a dis-
29. The acidic hydrolysis of ether (X), shown tance d cm from the plug soaked in X. Take X and Y
below is fastest when to have equal molecular diameters and assume ideal
behaviour for the inert gas and the two vapous.
(A) one phenyl group is replaced by a methyl

group.
31. The value of d in cm (shown in the figure),
(B) one phenyl group is replaced by a para- as estimated from Graham's law, is
methoxyphenyl group (A) 8 (B) 12
(C) two phenyl groups are replaced by two (C) 16 (D) 20
para-methoxyphenyl groups Sol. (C)
(D) no structural change is made to X
Ans. C L = 24 cm
Rate of SN1 reaction  stability of carbocation
. If two phenyl group is replaced by two p-
methoxy phenyl group then it gives most Cotton wool d
Cotton wool
Initial formation soaked in Y
stable carbocation so fastest reaction. soaked in X
of
30. Under ambient conditions, the total number the product
of gases released as products in the final
step of the reaction scheme shown below is ratex MM y

rate y MM x
Complete
Hydrolysis dx / t MM y
XeF6 P + other product  
dy / t MM x
-
OH /H2O
d 40
 
Q 24  d 10
-  d = 48 – 2d
slow disproportionation in OH /H2O
 d = 16
Products
32. The experimental value of d is found to be
smaller than the estimate obtained using
(A) 0 (B) 1 Graham's law. This is due to
(C) 2 (D) 3 (A) larger mean free path for X as compared
Ans. (C) to that of Y.
(B) larger mean free path for Y as compared
Complete
XeF6 + H2O 
Hydrolysis
 XeO3 + HF to that of X.
(C) increased collision frequency of Y with
XeO3 + OH– (basic medium) HXeO4– the inert gas as compared to that of X with
the inert gas.
Slow (D) increased collision frequency of X with
HXeO4– + OH– 
Disproportionation
 XeO64– +
the inert gas as compared to that of Y with
Xe  + O2  the inert gas.
+ H 2O Sol. (B, D)
Page 9
Paragraph For Questions 33 and 34 Sol. C
Schemes 1 and 2 describe sequential transforma-
tion of alkynes M and N. Consider only the major
products formed in each step for both the schemes.
33. The product X is
(A)
It gives + Ve iodoform test and it is func-

tional isomer if X .
Paragraph For Questions 35 and 36
An aqueous solution of metal ion M1 reacts sepa-
(B) rately with reagents Q and R in excess to give tet-
rahedral and square planar complexes, respectively.
An aqueous solution of another metal ion M2 always
forms tetrahedral complexes with these reagents.
Aqueous solution of M2 on reaction with reagent S
(C) gives white precipitate which dissolves in excess of
S. The reactions are summarized in the scheme given
below:
SCHEME:
Q R
Tetrahedral M1 Square planar
(D) excess excess
Q R
Sol. A Tetrahedral M2 Tetrahedral
excess excess
HO–CH2–CH2–CCH NaNH2 HO–CH2–CH2–CH
CH3–CH2I
C–Na+ HO–CH2–CH2CC–CH2–CH3
S, stoichiometric amount
CH3–I CH3–O–CH2–CH2–CC–CH2–CH3 S
White precipitate White precipitate
H2/Lindlar's excess
catalst
34. The correct statement with respect to prod- 35. M1, Q and R, respectively are
uct Y is (A) Zn2+, kCN and HCl (B) Ni2+, HCl and KCN
(A) It gives a positive Tollens test and is a (C) Cd2+, KCN and HCl (D) Co2+, HCl and KCN
functional isomer of X. Ans. (B)
(B) It gives a positive Tollens test and is a
M1 Ni2+ KCN [Ni(CN)4]2–
geometrical isomer of X.
dsp2 sq.
(C) It gives a positive iodoform test and is a
planar
functional isomer of X.
(D) It gives a positive iodoform test and is a Ni2+ HCl [NiCl4]2–
geometrical isomer of X. sp3 (tetrahedral)
Page 10
M2 Zn2+ + KCN [Zn(CN)4]
2–
(Tetrahedral sp3)
(S)
2+
Zn + HCl [Zn(Cl4]2– + H+
3
(Tetrahedral sp ) List-II
(1) p–d  antibonding
Zn2+ + KOH  Zn(OH)2  OH– (2) d–d  bonding

(white ppt.) (3) p–d  bonding
[Zn(OH)4]2– (4) d–d  antibonding
(color less solution) P Q R S
(A) 2 1 3 4
36. Reagent S is (B) 4 3 1 2
(A) K4[Fe(CN)6] (B) Na2HPO4 (C) 2 3 1 4
(C) K2CrO4 (D) KOH (D) 4 1 3 2
Ans. (D) Ans. C
39. Different possible thermal decomposition
37. Match each coordination compound in List-I pathways for perosysters are shown below.
with an appropriate pair of characteristics match each opathway form List with an ap-
from List-II and select the correct answer propriate structure from List II and select
using the code given below the lists. the correct answer using the code given be-
{en = H2NCH2CH2NH2; atomic numbers : Ti = low the lists.
22, Cr = 24, Co = 27; Pt = 78}
List-I
(P) [Cr(NH3)4Cl2]Cl
(Q)[Ti(H2O)5Cl (NO3)2]
(R) [Pt(en)(NH3)Cl]NO3]
(S) [Co(NH3)4(NO3)2]NO3
List-II
(1) Paramagnetic and exhibits ionisation isom-
erism
(2) Diamagnetic and exhibits cis-trans isom- List-I
erism
(P) Pathway P
(3) Paramagnetic and exhibits cis-trans isom-
erism (Q) Pathway Q
(4) Diamagnetic and exhibits ionisation isom-
erism (R) Pathway R
P Q R S (S) Pathway S
(A) 4 2 3 1
(B) 3 1 4 2 List-II
(C) 2 1 3 4
(D) 1 3 4 2
Ans. B (1)
38. Match the orbital overlap figure shown in List-
I with the description given in List-II and
select the correct answer using the code
given below the lists. (2)
List-I
(P)
(3)
(Q)
(4)
(R)
Page 11
Code : List-II
1. Scheme I
P Q R S (i) KMnO4, HO–, heat (ii) H+, H2O
(A) 1 3 4 2 (iii) SoCl2 (iv) NH3
\
(B) 2 4 3 1 2. Scheme II
(C) 4 1 2 3 (i) Sn/HCl (ii) CH3COCl (iii) Conc. H2SO4
(iv) HNO3 (v) dil. H2SO4, heat (vi) HO–
(D) 3 2 1 4
Sol. A 3. Scheme III
(i) red hot iron, 873 K
Compound (I) follow the pathway (P) and (ii) fuming HNO3, H2SO4 heat
form formaldehyde as carbonyl. It remove CO2 (iii) H2S. NH3 (iv) NaNO2, H2SO4
in I step (v) hydrolysis
Compound (II) follow the pathway (S) and
4. Scheme IV
form formaldehyde as carbonyl. It remove CO2 (i) conc. H2SO4, 60ºC
in II step (ii) conc. HNO3, conc. H2SO4
Compound (III) follow the pathway (Q) and (iii)dil. H2SO4, heat
Code :
does not form carbonyl. It remove CO2 in I
P Q R S
step (A) 1 4 2 3
Compound (IV) follow the pathway (R) and (B) 3 1 4 2
(C) 3 4 2 1
does not form carbonyl. It remove CO2 in II
(D) 4 1 3 2
step Sol. C
(P) Acetylene Benzene
40. Match the four starting materials (P, Q, R, S)
given in List I with the corresponding reac-
tion schemes (I, II, III, IV) provided in List-II
Dinitrobenzene
and select the correct answer using the code
given below the lists.
m-nitro aniline
List-I
(P)
m-nitro benzene diazonium ion
(Q)
m-nitro phenol
(C6H5NO3)
(Q)
(R)
(S)
Page 12
(R) (S)
MATHEMATICS
Sol. D
SECTION – A
 a 2a   a  2a 
Single Correct R 2 ,
m m
 , S 2 ,
m 

  m
41. In a triangle the sum of two sides is x and
the product of the same two sides is y. 2 R
If x2 – c2 = y, where c is the third side of the y = mx + P
m
triangle, then the ratio of the in-radius to
the circum-radius of the triangle is 2
00 A B
3y 3y m
 2
(A) (B)
2x(x  c) 2c(x  c) m2  1 Q
S
3y 3y 4
(C) (D) 2
4x(x  c) 4c(x  c) m2 (m2  1)
Sol. B m 4 + m2 – 2 = 0
a + b = x, ab = y  (m2 – 1) (m2 + 2) = 0
(a + b)2 – c2 = ab  m = ±1
1 R(2, 4) & S(2, –4)
 cos C = P(–1, 1) Q(–1, –1)
2
 C = 120° 1 1
Area = (PQ + RS) · AB = (2 + 8)· 3
y 2 2
also x – C = 43. The quadratic equation p(x) = 0 with real
xc
coefficients has purely imaginary roots.
r (s  c) tan 60 (s  c) 3 · 3 Then the equation
Now  = p(p(x)) = 0 has
R c c
2 sin120  (A) only purely imaginary roots
(B) all real roots
y 1 (C) two real and two purely imaginary roots
= 3· ·
2(x  c) c (D) neither real nor purely imaginary roots
Sol. D
2 2 p(p(x)) = 0
42. The common tangents to the circle x + y =
 p(x) = purely imaginary roots
2 and the parabola y2 = 8x touch the circle
 No real value of x will satisfy
at the points P, Q and the parabola at the
 and value of x will be imaginary but
points R, S. Then the area of the quadrilat-
will not be purely imaginary
eral PQRS is
(A) 3 (B) 6
(C) 9 (D) 15
Page 13
44. Six cards and six envelopes are numbered 1, x2
2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and cards are to be placed in F(x) =  e t dt
0
envelopes so that each envelope contains
exactly one card and no card is placed in the 2
F(x) = [ e x – 1]
envelope bearing the same number and
2
moreover the card numbered 1 is always F(2) = Lim (ex  1) = e4 – 1
x 2
placed in envelope numbered 2. Then the
number of ways it can be done is
(A) 264 (B) 265 47. The function y = f(x) is the solution of the
(C) 53 (D) 67 xy x 4  2x
dy
Sol. C differential equation + 2 =
dx x –1 1 – x2
Required ways
1 1 1 1 1 3
6 !     
2
=  2 ! 3! 4 ! 5! 6 !  in (–1, 1) satisfying f(0) = 0. Then
5
 f(x) dx
3
–
360  120  30  6  1 265 2
= = = 53
5 5 is
45. Three boys and two girls stand in a queue.
 3  3
The probability, that the number of boys (A) – (B) –
ahead of every girl is at least one more than
3 2 3 4
the number of girls ahead of her, is  3  3
(C) – (D) –
1 1 6 4 6 2
(A) (B)
2 3 Sol. B
2 3 dy  x  x 4  2x
(C) (D) –   y =
3 4 dx  1  x2  1  x2
Sol. A 1 2x
BGBGB BGBBG BBGGB BBGBG BBBGG  1 x2 dx
I.F.  e 2
5 (3 !  2 !) 1 1
 ln (1 x2 )
Probability =  I.F. = e 2 =
5! 2 1  x2
x 4  2x
46. Let f : [0, 2]  R be a function which is
y 1  x2 =  1  x2 1  x2 dx
continuous on [0, 2] and is differentiable on
x5
2 y 1  x2 = + x2
x 5
(0, 2) with f(0) = 1. Let F(x) =  f( t) dt for
0 x5  5x2
y=
x  [0, 2]. If F'(x) = f'(x) for all x  (0, 2), 5 1  x2
then F(2) equals
(A) e2 – 1 (B) e4 – 1 x5  5x2
y=
(C) e – 1 (D) e4 5 1  x2
Sol. B
3 /2 3 /2
x5 5x2
x2
F(x) =  f( t ) dt
y=  5 1  x2
dx +  5 1  x2
dx
0  3 /2  3 /2
3 /2
differentiating 5x2
f'(x) = f(x) . 2x =2 
0 5 1  x2
dx
f ' (x) 3 /2
x2  1  1
 f(x) 
 2x
=2  dx
0 1  x2
n f(x) = x2 + k
f(0) = 1  k = 0  3 /2 3 /2 
1
= 2  (1  x 2 ) dx  dx 
2    1  x2 
f(x) = e x  0 0 
Page 14
 3 /2  1  e2u
  =
= 2   (1  x ) dx  
2
2eu
3
 0 
0 17
 1  e2u   2eu du 
 
 x
  2 1 1 
3 /2
 I=   eu 
 
. 
 1e
2u 

=2   1  x  sin x    ln ( 2 1) 
 2 2 0 3
 
log ( 2  1)
   =
 2(eu  eu)16 du

  3 1       0
=2  3
 4 2 6  50. Coefficient o f x 11 in the expansio n of
  
(1 + x2)4 (1 + x3)7(1 + x4)12 is
3  2 (A) 1051 (B) 1106
=– – + (C) 1113 (D) 1120
4 3 3
Sol. C
 3 Given expression is
– (1 + 4x2 + 6x4 + 4x6 + x8).
3 4
(1 + 7C1 x3 + 7C2 x6 + 7C3x9 +.....).
(1 + 12C1 x4 + 12C2 x8 + .......)
48. For x  (0, ), the equation sinx + 2sin 2x –
Coefficient of
sin 3x = 3 has
x11 = 1 . 7C1 . 12C2 + 4 . 7C3 . 1 + 6 . 7C1 .
(A) infinitely many solutions 12C + 1. 7C .1
(B) three solutions 1 1
= 462 + 140 + 504 + 7
(C) one solution
= 1113
(D) no solution
Sol. D
sin x + 4 sin x cos x – 3 sin x + 4 sin3 x – 3 = 0 Paragraph
4 sin x (cos x + 1 – cos2 x) – 2 sin x – 3 = 0 Paragraph for Question Nos. 51 to 52
2 Box 1 c onta ins thre e ca rds bearing
 1 3
  cos x   + (cosecx – 1) = 0 numbers 1, 2, 3; box 2 contains five cards
 2 4 bearing number 1, 2, 3, 4, 5; and box 3 con-
Hence No solution tains seven cards bearing numbers 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7. A card is drawn from each of the
boxes. Let xi be the number on the card drawn

2
from the ith box, i = 1, 2, 3.
17 51. The probability that x1 + x2 + x3 are in an
49. The following integral  (2 cos ec x) dx is
 arithmetic progression, is
4
29 53
equal to (A) (B)
105 105
log(1  2)
(A) 0 2(eu  e–u )16 du
57 1
(C) (D)
log(1  2) 105 2
(B) 0 (eu  e–u )17 du
Sol. B
log(1  2) 1, 2, 3
(C) 0
(eu –u 17
– e ) du 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
Box (1) Box (2)
log(1 2)
(D) 0
2(eu –u 16
– e ) du 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Box (3)
Sol. A
A card is drawn from each Box
x OOO + OEE + EOE + EEO
cot = eu
2 2 3 4 2 2 3 1 3 3 1 2 4 53
x = 2 cot–1 eu . . + . . + . . + . . =
3 5 7 3 5 7 3 5 7 3 5 7 105
2eu
dx = du 52. The probability that x1, x2, x3 are in an arith-
1  e2u
metic progression, is
x 1 9 10
1  tan2 1
2 e2u (A) (B)
cosec x = = 105 105
x 2
2 tan
2 eu 11 7
(C) (D)
105 105
Page 15
Sol. C Sol. B
The only cases are
x
111, 123, 135, 147, 222, 234, 246, 321, 333, Tangent at P is y = + at .....(1)
345, 357 t
Normal at S is y = – sx + 2as + as3
11 11
Required Probability = = 1
357 105 Now st = 1 so s =
t
we get
Let a, r, s, t be nonzero real number. Let x 2a a
P(at2, 2at), Q(ar2, 2ar) and S(as2, 2as) be y=– + + 3 .....(2)
t t t
distinct points on the parabola y2 = 4ax. Sup- Adding (1) & (2)
pose that PQ is the focal chord and lines QR
and PK are parallel, where K is the point (2a, 0). 2a a
2y = at + + 3
53. The value of r is t t
1 t2  1 at4  2at2  a a(t 4  2t2  1)
(A) – (B) y= =
t t 2t3 2t3
1 t2 – 1 a(t2  1)2
(C) (D) =
t t 2t3
Sol. D
at) Given that for each a  (0, 1),
(at ,2
2
r) P
2 2a
, 1h
(ar a
R Lim
t (1  t)a  1 dt
h  0
k(2a,0) h
F(a,0) exists. Let this limit be g(a). In addition,

it is given that the function g(a) is
differentiable on (0, 1).
Q a

 t 2 , 2a  1
t 
 2
S(as , 2as) 55. The value of g   is
2
(A)  (B) 2
2 0  2at 2t  
mQR=  1 , mPK =  (C) (D)
r 2a  at2 t2  2 2 4
t Sol. A
2 2t 1 h
 2 a
1 t 2 g(a) = hLim t (1  t)a1 dt
r  0
t h
1 1 h
r
t2  2 g(1/2) = hLim
1 / 2
(1  t)1 / 2 dt
t
2

2t
 0 t
h
1 2 1 1 h
r  t r=t– 1
t t t = hLim
 0  dt
h
t(1  t)
t2  1
r= 1
t dt
= 
0
t(1  t)
54. If st = 1, then the tangent at P and the
normal at S to the parabola meet at a point t = sin2 
whose ordinate is dt = 2 sin  cos  d
 /2  /2
(t2  1)2 a(t2  1)2 2 sin  cos  d
(A)
2t3
(B)
2t3 =  0
sin  cos 
  2 d
0
2 2 2 2
a(t  1) a(t  2) = 20 / 2 = 
(C) (D)
t3 t3
Page 16
 1 1+x  
1   21 cos 2x log   dx 
56. The value of g'   is  –  1–x  
2  2 
(S) equal 4. 0
 1  1  x  
   2 cos 2x log 
(A) (B)   0  dx 
2  1 – x  
 P Q R S
(C) – (D) 0
2 (A) 3 2 4 1
Sol. D (B) 2 3 4 1
1 h (C) 3 2 1 4
Lim a
(1  t)a 1 dt (D) 2 3 1 4
g(a) = h  0 t
h
Sol. D
2
(P) f(x) = ax + bx
1
1
a
= t (1  t)a 1 dt  ax3 bx2 
   1
0
 3 2 
0
1
a
.ln t (1 – t)a–1 a b
g'(a) =  ( t
0
 1
3 2
+ t–a (1 – t)a–1 n (1 – t)) dt a b
1
1 3 2
1 / 2
g'(1/2) =
 ( t .ln t (1 – t)–1/2
a 2b 2a
0   2b
3 2 3
+ t–1/2 (1 – t)–1/2 n (1 – t)) dt
1
2a
b=2–
= 1 / 2
(1 – t)–1/2 (–ln t + ln (1 – t))dt 3
t
0 b  2a
........(1) N=
3
1
1 / 2
a0b 2
g'(1/2)=  (1  t) t–1/2 (–ln (1 – t)+ln t ) dt
0 a3b 0
........(2)
Adding (1) and (2) 2 2
(Q) [ 13, 13] : f(x) = sin x + cos x
g'(1/2) = 0
2  9
x = ,
Matrix Match Type 4 4
Matching List Type (Only One Option Correct)
 9
57. List I List II x=± ,±
(P) The number of polynomials 1. 8 4 4
f(x) with non-negative 2 3x2 2 3ex x2
integer coefficients of
degree  2, satisfying
(R) I=  2 1  e x
 2 ex  1
1 2
f(0) = 0 and 0 f(x) dx 2I =  3x2 dx
2
= 1, is
(Q) The number of points in 2. 2 2
I= 2  3x2
the interval [ – 13, 13 ] at 0
which f(x) = sin(x2) + cos(x2) 2

 3x3 
attains its maximum value is I =   = 8
 3 0
2 3x2
(R) –2 dx equals 3. 4 (S) numerator is odd function
(1  ex )
=0
Page 17
58. List I List II
(P) Let y(x) = cos(3cos–1 x), 1. 1 A1
3 2
A2
x  [–1,1], x  ± . a1
2 n
an a2
1   2 d2y(x) dy(x)  O
Then y(x) (x – 1) 2
x  (Q) a3 A3
 dx  dx  
a5
equal
(Q) Let A1, A2,...., An (n > 2) 2. 2 A5 A4
be the vertices of a regular
polygon of n sides with its
n 1 n 1
centre at the origin. Let    
  (a k  ak  1 )   (a k ·ak 1 )
ak be the position vector k 1 k 1
of the point Ak, k = 1, 2,...,n.   2

  (n – 1) | ak || ak 1 | sin
n–1

If k 1 ak  ak 1 =  n
    2
= (n – 1) | ak || ak 1 | cos
 n–1
k 1  ak · ak 1  , then the n
minimum value of n is 2
(R) If the normal from the 3. 8  tan =1
n
point P(h, 1) on the ellipse
2 
x2 y2 
+ = 1 is perpendicular n 4
6 3
to the line x + y = 8, then n8
the value of h is (R) y+x=8
(S) Number of positive 4. 9 slope of Normal = + 1
solutions satisfying the 3x
dy
equation =–
dx 6y
 1   1 
tan–1   + tan–1  4x  1 
 2x  1   
 2 
= tan–1  2  is
x 
P Q R S
(A) 4 3 2 1
(B) 2 4 3 1
(C) 4 3 1 2
(D) 2 4 1 3
Normal (h, 1)
Sol. A
 slope at (h, 1)
 3  6
–1
(P) y = sin(3cos x)  2

 is =1
 1 x  3h
–1
 h =2
1  x2 y' = 3 sin(3 cos x)
 1 1 
2x cos(3 cos 1 x)  2x  1  4x  1 
y'  9 –1  
1  x2 y" – 2 1  x2 1  x2
(S) tan  1 1 
1   
 2x  1 4x  1 
(1  x2 )y " xy ' 9y
 4x  1  2x  1 2
1 x 2
1  x2 
2
8x2  6x  1  x x2
(x – 1) y" + y' = 9y
6x  2 2

2x(4x  3) x3
Page 18
3x  1 2 2  f2 (f1(x)) x  0
  3x + x = 8x + 6
4x  3 x (P) f4(x) =  f (f (x))  1 x  0 
2 2 1 
3x – 7x – 6 = 0
2
3x – 9x + 2x – 6 = 0  x2 x  0 
3x(x – 3) + 2(x – 3) = 0 =  2x 
e  1 x  0 
2
x = 3, x =  onto but not one-one
3
x=3 y
 1 1 
  
–1 
1 1  13  7 
 tan1    tan1  7 13   tan1  (Q) f3(x) = x
tan 7  13 1 1 
     1     90 
 7 13 
f3  differentiable but not one-one.
2
–1  
tan    x2 x  0
9
(R) f2 0 f1(x) =  2x 
e x  0
2
–1 
R.H.S. tan  
9
   
 1   1
 1 
2 –1    tan   neither continuous
x=– tan  4   8  nor one-one
3    1     1 y
 3   3  2
(S) f2(x) = x x0 y=x2
–1 
3  1  3  x
tan    tan  
 1   5  continuous and one-one
–5
59. Let f1 : R  R, f2 : [0, )  R, f3 : R  R and

f4 : R  [0, ) be defined by  2k   2k 
60. Let zk = cos   + i sin  10  ; k = 1,2,...,9.
| x | if x <0  10   
f1 (x) =  x List I List II
 e if x  0
(P) For each zk there 1. True
f2 (x) =x2; exists a zj such that
zk · zj = 1
 f2(f1(x)) if x <0
f3 (x) =  (Q) There exists a 2. False
f
2 1(f (x))  1 if x  0 k  {1,2,...,9} such
(P) f4 is 1. onto but not one-one that z1 · z = zk has no
(Q) f3 is 2. neither continuous nor one-one solution z in the set of
(R) f2of1 is 3. differentiable but not one-one complex numbers.
(S) f2 is 4. continuous and one-one |1 – z1 || 1 – z2 | ... | 1 – z9 |
P Q R S (R) equal 3. 1
10
(A) 3 1 4 2
(B) 1 3 4 2 9  2k 
(C) 3 1 2 4 (S) 1–  k 1 cos   equal 4. 2
 10 
(D) 1 3 2 4
Sol. D P Q R S
f1 : R  R, f2 : [0, )  R, f3 : R  R (A) 1 2 4 3
f4 : R  [0, ) (B) 2 1 3 4
(C) 1 2 3 4
x x  0 (D) 2 1 4 3
f1(x) =  x  Sol. C
e x  0
2k
i
(P) Zk = e 10
th
Zk = 10 roots of unity
 P is true
(Q) k  {1, 2, 3, ...... 9}
Page 19
2k 9
i 2 2k
Zk e 10 i (k 1)
10 (S) 1–  cos 10
Z = Z  i2  e k 1
1
e 10  2 4 6 18 
Z obuiously has a solution in the set of 1 –  cos 10  cos 10  cos 10  ...........  cos 10 
 
complex numbers. False
10
(R) (x –1) = (x–1)(x–z1)(x–z2) ...... (x – z9)  9 
10
 sin 10 cos  
x 1  
(x – z1)(x–z2)(x–z3)......(x–z9) = 1–    = 1 + 1 = 2
x 1  sin
2 3 9  10 
= 1 + x + x + x + ....... + x
Now put x = 1
(1 – z1) (1 – z2) ....... (1 – z9)
= 1 + 1 + 1 ....... + 1
 |1 – z1| |1 – z2| ......... |1 – z9| = 10
| 1  z1 || 1  z2 | ....... | 1  z9 |
 1
10
Page 20

Project Report

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Project Report

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Project Report

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

.

Ask, Learn & Lead it

SECTION - 1 : (MAXIMUM MARKS : 24)

Consider current in left part to be i1 and in the right part to be i2

SECTION 2 (Maximum Marks: 24)

Sol. 2.00 sec

 distance between the blocks = speed × time

By loop rule (vnet = 0)

Total distances 2r1  2r2

Total distance along x-axis, d1 + d2 = 2r1 + 2r2 = 2 (r1 + r2) = 2 (5r2)

Here as the flow of current is same, we can say that

SECTION 3 (Maximum Marks: 12)

 [0] = [0 ]1 [L]–2 [T]2

independent variables are always added. So the error in z will be

SECTION - 1 : (MAXIMUM MARKS : 24)

3. Based on the compounds of group 15 elements , the correct statement(s) is (are)

4. In the following reaction sequence, the correct structure(s) of X is (are)

5. The reaction(s) leading to the formation of 1,3,5-trimethylbenzene is (are)

O Conc. H2SO 4 heated iron tube

1. Br2, NaOH 3. Soda lime

(D) Zn/Hg, HCl

SECTION 2 (Maximum Marks: 24)

O2 (superoxide) = One unpaired electrons in * M.O.. Paramagnetic

232 × 4 + 12 × [40+96+36] = 920 + 8 + 132 + 80 + 172 × 12

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

10. For the electrochemical cell,

1m3,5bar 3m3, 1 bar, 300 K

(A) CO2H (B)

18. The compound S is

COOH COOH COCl

Br2 NaOH NaBH4

SECTION 1 (MAXIMUM MARKS : 24)

This section contains Six(06) questions.

lies on a straight line

(C) The radius of the incircle of the triangle PQR is 10 3  15

Q.3 Let P1 : 2x + y – z = 3 and P2 : x + 2y + z = 2 be two planes. Then, which of the following

Option (C) : f(x) = sin  

but lim sin

Q.5 Let f : R  R and g : R R be two non-constant differentiable functions . If

Q.6 Let f : [0,  )  R be a continuous function such that

(C) The area of the region  x, y   0,1  R: f  x   y  1  x2  is

(D) The area of the region  x, y   0,1  R: f  x   y  1  x2  is  1

SECTION 2 (MAXIMUM MARKS: 24)

Q.10 The number of real solutions of the equation

Q.11 For each positive integer n, let

(0, 0) (1, 0) (2, 0)

SECTION 3 (Maximum Marks : 12)

E3, F3 and G3 lie on polar of P0,

Tangent at P(2cos, 2sin) is xcos+ysin= 2

SECT ION 1 (Maximum Marks: 24)

(A) The electric flux through the shell is 3R /  0

(C) The electric flux through the shell is 2R / 0

radially outward. Hence EZ = 0 Length, PQ = 2R sin 60 = R

(A) (B) (C) (D)

SECTION 2 (Maximum Marks: 24)

or x = 2.5 (–4) (e–1 – e0) or x = 25 (–4) (0.37 – 1) or x = 6.30

 from (1) and (2)